Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
47-1
Pushbuttons &
Indicating Lights
January 2010
Contents
Description
Page
Toggle Switches — E10 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Toggle Switches — E10E Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled — All Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight — E22 and EM22 Series . . . . . .
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight — E30 Series. . . . . . .
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight — 10250T Series . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight — E34 Series . . . . . . . .
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight — HT800 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations — 10250T/E34 Series . .
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
HT800 Series
CA08102001E
47-2
47-7
47-13
47-28
47-99
47-115
47-166
47-195
47-215
47-243
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-2
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches
January 2010
E10 Series
■
Contents
Description
Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . .
Standards and
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and
Specifications
Toggle Switches. . . . . . . . . .
Hesitation Switches . . . . . . .
Pushbutton Actuators . . . . .
Product Selection
Toggle Switches. . . . . . . . . .
Hesitation Switches . . . . . . .
Pushbutton Actuators . . . . .
Circuit Arrangements. . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number
Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47-2
47-2
47-2
47-2
47-2
■
Toggle
Switch
Pushbutton
Actuator
Hesitation
Switch
Lever Lengths: 0.563 inch (14.3 mm)
or 0.688 inch (17.5 mm), bright
nickel plated
■ Terminals: Screw, 0.250 inch (6.4 mm)
spade and solder lug
Hesitation Switches
■
47-3
47-4
47-4
47-4
47-5
47-6
47-6
Product Description
Cutler-Hammer® E10 switches from
Eaton’s electrical business are
intended for general purpose light
industrial use. Designed for retrofit
and OEM applications, the one-hole
mounted units feature a bright nickel
plated lever and a 0.468"-32 diameter
threaded bushing with a 0.068 x 0.035
inch (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway for
anti-rotation. Mounting hardware, consisting of one hexagonal locknut, one
knurled or hexagonal face nut, and #632 x 3/16" (where applicable) binding
head terminal screw. All are furnished
unassembled in individually sealed
poly bags, packed 10 per carton.
Standards and Certifications
47
Mounting:
❑ One hole with threaded 0.468"-32
bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 inch
(1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway that
serves as anti-rotational feature
■
■
UL Recognized — File No. 2702
CSA — File No. LR40068
Operation:
❑ Slow make/slow break mechanism
with butt action for AC and low
voltage DC applications; maintained contacts; ideal for reversing
motor applications; patented
interlock mechanism prevents
operation of lever through center
position until manual pressure is
momentarily relieved.
■ AC Ratings:
15A, 125V AC
10A, 250V AC
Max. 3/4 hp at 250V AC
■
DC Ratings:
15A, 28V DC
■
Poles/Throws: 2, 3 and 4, double
throw only
■ Mounting:
❑ One pole with threaded 0.468"-32
bushing and 0.068 x 0.049 inch
(1.7 x 1.2 mm) deep keyway
■
Technical Data and
Specifications
Toggle Switches
■
AC Ratings:
6 – 20A, 125V AC
3 – 10A, 250V AC
Max. 3/4 hp @ 250V AC
■
DC Ratings:
6 – 20A, 28V DC
■
Electrical Life: 6,000 cycles make/
break at switch ampere rating
■ Operation:
❑ Slow make/slow break mechanism
with butt action for AC and low
voltage DC applications
❑ Maintained and momentary
contacts
■
Poles/Throws: 1 through 4, single
and double throw
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Lever Length: 0.687 inch (17.4 mm),
stainless steel
■ Terminals: Screw
Pushbutton Actuators
■
AC Ratings:
6 – 15A, 125V AC (NO)
3 – 10A, 250V AC (NO)
Max. 1/3 hp @ 125/250V AC
■
Operation:
❑ Slow make/slow break mechanism
❑ Normally open contacts
■
Poles/Throws: Single, single and
double throw
■ Mounting:
❑ One hole with 0.468"-32 threaded
bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 inch
(1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway
❑ Two bushing heights: 11/16 inch
(17.5 mm) and 11/32 inch (8.7 mm)
■
Button Extensions: 17/32 inch
(13.5 mm) and 1/4 inch (6.4 mm),
bright nickel plated
■ Terminals: Screw
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches
47-3
January 2010
E10 Series, Toggle Switches
Product Selection
Toggle Switches
Table 47-1. Toggle Switches — AC Rated — Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Nominal AC Ratings
Amperes
hp
125V
250V
250V
6
15
20
3
10
10
6
15
20
Poles
and
Throw
Function — Circuit
with Lever In
Screw Terminal
Price
U.S. $
0.250 Inch (6.4 mm)
Spade Terminal
Solder Lug
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
UP
Position
CENTER DOWN
Catalog
Position Position — Number
Keyway
Price
U.S. $
—
3/4
3/4
1 P.S.T.
ON
None
OFF
E10T106AS
E10T115AS
E10E120AS
E10T106AP
E10T115AP
E10E120AP
E10T106AL
E10T115AL
E10E120AL
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
1 P.D.T.
ON
OFF
ON
E10T106DS
E10T115DS
E10E120DS
E10T106DP
E10T115DP
—
—
E10T115DL
—
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
1 P.D.T.
ON
None
ON
E10T106ES
E10T115ES
E10E120ES
—
E10T115EP
—
—
E10T115EL
—
—
10
1/2
1 P.S.T.
1 P.D.T.
1 P.D.T.
1 P.D.T.
OFF
ON
ON
(ON)
None
OFF
None
OFF
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
E10T115BS
E10T115FS
E10T115HS
E10T115GS
E10T115BP
E10T115FP
E10T115HP
E10T115GP
—
—
—
—
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
2 P.S.T.
ON
None
OFF
E10T206AS
E10T215AS
E10E220AS
E10T206AP
E10T215AP
E10E220AP
—
E10T215AL
E10E220AL
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
2. P.D.T. ON
OFF
ON
E10T206DS
E10T215DS
E10E220DS
E10T206DP
E10T215DP
E10E220DP
—
E10T215DL
—
6
15
20
3
10
10
—
3/4
3/4
2 P.D.T.
ON
None
ON
E10T206ES
E10T215ES
E10E220ES
—
E10T215EP
—
—
E10T215EL
—
15
10
1/2
2 P.S.T.
2 P.D.T.
2 P.D.T.
OFF
ON
(ON)
None
None
OFF
(ON)
(ON)
(ON)
E10T215BS
E10T215HS
E10T215GS
—
E10T215HP
E10T215GP
—
—
—
10
3/4
3 P.S.T.
3 P.D.T.
3 P.D.T.
ON
ON
ON
None
OFF
None
OFF
ON
ON
E10E315AS
E10E315DS
E10E315ES
E10E315AP
E10E315DP
E10E315EP
—
E10E315DL
E10E315EL
10
3/4
4 P.S.T.
4 P.D.T.
4 P.D.T.
ON
ON
ON
None
OFF
None
OFF
ON
ON
E10E415AS
E10E415DS
E10E415ES
—
—
—
E10E415AL
E10E415DL
E10E415EL
Price
U.S. $
1-Pole
1-Pole
2-Pole
2-Pole
3-Pole
3-Pole
15
4-Pole
15
4-Pole
See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements on Page 47-4.
( ) = Momentary contacts, spring return action.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches
47-4
January 2010
E10 Series, Hesitation Switches and Actuators
Hesitation Switches
Table 47-2. Hesitation Switches — Special Purpose — Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Nominal Ratings
Amperes
Operation
hp
28V 125V 250V 250V
DC AC
AC
AC
15
0.69
(17.5)
0.47-32
Thread
15
10
3/4
Maintained
Function — Circuit
with Lever In…
UP
Position
CENTER
Position
DOWN
Position —
Keyway
ON
OFF
ON
0.47
(11.9)
0.07 (1.8) x
0.05 (1.3)
Keyway
Poles
and
Throw
Screw Terminal
Catalog
Number
2 P.D.T.
3 P.D.T.
4 P.D.T.
E10E215SS
E10E315SS
E10E415SS
Price
U.S. $
1.25
(31.8)
1.47
(37.3)
1.34
(34)
See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements below.
Note: Interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through the center position until pressure is momentarily relieved.
Designed for control and protection of reversing motors.
Pushbutton Actuators
Table 47-3. Pushbutton Actuators — Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces
Nominal Ratings
Approximate
Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Amperes AC
125V
hp
125 –
NO NC NO NC 250V
0.04 (1) x 0.07 (1.8)
Keyway
250V
Poles Contacts Bushing
Length
and
Inches (mm)
Throw
Dim. “A”
Button
Extension
Inches (mm)
Dim. “B”
Typical
Screw Terminal
Maximum
Operating Catalog
Price
Force
Number
U.S. $
Spade Terminal
0.250 Inch (6.4 mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
6
—
3
—
—
1 P.S.T. NO
0.69 (17.5)
0.34 (8.6)
0.53 (13.5)
0.25 (6.4)
0.9 lbs.
E10P106RS
E10P106JS
E10P106RP
—
15
—
10
—
1/3
1 P.S.T. NO
0.69 (17.5)
0.34 (8.6)
0.53 (13.5)
0.25 (6.4)
0.9 lbs.
E10P115RS
E10P115JS
E10P115RP
—
15
10
10
5
1/4 1 P.D.T. NO, NC
0.69 (17.5)
0.53 (13.5)
1.0 lbs.
E10P115LS
—
0.47-32
Thread
B
A
0.63
(16)
47
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
See Figure 47-1 Circuit Arrangements below.
Rated 1/4 hp at 125V, 1/2 hp at 250V.
Circuit Arrangements
SPST
3PDT
SPDT
DPST
4PST
DPDT
4PDT
3PST
Figure 47-1. Circuit Arrangements
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches
47-5
January 2010
E10 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-4. Accessories — Minimum Order Quantity 100 Pieces
Description
Material/Notes
Catalog
Number
Hexagon Locknut
Zinc-Chromate Treated Steel
E10TA101
Price
U.S. $
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
0.08
(2)
0.63
(16)
Knurled Face Nut
Zinc-Chromate Treated Steel
E10TA102
0.07
(1.8)
0.63
(16)
Internal Tooth Lockwasher
Cadmium Plated Steel
E10TA103
Terminal Screws
#6-32 x 3/16" Binding Head
E10TA201
Spade Terminal Adapter — 0.250 inch (6.4 mm)
Assembles to Screw Terminals
E10TA202
ON-OFF Indicating Plate — Vertical Orientation
Burnished Nickel Finish Steel
E10TA301
ON
1.0
(25.4)
0.06
(1.5)
OFF
0.03
(.8)
0.63
(16)
OFF-ON Indicating Plate — Horizontal Orientation
Burnished Nickel Finish Steel
E10TA302
O
F
F
Flip-Up Guard
for Toggle Switches
E10TA104
Fixed Shroud for
Toggle Switches
E10TA105
47
O
N
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Toggle Switches
47-6
January 2010
E10 Series — Catalog Number Structure
Dimensions
Table 47-5. Toggle Switch — Approximate Dimensions
No.
of
Poles
Operation
1
2
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Bushing Lever
Screw Terminals
Length Length C
D
E
A
B
Spade Terminals
Solder Lug
C
D
E
C
D
E
Momentary
& Maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.00
(25.4)
1.17
(29.7)
0.63
(16.0)
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
0.63
(16.0)
1.00
(25.4)
1.13
(28.7)
0.63
(16.0)
Maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.06
(26.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.19
(30.2)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
1.06
(26.9)
1.31
(33.3)
0.75
(19.1)
Momentary
0.47
(11.9)
0.56
(14.2)
1.25
(31.8)
3
Maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.27
(32.3)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.37
(34.8)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
4
Maintained
0.47
(11.9)
0.69
(17.5)
1.20
(30.5)
1.30
(33.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.30
(33.0)
1.34
(34.0)
1.40
(35.6)
1.23
(31.2)
1.34
(34.0)
1.44
(36.6)
B
A
D
C
E
1.31
(33.3)
1.25
(31.8)
Note: Spade terminal adapters are used on 6 ampere, 20 ampere and momentary screw terminal switches, adding 0.42 (10.7) to dimension C.
Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-6. E10 Catalog Numbering System — Not to be used for ordering purposes
E10 T
1 06 A S =
E10T106AS
Series
Complete Cat. No.
Termination
Lever Length
S = Screw
L = Solder Lug
P = Spade
T = 0.563 inch (14.3 mm) Lever
E = 0.688 inch (17.5 mm) Lever
Poles
1=
2=
3=
4=
47
0.563 inch (14.3 mm)
1-Pole
6 Amperes
ON - None - OFF
Screw Terminal
Function
1 Pole
2 Pole
3 Pole
4 Pole
Ratings — 125V
A=
B=
D=
E=
F=
G=
H=
ON - None - OFF
OFF - None - (ON)
ON - OFF - ON
ON - None - ON
ON - OFF - (ON)
(ON) - OFF - (ON)
ON - None - (ON)
06 = 6 Amperes
15 = 15 Amperes
20 = 20 Amperes
( ) = Momentary contacts, spring return action.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
47-7
January 2010
Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series
■
Features
Contents
Description
Page
■
Environmentally Sealed Toggle
Switches
Molded-In Screw Terminal
E10E Series . . . . . . . . . . . 47-7
Econoswitch E10E Series . 47-9
Switch Guard . . . . . . . . . . . 47-12
■
■
■
■
■
Standards and Certifications
■
UL — File number E15346; Guide
card number is WOYR2
■ CSA — LR40068, class number 6241
Technical Data and
Specifications
Options
■
Note: Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more information.
■
■
One-Pole and Two-Pole
Molded-In Screw Terminal
Completely sealed against dust,
moisture and other contaminants
One-hole mounted bushing for easy
installation
Multi-circuits offered
2- and 3-position with maintained
and momentary action
Molded-in terminal inserts and
terminals numbers
1- and 2-pole circuitry
Special circuits
Panel seal, part number 32-341
■ Spade terminal adapters available
■
Non-UL Recognized devices
❑ Alternate toggle levers
❑ Locking toggle levers
❑ Rocker buttons
■
■
■
Special mounting hardware
Mounting hardware furnished
assembled
■ Terminal screws furnished
assembled
■
■
Watertight seal per MIL-STD-108E
and designed to meet IP68
Thermoset molding materials meet
flame retardant requirements
Temperature Range: -50° to 150°F
(-46° to 66°C)
Life: 20,000 operations at rated load;
40,000 operations mechanical life;
6,000 operations at hp ratings per
UL and CSA requirements
Bushings: 15/32" – 32 thread
Product Selection
Table 47-7. Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series Toggle Switch Product Selection
Nominal AC Ratings
Amperes
125V
Circuit with Lever Position
1-Phase hp
3-Phase
hp
Up
Center
Down (Keyway)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
47
250V
125V
250V
125/250V
9
1/4
1/2
—
ON
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
ON
OFF
ON
E10E118DM
E10E118AM
E10E118EM
9
1/2
1
—
ON
ON
ON
OFF
NONE
NONE
ON
OFF
ON
E10E218DM
E10E218AM
E10E218EM
One-Pole
18
Two-Pole
18
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-8
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
January 2010
Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series
Dimensions
0.432
(10.97)
0.432
(10.97)
0.076
(1.93)
0.076
(1.93)
Keyway
Keyway
33°
16.5°
33°
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
16.5°
0.690
(17.53)
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
0.690
(17.53)
0.470
(11.94)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
1.18
(29.9)
Max.
0.250
(6.35)
0.470
(11.94)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
1.100
0.130 (27.94) 1.370
(3.30) Max. (34.80)
Max.
0.250
(6.35)
#6-32 Terminal Screw
with Internal Tooth
Lockwasher (SEMS)
#6-32 Terminal Screw
with Internal Tooth
Lockwasher (SEMS)
0.130
(3.30)
47
1
4
0.635
(16.13)
Max.
2 3
0.380 0.910
(9.65) (23.11)
Max.
0.380
(9.65)
Typ.
1.270 (32.26) Max.
1
2 3
0.380
(9.65)
Typ.
1.340 (34.04) Max.
Figure 47-2. One-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series Toggle
Switches — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-4. Two-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series —
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
15/32 Dia. Bushing
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
0.375
(9.52)
0.130
(3.30)
Locking Ring
0.445
(11.30)
5 6
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
0.062
(1.57)
Keyway
Figure 47-3. Toggle Switch Panel Cutout Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
47-9
January 2010
Econoswitch E10E Series
Standards and Certifications
■
UL — File number E15346; Guide
card number is WOYR2
■ CSA — LR40068, class number 6241
Table 47-9. UL and CSA Nominal Ratings
One-Pole and Two-Pole Econoswitch
E10E Series Toggle Switches
Catalog
Number
Amperes
125V AC
250V AC
1-Phase hp
125V AC
250V AC
125/250V AC
E10E118xx
E10E218xx
18
18
9
9
1/4
1/2
1/2
1
—
—
Features
Technical Data and Specifications
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Environmentally sealed
1- and 2-pole circuitry
One-hole mounting for easy installation
Multi-circuits
2- and 3-position with maintained
and momentary action
Three types of termination offered
as standard
Watertight seal per MIL-STD-108E
and designed to meet IP68
■ Three standard types of terminals:
Screws — 6-32 UNC-22A
Solder lug — 0.125 (3.17) dia. hole
Spade — 0.250 (6.35) x 0.032 (0.81)
thick
3-Phase hp
■
Life: 50,000 operations at rated load;
100,000 operations mechanical life
■ Temperature Range: -50° to 150°F
(-46° to 66°C)
Product Selection
Table 47-8. Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switch Product Selection
Type of
Operation
Current Ratings — Amperes
28V DC
Circuit with Lever
Position
115V AC, 60 or 400 Hz
Lamp Resistive Inductive Lamp Resistive Inductive
Load Load
Load
Load Load
Load
Up
Screw Terminals
Down Catalog
Center (Keyway) Number
Solder Lug
Terminals
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Spade Terminals
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
47
One-Pole
Maintained
Maintained
Maintained
Momentary
Momentary
5
5
5
4
4
20
20
20
15
15
15
15
15
10
10
3
3
3
2
2
15
15
15
15
15
10
10
10
7
7
OFF
ON
ON NONE
ON NONE
ON OFF
OFF NONE
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
E10E118DS
E10E118AS
E10E118ES
E10E118GS
E10E118BS
E10E118DL
E10E118AL
E10E118EL
E10E118GL
E10E118BL
E10E118DP
E10E118AP
E10E118EP
E10E118GP
E10E118BP
7
7
7
5
5
20
20
20
18
18
15
15
15
10
10
4
4
4
2
2
15
15
15
11
11
15
15
15
8
8
OFF
ON
ON NONE
ON NONE
ON OFF
OFF NONE
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
E10E218DS
E10E218AS
E10E218ES
E10E218GS
E10E218BS
E10E218DL
E10E218AL
E10E218EL
E10E218GL
E10E218BL
E10E218DP
E10E218AP
E10E218EP
E10E218GP
E10E218BP
Two-Pole
Maintained
Maintained
Maintained
Momentary
Momentary
Momentary contact.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-10
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
January 2010
Econoswitch E10E Series
Dimensions
15/32 Dia. Bushing
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
0.375
(9.52)
0.480 (12.19)
Dia. Hole
0.445
(11.30)
0.130
(3.30)
0.062
(1.57)
Keyway
Locking Ring
Figure 47-5. Toggle Switch Panel Cutout Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.432
(10.97)
Keyway
0.076
(1.93)
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
33°
16.5°
0.690
(17.53)
0.470
(11.94)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
47
#6-32 UNC-2A
Terminal Screw,
SEMS
1.51
(38.4)
Max.
1.28
(32.5)
Max.
1.30
(33.0)
Max.
0.250 x 0.032
(6.35) x (0.81)
Thick
0.125 (3.17)
Dia. Hole
1.25 (31.75)
0.594
(15.09)
1
2
3
Screw Terminal
1
2
3
Solder Lug
1
2
3
Spade Terminal
Figure 47-6. One-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switches — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
47-11
January 2010
Econoswitch E10E Series
0.432
(10.97)
Keyway
0.076
(1.93)
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
33°
16.5°
0.690
(17.53)
0.468
(11.89)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
1.34
(34.1)
Max.
#6-32 UNC-2A
Terminal Screw,
SEMS
1.55
(39.4)
Max.
1.32
(33.5)
Max.
0.250 x 0.032
(6.35) x (0.81)
Thick
0.125 (3.17)
Dia. Hole
1.32 (33.5)
0.89
(22.6)
Screw Terminal
Solder Lug
Spade Terminal
Figure 47-7. Two-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series Toggle Switches — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
47
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches
47-12
January 2010
Switch Guard
Dimensions
33°
0.240 (6.10)
Dia.
Switch Guard
0.688
(17.48)
Features
■
■
■
■
■
■
For use with 2-position switch
Cover closure transfers switch
toggle lever to OFF position
One-hole mounted mounting style
Cover is molded out of red
thermoset molding material
Guard cover is spring-loaded to
either close or lock in open position
Prevents accidental operation at
switches
Switch Guard
0.475
(12.07)
Dia.
Rivet
0.031 0.062
(0.79) (1.57)
0.750
(19.05)
Max.
0.688
(17.48)
Max.
1.062
(26.97)
1.635 (41.53) Max.
1.830 (46.48) Max.
Table 47-10. Switch Guard Product Selection
Price
U.S. $
0.468
(11.89)
15/32-32 UN-2A
Thread to Within
0.060 (1.52)
of Shoulder
Product Selection
Catalog
Number
0.840
(21.34)
1.547 (39.29)
Rad.
Open
E10TA104
Closed
Red-Molded
Plastic
1.093
(27.76)
Max.
47
Switch
(Ref.)
Steel
0.032
(0.81)
Figure 47-8. Switch Guard— Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-13
January 2010
Product Family Overview
Features
Contents
Description
Assembled Control
Stations
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E22 Control Stations . . . . .
General Purpose
Control Stations. . . . . . . .
Special Purpose
Control Stations. . . . . . . .
Heavy-Duty
Control Stations. . . . . . . .
10250T Control Stations . .
10250T Class I Division 2
Control Stations. . . . . . . .
E34 Class I Division 2
Corrosion Resistant
Control Stations. . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Assembled
Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renewal Parts. . . . . . . . . . .
Page
Heavy-Duty Control Stations
E22 Control Stations
47-13
47-14
47-16
47-18
47-19
47-20
47-21
Cat. No. E22AS204
■
■
■
■
■
47-22
47-23
47-24
47-26
■
■
22.5 mm operators
Industrial grade
Impact resistant polycarbonate
enclosures
Compact wall mount
Optional yellow covers
Popular with OEMs
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Cat. No. 10250H1913
■
■
■
■
■
■
Industrial grade
Extra heavy-duty
Polyester enclosure
Booted buttons
Outdoor installation
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X,
12, 13
10250T Control Stations
General Purpose Control Stations
Cat. No. 10250T3525
Cat. No. 10250H5200
■
Construction grade
General purpose wall mount
■ Popular with contractors
■ UL (NEMA) Type 1
■
Special Purpose Control Stations
■
30.5 mm operators
Industrial grade
■ Zinc die cast enclosure
■ Popular with industrial end users
■ UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
■
Class I Division 2 Control Stations
Cat. No. 10250H364
Cat. No. E34EX7023P
■
■
Standard grade
■ Polyester enclosure
■ UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13
■
■
■
■
■
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Available with 10250T or E34 30.5 mm
operators
Zinc die cast, polyester or stainless
steel enclosures
Factory-sealed contact blocks
Popular with industrial end users
UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B,
C and D
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-14
January 2010
E22 Series, 22.5 mm Pushbutton Stations
Assembled E-Stop Stations
Product Description
■
Safety-yellow cover and light gray
base enclosures
■ Polycarbonate enclosures
■ Single 21 mm diameter hole for
cable entry
Emergency Stop Station
Table 47-11. Product Selection — Emergency Stop Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator
Contact Symbol
Button Type/Color
Legend
Marking
Catalog
Number
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Round Yellow Nameplate
E22AT111
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT112
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Cover
E22AT113
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT114
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Round Yellow Nameplate
E22AT111C
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT112C
1NO
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Cover
E22AT113C
1NC
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT114C
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Round Yellow Nameplate
E22AT111E
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT112E
1NO
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Cover
E22AT113E
1NO
40 mm Latching
Trigger Action/Red
EMO
Safety Yellow Guard
E22AT114E
40 mm Mushroom,
Momentary Action/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Yellow Cover
E22ASB105
40 mm Latch in
Twist-to-Release/Red
EMERGENCY STOP
Yellow Cover
E22ASB106
1NC
Cat. No. E22AT111
Cat. No. E22AT111C
47
Cat. No. E22AT111E
1NC
Price
U.S. $
Cat. No. E22ASB106
Compliant with EN418 Safety of Machinery Standard.
Non-compliant with EN418 requirements.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-23
Custom Stations. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-15
January 2010
E22 Series, 22.5 mm Pushbutton Stations
Assembled E22 Pushbutton
Stations
Product Description
■
E22 Series black bezel pushbuttons
Light gray polycarbonate enclosures
■ Single 21 mm diameter hole for
cable entry
■
E-Stop Control Station
Note: For Custom Stations, see Pages 47-24
– 47-25.
Table 47-12. Product Selection — Assembled Control Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator
One Pushbutton
Cat. No. E22ASB109
Contact Symbol
Button Type/Color
Legend
Marking
Catalog Number
Chrome Bezels
Catalog Number
Black Bezels
Extended/Red
STOP
E22AS109
E22ASB109
Flush/Green
START
E22AS108
E22ASB108
Flush/Green
Extended/Red
START
STOP
E22AS204
E22ASB204
1NO
Flush/Green
Mushroom/Red
START
STOP
E22AS205
E22ASB205
1NC
Flush/Green Latch-In
Twist-to-Release/Red
START
STOP
E22AS206
E22ASB206
Flush/Black
Extended/Red
Flush/Black
FOR
STOP
REV
E22AS304
E22ASB304
Flush/Black
Extended/Red
Flush/Black
CLOSE
STOP
OPEN
E22AS305
E22ASB305
1NC
Flush/Black
Extended/Red
Flush/Black
UP
STOP
DOWN
E22AS306
E22ASB306
1NO
1NC
1NO
Two Pushbuttons
Cat. No. E22AS204
Three Pushbuttons
1NO
Cat. No. E22AS304
Price
U.S. $
47
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-23
Custom Stations . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-16
January 2010
10250H Series, General Purpose Stations
General Purpose Type N Control Stations
Table 47-13. Product Selection — Type N Control Stations – UL (NEMA) Type 1
Enclosure
Type
Contact
Symbol
Button Type/Color
Legends
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Flush/Green
START
10250H5100
Flush/Red
STOP
10250H5101
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
One Element
Single Button with
Padlock Attachment
Accessory
4.00
(101.6)
3.25
(82.6)
Selector
Switch
Extended/Red
STOP
10250H5104
Palm Operated/Black
None
10250H89
3-Position Selector
Switch/Black Knob
RUN/OFF/AUTO
10250H289
Flush/Red
START/STOP
10250H5200
Flush/Green
Extended/Red
START/STOP
10250H5207
Flush/Black (All)
RAISE/LOWER
FOR/REV
OPEN/CLOSE
UP/DOWN
HIGH/LOW
FAST/SLOW
10250H5201
10250H5202
10250H5203
10250H5204
10250H5205
10250H5208
FOR/REV/STOP
UP/DOWN/STOP
RAISE/LOWER/STOP
OPEN/CLOSE/STOP
FAST/SLOW/STOP
10250H5300
10250H5301
10250H5302
10250H5303
10250H5304
2.25
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
Two Element
Two Button Station
4.00
(101.6)
3.25
(82.6)
2.25
(57.2)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
Three Element
47
Three Button Stations
Three Button with
Indicating Light
Flush/Black (All)
110/220V Neon Indicating Light
START/STOP
Clear — Flush/Green; Flush/Red
Red — Flush/Green; Flush/Red
Amber — Flush/Green; Flush/Red
10250H5310
10250ED853
10250ED853-2
6.00
(152.4)
5.00
(127.0)
1.50
(38.1)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
Round button.
2.38 (60.5) for neon indicating light.
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-17
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-17
January 2010
10250H Series, General Purpose Stations
General Purpose Type N Open Type Assemblies
Table 47-14. Product Selection — Type N — Open Type Construction (No Cover)
Enclosure
Type
Contact
Symbol
Button Type/Color
Legends
Catalog
Number
3-Position Selector
Switch/Black Knob
RUN/OFF/AUTO
10250H2538
Two Button Station
Flush/Green
START/STOP
10250H2747
Mechanically Interlocked Pushbuttons
Flush/Black (All)
Mech. Interlocked
None
10250H2544
Price
U.S. $
One Element
Selector Switch
Two Element
No legend on buttons. Specify any standard legend.
Table 47-15. Accessories for Type N Control Stations
Description
Catalog
Number
Padlock Attachment — For field assembly on square button type (except extended button types)
10250H5110
Price
U.S. $
47
Table 47-16. Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations
Voltage
Make and Emergency Interrupt Capacity
AC
DC
110V
220V
30
15
Normal Load Break
3
Continuous Current
10
1.5
10
440V
550V
120V
240V
600V
7.5
6
1.0
0.5
0.1
0.75
0.6
1.0
0.5
0.1
10
10
10
10
10
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-18
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
January 2010
10250H Series, Special Purpose Stations
Special Purpose Control Stations
Table 47-17. Product Selection — Special Purpose Control Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13
Type
One Element
Pushbutton Station
Feature
One
Flush
Element
Pushbutton
With Lock Hasp
Symbol Legends
Catalog
Number
START
10250H2738
STOP
10250H658
STOP
10250H665
Price
U.S. $
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
5.50
(139.7)
Two Element
Pushbutton Station
Two
Flush
Element
Pushbutton
6.25
(158.8)
START/STOP 10250H364
With Lock Hasp
START/STOP 10250H671
Buttons
Interlocked
FAST/SLOW
FOR/REV
UP/DOWN
OPN/CLOSE
2.25
(57.2)
3.13
(79.5)
0.75 (19.1)
Pipe Tap
3.38
(85.9)
Ship Wt.
2.5 Lb (1.1 kg)
10250ED664
10250H2740
10250H2741
10250H2742
Cat. No. 10250H364
47
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-26
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-19
January 2010
10250H Series, Heavy-Duty Stations
Heavy-Duty Type H Control Stations
Product Description
■
■
10250T Series operators
Dark brown polyester enclosure
■ Protective rubber gaskets provide
NEMA 3S rating on pushbuttons
Top and bottom 3/4-inch NPT conduit
entrances
■ Includes alternate legend plates and
spare mounting screws
■
Table 47-18. Product Selection — Type H Control Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Type of
Element
Feature
Circuit
Assembled
Legend
Plate
Unassembled
Alternate
Legend Plates
Catalog
Number
Pushbuttons
Without
Padlock Hasp
1NO-1NC
JOG
START
STOP
RUN
10250H1881
With
Padlock Hasp
1NC
STOP
—
10250H4239
Knob Selector
Switch
2-Position
3-Position
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
OFF/ON
MAN/OFF/AUTO
—
—
10250H4526
10250H4527
Pushbuttons
Standard
Price
U.S. $
One Element
Two Element
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
—
10250H1884
2NO-2NC
RAISE/LOWER
FORWARD
REVERSE
OPEN
CLOSE
10250H1885
Standard and
Standard w/
Padlock Hasp
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
—
10250H4240
Standard
2NO-3NC
FOR/REV/STOP
2 Standard and
Standard w/
Padlock Hasp
2NO-3NC
FOR/REV/STOP
START
JOG
RAISE
LOWER
Light-Red Lens
and 2 Plain
1NO-2NC
MOTOR
RUNNING
START/STOP
Three Element
Pushbuttons
Indicating
Light and
Pushbuttons
120V
—
OPEN
CLOSE
FAST
SLOW
10250H1890
10250H4241
10250H1913
Cat. No.
10250H1913
Table 47-19. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
NEMA
Type
No. of
Elements
Dimensions
Wide
High
Deep
3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13
1 and 2
3
4.50 (114.3)
4.50 (114.3)
8.25 (209.6)
10.75 (273.1)
4.50 (114.3)
4.25 (108.0)
Table 47-20. Maximum Ampere Ratings
Description
Make and Emerg. Inter. Capacity
Normal Load Break
Continuous Amperes
Voltamperes —
Make and Emerg. Inter. Cap.
Normal Load Break
Volts AC 50/60 Hz
Volts DC
120
240
480
600
125
250
60
6
10
30
3
10
15
1.5
10
12
1.2
10
1.1
1.1
10
0.55
0.55
10
7200
720
7200
720
7200
720
7200
720
138
138
138
138
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-27
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-20
January 2010
10250T Series, 30.5 mm Pushbutton Stations
10250T Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
Product Description
■
■
10250T Series operators
ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc enclosures
■
■
Surface or flush mounting
Single 3/4-inch NPT conduit entrance
on one and two element stations
■
Single 1-inch NPT conduit entrance
on three element stations
Table 47-21. Product Selection — Complete Assembled Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13
Number of
Elements
Type of
Elements
Features
Contact
Block(s)
Legend
Surface Mounting
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Flush Mounting
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Break Glass
Station
Break Glass
Station
Gray Enclosure
Red Enclosure
NC (Logic
Level)
EMERG. OFF
EMERG. OFF
10250TGS
10250TGR
—
—
One Element
Pushbutton
Standard
NO-NC
NC
NO-NC
NO-NC
NC
START
STOP
None
START
STOP
10250T3516
10250T3518
10250T3540
10250T3517
10250T3519
10250T3573
10250T3575
10250T3597
10250T3574
10250T3576
NC
NO-NC
STOP
OFF/ON
10250T3520
10250T3523
10250T3577
10250T3580
2NO
MAN/OFF/AUTO
10250T3524
10250T3581
2NC
START/STOP
10250T3545
10250T3602
1NO-2NC
2NO-2NC
2NO-2NC
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
RAISE/LOWER
None
START/STOP
10250T3525
10250T3672
10250T3541
10250T3542
10250T3582
10250T3673
10250T3598
10250T3599
1NO-2NC
START/STOP
10250T3526
10250T3583
NO-NC
Plus NC
START/STOP
10250T3528
10250T3585
2NO-3NC
2NO-3NC
2NO-3NC
2NO-3NC
2NO-3NC
FOR, REV, STOP
UP, DOWN, STOP
OPEN, CLOSE, STOP
None, None, STOP
None, None, STOP
10250T3532
10250T3615
10250T3614
10250T3543
10250T3544
10250T3589
—
—
10250T3600
10250T3601
1NO-2NC
MOTOR RUN,
START/STOP
10250T3536
10250T3537
10250T3538
10250T3539
10250T3593
10250T3594
10250T3595
10250T3596
Mushroom
Head
With Lock Hasp
Selector
Switch
Two Element
Push-Pull
3-Position
Pushbuttons
2-Position
Black Knob
3-Position
Black Knob
Momentary
Red Button
Standard
Pushbuttons
With Lock
Hasp
Standard and
Mushroom Head
Standard with
Maintained
Contact
Standard
47
Three Element
Indicating Light
(Transformer Type)
and Pushbuttons
2 Standard and
with Lock Hasp
Red Lens — 120V
Red Lens — 240V
Red Lens — 480V
Red Lens — 600V
Breaking glass closes contact.
Stop buttons are red — all others are black.
Uses deep cover instead of shallow cover.
Switch component is 10250TA67.
NEMA 4 – 13, if properly mounted on a flat
surface. Consists of front plate, legend,
operator and contact blocks.
Lock is 10250TA2.
Break Glass Operator
Shown Assembled to
Contact Block (Contact
Block Supplied
Separately)
Table 47-22. Break Glass Kit
Description
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Operator with Hammer
and 5 Glass Discs
Glass Discs Only (5)
10250TBG
10250TGL
Custom Stations. . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-157 – 47-158
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-21
January 2010
10250T Series, Class I Division 2 Stations
Class I Division 2 10250T Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations
Product Description
■
10250T Series operators
Factory sealed contact blocks
■ Die-cast, polyester or stainless steel
enclosures
■
■
Approved for NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D or Class I Zone 2
Group IIB plus Hydrogen type hazardous locations
Die Cast Enclosure with
One Pushbutton —
Aluminum Jumbo
Mushroom Red-Engraved
EMER. STOP
Catalog Number
10250T7007
Polyester Enclosure
with Two Pushbuttons
— Flush Green
and Extended Red
Catalog Number
10250T7023P
Stainless Steel
Enclosure with
One Red Pilot and
Two Pushbuttons —
Flush Green and
Extended Red
Catalog Number
10250T7033S
Table 47-23. Product Selection — Complete 10250T Assembled Stations — UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operator
Contact Symbol
Button Type/Color
Legend Marking
Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalog
Number
One Pushbutton
1NO
1NC
Two Pushbuttons
1NO
1NC
Each Button
One Pilot Light
Two Pushbuttons
1NO
1NC
Each Button
3-Position
Selector Switch
2NO
2NC
One Pushbutton
Maintained
Price
U.S. $
Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Flush/Green
START
10250T7003
10250T7003P
10250T7003S
Extended/Red
STOP
10250T7005
10250T7005P
10250T7005S
Alum. Jumbo
Mushroom/Red
EMER. STOP
(Engraved Button)
10250T7007
10250T7007P
10250T7007S
Flush/Black
No Legend
10250T7009
10250T7009P
10250T7009S
Flush/Green
Extended/Red
START
STOP
10250T7023
10250T7023P
10250T7023S
Flush/Black
Flush/Black
No Legend
No Legend
10250T7025
10250T7025P
10250T7025S
120V AC Red
Flush/Green
Extended/Red
No Legend
START
STOP
10250T7033
10250T7033P
10250T7033S
120V AC Red
Flush/Black
Flush/Black
No Legend
10250T7035
10250T7035P
10250T7035S
Maintained
Knob/Black
HAND/OFF/AUTO
10250T7011
10250T7011P
10250T7011S
Maintained
Knob/Black
No Legend
10250T7013
10250T7013P
10250T7013S
Push-Pull
w/Jumbo
Mushroom/Red
EMER. STOP
(Engraved Button)
10250T7019
10250T7019P
10250T7019S
Price
U.S. $
Pull Push
O
X 1NO
X
O 1NC
Custom Stations . . . . . . . . .
Enclosure Dimensions . . . .
Operator Dimensions . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Page 47-23
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-22
January 2010
E34 Series, Class I Division 2 Corrosion Resistant Stations
Class I Division 2 E34 Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations
Product Description
■
E34 Series operators
Factory sealed contact blocks
■ Die-cast, polyester or stainless steel
enclosures
■ Approved for NEC Class I Division 2
Groups B, C and D or Class I Zone 2
Group IIB plus Hydrogen type hazardous locations
■
Polyester Enclosure with
Two Pushbuttons —
Flush Green and
Extended Red, Catalog
Number E34EX7023P
Table 47-24. Product Selection — Complete E34 Assembled Stations
Operator
Contact Symbol
Button Type/Color
— UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Legend Marking
Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalog
Number
One Pushbutton
1NO
1NC
Two Pushbuttons
1NO
1NC
Each Button
3-Position
Selector Switch
2NO
2NC
47
One Pushbutton
Maintained
Price
U.S. $
Polyester Molded
Enclosure
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Flush/Green
START
E34EX7003
E34EX7003P
E34EX7003S
Extended/Red
STOP
E34EX7005
E34EX7005P
E34EX7005S
Alum. Jumbo
Mushroom/Red
EMER. STOP
(Engraved Button)
E34EX7007
E34EX7007P
E34EX7007S
Flush/Black
No Legend
E34EX7009
E34EX7009P
E34EX7009S
Flush/Green
Extended/Red
START
STOP
E34EX7023
E34EX7023P
E34EX7023S
Flush/Black
Flush/Black
No Legend
No Legend
E34EX7025
E34EX7025P
E34EX7025S
Maintained
Knob/Black
HAND/OFF/AUTO
E34EX7011
E34EX7011P
E34EX7011S
Maintained
Knob/Black
No Legend
E34EX7013
E34EX7013P
E34EX7013S
Push-Pull w/Jumbo
Mushroom/Red
EMER. STOP
(Engraved Button)
E34EX7019
E34EX7019P
E34EX7019S
Pull Push
O
X 1NO
X
O 1NC
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page 47-21.
Custom Pushbutton
Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-24 – 47-25
Enclosure Dimensions . . . . . . Page 47-23
Operator Dimensions . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-23
January 2010
E22/10250T/E34 Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
Table 47-25. E22 One-Element, Two-Element and Three-Element
Approximate Dimensions
E22
1.81
(46)
2.36
(60)
2.75
(70)
4-0.17 (4.2)
Mtg. Holes
2.99
(76)
2.24
(57)
Top View
A
Side View
Catalog
Number
Dimension A
in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Dimension A
in Inches (mm)
E22ASB105
E22ASB106
E22ASB108
E22ASB109
E22ASB204
E22ASB205
E22ASB206
0.87 (22.0)
0.87 (22.0)
0.57 (14.4)
0.65 (16.4)
0.65 (16.4)
0.87 (22.0)
0.87 (22.0)
E22ASB304
E22ASB305
E22ASB306
E22AT111
E22AT112
E22AT113
0.65 (16.4)
0.65 (16.4)
0.65 (16.4)
1.32 (33.5)
1.32 (33.5)
1.32 (33.5)
10250T and E34
Table 47-26. Approximate Enclosure Dimensions
Number
of
Elements
0.87
(22)
0.83 (21)
Cable Entry
Bottom View
Surface Mounting
Conduit
Entrance
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
3.88
(98.6)
3.88
(98.6)
3.88
(98.6)
3.88
(98.6)
4.0
(101.6)
5.88
(149.4)
7.75
(196.9)
9.63
(244.6)
3.0
(76.3)
3.0
(76.3)
3.0
(76.3)
3.0
(76.3)
2.69
(68.3)
2.69
(68.3)
2.69
(68.3)
2.69
(68.3)
3.25
(82.6)
5.13
(130.3)
7.0
(177.8)
8.88
(225.6)
3.81
(96.8)
3.81
(96.8)
3.81
(96.8)
3.81
(96.8)
6.63
(168.4)
6.63
(168.4)
8.88
(225.6)
11.13
(282.7)
3.38
(85.9)
3.38
(85.9)
3.38
(85.9)
3.38
(85.9)
2.94
(74.7)
2.94
(74.7)
2.94
(74.7)
2.94
(74.7)
4.88
(124.0)
4.88
(124.0)
7.13
(181.1)
9.38
(238.3)
3.50
(88.9)
6.75
(171.5)
9.00
(228.6)
11.25
(285.8)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
3.00
(76.2)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50
(38.1)
4.25
(108.0)
7.50
(190.5)
9.00
(228.6)
12.00
(304.8)
Cast
Figure 47-9. One-Element — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1
2
4.25
(108)
3.15
(80)
2.36
(60)
3
4-0.17 (4.2)
Mtg. Holes
4
1
2
3
1.97
(50)
Top View
A
Side View
0.87
(22)
1
1
4
Stainless Steel
1
0.83 (21)
Cable Entry
2
Bottom View
Figure 47-10. Two-Element — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
4
2.36
(60)
3.15
(80)
3.00
(76.2)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
3.50
(88.9)
No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
4-0.17 (4.2)
Mtg. Holes
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
6.3
(160)
E
B
1.97
(50)
Top View
A
Side View
0.87
(22)
D
A
0.83 (21)
Cable Entry
C
Surface
Bottom View
Figure 47-12. Approximate Enclosure Dimensions
Figure 47-11. Three-Element — Approximate Dimensions in Inches
(mm)
CA08102001E
3/4
Polyester
4.72
(120)
5.82
(148)
3/4
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
47-24
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
January 2010
E22/10250T/E34 Series, Custom Assembled Stations — Specification Form
Custom Assembled Stations
Specification Form
Ordering Instructions
Step 1) Copy this ordering guide
from catalog.
Step 2) Specify 10250T, E22 or E34
pushbutton lines in the corresponding box on the following
page.
Step 6) For non-standard legends,
specify legend desired, letter
size and location on the layout sketches on the following
page. For limitations see
Page 47-84 and Page 47-152.
For pricing, use the blank legend Catalog Number and
“STAMP” Suffix
(Ex.: 10250TS36STAMP) and
reference the most recent
PAD or VISTA-line.
10250T
Pages 47-115 – 47-165
Example: 10250TS36
E22
Pages 47-28 – 47-98
Special Legend for Position #_______
E34
Pages 47-166 – 47-189
10250T
Pages 47-215 – 47-242
& E34
Class I Div. 2
For each contact block, specify if it
is to be mounted in the left or right
position. For example: If an E22B1
contact block is selected, specify if it is
to be mounted on the left or right side
of the mounting adapter as viewed
from back of operator.
LETTER SIZE
3/32"
Step 3) Check back of panel dimensions — specify single or
double depth enclosure in the
corresponding box on the
following page.
47
E22
1/8"
✔
3/16"
Step 4) Specify enclosure Catalog
Number and price in the
corresponding box on the
following page. Enclosures
can be found on Pages 47-87
– 47-88 and Pages 47-153 –
47-154. For pricing, reference
the most recent PAD or
VISTA-line.
Step 7) Fax Sheet 2 of this form to
Eaton’s TRC, Technical
Resource Center, at
828-651-0549 to the attention
of — Custom Stations Order
or email to TRC@eaton.com.
Step 5) Specify Catalog Numbers for
desired operator, legend
plate, light unit, accessory
and contact block(s) for each
location in the enclosure in
the corresponding box on the
following page. (See position
locations below.)
Step 8) Place your order over the
VISTA System.
Within a few days you will
receive a confirmation fax
with the custom station part
number and price.
For Selector and Roto-Push
Operators
10250T or E34
Position 1
Position 1
Position 2
For single contact blocks or 1NO-1NC
contact blocks, the mounting position
of contacts must be specified. For
example: If a 1NO-1NC contact block
is required, specify if NO is to be
mounted in Top A position or Bottom
B position.
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 1
Position 2
Position 3
Position 4
Figure 47-13. Position Locations
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-25
January 2010
E22/10250T/E34 Series, Custom Assembled Stations — Specification Form
To —
Eaton’s TRC, Custom Station Order
(828) 651-0549 FAX, or email to TRC@eaton.com
FACTORY USE ONLY
Part Number
Product Code
From — Customer Name __________________________________________
Suffix
Customer Contact _________________________________________
Date
Phone Number ____________________________________________
Engineer
Fax Number ______________________________________________
Email Address ____________________________________________
✔
Step 3)
Step 2)
10250T
❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2
E22
❏ STD
E34
❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2
Step 4)
Single Depth Enclosure
Enclosure Catalog Number
Price
Double Depth Enclosure
Step 5)
Position
Operator
Price
U.S. $
Light Unit
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Block
Price
U.S. $
Lens or Caps
Price
U.S. $
A/L
B/R
Contact
Block
Price
U.S. $
A/L
B/R
Total
Price
1
2
3
4
Position
Legend Plate
Price
U.S. $
Accessory
Price
U.S. $
Total
Price
1
2
3
47
4
Total:
10% Adder
for Assembled Stations
Step 6) Non-standard Legends
Special Legend for Position #_______
LETTER SIZE
✔
Special Legend for Position #_______
LETTER SIZE
✔
Special Legend for Position #_______
LETTER SIZE
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
✔
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-26
January 2010
10250H Series, Renewal Parts
Renewal Parts
Figure 47-14. Type N Renewal Parts
Table 47-27. Assembled Stations — Type N Renewal Parts
Item Description
No.
No. Part
Req. Number
Type N — Square Buttons
1
47
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Cover
2 Element
Single Element — Top Button
Single Element — Bottom Button
Cover Screw
Pushbutton Support Bracket
Pushbutton Support Bracket Screw
Pushbutton Spring
Disc (when used — 2 element
assembly)
Pushbutton — Top Position
START/Green
RAISE/Black
FORWARD/Black
OPEN/Black
UP/Black
Blank/Green
Pushbutton — Bottom Position
STOP/Red
Extended STOP/Red
REVERSE/Black
CLOSE/Black
DOWN/Black
LOWER/Black
Blank/Red
Pushbutton Element
1NO-1NC
2NO
1NO
1NC
Cover
Pushbutton Support Bracket
Pushbutton — Top Position
FORWARD/Black
UP/Black
RAISE/Black
OPEN/Black
FAST/Black
Price
U.S. $
Item
No.
Description
No. Part
Req. Number
Price
U.S. $
Type N — Square Buttons (Continued)
1
2
1
1
2
2
13
49-3524
49-3524-2
49-3524-3
11-2168
79-6649
11-2090
69-2571
16-1960
1
53-1169-3
53-1169-66
53-1169-7
53-1169-9
53-1169-11
53-1169
1
53-1202-2
53-1202-5
53-1169-8
53-1169-10
53-1169-12
53-1169-6
53-1202
1
1
1
1
86-2588
86-2588-2
86-2588-3
86-2588-4
49-3464
79-6650
53-1170-7
53-1170-4
53-1170-5
53-1170-9
53-1170-6
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Pushbutton Middle Position
REVERSE/Black
DOWN/Black
LOWER/Black
CLOSE/Black
SLOW/Black
Pushbutton — Bottom Position
STOP/Red
Pushbutton Element
2NO-3NC
Cover
Lens
Clear
Red
Amber
Shield
Shield Screws
Lamp (Neon NE48)
Lamp Receptacle
Lamp Receptacle Screw
Pilot Light Terminal Base
Lens
Clear
Red
Amber
Pushbutton Support Bracket
Pushbutton Element
1NO-1NC
1
53-1169-15
53-1169-18
53-1169-16
53-1169-17
53-1169-13
1
53-1201-2
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
86-2593
49-3524-4
28-494
28-887-2
28-887-3
73-1337
11-2012
28-494
28-902
911-330F1
86-2586
1
1
28-887
28-887-2
28-887-3
79-6650-2
86-2594
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
10250H2538
86-353
86-353-8
86-353-8
86-353
86-353-3
86-356
86-356
86-356
Type N — Round Buttons
Similar
to 27
Pushbutton Assembly and
Element for:
10250H289
10250H364
10250H685
10250H665
10250H671
10250H2738
10250H2740
10250H2741
10250H2742
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Pushbutton Control Stations — Assembled
47-27
January 2010
10250H Series, Renewal Parts
7
7
7
8
6
9
10
12
10
5
5
4
4
5
4
3
3
1
Pushbutton
11
2
1
2
Indicating Light
2
1
Selector Switch
Figure 47-15. Type H Renewal Parts
Table 47-28. Assembled Stations — Type H Renewal Parts
Item
No.
Description
No.
Req.
Part Number
Type H — Assembled Stations
Price
U.S. $
Item
No.
Description
No.
Req.
Part Number
Price
U.S. $
Type H — Assembled Stations (Continued)
1
Screw
2
11-4654
7
Screw
4
11-953
2
Screw
2
11-5719
8
Diaphragm
1
32-253-2
3
Base
1
17-16560
9
Mounting Plate
1
17-19522
4
Contact Blocks
See Page 47-116
Gasket
1
32-254
5
10250T Operator
See Pages 47-119 – 47-147
11
Base
1
17-16561
6
Mounting Plate
1
12
Mounting Plate
1
17-19523
17-19524
10
47
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-28
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series
Contents
Description
Product Description . . . . . . . . .
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Block Operation . . . . .
Standards and
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons . . .
Push-Push Units . . . . . . . . .
Push-Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintained Emergency
Stop Pushbutton Units . . .
Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . .
Twist-to-Release. . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . . .
Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . .
Page
47-29
47-29
47-29
47-29
47-29
47-29
47-31
47-33
47-34
47-36
47-37
47-39
47-41
47-42
47-43
47-44
47-47
Description
Product Selection (Continued)
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . .
Selector Switches . . . . . . .
Illuminated Selector
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch
Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotary Cam Selector
Switch Units. . . . . . . . . . .
Specialty Operators . . . . . .
Double Headed
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . .
Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . .
Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Light Units and Lamps . . .
Replacement LEDs and
Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-Way Mounting
Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . .
Options
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Printed Legends . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Legends . .
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering Complete Devices
Ordering Complete Devices
Using Single Composite
Cat. Number . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering Rotary Cam
Selector Switches . . . . . .
Catalog Number
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
47-48
47-49
47-51
47-55
47-58
47-60
47-62
47-64
47-65
47-67
47-68
47-69
47-70
47-72
Page
47-74
47-77
47-78
47-79
47-85
47-86
47-87
47-89
47-94
47-95
47-95
47-97
47-98
47
Legend Plates,
Three Styles
Available
Panel
Optional
Anti-Rotation
Ring
#E22LRP
3-Way
Mounting Adapter
#E22BA1
Terminal Clamps Are
Shipped Open, Ready to Wire
Bezel,
Choice of
Chrome or
Matte Black
Octagonal Mounting Nut
Which Eliminates Spacer Washers and
Set Screws #15-1438.
Tightening Torque: 15 lb-in (1.7 Nm)
T3-1/4 Bayonet
Base Lamps Used
Throughout
Light Units
and Contact Blocks
Secured to
Mounting Adapter
Without Tools
Variety of
Operators
Snap-On Fingerproof Shroud Provides
IP2X Fingerproof Protection Against
Electrical Contact
Sealing Washer
E22 Series
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-29
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Product Description
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® 22.5 mm
Industrial Heavy-Duty Pushbutton line
offers a wide array of functional,
smartly styled illuminated and nonilluminated pushbuttons, selector
switches, push-pulls, alternate action
and twist-to-release operators. The
complete line also includes transformer, full voltage, resistor, LED or
neon light units.
E22 operators are available with either a
traditional chrome or matte black frontof-panel appearance. The space-saving
design and modular construction of the
E22 line makes on-the-job assembly
fast and simplifies the stocking of both
components and complete devices.
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer EM22 Metal
Series is a rugged line of metal construction 22.5 mm pushbutton devices.
They are an extension of the industrially proven E22 Heavy-Duty Double
Insulated 22.5 mm pushbutton family.
EM22 operators are heavy-duty zinc
die-cast construction plated with a
corrosion resistant chromate finish.
Operators are complete with a very durable chrome plated metal bezel. Indicating
light units in the EM22 Series feature
smartly styled round lenses that enhance
their appearance and brightness.
All EM22 operators are compatible
with existing E22 contact blocks, light
units, accessories and enclosures.
EM22 metal operators and indicating
lights are grounded when mounted to
metal panels through the toothed
mounting nut. They are not grounded
when mounted to plastic panels.
Features
E22 Operators:
■ Heavy-duty oiltight construction
■ Chrome metal or black nylon bezels
■ Snap-lock contact block mounting
EM22 Operators:
■ Heavy-duty zinc die-cast
construction
■ Metal mounting nut doubles as
grounding and anti-rotation device
■ Chrome-plated metal bezel (matte
black not available)
Benefits
Plastic Devices
■
Modular construction makes assembly fast and simplifies stocking of
components and complete devices
■ Reliability nibs provide positive contact through light, medium or heavy
loads
■ Chrome finish and plastic construction are corrosion resistant
Metal Devices
■
■
■
■
■
■
EM22 is backwards compatible with
E22 operators
Metal mounting nut cuts through
painted surfaces to provide proper
grounding
Hands-free front of panel mounting
reduces installation cost
Mounting flexibility reduces installation cost, time and inventory
Stands up well in corrosive
environments
E22 and EM22 compatibility lowers
parts count and inventory
requirements
■
UL Listed E-Stop Device — File No.
E217948
■ Machinery Safety Directive — EN418
■ Semiconductor Manufacturing
Equipment — SEMI S2-0200
■ DEMKO Third Party Certification —
Certificate Nos. 129648-01 and
129648-02
Technical Data and
Specifications
Ingress Protection
■
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12
and 13
■ IEC IP65
Note: Ratings apply when mounted in
enclosures with the same ratings.
Mechanical Endurance Ratings
■
Frequency of operation
❑ Pushbuttons – 6,000 operations/hr
❑ Push-Pulls – 3,000 operations/hr.
❑ Push-Push – 1,800 cycles/hr.
❑ Selector Switches – 3,000
operations/hr.
❑ Trigger-Action E-Stop – 360
cycles/hr.
❑ Twist-to-Release – 1,200 cycles/hr
■
Mechanical Life
❑ Contact Blocks – 3 million
operations
❑ Pushbuttons – 5 million operations
❑ Push-Pulls – 300,000 operations
❑ Push-Push – 300,000 operations
❑ Selector Switches – 500,000
operations
❑ Trigger-Action E-Stop – 100,000
operations
❑ Twist-to-Release – 300,000
operations
❑ Joysticks — 500,000 operations
■
Vibration (IEC 68-2 [BS 2011])
❑ Vibration – 5g/0.7 mm peak to
peak, 10 sweeps, 10 – 500 Hz
❑ Shock – 30g, 18 ms
❑ Bump – 25g, 6 ms for 1,000 cycle
Contact Block Operation
Linear make and break. All normally
closed (NC) contacts are Direct Opening
Action, i.e., NC contacts are physically
forced open by direct linkage with the
pushbutton operator in the unlikely
event of contact weld.
The contact block contacts are provided
with “Reliability Nibs.” The precisely
shaped point of the nib, coined on the
silver contact alloy, penetrates dust,
film oxide layers and other contaminants. This improves contact reliability
even under dry circuit and fine dust
conditions.
Logic level contact blocks are available
for low power switching — minimum
1 mA @ 5V DC.
Standards and Certifications
■
CE EN 60947-5-1
UL 508 — File No. E131568
■ CSA — File No. LR68551
■
Common E22 & EM22 Features:
■ Reliability nibs on contact blocks
■ Plain or notched hole mounting
■ Direct opening action
normally closed contacts
■ Fingerproof terminals
CA08102001E
Additional Certifications for
Trigger Action E-Stop Devices
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-30
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Environmental Conditions
Electrical Ratings
■
Table 47-31. Contact Block
■
■
■
■
Operating temperature:
-4° to +140°F (-20° to +60°C)
Storage temperature:
-40° to +176°F (-40° to +80°C)
Altitude: Up to 6562 feet (2000m)
Pollution degree (IEC 947-1): 3
Humidity: Maximum 95% RH @ 60°C
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q600
Description
Make and emergency
interrupting capacity
(Amp)
A600 (AC) Volts
Q600 (DC) Volts
120
240
480
600
125
250
440
60
30
15
12
0.55 0.27 0.1
600
0.1
Terminal Markings
Normal load break (Amp)
All rear of panel devices are marked with the circuit configuration per CENELEC 50013 standards.
Thermal current (Amp)
Ratings do not apply to rotary cam switches, see Ratings Page 47-95.
Table 47-29. Contact Blocks
■
A600, Q600 per UL 508
AC15, DC13 per IEC 60947-5-1
Circuit Configuration
2
1
4
3
■
6
3
10
10
1.5
10
1.2 0.55 0.27 0.1
10
2.5
2.5
2.5
0.1
2.5
Description
Plunger
Color
1NC
Red
Logic level contact blocks are UL A600, Q600 and IEC AC15,
DC13 rated and also have a minimum rating of 1 mA @ 5V DC.
1NO
Green
■
1NO-1NC
White
Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp): 4 kV
Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1
2
1
4
3
4A
3A
4
3
4
3
2
1
■
2NO
47
Green
Rated conditional short circuit current: 1 kA
Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA 10, Red Spot Type
gG, 10A, 660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1
Electrical Life
■
1NO
Early Make
Black
1NC
Late Break
Gray
AC15 durability
❑ 120V, 6A – 1 x 106 operations
■ DC13 durability
❑ 24V, 4A – 0.15 x 106 operations
❑ 660V, 0.1A – 0.5 x 106 operations
Material
■
Table 47-30. Lights Units
Circuit Configuration
Description
X1
X2
X1
X2
Full Voltage
Resistor
Transformer
X2
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Housing, bezel, mounting rings: Glass filled nylon
Metal bezels: Chrome plated brass
Internal seal: Nitrile rubber
Panel gasket: Nitrile rubber
Illuminated lenses: Polycarbonate
Buttons: Polyester or polycarbonate
Contacts: Silver
Terminals: Brass
X1
■
E22CB1, E22CB11, E22CB1E, E22B1 and E22B11 contact
blocks are marked with Direct Opening Action (DOA) Symbol “ “ per IEC 60947-5-1, Annex K and NEMA ICS 5, Part
6. For Mechanical Operating Parameters, see Page 47-69.
■
E22CB1, E22CB11 and E22CB1E contact blocks will be
marked as Suitable for Isolation per IEC 60947-5-1.
Contact Block Terminal Clamps
■
■
■
■
■
Clamp type: Self-lifting
Screw type: Plus/minus, captive
Wire range: 18 to 12 AWG (0.75 to 4.0 mm2)
Fingerproof protection: IP2X
Tightening torque: 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-31
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Pushbutton Units
■
Product Selection
■
Pushbutton Units
■
■
Non-illuminated
Plastic or Metal Operators
Black or Chrome Bezel
Flush, Extended or Mushroom Head
Operators
Description
Listed below are commonly ordered
complete pushbutton devices including
operator and contact block(s). These
devices are shipped as unassembled
components overpacked in a single
bag. For instructions on how to order
devices not listed below using a single
composite Catalog Number, refer to
Page 47-95.
Table 47-32. Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Button
Color
Contact Block Circuit
NO
NC
Catalog
Catalog
Number
Number
Price NO-NC
U.S. $ Catalog
Number
2NO
Catalog
Number
2NC
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operators — Black Bezel
Flush — Momentary
Black
E22PB1A
Red
E22PB2A
Green
E22PB3A
Extended — Momentary
Black
E22EB1A
Red
E22EB2A
Green
E22EB3A
40 mm Mushroom — Momentary
Black
E22LB1A
Red
E22LB2A
Green
E22LB3A
E22PB1B
E22PB2B
E22PB3B
E22PB1C
E22PB2C
E22PB3C
E22PB1D
E22PB2D
E22PB3D
E22PB1E
E22PB2E
E22PB3E
E22EB1B
E22EB2B
E22EB3B
E22EB1C
E22EB2C
E22EB3C
E22EB1D
E22EB2D
E22EB3D
E22EB1E
E22EB2E
E22EB3E
E22LB1B
E22LB2B
E22LB3B
E22LB1C
E22LB2C
E22LB3C
E22LB1D
E22LB2D
E22LB3D
E22LB1E
E22LB2E
E22LB3E
E22LLB1C
E22LLB2C
E22LLB3C
E22LLB1D
E22LLB2D
E22LLB3D
E22LLB1E
E22LLB2E
E22LLB3E
E22JPB1C
E22JPB2C
E22JPB3C
E22JPB1D
E22JPB2D
E22JPB3D
E22JPB1E
E22JPB2E
E22JPB3E
E22JLB2N8C
E22JLB2N8D
E22JLB2N8E
40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom — Latching
Black
E22LLB1A
E22LLB1B
Red
E22LLB2A
E22LLB2B
Green
E22LLB3A
E22LLB3B
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Momentary
Black
E22JPB1A
E22JPB1B
Red
E22JPB2A
E22JPB2B
Green
E22JPB3A
E22JPB3B
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Maintained
Red
E22JLB2N8A
E22JLB2N8B
EMERGENCY
STOP (Metal)
47
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
Flush — Momentary
Black
E22P1A
E22P1B
Red
E22P2A
E22P2B
Green
E22P3A
E22P3B
Extended — Momentary
Black
E22E1A
E22E1B
Red
E22E2A
E22E2B
Green
E22E3A
E22E3B
40 mm Mushroom — Momentary
Black
E22L1A
E22L1B
Red
E22L2A
E22L2B
Green
E22L3A
E22L3B
40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom — Latching
Black
E22LL1A
E22LL1B
Red
E22LL2A
E22LL2B
Green
E22LL3A
E22LL3B
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Momentary
Black
E22JP1A
E22JP1B
Red
E22JP2A
E22JP2B
Green
E22JP3A
E22JP3B
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Maintained
Red
E22JL2N8A
E22JL2N8B
EMERGENCY
STOP (Metal)
E22P1C
E22P2C
E22P3C
E22P1D
E22P2D
E22P3D
E22P1E
E22P2E
E22P3E
E22E1C
E22E2C
E22E3C
E22E1D
E22E2D
E22E3D
E22E1E
E22E2E
E22E3E
E22L1C
E22L2C
E22L3C
E22L1D
E22L2D
E22L3D
E22L1E
E22L2E
E22L3E
E22LL1C
E22LL2C
E22LL3C
E22LL1D
E22LL2D
E22LL3D
E22LL1E
E22LL2E
E22LL3E
E22JP1C
E22JP2C
E22JP3C
E22JP1D
E22JP2D
E22JP3D
E22JP1E
E22JP2E
E22JP3E
E22JL2N8C
E22JL2N8D
E22JL2N8E
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-89
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
1CD1
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-32
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Pushbutton Units
Table 47-32. Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 (Continued)
Button
Color
Contact Block Circuit
NO
NC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
NO-NC
2NO
2NC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
EM22P1D
EM22P1C
EM22P2C
EM22P3C
EM22P3D
EM22E2B
EM22E2C
EM22E2E
EM22L2B
EM22L2C
EM22L2E
EM22LL2C
EM22LL2E
EM22JP2C
EM22JP2D
EM22JP2E
EM22JL2N8C
EM22JL2N8D
EM22JL2N8E
Price
U.S. $
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
Flush — Momentary
Black
Red
Green
EM22P1A
EM22P2A
EM22P3A
EM22P2B
EM22P2E
Extended — Momentary
Red
EM22E2A
40 mm Mushroom — Momentary
Red
EM22L2A
40 mm Twist-to-Release Mushroom — Latching
Red
EM22LL2A
EM22LL2B
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Momentary
Red
EM22JP2A
EM22JP2B
50 mm Jumbo Mushroom — Maintained
Red
EMERGENCY
STOP (Metal)
EM22JL2N8A
EM22JL2N8B
See Page 47-95 for ordering other complete devices not shown.
47
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-89
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-86
1CD1
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-33
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Pushbutton Components
Pushbutton Components
Table 47-33. Momentary Contact Pushbuttons, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Will Accept Maximum of 3 Contact Blocks (6 Circuits)
When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter and Optional
Operator Plug.
Color
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
E22 Black
E22 Chrome
EM22 Chrome
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
25 mm Diameter Flush Button
E22PB1
E22PB2
E22PB3
E22PB4
E22PB5
E22PB6
E22PB7
E22PB8
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E22P1
E22P2
E22P3
E22P4
E22P5
E22P6
E22P7
E22P8
EM22P1
EM22P2
EM22P3
EM22P4
EM22P5
EM22P6
EM22P7
EM22P8
E22E1
E22E2
E22E3
E22E4
E22E5
E22E6
E22E7
E22E8
EM22E1
EM22E2
EM22E3
EM22E4
EM22E5
EM22E6
EM22E7
EM22E8
E22PF1
E22PF2
E22PF3
E22PF4
E22PF5
E22PF6
E22PF7
E22PF8
EM22PF1
EM22PF2
EM22PF3
EM22PF4
EM22PF5
EM22PF6
EM22PF7
EM22PF8
E22M1
E22M2
E22M3
E22M4
E22M6
EM22M1
EM22M2
EM22M3
EM22M4
EM22M6
25 mm Diameter Extended Button
E22EB1
E22EB2
E22EB3
E22EB4
E22EB5
E22EB6
E22EB7
E22EB8
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
25 mm Diameter with Full Shroud
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
28 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button
E22MB1
E22MB2
E22MB3
E22MB4
E22MB6
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
47
40 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button
E22LB1
E22LB2
E22LB3
E22LB4
E22LB6
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22L1
E22L2
E22L3
E22L4
E22L6
EM22L1
EM22L2
EM22L3
EM22L4
EM22L6
50 mm Dia. Mushroom Head Button — Plastic
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Red (Metal)
E22JPB1
E22JPB2
E22JPB3
E22JPB4
E22JPB6
E22JB2
E22JP1
E22JP2
E22JP3
E22JP4
E22JP6
E22J2
EM22JP1
EM22JP2
EM22JP3
EM22JP4
EM22JP6
EM22J2
Red (Metal) Engraved EMERGENCY STOP
E22JB2N8
E22J2N8
EM22J2N8
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Pushbutton Unit consists of the following:
Operator
See Above
Operator Plug
E22BA2 Required
if 3rd Contact
Block Is Used.
See Page 47-75
Legend Plate or
Print Option
See Pages
47-79 – 47-85
Mounting Adapter
E22BA1 (Supplied
with Operator).
For 5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Contact
Blocks
See Page 47-69
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-34
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
■
■
■
■
■
■
Plastic or Metal Operators
Black or Chrome Bezel
Extended Pushbuttons
Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Light Units
Plastic Lenses
Metal Operators available with LED
Table 47-34. Plastic Illuminated Extended Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Description
Button
Color
NO
NC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
NO-NC
2NO
2NC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E22TB2X4B
E22TB3X4B
E22TB5X4B
E22TB6X4B
E22TB9X4B
E22TB0X4B
E22TB2X4C
E22TB3X4C
E22TB5X4C
E22TB6X4C
E22TB9X4C
E22TB0X4C
E22TB2X4D
E22TB3X4D
E22TB5X4D
E22TB6X4D
E22TB9X4D
E22TB0X4D
E22TB2X4E
E22TB3X4E
E22TB5X4E
E22TB6X4E
E22TB9X4E
E22TB0X4E
E22TB2X10B
E22TB3X10B
E22TB5X10B
E22TB6X10B
E22TB9X10B
E22TB0X10B
E22TB2X10C
E22TB3X10C
E22TB5X10C
E22TB6X10C
E22TB9X10C
E22TB0X10C
E22TB2X10D
E22TB3X10D
E22TB5X10D
E22TB6X10D
E22TB9X10D
E22TB0X10D
E22TB2X10E
E22TB3X10E
E22TB5X10E
E22TB6X10E
E22TB9X10E
E22TB0X10E
E22TB2X11B
E22TB3X11B
E22TB5X11B
E22TB6X11B
E22TB9X11B
E22TB0X11B
E22TB2X11C
E22TB3X11C
E22TB5X11C
E22TB6X11C
E22TB9X11C
E22TB0X11C
E22TB2X11D
E22TB3X11D
E22TB5X11D
E22TB6X11D
E22TB9X11D
E22TB0X11D
E22TB2X11E
E22TB3X11E
E22TB5X11E
E22TB6X11E
E22TB9X11E
E22TB0X11E
E22T2X4B
E22T3X4B
E22T5X4B
E22T6X4B
E22T9X4B
E22T0X4B
E22T2X4C
E22T3X4C
E22T5X4C
E22T6X4C
E22T9X4C
E22T0X4C
E22T2X4D
E22T3X4D
E22T5X4D
E22T6X4D
E22T9X4D
E22T0X4D
E22T2X4E
E22T3X4E
E22T5X4E
E22T6X4E
E22T9X4E
E22T0X4E
E22T2X10B
E22T3X10B
E22T5X10B
E22T6X10B
E22T9X10B
E22T0X10B
E22T2X10C
E22T3X10C
E22T5X10C
E22T6X10C
E22T9X10C
E22T0X10C
E22T2X10D
E22T3X10D
E22T5X10D
E22T6X10D
E22T9X10D
E22T0X10D
E22T2X10E
E22T3X10E
E22T5X10E
E22T6X10E
E22T9X10E
E22T0X10E
E22T2X11C
E22T3X11C
E22T5X11C
E22T6X11C
E22T9X11C
E22T0X11C
E22T2X11D
E22T3X11D
E22T5X11D
E22T6X11D
E22T9X11D
E22T0X11D
E22T2X11E
E22T3X11E
E22T5X11E
E22T6X11E
E22T9X11E
E22T0X11E
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operators — Black Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TB2X4A
E22TB3X4A
E22TB5X4A
E22TB6X4A
E22TB9X4A
E22TB0X4A
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TB2X10A
E22TB3X10A
E22TB5X10A
E22TB6X10A
E22TB9X10A
E22TB0X10A
120V Transformer AC — 50/60 Hz
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TB2X11A
E22TB3X11A
E22TB5X11A
E22TB6X11A
E22TB9X11A
E22TB0X11A
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
47
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22T2X4A
E22T3X4A
E22T5X4A
E22T6X4A
E22T9X4A
E22T0X4A
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22T2X10A
E22T3X10A
E22T5X10A
E22T6X10A
E22T9X10A
E22T0X10A
120V Transformer AC — 50/60 Hz
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22T2X11A
E22T3X11A
E22T5X11A
E22T6X11A
E22T9X11A
E22T0X11A
E22T2X11B
E22T3X11B
E22T5X11B
E22T6X11B
E22T9X11B
E22T0X11B
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-35
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Table 47-35. Metal Illuminated Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Button
Color
NO Contact Block
NC Contact Block
Incandescent
Catalog
Number
LED
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Incandescent
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
LED
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22T2X4A
EM22T3X4A
EM22T5X4A
EM22T6X4A
EM22T9X4A
EM22T0X4A
EM22T2X40A
EM22T3X41A
EM22T5X90A
EM22T6X52A
EM22T9X95A
EM22T0X90A
EM22T2X4B
EM22T3X4B
EM22T5X4B
EM22T6X4B
EM22T9X4B
EM22T0X4B
EM22T2X40B
EM22T3X41B
EM22T5X90B
EM22T6X52B
EM22T9X95B
EM22T0X90B
EM22T2X43A
EM22T3X44A
EM22T5X92A
EM22T6X61A
EM22T9X96A
EM22T0X92A
—
—
—
—
—
—
EM22T2X43B
EM22T3X44B
EM22T5X92B
EM22T6X61B
EM22T9X96B
EM22T0X92B
—
—
—
—
—
—
EM22T2X10B
EM22T3X10B
EM22T5X10B
EM22T6X10B
EM22T9X10B
EM22T0X10B
—
—
—
—
—
—
EM22T2X433A
EM22T3X444A
EM22T5X922A
EM22T6X611A
EM22T9X966A
EM22T0X922A
EM22T2X11B
EM22T3X11B
EM22T5X11B
EM22T6X11B
EM22T9X11B
EM22T0X11B
EM22T2X433B
EM22T3X444B
EM22T5X922B
EM22T6X611B
EM22T9X966B
EM22T0X922B
120V AC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
—
—
—
—
—
—
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22T2X10A
EM22T3X10A
EM22T5X10A
EM22T6X10A
EM22T9X10A
EM22T0X10A
120V AC Transformer — 50/60 Hz
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22T2X11A
EM22T3X11A
EM22T5X11A
EM22T6X11A
EM22T9X11A
EM22T0X11A
47
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-89
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-86
1CD1
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-36
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton Components
Illuminated Pushbutton Components
Table 47-36. Illuminated Pushbutton and PresTest Indicating Light Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Will Accept Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks
(4 Circuits) When Used with Supplied
3-Way Adapter
Color
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
E22 Black
E22 Chrome
EM22 Chrome
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
25 mm Diameter Flush Lens
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22NB2
E22NB3
E22NB4
E22NB5
E22NB6
E22NB9
E22NB0
E22N2
E22N3
E22N4
E22N5
E22N6
E22N9
E22N0
EM22N2
EM22N3
EM22N4
EM22N5
EM22N6
EM22N9
EM22N0
E22T2
E22T3
E22T4
E22T5
E22T6
E22T9
E22T0
EM22T2
EM22T3
EM22T4
EM22T5
EM22T6
EM22T9
EM22T0
25 mm Diameter Extended Lens
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TB2
E22TB3
E22TB4
E22TB5
E22TB6
E22TB9
E22TB0
25 mm Dia. Extended Lens with Shroud
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22TX2
E22TX3
E22TX4
E22TX5
E22TX6
E22TX9
E22TX0
EM22TX2
EM22TX3
EM22TX4
EM22TX5
EM22TX6
EM22TX9
EM22TX0
If a Flush Lens type is required instead of Extended, substitute N for T in listed Catalog Number.
Example: E22NX2 — Red flush illuminated pushbutton with full shroud. Chrome version only.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
47
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-70 – 47-71
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-37
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Push-Push Units
Alternate-Action (Push-Push) Pushbutton Units
■
Non-illuminated or Illuminated
Plastic or Metal Operators
■ Black or Chrome Bezel
■ Flush or Extended Operators
■
Description
Listed below are commonly ordered
complete pushbutton devices including
operator and contact block(s). These
devices are shipped as unassembled
components overpacked in a single
bag. For instructions on how to order
devices not listed below using a single
composite Catalog Number, refer to
Page 47-95.
Table 47-37. E22 and EM22 Series Non-illuminated Flush and Extended Alternate-Action Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Button
Color
Contact Block Circuit
NO
NC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E22PPB1A
E22PPB5A
E22PPB7A
E22PPB1B
E22PPB5B
E22PPB7B
E22EPB1A
E22EPB5A
E22EPB7A
Price NO-NC
U.S. $ Catalog
Number
2NO
2NC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E22PPB1C
E22PPB5C
E22PPB7C
E22PPB1D
E22PPB5D
E22PPB7D
E22PPB1E
E22PPB5E
E22PPB7E
E22EPB1B
E22EPB5B
E22EPB7B
E22EPB1C
E22EPB5C
E22EPB7C
E22EPB1D
E22EPB5D
E22EPB7D
E22EPB1E
E22EPB5E
E22EPB7E
E22PP1A
E22PP5A
E22PP7A
E22PP1B
E22PP5B
E22PP7B
E22PP1C
E22PP5C
E22PP7C
E22PP1D
E22PP5D
E22PP7D
E22PP1E
E22PP5E
E22PP7E
E22EP1A
E22EP5A
E22EP7A
E22EP1B
E22EP5B
E22EP7B
E22EP1C
E22EP5C
E22EP7C
E22EP1D
E22EP5D
E22EP7D
E22EP1E
E22EP5E
E22EP7E
EM22PP1A
EM22PP5A
EM22PP7A
EM22PP1B
EM22PP5B
EM22PP7B
EM22PP1C
EM22PP5C
EM22PP7C
EM22PP1D
EM22PP5D
EM22PP7D
EM22PP1E
EM22PP5E
EM22PP7E
EM22EP1A
EM22EP5A
EM22EP7A
EM22EP1B
EM22EP5B
EM22EP7B
EM22EP1C
EM22EP5C
EM22EP7C
EM22EP1D
EM22EP5D
EM22EP7D
EM22EP1E
EM22EP5E
EM22EP7E
Price
U.S. $
E22 Series — Plastic Operators – Black Bezel
Flush
Black
White
Gray
Extended
Black
White
Gray
E22 Series — Plastic Operators – Chrome Bezel
Flush
Black
White
Gray
Extended
Black
White
Gray
EM22 Series — Metal Operators – Chrome Bezel
Flush
Black
White
Gray
Extended
Black
White
Gray
Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements:
The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons.
Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which can not result in a hazardous condition.
IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the printed
legend N124.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
47-38
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Push-Push Units
Table 47-38. Illuminated Bezel Flush Assembled Push-Push Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Button
Color
Contact Block Circuit
NO
NC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
NO-NC
2NO
2NC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22TP2X4C
E22TP3X4C
E22TP5X4C
E22TP6X4C
E22TP9X4C
E22TP0X4C
E22TP2X4D
E22TP3X4D
E22TP5X4D
E22TP6X4D
E22TP9X4D
E22TP0X4D
E22TP2X4E
E22TP3X4E
E22TP5X4E
E22TP6X4E
E22TP9X4E
E22TP0X4E
E22TP2X10C
E22TP3X10C
E22TP5X10C
E22TP6X10C
E22TP9X10C
E22TP0X10C
E22TP2X10D
E22TP3X10D
E22TP5X10D
E22TP6X10D
E22TP9X10D
E22TP0X10D
E22TP2X10E
E22TP3X10E
E22TP5X10E
E22TP6X10E
E22TP9X10E
E22TP0X10E
E22TP2X11C
E22TP3X11C
E22TP5X11C
E22TP6X11C
E22TP9X11C
E22TP0X11C
E22TP2X11D
E22TP3X11D
E22TP5X11D
E22TP6X11D
E22TP9X11D
E22TP0X11D
E22TP2X11E
E22TP3X11E
E22TP5X11E
E22TP6X11E
E22TP9X11E
E22TP0X11E
EM22TP2X4C
EM22TP3X4C
EM22TP5X4C
EM22TP6X4C
EM22TP9X4C
EM22TP0X4C
EM22TP2X4D
EM22TP3X4D
EM22TP5X4D
EM22TP6X4D
EM22TP9X4D
EM22TP0X4D
EM22TP2X4E
EM22TP3X4E
EM22TP5X4E
EM22TP6X4E
EM22TP9X4E
EM22TP0X4E
EM22TP2X10C
EM22TP3X10C
EM22TP5X10C
EM22TP6X10C
EM22TP9X10C
EM22TP0X10C
EM22TP2X10D
EM22TP3X10D
EM22TP5X10D
EM22TP6X10D
EM22TP9X10D
EM22TP0X10D
EM22TP2X10E
EM22TP3X10E
EM22TP5X10E
EM22TP6X10E
EM22TP9X10E
EM22TP0X10E
EM22TP2X11C
EM22TP3X11C
EM22TP5X11C
EM22TP6X11C
EM22TP9X11C
EM22TP0X11C
EM22TP2X11D
EM22TP3X11D
EM22TP5X11D
EM22TP6X11D
EM22TP9X11D
EM22TP0X11D
EM22TP2X11E
EM22TP3X11E
EM22TP5X11E
EM22TP6X11E
EM22TP9X11E
EM22TP0X11E
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TP2X4A
E22TP3X4A
E22TP5X4A
E22TP6X4A
E22TP9X4A
E22TP0X4A
E22TP2X4B
E22TP3X4B
E22TP5X4B
E22TP6X4B
E22TP9X4B
E22TP0X4B
120V AC/DC Resistor, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TP2X10A
E22TP3X10A
E22TP5X10A
E22TP6X10A
E22TP9X10A
E22TP0X10A
E22TP2X10B
E22TP3X10B
E22TP5X10B
E22TP6X10B
E22TP9X10B
E22TP0X10B
120V AC Transformer — 50/60 Hz, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22TP2X11A
E22TP3X11A
E22TP5X11A
E22TP6X11A
E22TP9X11A
E22TP0X11A
E22TP2X11B
E22TP3X11B
E22TP5X11B
E22TP6X11B
E22TP9X11B
E22TP0X11B
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
24V AC/DC Full Voltage Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22TP2X4A
EM22TP3X4A
EM22TP5X4A
EM22TP6X4A
EM22TP9X4A
EM22TP0X4A
EM22TP2X4B
EM22TP3X4B
EM22TP5X4B
EM22TP6X4B
EM22TP9X4B
EM22TP0X4B
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
47
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22TP2X10A
EM22TP3X10A
EM22TP5X10A
EM22TP6X10A
EM22TP9X10A
EM22TP0X10A
EM22TP2X10B
EM22TP3X10B
EM22TP5X10B
EM22TP6X10B
EM22TP9X10B
EM22TP0X10B
120V AC Transformer Unit, Flush, Illuminated Bezel
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22TP2X11A
EM22TP3X11A
EM22TP5X11A
EM22TP6X11A
EM22TP9X11A
EM22TP0X11A
EM22TP2X11B
EM22TP3X11B
EM22TP5X11B
EM22TP6X11B
EM22TP9X11B
EM22TP0X11B
Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements:
The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons.
White shall be used for illuminated Push-Push operators.
Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which can not result in a hazardous condition.
IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the printed
legend N124.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-89
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
1CD1
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-39
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Push Components
Alternate Action (Push-Push) Components
Non-illuminated and Illuminated Push-Push Operators
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks when used with supplied 3-way adapter, 5-way mounting adapters are not to be used.
Table 47-39. Push-Push Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
E22 Series — Plastic Operators
Black Bezel
Chrome Bezel
EM22 Series — Metal Operators
Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
E22PPB1
E22PPB5
E22PPB7
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
E22PP1
E22PP5
E22PP7
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
EM22PP1
EM22PP5
EM22PP7
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
E22EPB1
E22EPB5
E22EPB7
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
E22EP1
E22EP5
E22EP7
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
EM22EP1
EM22EP5
EM22EP7
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
E22NPB5
E22NPB0
E22NPB2
E22NPB3
E22NPB6
E22NPB9
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
E22NP5
E22NP0
E22NP2
E22NP3
E22NP6
E22NP9
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
EM22NP5
EM22NP0
EM22NP2
EM22NP3
EM22NP6
EM22NP9
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
E22TP5
E22TP0
E22TP2
E22TP3
E22TP6
E22TP9
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
EM22TP5
EM22TP0
EM22TP2
EM22TP3
EM22TP6
EM22TP9
Price
U.S. $
Flush, Non-illuminated
Color
Black
White
Gray
Extended, Non-illuminated
Color
Black
White
Gray
Flush, Illuminated
Color
White
Clear
Red
Green
Blue
Amber
47
Flush, Illuminated with Lens Guard
Color
White
Clear
Red
Green
Blue
Amber
Catalog
Number
—
—
—
—
—
—
Price
U.S. $
Note: In order to comply with NFPA 79 and IEC 60204-1 requirements:
The colors black, white or gray shall be used for Push-Push operators which act alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons.
White shall be used for illuminated Push-Push operators.
Push-Push operators shall only be used for functions which cannot result in a hazardous condition.
IEC 60204-1 recommends that Push-Push operators acting alternately as START/ON and STOP/OFF pushbuttons be marked with the IEC symbol
for Push-Push pushbuttons. To order with legend, add Suffix N124 to operator Catalog Number. Example: E22PPB1N124
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-89
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Pages 47-70 – 47-71
Page 47-98
1CD1
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-40
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Push Components
Alternate Action (Push-Push) Components (Continued)
Contact Block Selection/Application
Non-illuminated Push-Push operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (singles or duals). 5-way mounting adapters are
not suitable with Push-Push operators. Illuminated Push-Push operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (singles or
duals) and one light unit.
Table 47-40. Push-Push Operators
Contact Block Required
Circuit
Catalog
Number
B
E22B1
1NC
O
X
A
E22B2
1NO
X
O
W
E22B11
1NO-1NC
X
O
O
X
V
E22B20
2NO
X
X
O
O
Price
U.S. $
Circuit Operation
Suffix
Code
Push-ON
Push-OFF
X = Closed Circuit
O = Open Circuit
Note: Add Contact Block Suffix Code from tables above to operator
Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example: E22EP1B =
chrome bezel, Black button Push-Push with 1NC contact block.
47
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Pages 47-70 – 47-71
Page 47-98
1CD1
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-41
January 2010
E22 Series, Complete Devices — Maintained Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units
Trigger Action Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units — EN 418 Compliant
tact blocks are fully compliant with this
safety directive.
The European Machinery Safety Directive EN 418 requires all emergency
OFF devices to be self-latching types
and to have positive (direct) opening
operation. Devices have to be manually
reset. Actuators shall be mushroom
head type and colored RED. The background immediately around the device
actuator should be colored YELLOW.
See Page 47-42 for yellow guard.
Features
■
■
■
■
The new E22 trigger action operators
in conjunction with yellow nameplates
and DOA (Direct Opening Action) con-
■
Safety interlock against inadvertent
operation
Stop command and latching occur
simultaneously
Contacts cannot be “teased” open
Direct Opening Action (DOA) contact
blocks
Resetable by rotation of actuator
Periodic Inspection
Industrial control equipment should
be periodically inspected. Eaton
recommends inspection of Emergency
Stop devices for proper mechanical
operation after every 500 hours of
elapsed time. See National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Standard No. ICS 1.3, Preventive
Maintenance of Industrial Control and
Systems Equipment, for guidelines in
setting up a maintenance program.
Table 47-41. Trigger Action Emergency OFF Switch Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Action
Color
Legend/
Engraving
Contact Block Circuit
1NC
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2NC
1NC-1NO
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
2NC-1NO
E22LTA2QE
E22LTA2QW
E22LTA2QWB
E22LTA2N123QE
E22LTA2N123QW
E22LTA2N123QWB
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
40 mm Trigger Action Twist-to-Release
Red
(Red)
E22LTA2QB
40 mm Trigger Action Twist-to-Release EMO (Emergency Machine OFF)
Red
(White)
E22LTA2N123QB
Third party certified by DEMKO. For specification drawing, request A70-8530 from the Cutler-Hammer TRC — call 1-800-809-2772.
Third party certified by DEMKO and GS3 to SEMI S2-0200 specifications. For specification drawing, request A70-8508 from the Cutler-Hammer TRC —
call 1-800-809-2772.
EMO (Emergency Machine OFF) marking per SEMI S2 requirement.
Table 47-42. Two-Position Push-Pull Emergency Stop Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Action
Color
Contact Block Circuit
Legend/
Engraving
1NC
2NC
1NC-1NO
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E22LPB2B
E22LPB2E
E22LPB2C
E22LPB2N125B
E22LPB2N125E
E22LPB2N125C
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
40 mm Mushroom
Red
None
Red
IEC Symbol for Emergency Stop.
Direct Opening Action (DOA) for IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6) Compliance
Table 47-43. Mechanical Operating Parameters of Operators with E22CB1 and E22CB11 (NC Contacts Only)
DOA Operating
Parameters
Latching Trigger Action E-Stop
2-Position Push-Pull
E-Stop + E22CB1
E-Stop + E22CB11
2-Pos. Push-Pull + E22CB1
Min. Travel to Open Contact — Inches (mm)
0.24 (6.1)
0.24 (6.1)
0.08 (2.1)
0.08 (2.1)
Min. Force to Open Contact — lb (N)
5.00 (22.24)
5.00 (22.24)
0
0
Total Travel — Inches (mm)
0.29 (7.4)
0.29 (7.4)
0.23 (5.8)
0.23 (5.8)
2-Pos. Push-Pull + E22CB11
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-42
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Emergency Stop Components
Emergency Stop Components
Table 47-44. Standard Emergency Stop and Emergency OFF Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
All Shown with Action
Chrome Bezel
Color
Button Diameter/
Material
Legend/
Engraving
Plastic — Black Bezel
Plastic — Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks (4 Circuits) When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter (Unless Otherwise Noted)
Maintained
Trigger Action
Twist-to-Release
Red
40 mm/Plastic
Maintained
Trigger Action
Twist-to-Release
Red
40 mm/Plastic
Momentary
Red
EMO
Maintained —
2-Position Push-Pull
Red
Maintained —
2-Position Push-Pull
Red
Red
E22L2
E22JPB2
E22JP2
E22JB2
E22J2
E22JB2N8
E22J2N8
40 mm/Plastic
E22LPB2
E22LP2
50 mm/Plastic
E22JPLB2
E22JPL2
50 mm/Alum.
E22JLB2
E22JL2
E22JLB2N8
E22JL2N8
E22EDB2
E22ED2
EMERG. STOP
E22EDB2N8
E22ED2N8
EMERG. STOP
E22EDB2N796
E22ED2N796
E22GDB2
E22GD2
40 mm/Plastic
40 mm/Plastic
Illuminated
EMERG. STOP
EMERG. STOP
Maintained —
Twist-to-Release
Red
—
E22LB2
EMERG. STOP
Maintained —
2-Position Push-Pull
E22LTA2N123
40 mm/Plastic
EMERG. STOP
Red
—
50 mm/Plastic
50 mm/Alum.
Maintained —
2-Position Push-Pull
E22LTA2
40 mm/Plastic
E22GDB2N8
E22GDB2N796
E22GD2N8
E22GD2N796
E22LLB2
E22LL2
E22LLB2N886
E22LL2N886
E22GB2
E22G2
(White)
47
(White)
Maintained — Key Release
Red
40 mm/Plastic
Compliant with EN418 Machinery Safety Directive.
Yellow field — red letters.
Maximum of 3 contact blocks allowable (6 circuits) when optional operator plug is used.
Table 47-45. EN418 Compliant Safety Yellow Guard
Description
Color
Mushroom Guard for 40 mm Trigger
Safety
Action Switch — To be used with E22LTA2 Yellow
and E22LTA2N123 operators.
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22MGTA
Periodic Inspection
Industrial control equipment should
be periodically inspected. Eaton
recommends inspection of Emergency
Stop devices for proper mechanical
operation after every 500 hours of
elapsed time. See National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
Standard No. ICS 1.3, Preventive
Maintenance of Industrial Control and
Systems Equipment, for guidelines in
setting up a maintenance program.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-Way Adapter . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
Page 47-69
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Page 47-77
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Page 47-98
1CD1
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-43
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components
Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components
Table 47-46. Maintained Contact Mushroom Head Operators, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Will Accept Maximum of 2 Contact Blocks (4 Circuits)
When Used with Supplied 3-Way Adapter.
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
Color
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
E22 Black
E22 Chrome
EM22 Chrome
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Chrome Bezel
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Color
Price
U.S. $
Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Twist-to-Release — 28 mm Diameter Button
(Push to Latch — Twist to Release)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22MLB1
E22MLB2
E22MLB3
E22MLB4
E22MLB6
E22ML1
E22ML2
E22ML3
E22ML4
E22ML6
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
EM22ML1
EM22ML2
EM22ML3
EM22ML4
EM22ML6
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
EM22LL1
EM22LL2
EM22LL3
EM22LL4
EM22LL6
Twist-to-Release — 40 mm Diameter Button
(Push to Latch — Twist to Release)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22LLB1
E22LLB2
E22LLB3
E22LLB4
E22LLB6
E22LL1
E22LL2
E22LL3
E22LL4
E22LL6
Push-Pull — 40 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch — Pull to Release)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E22LPB1
E22LPB2
E22LPB3
E22LPB4
E22LPB6
E22LP1
E22LP2
E22LP3
E22LP4
E22LP6
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
EM22LP1
EM22LP2
EM22LP3
EM22LP4
EM22LP6
Push-Pull — 50 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch — Pull to Release)
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Red (Metal)
E22JPLB1
E22JPLB2
E22JPLB3
E22JPLB4
E22JPLB6
E22JLB2
E22JPL1
E22JPL2
E22JPL3
E22JPL4
E22JPL6
E22JL2
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Red (Metal)
EM22JPL1
EM22JPL2
EM22JPL3
EM22JPL4
EM22JPL6
EM22JL2
Red (Metal) EMERGENCY STOP
E22JLB2N8
E22JL2N8
EM22JL2N8
Key Release — 40 mm Diameter Button (Push to Latch — Turn Key to Release)
Black
Red
Green
E22GB1
E22GB2
E22GB3
E22G1
E22G2
E22G3
Black
Red
Green
EM22G1
EM22G2
EM22G3
For legend plates, use oversize plates, Catalog Numbers E22VA1, VA2 or VA8 listed on Page 47-74.
To order a different key and lock assembly, add suffix B1, C1, D1, E1 or F1 to the end of the Catalog Number.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-44
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Indicating Light Units, Modular
Indicating Light Units — Modular
■
Standard and PresTest Types
Plastic or Metal Operators
■ Full Voltage LED Light Units or
■ Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Incandescent Light Units
■ Plastic Lenses
■
PresTest — This device incorporates a
press-to-test feature whereby depressing
the lens disconnects the light from the
source being monitored and connects
the lamp to a continuously energized
circuit for immediate test for a faulty
lamp.
Table 47-47. Indicating and PresTest Light Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color
Indicating Light
LED
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
PresTest
Incandescent
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operators
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
E22H2X40
Green
E22H3X41
White
E22H5X90
Blue
E22H6X52
Amber
E22H9X95
Clear
E22H0X90
E22H2X4
E22H3X4
E22H5X4
E22H6X4
E22H9X4
E22H0X4
120V AC Full Voltage
Red
E22H2X43
Green
E22H3X44
White
E22H5X92
Blue
E22H6X61
Amber
E22H9X96
Clear
E22H0X92
E22H2X10
E22H3X10
E22H5X10
E22H6X10
E22H9X10
E22H0X10
E22T2X26
E22T3X26
E22T5X26
E22T6X26
E22T9X26
E22T0X26
120V AC Transformer
Red
—
Green
—
White
—
Blue
—
Amber
—
Clear
—
E22H2X11
E22H3X11
E22H5X11
E22H6X11
E22H9X11
E22H0X11
E22T2X27
E22T3X27
E22T5X27
E22T6X27
E22T9X27
E22T0X27
24V AC/DC Full Voltage
Red
EM22H2X40
Green
EM22H3X41
White
EM22H5X90
Blue
EM22H6X52
Amber
EM22H9X95
Clear
EM22H0X90
EM22H2X4
EM22H3X4
EM22H5X4
EM22H6X4
EM22H9X4
EM22H0X4
EM22T2X20
EM22T3X20
EM22T5X20
EM22T6X20
EM22T9X20
EM22T0X20
120V AC/DC Resistor Unit
EM22H2X8
EM22H3X8
EM22H5X8
EM22H6X8
EM22H9X8
EM22H0X8
EM22T2X26
EM22T3X26
EM22T5X26
EM22T6X26
EM22T9X26
EM22T0X26
EM22H2X11
EM22H3X11
EM22H5X11
EM22H6X11
EM22H9X11
EM22H0X11
EM22T2X27
EM22T3X27
EM22T5X27
EM22T6X27
EM22T9X27
EM22T0X27
E22T2X20
E22T3X20
E22T5X20
E22T6X20
E22T9X20
E22T0X20
120V AC/DC Resistor
Metal Operators
47
120V AC Full Voltage
Red
Green
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
EM22H2X43
EM22H3X44
EM22H5X92
EM22H6X61
EM22H9X96
EM22H0X92
120V AC Transformer — 50/60 Hz
Red
EM22H2X433
Green
EM22H3X444
White
EM22H5X922
Blue
EM22H6X611
Amber
EM22H9X966
Clear
EM22H0X922
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-45
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Indicating Light Units, One-Piece LED
Indicating Light Units — One-Piece LED
■
■
■
■
■
■
One-Piece Body Style
Plastic Operators
Full Voltage LEDs
Cluster-Style Integrated LED (non-removable) or
Standard Bayonet Base LED
Plastic Lenses
Table 47-48. Cluster LED Type Indicating Lights — Non-removable LEDs — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Product Description
Includes
permanently
attached lens
and board
mounted,
cluster style
LEDs
Supply
Voltage
LED Color Lamp Life
Catalog
Number
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
100,000
E22HL2X4
E22HL3X4
E22HL9X4
48V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
100,000
E22HL2X6
E22HL3X6
E22HL9X6
110/120V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
100,000
E22HL2X8
E22HL3X8
E22HL9X8
Non-removable LED
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.88
(47.7)
0.58
(14.8)
Ø1.16
(29.5)
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to
application conditions.
Table 47-49. Standard LED Type Indicating Lights — Replaceable bayonet base LEDs — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Product Description
Color
Lamp Life
Catalog
Number
12V AC/DC
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
100,000
E22HV0X89
E22HV2X37
E22HV3X38
E22HV4X39
E22HV5X89
E22HV6X51
E22HV9X94
24V AC/DC
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0X90
E22HV2X40
E22HV3X41
E22HV4X42
E22HV5X90
E22HV6X52
E22HV9X95
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0X91
E22HV2X53
E22HV3X54
E22HV4X55
E22HV5X91
E22HV6X56
E22HV9X87
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0X97
E22HV2X57
E22HV3X58
E22HV4X59
E22HV5X97
E22HV6X60
E22HV9X98
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0X92
E22HV2X43
E22HV3X44
E22HV4X45
E22HV5X92
E22HV6X61
E22HV9X96
Supply
Voltage
Includes lens
and T 3-1/4
bayonet base
LED
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
47
1.88
(47.7)
0.58
(14.8)
Ø1.16
(29.5)
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to
application conditions.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-46
January 2010
E22 Series, Complete Devices — Indicating Light Units, One-Piece Incandescent
Indicating Light Units — One-Piece Incandescent
■
■
■
■
One-Piece Body Style
Plastic Operators
■ Full Voltage and Resistor Type
Bayonet Base Incandescent Lamp
Standard or Insert (with Printed
Legends) Plastic Lenses
Table 47-50. Incandescent Standard Lens Type Indicating Lights — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Product Description
Supply
Voltage
Color
Includes lens and 12V AC/DC Clear
T 3-1/4 bayonet
#756 Lamp Red
base lamp
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
47
Lamp Life
Catalog
Number
15,000
E22HV0X3
E22HV2X3
E22HV3X3
E22HV4X3
E22HV5X3
E22HV6X3
E22HV9X3
E22HV0X4
E22HV2X4
E22HV3X4
E22HV4X4
E22HV5X4
E22HV6X4
E22HV9X4
24V AC/DC
#1819
Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
2,500
110/120V
AC/DC
W1121
Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
1,000
220/240V
AC Resistor
W1121
Lamp
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
1,000
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.88
(47.7)
0.58
(14.8)
E22HV0X8
E22HV2X8
E22HV3X8
E22HV4X8
E22HV5X8
E22HV6X8
E22HV9X8
Ø1.16
(29.5)
E22HR0X8
E22HR2X8
E22HR3X8
E22HR4X8
E22HR5X8
E22HR6X8
E22HR9X8
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to
application conditions.
Incandescent — Insert Lens with Printed Legends
Insert version indicating lights allow printed legends to be placed directly on the inside of the lens.
To specify lens insert with printed legends, add Suffix Code from table on Page 47-85 to the end of the catalog number.
Table 47-51. Incandescent Insert Lens Type Indicating Lights — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Product Description
Supply
Voltage
Lamp Life
Catalog
Number
15,000
E22HVA0X3
E22HVA2X3
E22HVA3X3
E22HVA4X3
E22HVA5X3
E22HVA6X3
E22HVA9X3
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
2,500
E22HVA0X4
E22HVA2X4
E22HVA3X4
E22HVA4X4
E22HVA5X4
E22HVA6X4
E22HVA9X4
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
1,000
Color
Includes lens and 12V AC/DC Clear
T 3-1/4 bayonet
#756 Lamp Red
base lamp
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
24V AC/DC
#1819
Lamp
Lens Insert
with Printed Legend
See Page 47-85.
110/120V
AC/DC
W1121
Lamp
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.88
(47.7)
0.58
(14.8)
Ø1.16
(29.5)
E22HVA0X8
E22HVA2X8
E22HVA3X8
E22HVA4X8
E22HVA5X8
E22HVA6X8
E22HVA9X8
Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to
application conditions.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-47
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Indicating Light Components
Indicating Light Components
Table 47-52. Indicating Lights — Without Light Unit — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color
E22
EM22
E22 Series — Plastic Operators
EM22 Series — Metal Operators
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
25 mm Dia. Standard Lens
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22H2
E22H3
E22H4
E22H5
E22H6
E22H9
E22H0
EM22H2
EM22H3
EM22H4
EM22H5
EM22H6
EM22H9
EM22H0
25 mm Dia. Lens — Insert Version
(To Order with Printed Legend Insert, see Page 47-85.)
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Chrome Bezel
E22A2
E22A3
E22A4
E22A5
E22A6
E22A9
E22A0
EM22A2
EM22A3
EM22A4
EM22A5
EM22A6
EM22A9
EM22A0
25 mm Dia. Glass Lens — Rated 4 – 13 Only
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22F2
E22F3
E22F4
E22F5
E22F6
E22F9
E22F0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Table 47-53. E22 Monoblock — Full Voltage Indicating Lights without Lamps — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Description
Color
Catalog
Number
Optically Enhanced Style
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HV0
E22HV2
E22HV3
E22HV4
E22HV5
E22HV6
E22HV9
Price
U.S. $
Description
Color
Catalog
Number
Diffuser Style (Catalog Numbers are
without legends)
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22HVA0
E22HVA2
E22HVA3
E22HVA4
E22HVA5
E22HVA6
E22HVA9
Price
U.S. $
Lens Insert
with Printed Legend
For LED/incandescent lamps, see Page 47-70 – 47-71.
For standard legends for diffuser, see Page 47-85.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-48
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■
■
■
Plastic or Metal Operators
Black or Chrome Bezel
■
■
Two- and Three-Position
Illuminated and Non-illuminated
■
Incandescent Bayonet Base Lamps
Transformer or Resistor Light Units
Table 47-54. Two-Position Push-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Non-illuminated
Pull
Button
Color
Catalog
Number
Black
Red
Green
Red (Alum) —
EMERG. STOP
Push
Illuminated – Tall Incandescent Bulb
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Color
120V AC Transformer
120V AC/DC Resistor
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E22EDB1B
E22EDB2B
E22EDB3B
E22EDB2N8B
Red
Green
Amber
Red (Alum) —
EMERG. STOP
E22GDB2X11B
E22GDB3X11B
E22GDB9X11B
E22GDB2N8X11B
E22GDB2X10B
E22GDB3X10B
E22GDB9X10B
E22GDB2N8X10B
Black
Red
Green
Red (Alum) —
EMERG. STOP
E22ED1B
E22ED2B
E22ED3B
E22ED2N8B
Red
Green
Amber
Red (Alum) —
EMERG. STOP
E22GD2X11B
E22GD3X11B
E22GD9X11B
E22GD2N8X11B
E22GD2X10B
E22GD3X10B
E22GD9X10B
E22GD2N8X10B
Red
Red – EMERG.
STOP
EM22ED2B
EM22ED2N8B
Red
Red – EMERG.
STOP
EM22GD2X11B
EM22GD2N8X11B
EM22GD2X10B
EM22GD2N8X10B
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operators — Black Bezel
X
O
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
X
O
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
X
O
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Table 47-55. Three-Position Push-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Pull
Intermediate
Non-illuminated
Push
Button
Color
Catalog
Number
Illuminated – Tall Incandescent Bulb
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Color
120V AC
Transformer
Catalog
Number
120V AC/DC Resistor
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operators — Black Bezel
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1LONC Contact Blocks
47
X
X
X
O
O
O
Black
Red
Green
E22FDB1S
E22FDB2S
E22FDB3S
Red
Green
Amber
E22HDB2X11S
E22HDB3X11S
E22HDB9X11S
E22HDB2X10S
E22HDB3X10S
E22HDB9X10S
Red
Green
Amber
E22HDB2X11T
E22HDB3X11T
E22HDB9X11T
E22HDB2X10T
E22HDB3X10T
E22HDB9X10T
Red
Green
Amber
E22HD2X11S
E22HD3X11S
E22HD9X11S
E22HD2X10S
E22HD3X10S
E22HD9X10S
Red
Green
Amber
E22HD2X11T
E22HD3X11T
E22HD9X11T
E22HD2X10T
E22HD3X10T
E22HD9X10T
Red
EM22HD2X11T
EM22HD2X10T
Red
EM22HD2X11S
EM22HD2X10S
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1ECNO Contact Blocks
X
O
O
O
O
X
Black
Red
Green
E22FDB1T
E22FDB2T
E22FDB3T
Plastic Operators — Chrome Bezel
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1LONC Contact Blocks
X
X
X
O
O
O
Black
Red
Green
E22FD1S
E22FD2S
E22FD3S
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull with 1NC and 1ECNO Contact Blocks
X
O
O
O
O
X
Black
Red
Green
E22FD1T
E22FD2T
E22FD3T
Metal Operators — Chrome Bezel
3-Position Momentary Push and Pull — 1NC and 1LONO Contact Block
X
O
O
O
O
X
Red
EM22FD2T
3-Position Momentary Push and Pull — 1NC and IECNC Contact Block
X
X
X
O
O
O
Red
EM22FD2S
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-49
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Components — Non-illuminated Operators
Table 47-56. Non-illuminated Push-Pull Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
E22 Series — Plastic Operators
Color
Black Bezel
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
E22 Black
E22 Chrome
EM22 Chrome
Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
EM22 Series — Metal Operators
Color
Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
2-Position — 40 mm Dia. Button (Maintained)
Red
EM22ED2
E22ED1
E22EDB1
Black
E22ED2
E22EDB2
Red
Green
EM22ED3
E22ED3
E22EDB3
Green
E22ED4
E22EDB4
Yellow
E22ED5
E22EDB5
White
E22ED6
E22EDB6
Blue
E22ED7
E22EDB7
Gray
E22ED8
Orange E22EDB8
3-Position — 40 mm Dia. Button (Spring Return to Center)
Red
EM22FD2
E22FD1
E22FDB1
Black
E22FD2
E22FDB2
Red
Green
EM22FD3
E22FD3
E22FDB3
Green
E22FD4
E22FDB4
Yellow
E22FD5
E22FDB5
White
E22FD6
E22FDB6
Blue
E22FD7
E22FDB7
Gray
E22FD8
Orange E22FDB8
3-Position — 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to Center from Pulled Position)
Red
EM22FDM2
E22FDM1
E22FDMB1
Black
E22FDM2
E22FDMB2
Red
Green
EM22FDM3
E22FDM3
E22FDMB3
Green
E22FDM4
E22FDMB4
Yellow
E22FDM5
E22FDMB5
White
E22FDM6
E22FDMB6
Blue
E22FDM7
E22FDMB7
Gray
E22FDM8
Orange E22FDMB8
These operators can be supplied with EMERGENCY STOP marking (decal) on face ring. To order, add Suffix N8 to operator Catalog Number.
Example: E22ED2N8. With Yellow field, Red letters, add N796.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Contact Block Selection/Application
Push-Pull operators will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks
(4 circuits, 2-position/2 circuits, 3-position). 5-way mounting
adapters can only be used on 2-position Push-Pulls and are
not suitable with 3-position Push-Pulls. See Page 47-77.
Table 47-57. 2-Position Push-Pull
Contact Block Required
Suffix Catalog
Code Number
Circuit
Price
U.S. $
Maintained Circuit Operation
Pulled
E22B1
1NC
X
O
A
E22B2
1NO
O
X
W
E22B11
1NO-1NC
X
O
O
X
V
E22B20
2NO
O
O
X
X
X = Closed Circuit
Contact Block Required
Suffix Catalog
Code Number
Circuit
Price
U.S. $
Maintained Circuit Operation
Pulled
Center
E22B1 and
E22B4
1NC
1NC
X
X
O
X
O
O
T
E22B1 and
E22B5
1NC
1NO
X
O
O
O
O
X
X = Closed Circuit
O = Open Circuit
Note: Add Contact Block Suffix Code from tables above to operator
Catalog Number to order as a complete device.
Example: E22ED1B = 2-position chrome bezel, Black button Push-Pull
with 1NC contact block.
O = Open Circuit
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
Pushed
S
Pushed
B
Table 47-58. 3-Position Push-Pull — E22B2, E22B11 and E22B20 Cannot
Be Used
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-89
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Pages 47-70 – 47-73
Page 47-98
1CD1
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-50
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Components — Illuminated Operators
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks when used with supplied 3-way adapter. 5-way mounting adapters are not to be used with
3-position operators, see Page 47-77.
Table 47-59. Illuminated Push-Pull Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
E22 Series — Plastic Operators
Color
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
E22 Black
E22 Chrome
EM22 Series — Metal Operators
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Color
Price
U.S. $
Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
EM22 Chrome 2-Position — 40 mm Diameter Lens (Maintained)
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22GDB2
E22GDB3
E22GDB4
E22GDB5
E22GDB6
E22GDB9
E22GBD0
E22GD2
E22GD3
E22GD4
E22GD5
E22GD6
E22GD9
E22GD0
Red
Green
Amber
EM22GD2
EM22GD3
EM22GD9
3-Position — 40 mm Diameter Lens (Spring Return to Center)
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E22HDB2
E22HDB3
E22HDB4
E22HDB5
E22HDB6
E22HDB9
E22HDB0
E22HD2
E22HD3
E22HD4
E22HD5
E22HD6
E22HD9
E22HD0
Red
Green
Amber
EM22HD2
EM22HD3
EM22HD9
3-Position — 40 mm Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to Center from Pulled Position)
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
47
E22HDMB2
E22HDMB3
E22HDMB4
E22HDMB5
E22HDMB6
E22HDMB9
E22HDMB0
E22HDM2
E22HDM3
E22HDM4
E22HDM5
E22HDM6
E22HDM9
E22HDM0
Red
Green
Amber
EM22HDM2
EM22HDM3
EM22HDM9
These operators can be supplied with EMERGENCY STOP marking (decal) on face ring. To order, add Suffix N8 to operator Catalog Number.
Example: E22ED2N8. With Yellow field, Red letters, add N796.
All illuminated Push-Pull operators require tall incandescent bulbs or tall LEDs from Table 47-103 or Table 47-104 (Page 47-73).
29.5 mm Diameter Button — For Both Non-illuminated and Illuminated Push-Pull Operators
For Push-Pull operator with 29.5 mm
diameter button, replace 5th digit (D)
of the listed Catalog Number with letter
H. Example: E22EH1, black, nonilluminated 2-position push-pull operator with 29.5 mm diameter button.
29.5 mm Diameter Button Operator
Note: Add Suffix Codes from the tables on
Page 47-69 (Contact Blocks) and Pages 4770 – 47-71 (Light Units) to operator Catalog
Number to order as a complete device.
Example: E22GD2X4B = 2-position chrome
bezel, Red button lens, 24V light unit PushPull with 1NC contact block.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . .
Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-89
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Pages 47-70 – 47-73
Page 47-98
1CD1
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-51
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Selector Switches
Selector Switch Units
■
■
■
■
■
■
45°
45°
Plastic Operators
Black or Chrome Bezel
Two-Position
45° Throw
Knob or Lever
Non-illuminated
Table 47-60. Two-Position Selector Switch Units — 45° Throw — Cam 2 — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator
Action
Operator
Type
Operator Position
Cam — 2
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
OX
XO
OX
XO
XO
OX
OX
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operator — Black Bezel
M
M
M
M
M
S
M
S
Knob
Lever
E22XBF1A
E22VBF1A
E22XBF1C
E22VBF1C
E22XBF1WW
E22VBF1WW
Knob
Lever
E22XB51A
E22VB51A
E22XB51C
E22VB51C
E22XB51WW
E22VB51WW
Knob
Lever
E22XBE1A
E22VBE1A
E22XBE1C
E22VBE1C
E22XBE1WW
E22VBE1WW
Knob
Lever
E22XB61A
E22VB61A
E22XB61C
E22VB61C
E22XB61WW
E22VB61WW
Knob
Lever
E22XF1A
E22VF1A
E22XF1C
E22VF1C
E22XF1WW
E22VF1WW
Knob
Lever
E22X51A
E22V51A
E22X51C
E22V51C
E22X51WW
E22V51WW
Knob
Lever
E22XE1A
E22VE1A
E22XE1C
E22XE1C
E22XE1WW
E22VE1WW
Knob
Lever
E22X61A
E22V61A
E22X61C
E22X61C
E22X61WW
E22V61WW
Plastic Operator — Chrome Bezel
M
M
M
M
M
S
M
S
47
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below.
Example: 2-position operator with Red knob, E22XBF2A
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Black
1
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Gray
7
Orange 8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Code
Page 47-89
Page 47-86
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
1CD1
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-52
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Selector Switches
Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■
■
■
■
■
■
60°
Plastic or Metal Operators
Black or Chrome Bezel
Two-Position
60° Throw
Knob or Lever
Non-illuminated
60°
Table 47-61. Two-Position Selector Switch Units — 60° Throw — Cam 2 — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Operator Position
Type
Operator
Action
Cam — 2
XO
OX
OX
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
OX
XO
OX
XO
OX
OX
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operator — Black Bezel
Knob
Lever
E22XBF61A
E22VBF61A
E22XBF61C
E22VBF61C
—
—
E22XBF61WW
E22VBF61WW
Knob
Lever
E22XB561A
E22VB561A
E22XB561C
E22VB561C
—
—
E22XB561WW
E22VB561WW
Knob
Lever
E22XBE61A
E22VBE61A
E22XBE61C
E22VBE61C
—
—
E22XBE61WW
E22VBE61WW
Knob
Lever
E22XB661A
E22VB661A
E22XB661C
E22VB661C
—
—
E22XB661WW
E22VB661WW
Knob
Lever
E22XF61A
E22VF61A
E22XF61C
E22VF61C
—
—
E22XF61WW
E22VF61WW
Knob
Lever
E22X561A
E22V561A
E22X561C
E22V561C
—
—
E22X561WW
E22V561WW
Knob
Lever
E22XE61A
E22VE61A
E22XE61C
E22VE61C
—
—
E22XE61WW
E22VE61WW
Knob
Lever
E22X661A
E22V661A
E22X661C
E22V661C
—
—
E22X661WW
E22V661WW
M M
Knob
Lever
EM22X561A
EM22V561A
EM22X561C
EM22V561C
EM22X561D
EM22V561D
EM22X561WW
EM22V561WW
M S
Knob
Lever
EM22X661A
EM22V661A
EM22X661C
EM22V661C
EM22X661D
EM22V661D
EM22X661WW
EM22V661WW
M
Knob
Lever
EM22XF61A
EM22VF61A
EM22XF61C
EM22VF61C
EM22XF61D
EM22VF61D
EM22XF61WW
EM22VF61WW
Knob
Lever
EM22XE61A
EM22VE61A
EM22XE61C
EM22VE61C
EM22XE61D
EM22VE61D
EM22XE61WW
EM22VE61WW
M
M
M
M
M
S
M
S
Plastic Operator — Chrome Bezel
M
M
47
M
M
M
S
M
S
Metal Operator — Chrome Bezel
M
M
S
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below.
Example: 2-position operator with Red knob, E22XBF62A
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Black
1
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Gray
7
Orange 8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-86
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-53
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Selector Switches
Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■
■
■
■
■
■
Plastic Operators
Black or Chrome Bezel
Three-Position
45° Throw
Knob or Lever
Non-illuminated
45°
45°
Table 47-62. Three-Position Selector Switch Units — 45° Throw — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator
Action
Operator
Type
Operator Position — Circuit
Cam 1
Cam 2
Cam 3
XOO
OOX
Catalog
Number
XOO
OXO
OOX
XOX
OOX
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operator — Black Bezel
M
M
Knob
Lever
E22XBG1D
E22VBG1D
E22XBH1D
E22VBH1D
E22XBG1RR
E22VBG1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBN1D
E22VBN1D
E22XBP1D
E22VBP1D
E22XBN1RR
E22VBN1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBL1D
E22VBL1D
E22XBM1D
E22VBM1D
E22XBL1RR
E22VBL1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBJ1D
E22VBJ1D
E22XBK1D
E22VBK1D
E22XBJ1RR
E22VBJ1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XG1D
E22VG1D
E22XH1D
E22VH1D
E22XG1RR
E22VG1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XN1D
E22VN1D
E22XP1D
E22VP1D
E22XN1RR
E22VN1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XL1D
E22VL1D
E22XM1D
E22VM1D
E22XL1RR
E22VL1RR
Knob
Lever
E22XJ1D
E22VJ1D
E22XK1D
E22VK1D
E22XJ1RR
E22VJ1RR
M
M
M
S
M
S
S
M
S
M
Plastic Operator — Chrome Bezel
M
M
M
M
M
S
M
S
S
M
S
47
M
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below.
Example: 3-position operator with Red knob, E22XBG2D
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Black
1
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Gray
7
Orange 8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Code
Page 47-89
Page 47-86
Pages 47-74 – 47-78
1CD1
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-54
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Selector Switches
Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■
■
■
■
■
■
Plastic or Metal Operators
Black or Chrome Bezel
Three-Position
60° Throw
Knob or Lever
Non-illuminated
60°
60°
Table 47-63. Three-Position Selector Switch Units — 60° Throw — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator
Action
Operator Position
Operator
Type
Cam 1
Cam 2
Cam 3
XOO
OOX
Catalog
Number
XOO
OXO
OOX
XOX
OOX
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Plastic Operator — Black Bezel
M
M
M
M
M
S
M
S
S
M
S
M
Knob
Lever
E22XBG61D
E22VBG61D
E22XBH61D
E22VBH61D
E22XBG61RR
E22VBG61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBN61D
E22VBN61D
E22XBP61D
E22VBP61D
E22XBN61RR
E22VBN61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBL61D
E22VBL61D
E22XBM61D
E22VBM61D
E22XBL61RR
E22VBL61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XBJ61D
E22VBJ61D
E22XBK61D
E22VBK61D
E22XBJ61RR
E22VBJ61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XG61D
E22VG61D
E22XH61D
E22VH61D
E22XG61RR
E22VG61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XN61D
E22VN61D
E22XP61D
E22VP61D
E22XN61RR
E22VN61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XL61D
E22VL61D
E22XM61D
E22VM61D
E22XL61RR
E22VL61RR
Knob
Lever
E22XJ61D
E22VJ61D
E22XK61D
E22VK61D
E22XJ61RR
E22VJ61RR
Knob
Lever
EM22XG61D
EM22VG61D
EM22XH61D
EM22VH61D
EM22XG61RR
EM22VG61RR
Knob
Lever
EM22XN61D
EM22VN61D
EM22XP61D
EM22VP61D
EM22XN61RR
EM22VN61RR
Knob
Lever
EM22XL61D
EM22VL61D
EM22XM61D
EM22VM61D
EM22XL61RR
EM22VL61RR
Knob
Lever
EM22XJ61D
EM22VJ61D
EM22XK61D
EM22VK61D
EM22XJ61RR
EM22VJ61RR
Plastic Operator — Chrome Bezel
M
M
M
M
M
47
S
M
S
S
M
S
M
Metal Operator — Chrome Bezel
M
M
M
M
M
S
M
S
S
M
S
M
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order with an alternate color, replace underlined digit (1) of listed Catalog Number with Code Number from table below.
Example: 3-position operator with Red knob, E22XBG62D
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Black
1
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Gray
7
Orange 8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-86
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-55
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switches
45° Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — Plastic
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter.
Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits). See Page 47-77.
Table 47-64. 45° Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Left
Black Bezel, Lever
Chrome Bezel, Lever
Center
Cam
Code
Right
Plastic — Black Bezel
Plastic — Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
2-Position — 45° Throw — Black Lever
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22VBF1
E22VB51
E22VF1
E22V51
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22VBE1
E22VB61
E22VE1
E22V61
3-Position — 45° Throw — Black Lever
Black Bezel, Lever
Chrome Bezel, Lever
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22VBG1
E22VBH1
E22VG1
E22VH1
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22VBJ1
E22VBK1
E22VJ1
E22VK1
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22VBL1
E22VBM1
E22VL1
E22VM1
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22VBN1
E22VBP1
E22VN1
E22VP1
2-Position — 45° Throw — Black Knob
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22XBF1
E22XB51
E22XF1
E22X51
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22XBE1
E22XB61
E22XE1
E22X61
3-Position — 45° Throw — Black Knob
47
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22XBG1
E22XBH1
E22XG1
E22XH1
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22XBJ1
E22XBK1
E22XJ1
E22XK1
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22XBL1
E22XBM1
E22XL1
E22XM1
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22XBN1
E22XBP1
E22XN1
E22XP1
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed
Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22VE2 — Two-Position Selector Switch with Red Lever.
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Black
1
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Gray
7
Orange 8
Code
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Non-illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following:
Operator
See Above
Legend Plate
See Page 47-86
Mounting Adapter
(Supplied with Operator).
For 5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Contact Blocks
See Page 47-69
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-56
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switches (Continued)
60° Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter.
Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits). See Page 47-77.
Table 47-65. 60° Throw Non-illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Left
E22 Black Bezel,
Lever
E22 Chrome Bezel,
Lever
EM22 Black
Lever
Center
Cam
Code
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
Black Bezel
Right
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Chrome Bezel
Chrome Bezel
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
2-Position — 60° Throw — Black Lever
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22VBF61
E22VB561
E22VF61
E22V561
EM22VF61
EM22V561
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22VBE61
E22VB661
E22VE61
E22V661
EM22VE61
EM22V661
3-Position — 60° Throw — Black Lever
E22 Black Bezel,
Knob
E22 Chrome Bezel,
Knob
EM22 Black
Knob
47
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22VBG61
E22VBH61
E22VG61
E22VH61
EM22VG61
EM22VH61
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22VBJ61
E22VBK61
E22VJ61
E22VK61
EM22VJ61
EM22VK61
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22VBL61
E22VBM61
E22VL61
E22VM61
EM22VL61
EM22VM61
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22VBN61
E22VBP61
E22VN61
E22VP61
EM22VN61
EM22VP61
2-Position — 60° Throw — Black Knob
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22XBF61
E22XB561
E22XF61
E22X561
EM22XF61
EM22X561
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22XBE61
E22XB661
E22XE61
E22X661
EM22XE61
EM22X661
3-Position — 60° Throw — Black Knob
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22XBG61
E22XBH61
E22XG61
E22XH61
EM22XG61
EM22XH61
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22XBJ61
E22XBK61
E22XJ61
E22XK61
EM22XJ61
EM22XK61
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22XBL61
E22XBM61
E22XL61
E22XM61
EM22XL61
EM22XM61
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22XBN61
E22XBP61
E22XN61
E22XP61
EM22XN61
EM22XP61
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed
Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22VE62 — Two-Position Selector Switch with Red Lever.
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Black
1
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Gray
7
Orange 8
Code
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Non-illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following:
Operator
See Above
Legend Plate
See Page 47-86
Mounting Adapter
(Supplied with Operator).
For 5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Contact Blocks
See Page 47-69
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-57
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Key Operated Selector Switch Components
Selector Switches (Continued)
Key Operated Selector Switches
Note: Key removal from maintained positions only — will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with
supplied 3-way mounting adapter. Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 5 contact blocks (10 circuits).
Table 47-66. Key Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Left
Center
Cam
Code
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
Black Bezel
Right
45°
Catalog
Number
EM22 Series —
Metal Operators
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
45°
Catalog
Number
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
60°
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Allowable
Key
Removal
Positions
2-Position
Plastic
Black
Bezel
M
M
—
—
M
S
2
2
E22KB53
E22KB62
E22K53
E22K62
—
—
1, 2
—
—
—
M
M
M
S
2
2
E22KBF5
E22KBE4
E22KF5
E22KE4
EM22KF65
EM22KE64
1, 4
—
3-Position
Plastic
Chrome
Bezel
Metal
Chrome
Bezel
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22KBG7
E22KBH7
E22KG7
E22KH7
EM22KG67
EM22KH67
1–6
1–6
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22KBJ5
E22KBK5
E22KJ5
E22KK5
EM22KJ65
EM22KK65
1, 4
1, 4
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22KBL4
E22KBM4
E22KL4
E22KM4
EM22KL64
EM22KM64
—
—
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22KBN6
E22KBP6
E22KN6
E22KP6
EM22KN66
EM22KP66
2, 4
2, 4
To order operator with other than standard key removal position(s), select allowable option from table below and change last (underlined)
digit of listed Catalog Number using Suffix Code shown. Example: E22KG66 — Three-Position Selector Switch with key removable from Left and
Center positions.
To order a different key and lock assembly, add suffix B1, C1, D1, E1 or F1 to the end of the Catalog Number.
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Table 47-67. Key Removal Options
Key Removal
Position
Code Key Removal
Suffix Position
Right Only
1
Left Only
2
Right and Left 3
Table 47-68. Spare Keys
Code Key Removal
Suffix Position
Center Only
4
Right and Center 5
Left and Center
6
Right, Left and
Center
Code
Suffix
Description
Reference Number
Stamped on Key
Catalog
Number
7
Standard Lock
92239
E22KS2
Master Key
For 95000 Series Locks
E22KM95
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Price
U.S. $
47
Page 47-89
Page 47-69
Page 47-98
1CD1
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-58
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switches
45° Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — Plastic
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with supplied 3-way mounting adapter.
Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 4 contact blocks (8 circuits).
Table 47-69. 45° Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Left
Black Bezel
Chrome Bezel
Center
Cam
Code
Right
E22 Series — Plastic Operators
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
2-Position — 45° Throw — Red Lever
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22WBF2
E22WB52
E22WF2
E22W52
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22WBE2
E22WB62
E22WE2
E22W62
3-Position — 45° Throw — Red Lever
Black Bezel
Chrome Bezel
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22WBG2
E22WBH2
E22WG2
E22WH2
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22WBJ2
E22WBK2
E22WJ2
E22WK2
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22WBL2
E22WBM2
E22WL2
E22WM2
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22WBN2
E22WBP2
E22WN2
E22WP2
2-Position — 45° Throw — Red Knob
47
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22SBF2
E22SB52
E22SF2
E22S52
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22SBE2
E22SB62
E22SE2
E22S62
3-Position — 45° Throw — Red Knob
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22SBG2
E22SBH2
E22SG2
E22SH2
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22SBJ2
E22SBK2
E22SJ2
E22SK2
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22SBL2
E22SBM2
E22SL2
E22SM2
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22SBN2
E22SBP2
E22SN2
E22SP2
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Red levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed
Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22WF3 — Two-Position Selector Switch with Green Lever.
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Amber
9
Clear
0
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following:
Operator
See Above
Legend Plate
See Page 47-86
Mounting Adapter
(Supplied with
Operator). For
5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Light Unit with Tall
Incandescent
Bulb/LED
See Pages
47-70 – 47-71
Contact
Blocks
See
Page 47-69
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-59
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switches (Continued)
60° Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches
Note: Will accept a maximum of 2 contact blocks (4 circuits) with standard mounting adapter supplied.
Optional 5-way adapter will accept a maximum of 4 contact blocks (8 circuits).
Table 47-70. 60° Throw Illuminated Lever and Knob Operated Selector Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Left
E22 Black
Bezel
E22 Chrome
Bezel
Center
Cam
Code
E22 Series —
Plastic Operators
E2M2 Series —
Metal Operators
Black Bezel
Right
Catalog
Number
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
EM22 Chrome 2-Position — 60° Throw — Red Lever
Bezel
—
M
M
2
E22WBF62
M
—
M
2
E22WB562
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22WBE62
E22WB662
Catalog
Number
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
E22WF62
E22W562
EM22WF62
EM22W562
E22WE62
E22W662
EM22WE62
EM22W662
Price
U.S. $
3-Position — 60° Throw — Red Lever
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22WBG62
E22WBH62
E22WG62
E22WH62
EM22WG62
EM22WH62
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22WBJ62
E22WBK62
E22WJ62
E22WK62
EM22WJ62
EM22WK62
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22WBL62
E22WBM62
E22WL62
E22WM62
EM22WL62
EM22WM62
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22WBN62
E22WBP62
E22WN62
E22WP62
EM22WN62
EM22WP62
2-Position — 60° Throw — Red Knob
—
M
M
—
M
M
2
2
E22SBF62
E22SB562
E22SF62
E22S562
EM22SF62
EM22S562
—
M
M
—
S
S
2
2
E22SBE62
E22SB662
E22SE62
E22S662
EM22SE62
EM22S662
47
3-Position — 60° Throw — Red Knob
M
M
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22SBG62
E22SBH62
E22SG62
E22SH62
EM22SG62
EM22SH62
S
S
M
M
M
M
1
2
E22SBJ62
E22SBK62
E22SJ62
E22SK62
EM22SJ62
EM22SK62
S
S
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22SBL62
E22SBM62
E22SL62
E22SM62
EM22SL62
EM22SM62
M
M
M
M
S
S
1
2
E22SBN62
E22SBP62
E22SN62
E22SP62
EM22SN62
EM22SP62
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Red levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit (underlined) in the listed
Catalog Number using Code Number from following table. Example: E22WF63 — Two-Position Selector Switch with Green Lever.
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Amber
9
Clear
0
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Ordering Example — A complete Illuminated Selector Switch consists of the following:
Operator
See Above
Legend Plate
See Page 47-86
Mounting Adapter
(Supplied with
Operator). For
5-Way Adapter,
See Page 47-77
Light Unit with Tall
Incandescent
Bulb/LED
See Pages
47-70 – 47-71
Contact
Blocks
See
Page 47-69
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-89
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-74 – 47-78
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-60
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection — For 2- and 3-Position Selector Switches
Table 47-71. 2-Position Switches
1. Develop a line circuit diagram
required for each application. Then,
by using the symbols “X” for contact
closed and “O” for contact open,
determine the contact state required
in each selector switch position.
2. Visually locate the closure
sequence in one of the 2- or 3Position Selector Switch Combination tables on Pages 47-60 – 47-61.
3. Find the contact block(s), their Suffix
Code letter(s) and their mounting
location(s) required for that circuit
configuration, by referring to the
table next to the “X O” closure
sequence that was selected.
Example: HAND-OFF-AUTO function,
two circuits are required —
Circuit #1 — X O O
This can be achieved using Cam 1 with
an E22B2 contact block mounted in the
left (1-) position.
Circuit #2 — O O X
This can be achieved using Cam 1 with
an E22B2 block mounted in the right
(2-) position.
Order a 3-Position Selector Switch
with Cam #1 —
Example: E22VG1, along with 2 E22B2
Contact Blocks.
Note: Contact Blocks must be mounted in
position indicated. Selector switches will
not accept a contact block in position 3 of
the mounting adapter. If more circuits and/or
different circuit arrangements are required,
see Rotary Cam Selector Switches listed on
Pages 47-62 – 47-63 and 47-95 – 47-96.
3
2
1
1-
3-
5
25-
1-
4
2
3
1
3-
2-
4-
47
1- 2- 3- Contact Block Mounting
Position Numbers Molded in
3-Way Mounting Adapter
Circuit
Cam
Catalog Number of
Contact Block(s)/
Mounting Position
O
X
2
E22B2 or E22B2
A
X
O
2
E22B1 or E22B1
B
O
X
X
O
2
E22B11
—
W
O
X
X
O
2
E22B2
E22B1
C
O
O
X
X
2
E22B20
—
V
O
O
X
X
2
E22B2
E22B2
D
X
X
O
O
2
E22B1
E22B1
E
O
O
O
X
X
X
2
E22B20
E22B2
VA
X
O
X
O
X
O
2
E22B1
E22B11
WB
X
O
O
O
X
X
2
E22B1
E22B20
VB
O
X
O
X
O
X
2
E22B11
E22B2
WA
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
2
E22B20
E22B20
VV
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
2
E22B20
E22B11
VW
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
2
E22B11
E22B11
WW
1&5
Code
Suffix
2&4
5- 1- 3- 2- 4- Contact Block
Mounting Position Numbers
Molded in 5-Way Mounting
Adapter, See Accessories for
5-Way Adapter — Page 47-72
Figure 47-16. Contact Block Mounting
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-61
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection (Continued)
Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches
Circuit
Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches (Continued)
Cam Catalog Number
Code
of Contact Block(s) Suffix
Mounting Position
1&5
Cam Catalog Number
Code
of Contact Block(s) Suffix
Mounting Position
2&4
X
O
O
1
E22B2
—
A
O
O
X
1
—
E22B2
A
O
X
X
1
E22B1
—
B
X
X
O
1
—
E22B1
B
X
O
X
2
E22B2
—
A
O
X
O
2
E22B1
—
B
O
O
X
2
—
E22B2
A
X
X
O
2
—
E22B1
B
X
O
O
O
O
X
1
E22B2
E22B2
D
X
X
O
X
O
O
1
E22B2
E22B1
C
O
O
X
O
X
X
1
E22B1
E22B2
C
O
X
X
X
X
O
1
E22B1
E22B1
E
X
O
O
X
O
X
1
E22B11
—
W
X
X
O
O
O
O
1
E22B20
—
V
O
X
O
X
X
O
1
—
E22B11
W
O
O
O
O
X
X
1
—
E22B20
V
X
O
O
X
O
O
1
E22B11
E22B1
PP
X
O
O
O
X
X
2
E22B2
E22B2
D
X
X
O
X
X
O
2
E22B2
E22B1
C
O
O
X
O
O
X
2
E22B1
E22B2
C
O
X
X
X
O
O
2
E22B1
E22B1
E
X
O
O
X
X
O
2
E22B11
—
W
X
X
O
O
X
X
2
E22B20
—
V
O
X
O
X
X
O
2
E22B11
—
W
O
O
O
O
X
X
2
—
E22B20
V
CA08102001E
Circuit
1&5
2&4
Table 47-72. 3-Position Switches (Continued)
Circuit
Cam Catalog Number
Code
of Contact Block(s) Suffix
Mounting Position
1&5
2&4
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
1
E22B2
E22B11
WA
X
O
X
O
X
X
X
O
O
2
E22B11
E22B1
WB
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
1
E22B2
E22B20
VA
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
2
E22B20
E22B1
VB
O
O
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
1
E22B1
E22B11
WB
E22B11
WW
X
X
X
1
E22B1
E22B20
VB
O
X
X
O
E22B11
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
1
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
E22B20
VW
O
X
X
1
E22B11
E22B2
WA
O
X
X
X
E22B11
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
1
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
VW
1
E22B20
E22B2
VA
O
O
X
O
E22B11
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
E22B20
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
1
X
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
1
E22B11
E22B1
WB
E22B20
VV
O
O
O
1
E22B20
E22B1
VB
O
O
X
X
E22B20
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
1
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
E22B11
WW
O
O
X
1
E22B11
E22B11
RR
X
O
X
O
E22B11
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
2
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
VW
2
E22B2
E22B11
WA
X
O
X
X
E22B20
X
X
O
O
X
O
O
E22B11
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
2
X
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
2
E22B2
E22B20
VA
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
2
E22B20
E22B11
VW
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
X
O
2
E22B1
E22B11
WB
X
O
O
O
X
X
2
E22B1
E22B20
VB
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
2
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
2
E22B11
E22B2
WA
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
2
E22B20
E22B2
VA
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
E22B20
E22B20
VV
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-62
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units
Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units
■
■
■
Plastic Operator
Black or Chrome Bezel
■
■
Four- to Six-Position
Knob, Lever or Key Version
Non-illuminated
Table 47-73. Four- to Six-Position Selector Switch Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact block rating, see Page Terminal Contact Sequence
47-95. Includes contact blocks. Numbers O = Circuit Open;
Components overpacked in a
X = Circuit Closed
single carton.
Switch Position Operator
(45° Throw
Type
Between Each
Position —
Except as Noted)
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Four-Position Maintained
0
Terminal Locations
Top View
1
2
3
4
1-2
5-6
7-8
3-4
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
1-2
5-6
3-4
7-8
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
1-2
5-6
3-4
(60° Throw)
2
1
1
0
Lever
Knob
E22JDBN1
E22LDBN1
E22JDN1
E22LDN1
4
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB4W1
E22LDB4W1
E22KDB4W8
E22JD4W1
E22LD4W1
E22KD4W8
3
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB4Y1
E22LDB4Y1
E22KDB4Y8
E22JD4Y1
E22LD4Y1
E22KD4Y8
4
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB5W1
E22LDB5W1
E22KDB5W8
E22JD5W1
E22LD5W1
E22KD5W8
4
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB5Y1
E22LDB5Y1
E22KDB5Y8
E22JD5Y1
E22LD5Y1
E22KD5Y8
5
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB6W1
E22LDB6W1
E22KDB6W8
E22JD6W1
E22LD6W1
E22KD6W8
4
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB6Y1
E22LDB6Y1
E22KDB6Y8
E22JD6Y1
E22LD6Y1
E22KD6Y8
3
2
1
4
3
2
Five-Position Maintained
0
2
6
10
1-2
5-6
9 - 10
7-8
3-4
1
5
9
O
O
O
O
1-2
5-6
3-4
7-8
Bottom View
1
2
3
4
5
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
2
1
1
0
3
5
2
3
Six-Position Maintained
47
0
3
7
11
4
8
12
1-2
5-6
9 - 10
11 - 12
3-4
7-8
O
O
O
O
O
1-2
5-6
7-8
9 - 10
3-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
X
2
1
3
4
6
1
0
2
3
5
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit in the listed Catalog Number
using Code Number from following table. Example: E22LDN2 — four-position selector switch with Red knob.
Key removable in all maintained positions (no alternates).
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Black
1
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Gray
7
Orange 8
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Block Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Custom Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates and Dimensions . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Code
Page 47-89
Page 47-95
Page 47-96
Page 47-86
1CD1
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-63
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units
Rotary Cam Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■
Plastic Operators
Black or Chrome Bezel
■ Seven- and Eight-Position
■ Knob, Lever or Key Version
■ Non-illuminated
■
Table 47-74. Seven- and Eight-Position Selector Switch Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact block ratings,
Terminal Contact Sequence
see Page 47-95. Includes Numbers O = Circuit Open;
contact blocks.
X = Circuit Closed
Components overpacked
in a single carton.
Switch Position Operator
(45° Lever Throw Type
Between Each
Position)
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
Chrome Bezel
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
Seven-Position Maintained
0
1-2
5-6
9 - 10
13 - 14
3-4
7-8
11 - 12
O
O
O
O
O
O
1-2
5-6
9 - 10
11 - 12
3-4
7-8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
2
1
3
5
7
1
0
4
2
E22JDB7W1
E22LDB7W1
E22KDB7W8
E22JD7W1
E22LD7W1
E22KD7W8
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB7Y1
E22LDB7Y1
E22KDB7Y8
E22JD7Y1
E22LD7Y1
E22KD7Y8
Lever
Knob
Key
E22JDB8W1
E22LDB8W1
E22KDB8W8
E22JD8W1
E22LD8W1
E22KD8W8
6
3
4
6
Lever
Knob
Key
5
Eight-Position Maintained
0
1-2
5-6
9 - 10
13 - 14
3-4
7-8
11 - 12
15 - 16
1-2
5-6
9 - 10
13 - 14
3-4
7-8
11 - 12
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
2
1
8
3
4
5
7
6
47
1
0
7
2
3
4
6
E22JD8Y1
E22LD8Y1
E22KD8Y8
E22JDB8Y1
E22LDB8Y1
E22KDB8Y8
Lever
Knob
Key
5
Listed selector switches are supplied as standard with Black levers or knobs. To select an alternate color, change the last digit in the listed Catalog Number
using Code Number from following table. Example: E22LDN2 — four-position selector switch with Red knob.
Key removable in all maintained positions (no alternates).
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Color
Code
Black
1
Red
2
Green
3
Yellow
4
White
5
Blue
6
Gray
7
Orange 8
Contact Block Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-95
Custom Ordering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-96
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-64
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Specialty Operators
Specialty Operators
Table 47-75. Potentiometers with Knob Operator — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Ohms
0.5 Watt Max./120V Max.
E22 Plastic —
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
Order Legend
Plate from
Below
2 Watt Max./120V Max.
E22 Plastic —
Chrome Bezel
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
EM22 Metal —
Chrome Bezel
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
E22 Plastic —
Black Bezel
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
E22 Plastic —
Chrome Bezel
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
EM22 Metal —
Chrome Bezel
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
1,000
2,500
5,000
E22PXB1C1
E22PXB1C2
E22PXB1C5
E22PX1C1
E22PX1C2
E22PX1C5
EM22PX1C1
EM22PX1C2
EM22PX1C5
E22PXB1F1
E22PXB1F2
E22PXB1F5
E22PX1F1
E22PX1F2
E22PX1F5
EM22PX1F1
EM22PX1F2
EM22PX1F5
10,000
25,000
50,000
E22PXB1C10
E22PXB1C25
E22PXB1C50
E22PX1C10
E22PX1C25
E22PX1C50
EM22PX1C10
EM22PX1C25
EM22PX1C50
E22PXB1F10
E22PXB1F25
E22PXB1F50
E22PX1F10
E22PX1F25
E22PX1F50
EM22PX1F10
EM22PX1F25
EM22PX1F50
E22PX1C0
EM22PX1C0
E22PXB1F0
E22PX1F0
EM22PX1F0
Operator E22PXB1C0
Only
Potentiometers are not IP1X or IP2X rated.
Table 47-76. Potentiometer Legend Plate
4
5
6
3
7
1
9
2
Description
Catalog
Number
Potentiometer
Legend Plate
E22NJP99
Price
U.S. $
8
0
10
Table 47-77. Flush Pushbutton Operators with Mechanical Push Rod — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Description
Color
Plastic —
Black Bezel
Catalog
Number
25 mm Diameter Flush Pushbutton
Operators supplied with Mechanical Push Rod —
Suitable for external mechanical reset of overload relays.
Push rod must be cut to desired length.
47
Gray
Blue
Red
Blue (RESET)
Plastic —
Chrome Bezel
Price
U.S. $
E22PB7L
E22PB6L
E22PB2L
E22PB6N29L
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22P7L
E22P6L
E22P2L
E22P6N29L
Table 47-78. Wobble Stick Operator — UL (NEMA) 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Description
Catalog
Number
E22 Series
E22 Series — Plastic Wobble Stick — Allows activation of
controls by pushing stick in any direction.
E22WS
EM22 Series
EM22 Series — Metal Wobble Stick — Allows activation of
controls by pushing stick in any direction.
EM22WS
Price
U.S. $
Note: For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-89
Page 47-69
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Pages 47-79 – 47-85
Page 47-98
1CD1
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-65
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Double Headed Pushbutton Components
Double Headed Pushbuttons
Table 47-79. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 1; IP40
Description
Operator Colors
Marking
Plastic — Black Bezel
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Non-illuminated
Double Headed
Pushbutton
Non-illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with 1NO and 1NC
Contact Block
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens
Green — Red
Green — Red
Unmarked
I
E22DB1A11
E22DB1A21
Green — Red
Green — Red
Unmarked
I
E22DB1A11C
E22DB1A21C
Green — Red
Unmarked
E22DB1A10
Green — Red
Green — Red
Green — Red
I
Unmarked
I
E22DB1A20
E22DB1A10X11
E22DB1A20X11
Green — Red
Green — Red
Unmarked
I
E22DB1A10X11C
E22DB1A20X11C
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens,
and 120V Transformer Light
Unit
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens,
120V Transformer Light Unit
and 1NO and 1NC Contact Block
Dimensions
C
A
B
Clear
Boot
For lens colors other than clear, replace the 0 above with the appropriate Color Code from Table 47-83 on Page 47-66.
For light units other than 120V transformer, replace the X11 code above with the appropriate Suffix from Table 47-81 on Page 47-66.
Table 47-80. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Double Headed Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13; IP65
Description
Operator Colors
Marking
Plastic — Black Bezel
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Non-illuminated
Double Headed
Pushbutton
Non-illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with 1NO and 1NC
Contact Block
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens
Green — Red
Green — Red
Unmarked
O
E22DB1B11
E22DB1B21
Green — Red
Green — Red
Unmarked
O
E22DB1B11C
E22DB1B21C
Green — Red
Green — Red
Green — Red
Green — Red
Unmarked
O
Unmarked
O
E22DB1B10
E22DB1B20
E22DB1B10X11
E22DB1B20X11
Green — Red
Green — Red
Unmarked
O
E22DB1B10X11C
E22DB1B20X11C
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens,
and 120V Transformer Light Unit
Illuminated Double Headed
Pushbutton with Clear Lens,
120V Transformer Light Unit
and 1NO and 1NC Contact Block
Dimensions
C
47
A
B
Clear
Boot
For lens colors other than clear, replace the 0 above with the appropriate Color Code from Table 47-83 on Page 47-66.
For light units other than 120V transformer, replace the X11 code above with the appropriate Suffix from Table 47-81 on Page 47-66.
IP65 or UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 versions include protective silicon boot E22DBB.
Note: Add Contact Block Suffix from table on Page 47-98 to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example: E22DB1A11B =
non-illuminated double headed pushbutton, unmarked, IP40 with 1NC contact block.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-69
Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Page 47-98
1CD1
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-66
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Double Headed Pushbutton Components
Double Headed Pushbuttons (Continued)
Table 47-81. Light Unit
Description
Direct Voltage Unit AC/DC
Without Lamp
Without Lamp
With 6V Lamp
With 12V Lamp
With 24V Lamp
With 48V Lamp
With 60V Lamp
Resistor Type Unit AC/DC
120V/60 Hz
Transformer Unit AC Only
120V/60 Hz
240V/60 Hz
480V/60 Hz
Silicon Boot for IP65 Ingress Protection
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
X1
X1
X2
X3
X4
X6
X7
E22D
E22DE
E22D6
E22D12
E22D24
E22D50
E22D60
X10
E22R2
X11
X12
X14
—
E22TL1
E22TL2
E22TL4
E22DBB
Price
U.S. $
Additional light units — See Pages 47-70 – 47-71.
Table 47-82. Light Unit Specifications
Catalog Number
Function
Bulb Type
Max. Voltage
E22D
Indicating Light
Illuminated Operator
Illuminated Operator
Incandescent, LED or Neon
Incandescent
LED or Neon
250V
60V
120V
E22DE
Table 47-83. Lens Color
Table 47-84. Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Lens Color
Color Code
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
0
2
3
4
5
6
9
Dimension A
Dimension B
Dimension C
With Boot
Without Boot
1.19 (30.2)
2.28 (57.9)
0.68 (17.3)
1.11 (28.2)
2.20 (55.9)
0.48 (12.2)
47
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-87 – 47-88
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-67
January 2010
EM22 Series, Complete Devices — Joystick Units
Joystick Complete Devices
Momentary and Maintained Joystick Switches
Table 47-85. Joystick Switches — UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Position
Description
Catalog
Number
2-Position
Momentary Joystick Switch
Momentary Joystick Switch with Center Lock
EM22JS2Y2X
EM22JS2Y4X
Maintained Joystick Switch
Maintained Joystick Switch with Center Lock
EM22JS2Y3X
EM22JS2Y5X
Momentary Joystick Switch
Momentary Joystick Switch with Center Lock
EM22JS4Y2X
EM22JS4Y4X
Maintained Joystick Switch
Maintained Joystick Switch with Center Lock
EM22JS4Y3X
EM22JS4Y5X
4-Position
Price
U.S. $
Note: Dimensions are listed on Page 47-89.
Table 47-86. Visual Aid Plates
Description
Catalog
Number
70 mm Diameter Oval — Black (Blank)
70 mm Diameter Oval — Black with 2 Arrows
E22VA20
70 mm Diameter Round — Black (Blank)
E22VA30
70 mm Diameter Round — Black with 2 Arrows
E22VA31
70 mm Diameter Round — Black with 4 Arrows
E22VA32
Price
U.S. $
E22VA21
Table 47-87. Contact Sequence for Two-Position Joystick
Contact Blocks
Circuit
14
24
13
23
Joystick Operator Position
(X = Closed, O = Open)
Location
Term No.
Up
Center
Down
NO
Top
14 – 13
O
O
X
NO
Bottom
24 – 23
X
O
O
Table 47-88. Contact Sequence for Four-Position Joystick
Contact Blocks
14
24
13
23
34
44
33
43
Joystick Operator Position
(X = Closed, O = Open)
Left
Center
Down
47
Circuit
Position
Location
Term No. Up
NO
Front
Top
14 – 13
O
O
O
X
Right
NO
Front
Bottom
24 – 23
O
O
O
O
X
NO
Back
Top
34 – 33
X
O
O
O
O
NO
Back
Bottom
44 – 43
O
X
O
O
O
O
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-68
January 2010
EM22 Series — Joystick Components
EM22 Series, Joystick Components
Momentary and Maintained Joystick Operators
Table 47-89. Joystick Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Position
Description
Catalog
Number
2-Position
Momentary Joystick Operator
Momentary Joystick Operator with Center Lock
EM22JS2Y2
EM22JS2Y4
Maintained Joystick Operator
Maintained Joystick Operator with Center Lock
EM22JS2Y3
EM22JS2Y5
Momentary Joystick Operator
Momentary Joystick Operator with Center Lock
EM22JS4Y2
EM22JS4Y4
Maintained Joystick Operator
Maintained Joystick Operator with Center Lock
EM22JS4Y3
EM22JS4Y5
Price
U.S. $
Standard
4-Position
with Center Lock
Note: Dimensions are listed on Page 47-89. For Rear of Panel Extensions, see Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Contact Block Selection/Application
Table 47-90. Joystick Operators
Position
Description
Circuit
Catalog
Number
2-Position
Joystick Contact Block Assembly
2NO
EM22JS2Y1
4-Position
Joystick Contact Block Assembly
4NO
EM22JS4Y1
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-91. Contact Sequence for Two-Position Joystick
Contact Blocks
47
14
24
13
23
Joystick Operator Position
(X = Closed, O = Open)
Circuit
Location
Term No.
Up
Center
Down
NO
Top
14 – 13
O
O
X
NO
Bottom
24 – 23
X
O
O
Table 47-92. Contact Sequence for Four-Position Joystick
Contact Blocks
14
24
13
23
34
44
33
43
Joystick Operator Position
(X = Closed, O = Open)
Circuit
Position
Location
Term No. Up
Left
Center
Down
Right
NO
Front
Top
14 – 13
O
O
O
X
NO
Front
Bottom
24 – 23
O
O
O
O
X
NO
Back
Top
34 – 33
X
O
O
O
O
NO
Back
Bottom
44 – 43
O
X
O
O
O
O
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-69
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks
Table 47-93. Contact Blocks
Description
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
1NC
1NO
1NO Early Make
1NC Late Break
1NC (Logic)
1NO (Logic)
1NC Added Spring Pressure
B
A
—
—
—
—
—
E22B1
E22B2
E22B3
E22B4
E22B1E
E22B2E
E22BR1
1NO-1NC
2NO
W
V
E22B11
E22B20
Price
U.S. $
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.42
(36)
1.26
(32)
0.39
(10)
1.57
(40)
1.89
(48)
1 Self Monitoring 1NC
—
Dual
Circuit
0.39
(10)
E22CB1M
1.57
(40)
1.89
(48)
Single
Circuit
0.39
(10)
Add Suffix to operator Catalog Number to order as a complete device. Example E22PB1B = Flush Black pushbutton with 1NC contact block.
E22B4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapter.
For low voltage applications.
Marked with Direct Opening Action (DOA) Symbol
per IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6).
For use with Trigger Action Emergency Stop (E22LTA2) Operators.
Direct Opening Action (DOA) for IEC 60947-5-1 (Annex K) and NEMA ICS 5 (Part 6) Compliance
Table 47-94. Mechanical Operating Parameters of Operators with E22B1 and E22B11 (NC Contacts Only)
DOA
Operating
Parameters
Latching Trigger Pushbuttons
Action E-Stop
2-Position
Push-Pull
3-Position
Push-Pull
Key, Lever and Knob
Selector Switches
E-Stop E-Stop 25 mm 25 mm Mush- Mush+
+
+
+
room room
E22B1 E22B11 E22B1 E22B11 +
+
E22B1 E22B11
2-Pos.
PushPull +
E22B1
2-Pos. Push Push
Pull
Pull
Push+
+
+
+
Pull +
E22B1 E22B11 E22B1 E22B11
E22B11
Spring
Return
+
E22B1
Spring
Return
+
E22B11
Maintained
+
E22B1
Maintained
+
E22B11
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
Min. Travel 0.24
to Open
(6.1)
Contact —
Inches (mm)
0.24
(6.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
0.08
(2.1)
Min. Force
to Open
Contact —
lb (N)
5.00
(22.24)
0.74
(3.27)
0.90
(4.00)
0.84
(3.74)
1.00
(4.45)
0
0
0
0
2.09
(9.31)
2.25
(10.02)
3.01
3.17
(13.37) (14.08)
0.29
(1.29)
0.45
(2.00)
0.30
(1.34)
0.46
(2.05)
0.29
(7.4)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
0.23
(5.8)
5.00
(22.24)
Total
0.29
Travel —
(7.4)
Inches (mm)
0.08
(2.1)
0.23
(5.8)
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-70
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components
Light Units and Lamps
E22 light units consist of two versions
— standard size LED lamps and tall LED
lamps. Select the standard LED light
units for all indicating lights, illuminated
pushbuttons, push-push (alternate
action) or double-headed pushbutton
operators. Select the tall LED light units
for all illuminated selector switches and
push-pull operators.
LED Light Units
Table 47-95. LED Light Units — Includes a T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base LED
Type
Supply
Voltage
LED Color
Suffix
Code
Standard LED
Catalog
Number
Tall LED
Catalog
Number
Full Voltage
Unit without Lamp
6V – 12V
AC/DC
—
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
White
Orange
X1
X37
X38
X39
X51
X89
X94
X40
X41
X42
X52
X90
X95
X53
X54
X55
X56
X91
X87
X57
X58
X59
X60
X97
X98
X43
X44
X45
X61
X92
X96
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
E22DE
E22DL612R
E22DL612G
E22DL612Y
E22DL612B
E22DL612W
E22DL612O
E22DL24R
E22DL24G
E22DL24Y
E22DL24B
E22DL24W
E22DL24O
E22DL48R
E22DL48G
E22DL48Y
E22DL48B
E22DL48W
E22DL48O
E22DL60R
E22DL60G
E22DL60Y
E22DL60B
E22DL60W
E22DL60O
E22DL120R
E22DL120G
E22DL120Y
E22DL120B
E22DL120W
E22DL120O
E22TL1LR
E22TL1LG
E22TL1LY
E22TL1LB
E22TL1LW
E22TL1LO
E22TL2LR
E22TL2LG
E22TL2LY
E22TL2LB
E22TL2LW
E22TL2LO
E22TL4LR
E22TL4LG
E22TL4LY
E22TL4LB
E22TL4LW
E22TL4LO
E22DE
E22DLT612R
E22DLT612G
E22DLT612Y
E22DLT612B
E22DLT612W
E22DLT612O
E22DLT24R
E22DLT24G
E22DLT24Y
E22DLT24B
E22DLT24W
E22DLT24O
E22DLT48R
E22DLT48G
E22DLT48Y
E22DLT48B
E22DLT48W
E22DLT48O
E22DLT60R
E22DLT60G
E22DLT60Y
E22DLT60B
E22DLT60W
E22DLT60O
E22DLT120R
E22DLT120G
E22DLT120Y
E22DLT120B
E22DLT120W
E22DLT120O
E22TL1TLR
E22TL1TLG
E22TL1TLY
E22TL1TLB
E22TL1TLW
E22TL1TLO
E22TL2TLR
E22TL2TLG
E22TL2TLY
E22TL2TLB
E22TL2TLW
E22TL2TLO
E22TL4TLR
E22TL4TLG
E22TL4TLY
E22TL4TLB
E22TL4TLW
E22TL4TLO
24V
AC/DC
Tall LED Light Unit
48V
AC/DC
60V
AC/DC
120V
AC/DC
Standard LED Light Unit
47
Transformer
AC Only
120V
240V
Transformer Light Unit
with Tall LED
480V
Price
US $
Select standard or tall LED based on Table 47-96.
Table 47-96. LED and Bulb Type Selection Chart
Illuminated Operator Type
Standard LED or Bulb
Tall LED or Bulb
Double-Headed Pushbuttons
✓
—
Indicating Lights
✓
—
Pushbuttons
✓
—
Push-Pull Operators
—
✓
Push-Push Pushbuttons
✓
—
Selector Switches
—
✓
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-71
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components
Light Units and Lamps (Continued)
double-headed pushbutton operators.
Select the tall bulb light units for all illuminated selector switches and pushpull operators.
E22 light units consist of two versions
— with standard bulb or with tall bulbs.
Select the standard bulb light units for
all indicating lights, illuminated pushbuttons, push-push (alternate action) or
Caution: Please note that 120V full voltage
light units (E22D120) are only suitable for
indicating light operators and will overheat in
other operators.
Incandescent Light Units
Table 47-97. Incandescent Light Units — Includes a T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Lamp (except when noted)
Type
Supply Voltage
50/60 Hz
Lamp
Voltage
Suffix
Code
Standard Bulb
Catalog
Number
Tall Bulb
Catalog
Number
Full Voltage
AC/DC
Unit without Lamp
6
12
24
48
60
120
120
—
6
12
24
48
60
120
60
X1
X2
X3
X4
X6
X7
X8
X10
E22D
E22D6
E22D12
E22D24
E22D50
E22D60
E22D120
E22R2
E22D
E22DT6
E22DT12
E22DT24
E22DT50
E22DT60
—
E22RT2
6
6
6
6
X11
X12
X13
X14
E22TL1
E22TL2
E22TL3
E22TL4
E22TL1T
E22TL2T
E22TL3T
E22TL4T
Resistor
AC/DC
Transformer
AC Only
120
240
380/415
480
Select standard or tall bulb based on Table 47-98.
E22D120 light units are suitable for indicating light operators only.
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-98. LED and Bulb Type Selection Chart
Illuminated Operator Type
Standard LED or Bulb
Tall LED or Bulb
Double-Headed Pushbuttons
✓
—
Indicating Lights
✓
—
Pushbuttons
✓
—
Push-Pull Operators
—
✓
Push-Push Pushbuttons
✓
—
Selector Switches
—
✓
47
Table 47-99. PresTest Units — Includes Pre-wired 1NO-1NC Contact Blocks
Type
Supply Voltage
50/60 Hz
Full Voltage
AC/DC
Resistor
AC/DC
Transformer
AC Only
Unit without Lamp
24
120
120
240
380/415
480
Select standard or tall bulb based on Table 47-98.
Light
Suffix
Code
Standard Bulb
Catalog
Number
—
24
60
X17
X20
X26
E22D0C
E22D24C
E22R2C
E22D0C
E22DT24C
E22RT2C
6
6
6
6
X27
X28
X29
X30
E22TL1C
E22TL2C
E22TL3C
E22TL4C
E22TLT1C
E22TLT2C
E22TLT3C
E22TLT4C
Lamp
Voltage
Tall Bulb
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-100. Master Packed Contact Blocks and Light Units
Description
Catalog
Number
Contact Blocks or Light Units Master Packed in Quantities of 100 Only —
Contact Block 1NC (Available singly in Catalog as E22B1)
Contact Block 1NO (Available singly in Catalog as E22B2)
Light Unit without Lamp Full Voltage (Available singly in Catalog as E22D)
Light Unit Resistor Type 120V 60 Hz (Available singly in Catalog as E22R2)
Light Unit Transformer Type 120V 60 Hz (Available singly in Catalog as E22TL1)
Price
U.S. $
E22AA6
E22AA7
E22AA12
E22AA24
E22AA11
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-69
Suffix Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-98
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-72
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components
Replacement LEDs and Bulbs — Standard Size
Table 47-101. Replacement LEDs for Indicating Lights, Illuminated Pushbuttons, Illuminated Push-Push Operators and Double-Headed Pushbuttons
Voltage
Color
Continuous
AC/DC
Catalog
Number
6V – 12V
AC
DC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED612RN
E22LED612ON
E22LED612YN
E22LED612GN
E22LED612BN
E22LED612WN
E22LED006RAF
E22LED006OAF
E22LED006YAF
E22LED006GAF
E22LED006BAF
E22LED006WAF
E22LED006RDF
E22LED006ODF
E22LED006YDF
E22LED006GDF
E22LED006BDF
E22LED006WDF
24V
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED024RN
E22LED024ON
E22LED024YN
E22LED024GN
E22LED024BN
E22LED024WN
E22LED024RAF
E22LED024OAF
E22LED024YAF
E22LED024GAF
E22LED024BAF
E22LED024WAF
E22LED024RDF
E22LED024ODF
E22LED024YDF
E22LED024GDF
E22LED024BDF
E22LED024WDF
48V
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED048RN
E22LED048ON
E22LED048YN
E22LED048GN
E22LED048BN
E22LED048WN
E22LED048RAF
E22LED048OAF
E22LED048YAF
E22LED048GAF
E22LED048BAF
E22LED048WAF
E22LED048RDF
E22LED048ODF
E22LED048YDF
E22LED048GDF
E22LED048BDF
E22LED048WDF
60V
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED060RN
E22LED060ON
E22LED060YN
E22LED060GN
E22LED060BN
E22LED060WN
E22LED060RAF
E22LED060OAF
E22LED060YAF
E22LED060GAF
E22LED060BAF
E22LED060WAF
E22LED060RDF
E22LED060ODF
E22LED060YDF
E22LED060GDF
E22LED060BDF
E22LED060WDF
120V
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RN
E22LED120ON
E22LED120YN
E22LED120GN
E22LED120BN
E22LED120WN
E22LED120RAF
E22LED120OAF
E22LED120YAF
E22LED120GAF
E22LED120BAF
E22LED120WAF
E22LED120RDF
E22LED120ODF
E22LED120YDF
E22LED120GDF
E22LED120BDF
E22LED120WDF
Standard
LED Lamp
47
Flashing
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-102. Replacement Bulbs — T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Type for Indicating Lights, Illuminated Pushbuttons, Illuminated Push-Push
Operators and Double-Headed Pushbuttons
Description
Mfg. Part Number
Operating Voltage (V)/
Wattage (W)
Catalog
Number
#755
#756
#1819
W1225
W1226
W1121
6V (0.9W)
12V (1.2W)
24V (1.2W)
48/50V (1.0W)
60V (1.2W)
120V (2.4W)
28-2202
28-5184
28-2468-24
28-2468-19
28-2468-20
28-2468-7
NE51H-R22
NE51H-R68
120 (0.3W)
240 (0.6W)
28-3754
28-3755
Price
U.S. $
Standard Incandescent Bulb
Neon
Neon bulbs are suitable for use in indicating lights only. Not to be used with any operator.
Note: See Page 47-73 for Replacement LEDs and bulbs for Push-Pulls and selector switches.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-73
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Illuminated Components
Replacement LEDs and Bulbs — Tall Size
Table 47-103. Replacement Tall LEDs for Illuminated Selector Switches and Push-Pull Operators ONLY
Voltage
6V – 12V
24V
48V
60V
Tall LED Lamp
120V
Color
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
Continuous
AC/DC
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E22LEDT612RN
E22LEDT612ON
E22LEDT612YN
E22LEDT612GN
E22LEDT612BN
E22LEDT612WN
E22LEDT024RN
E22LEDT024ON
E22LEDT024YN
E22LEDT024GN
E22LEDT024BN
E22LEDT024WN
E22LEDT048RN
E22LEDT048ON
E22LEDT048YN
E22LEDT048GN
E22LEDT048BN
E22LEDT048WN
E22LEDT060RN
E22LEDT060ON
E22LEDT060YN
E22LEDT060GN
E22LEDT060BN
E22LEDT060WN
E22LEDT120RN
E22LEDT120ON
E22LEDT120YN
E22LEDT120GN
E22LEDT120BN
E22LEDT120WN
Flashing
AC
Catalog
Number
DC
Catalog
Number
E22LEDT006RAF
E22LEDT006OAF
E22LEDT006YAF
E22LEDT006GAF
E22LEDT006BAF
E22LEDT006WAF
E22LEDT024RAF
E22LEDT024OAF
E22LEDT024YAF
E22LEDT024GAF
E22LEDT024BAF
E22LEDT024WAF
E22LEDT048RAF
E22LEDT048OAF
E22LEDT048YAF
E22LEDT048GAF
E22LEDT048BAF
E22LEDT048WAF
E22LEDT060RAF
E22LEDT060OAF
E22LEDT060YAF
E22LEDT060GAF
E22LEDT060BAF
E22LEDT060WAF
E22LEDT120RAF
E22LEDT120OAF
E22LEDT120YAF
E22LEDT120GAF
E22LEDT120BAF
E22LEDT120WAF
E22LEDT006RDF
E22LEDT006ODF
E22LEDT006YDF
E22LEDT006GDF
E22LEDT006BDF
E22LEDT006WDF
E22LEDT024RDF
E22LEDT024ODF
E22LEDT024YDF
E22LEDT024GDF
E22LEDT024BDF
E22LEDT024WDF
E22LEDT048RDF
E22LEDT048ODF
E22LEDT048YDF
E22LEDT048GDF
E22LEDT048BDF
E22LEDT048WDF
E22LEDT060RDF
E22LEDT060ODF
E22LEDT060YDF
E22LEDT060GDF
E22LEDT060BDF
E22LEDT060WDF
E22LEDT120RDF
E22LEDT120ODF
E22LEDT120YDF
E22LEDT120GDF
E22LEDT120BDF
E22LEDT120WDF
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-104. Replacement Tall Bulbs — T3-1/4 (BA9) Bayonet Base Type for Illuminated
Selector Switches and Push-Pull Operators ONLY
Description
Operating Voltage (V)/
Wattage (W)
Catalog
Number
6V (1.0W)
12V (1.2W)
24V (1.2W)
32V (1.2W)
48V (1.0W)
60V (1.2W)
120V (2.2W)
28-6731
28-6731-2
28-6731-3
28-6731-7
28-6731-4
28-6731-5
28-6731-6
47
Price
U.S. $
Tall Incandescent Bulb
Note: See Page 47-72 for Replacement LEDs and bulbs for indicating lights and pushbutton
switches.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-74
January 2010
EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories
Description
Catalog
Number
Octagonal Wrench — For easy tightening of
back-of-panel mounting nut on E22 (plastic)
operators
E22CW
Octagonal Wrench — For easy tightening of
back-of-panel mounting nut on EM22 (metal)
operators
E22CWM
Bulb Removal Tool — To facilitate bulb removal
from front of panel on all illuminated operators
E22BA3
Hole Cutting Tool — For 22.5 mm Diameter
mounting hole.
Maximum Thickness:
Steel — 16 SWG (1.63 mm)
Aluminum — 14 SWG (2.03 mm)
E22BA5
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions
Inches (mm)
1.57 (40)
4.92
(125)
1.57 (40)
5.50
(140)
0.39 (10)
2.44 (62)
Hole Plug — Forms oil- and watertight seal for
unused panel holes — UL Listed Type
4-4X-13
Black Nylon
Stainless Steel
1.10
(28)
E22BHP
E22BA8
0.55 (14)
Protective Boot — Silicon Rubber. For use with
25 mm Diameter Flush and Extended pushbutton operators only —
Clear
Red
Green
Black
Oversize Yellow Legend Plates —
1.77" (45 mm) Blank
1.77" (45 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP
2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP
2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMERGENCY OFF
2.56" (65 mm) Printed EMO
2.76" (70 mm) Blank
2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMERGENCY STOP
2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMERGENCY OFF
2.76" (70 mm) Printed EMO
Mounting Adapter — Supplied as standard with
E22 operators. Provides contact block and light
unit mounting.
47
E22BCM
E22BRM
E22BGM
E22BBM
1.18
(30)
0.71
(18)
E22VA2
E22VA9
E22VA7
E22VA6
E22VA3
E22VA1
E22VA8
E22VA4
E22VA5
E22BA1
1.81
(46)
0.71
(18)
Mounting Adapter with Barrier — Supplied as
standard with E22 Trigger Action Emergency
Stop Operators. Provides contact block unit
mounting only.
E22BA7
1.81
(46)
0.71
(18)
Auto Latch Mounting Adapter — Supplied as
E22BA1A
standard with EM22 operators. Provides contact
block and light unit mounting.
Yellow plates comply with EN418 Machine Safety Standard background requirements for E-Stops.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-75
January 2010
EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories
Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories (Continued)
Description
Catalog
Number
Mounting Adapter with Barrier — Supplied
as standard with EM22 Trigger Action
Emergency Stop Operators. Provides contact block unit mounting only.
E22BA7A
5-Way Mounting Adapter — Provides
contact block and light unit mounting for up
to 10 circuits. The standard 3-way mounting
adapter E22BA1 allows up to 6 circuits.
For non-illuminated PBs and 2-position
selector switches
For illuminated PBs and 2-position selector
switches
For non-illuminated 3-position selector
switches with Cam #1
For illuminated 3-position selector switches
with Cam #1
Additional information – See Page 47-77
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions
Inch (mm)
LOCK
E22BA11
1.81
(46)
E22BA11L
E22BA12
E22BA12L
Operator Plug — Must be inserted into rear E22BA2
of momentary action pushbutton and mushroom head operators when 3rd Contact
Block is installed in center position. Not to be
used with maintained action or illuminated
operators — minimum order quantity 10
pieces. To assemble, push plug into the rear
of the operator. On mushroom operators,
cut down the plug to 15.2 mm [0.62"] prior to
assembly. Plug is notched to indicate cut
down length.
Adapter Kit — Enables a 22.5 mm operator
to be mounted in a 30.5 mm mounting hole
— panel thickness from 1/16 to 7/32 inch
(1.6 to 5.6 mm).
1.97
(50)
1.02
(26)
0.41
(10.5)
0.87
(22)
E22ARK
47
Locating Ring — Provides additional antiE22LRM
rotation features when using optional panel
mounting hole notch — minimum order
quantity 10 pieces (metal)
Padlockable Transparent Cover — Suitable
for use with 25 mm Flush and Extended
Pushbutton operators only
E22PCM
Padlockable Transparent Cover — Suitable E22PCPM
for use with 25 mm Extended Pushbutton
operators only. Enables NC circuit to be held
open.
Padlockable Transparent Cover — Suitable
for use with 28 mm Mushroom operators,
Knob and Key Selector switches
0.93 (23.7)
1.25 (31.8)
E22BA9
1.1 (27.9)
1.25 (31.8)
Quick Connect Terminals — For easy instal- E22AT
lation of wired connections. 300V clearance.
Minimum order quantity 10 pieces.
5-Way mounting adapters cannot be used with 3-position Push-Pull operators, Cam #2 3-position selector switches, trigger action E-Stops or E22B4/
E22BF4 contact blocks.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-76
January 2010
EM22 and E22 Series, Accessories
Table 47-105. EM22 and E22 Series Accessories (Continued)
Description
Catalog
Number
Contact Blocks with Quick Connect Terminal
Assembled — 300V clearance —
1NC
1NO
1NO Early Make
1NC Late Break
1NO-1NC
2NO
Light Units with Quick Connect Terminals
Assembled — 300V clearance —
Transformer Type AC Only —
120/110V, 60/50 Hz
Resistor/Diode AC
120/110V
Full Voltage AC/DC
24V
Without Bulb
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
E22BF1
E22BF2
E22BF3
E22BF4
E22BF11
E22BF20
1.42
(36)
1.26
(32)
0.39
(10)
1.54
(39) Transformer
Type
E22TLF1
E22RF2
2.17
(55)
0.39
(10)
E22DF24
E22DF
1.42
(36)
1.26
(32)
Mechanical Push Rod — For use with all
non-illuminated pushbutton and momentary
mushroom head operators. Suitable for
external mechanical reset of overload
relays. Must be cut to proper length.
Uncut — 4.72 inches (119.9 mm) long
E22MRL
Single
Circuit
Full Voltage &
Resistor Types
0.39
(10)
1.0
(25.4)
0.43
(11)
0.98 to 4.72
(25 to 120)
Mushroom Shroud — Protects against
inadvertent operation.
Chrome shroud (cut-away type for use with E22MSP
push/pull pushbuttons)
Black shroud (cut-away type for use with
E22MBSP
push/pull pushbuttons)
1.85
(47)
0.98
(25)
Mushroom Shroud — Protects against
inadvertent operation.
Chrome shroud (cut-away type)
Black shroud (cut-away type)
47
E22MS
E22MBFS
1.85
(47)
0.98
(25)
Mushroom Shroud — Protects against
inadvertent operation.
Chrome shroud (full type)
Black shroud (full type)
E22MSF
E22MBFSF
1.85
(47)
0.98
(25)
Mushroom Guard — For 40 mm Trigger
Action Switch — To be used with E22LTA2
and E22LTA2N123 operators.
E22MGTA
1.71
(43.5)
3.00
(76.2)
1.60
(40.6)
Dia.
0.89
(22.5)
0.26
(6.5)
1.73
(44)
0.20
(5)
E22BF4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapters.
For devices not listed, contact your Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-833-3927.
For use with 28 mm and 40 mm diameter mushroom pushbutton operators.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-77
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Accessories
5-Way Mounting Adapter
Legend Plates,
Three Styles
Available
Panel
The E22 5-way mounting adapter listed
below allows up to 5 single circuit or
up to 5 double circuit contact blocks
(10 total circuits) to be mounted
behind a single operator.
Optional
Anti-Rotation
Ring #E22LRP
Slightly more spacing (approximately
0.79 in. [20 mm]) is required for this
mounting adapter as indicated in the
Minimum Spacing table below.
Bezel, Choice of
Chrome or
Matte Black
Variety of
Operators
Light Units
and Contact Blocks
Secured to
Mounting Adapter
Without Tools
Octagonal Mounting Nut
Which Eliminates Spacer
Washers and Set Screws #15-1438.
Tightening Torque: 15 lb-in (1.7 Nm)
For selector switch applications, the
cam and contact blocks selection must
be determined using the procedure
and selection tables listed on Pages
47-60 – 47-61.
5-Way Mounting Adapter
Table 47-106. Minimum Spacing — Inches (mm)
Size/Type of Operator
Dimension A
Mounting Adapter Type(s)
Two
One 3-Way & Two
3-Way
One 5-Way
5-Way
All Types up to 1.18 in. (30 mm) Dia.
Including Knob and Key Operated Selector
Switches — except those listed below
Lever Operated Selector Switch Operators and
1.18 – 1.57 in. (30 – 40 mm) Diameter Operators
1.97 in. (50 mm) Diameter Operators
Large Yellow Round Legend Plate —
2.76 in. (70 mm) Diameter
Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or
Padlockable Cover
1.18 (30) 1.58 (40)
1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)
1.77 (45) 1.77 (45)
1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)
2.16 (55) 2.16 (55)
2.95 (75) 2.95 (75)
2.16 (55) 2.16 (55)
2.95 (75) 2.95 (75)
1.38 (35) 1.58 (40)
1.97 (50) 1.97 (50)
A
Dimension B
B
0.89 (22.5)
+0.02 (0.4)
Diameter
0.13 (3.2)
+
_ 0.01 (0.2)
0.96 (24.3)
+0.02 (0.4)
-0 (0)
Notch Mounting
Hole as Shown
Table 47-107. 5-Way Mounting Adapter
Description
Catalog
Number
5-Way Mounting Adapter — Provides contact
block and light unit mounting for up to 10
circuits. The standard 3-way mounting adapter
E22BA1 allows up to 6 circuits.
For non-illuminated PBs, 2-position
selector switches and 2-position Push-Pulls
For illuminated PBs, 2-position selector
switches and 2-position Push-Pulls
For non-illuminated 3-position selector
switches with Cam #1
For illuminated 3-position selector switches
with Cam #1
Price
U.S. $
Figure 47-17. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm)
LOCK
1.81
(46)
E22BA11
E22BA11L
E22BA12
1.02
(26)
E22BA12L
Cannot be used with 3-position Push-Pull operators, Cam #2 3-position selector switches,
push-push operators, trigger action pushbutton or E22B4/E22BF4 contact blocks. See Table 47-108.
1.97
(50)
Figure 47-18. Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-108. 5-Way Mounting Adapter Selection Chart
Front of Panel Devices
Back of Panel Options
Non-illuminated
Illuminated
E22BA11 E22BA12 E22BA11L E22BA12L
Flush and Extended Pushbuttons
28, 40, 50 mm Mushroom (Momentary)
50 mm Mushroom Latch (Pull-to-Release)
40 mm Mushroom Latch (Key Release)
28 and 40 mm Mushroom Latch (Twist-to-Release)
29.5 and 40 mm 2-Position Push-Pull
29.5 and 40 mm 3-Position Push-Pull
Double Headed Pushbutton
2-Position Selector Switch — Cam 2
3-Position Selector Switch — Cam 1
3-Position Selector Switch — Cam 2
Trigger Action Pushbutton
Push-Push Operator
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
—
—
✓
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
✓
—
✓
—
—
✓
—
—
✓
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✓
—
—
—
Four single circuit contact blocks maximum.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-78
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Accessories and Replacement Parts
Accessories (Continued)
Table 47-111. Replacement Caps — Push-Pull
Description
Table 47-109. E22 Series Accessories (Continued)
47
Description
Catalog
Number
Octagonal Mounting Nut
15-1438
Molded Black Bezel — For
converting chrome bezel to
black bezel — Suitable for
Knob, Lever and Key Selector
Switches
E22AZB
Chrome Bezel — Suitable for
Knob, Lever and Key Selector
Switches
28-6028
Price
U.S. $
Flush 25 mm Dia.
Red
Green
Blue
Clear
Amber
White
Yellow
E22ADR
E22ADG
E22ADV
E22ADC
E22ADA
E22ADW
E22ADY
Ext. 25 mm Dia.
Lenses with
Octagonal Bezel
for 25 mm Diameter
Extended Illuminated
Pushbuttons — 10 per
package, minimum
order 10.
Red
Green
Blue
Clear
Amber
White
Yellow
E22AER
E22AEG
E22AEV
E22AEC
E22AEA
E22AEW
E22AEY
Std. Flush Button
25 mm Dia.
Color Caps with
Octagonal Bezel for
Standard Nonilluminated 25 mm
Diameter Flush Pushbuttons — 10 per
package, minimum
order 10.
Red
Green
Blue
White
Yellow
Black
Gray
Orange
E22ABR
E22ABG
E22ABV
E22ABW
E22ABY
E22ABB
E22ABE
E22ABN
Std. Ext. Button
25 mm Dia.
Color Caps with
Octagonal Bezel for
Standard Nonilluminated 25 mm
Diameter Extended
Pushbuttons — 10 per
package, minimum
order 10.
Red
Green
Blue
White
Yellow
Black
Gray
Orange
E22ACR
E22ACG
E22ACV
E22ACW
E22ACY
E22ACB
E22ACE
E22ACN
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Amber
Red
EMERGENCY
STOP
E22AHS1
E22AHS2
E22AHS3
E22AHS4
E22AHS5
E22AHS6
E22AHS7
E22AHS8
—
E22AH1
E22AH2
E22AH3
E22AH4
E22AH5
E22AH6
E22AH7
E22AH8
E22AH2N8
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Red
EMERGENCY
STOP
E22AFS0
E22AFS2
E22AFS3
E22AFS4
E22AFS5
E22AFS6
E22AFS9
—
E22AF0
E22AF2
E22AF3
E22AF4
E22AF5
E22AF6
E22AF9
E22AF2N8
Non-illuminated
Table 47-112. Replacement Selector Switch Levers and Knobs
Color
Levers
Catalog
Number
Knobs
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E22AV21
E22AV22
E22AV23
E22AV24
E22AV25
E22AV26
E22AV27
E22AV28
E22AX1
E22AX2
E22AX3
E22AX4
E22AX5
E22AX6
E22AX7
E22AX8
E22AX21
E22AX22
E22AX23
E22AX24
E22AX25
E22AX26
E22AX27
E22AX28
E22AW20
E22AW22
E22AW23
E22AW24
E22AW25
E22AW26
E22AW29
E22AR0
E22AR2
E22AR3
E22AR4
E22AR5
E22AR6
E22AR9
E22AR20
E22AR22
E22AR23
E22AR24
E22AR25
E22AR26
E22AR29
53-4183-36
53-4183-31
53-4183-32
53-4183-34
53-4183-35
53-4183-33
53-4183-37
53-4183-38
53-4185-36
53-4185-31
53-4185-32
53-4185-34
53-4185-35
53-4185-33
53-4185-37
53-4185-38
53-4184-36
53-4184-31
53-4184-32
53-4184-34
53-4184-35
53-4184-33
53-4184-37
53-4184-38
53-4183-26
53-4183-21
53-4183-22
53-4183-24
53-4183-25
53-4183-23
53-4183-27
53-4185-26
53-4185-21
53-4185-22
53-4185-24
53-4185-25
53-4185-23
53-4185-27
53-4184-26
53-4184-21
53-4184-22
53-4184-24
53-4184-25
53-4184-23
53-4184-27
Non-illuminated — 45° Throw
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E22AV1
E22AV2
E22AV3
E22AV4
E22AV5
E22AV6
E22AV7
E22AV8
Illuminated — 45° Throw
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
E22AW0
E22AW2
E22AW3
E22AW4
E22AW5
E22AW6
E22AW9
Non-illuminated — 60° Throw
Replacement Parts
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
Table 47-110. Replacement Lenses — Indicating Lights
Standard
Indicating Light
1.57 Inches (40 mm)
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Illuminated
Lenses with
Octagonal Bezel for
25 mm Diameter
Flush Illuminated
Pushbutton — 10 per
package, minimum
order 10.
Color
1.16 Inches (29.5 mm)
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Glass
Lens
For Use with
Insert
53-4122-36
53-4122-31
53-4122-32
53-4122-34
53-4122-35
53-4122-33
53-4122-37
53-4122-38
Illuminated — 60° Throw
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
E22AE0
E22AE2
E22AE3
E22AE4
E22AE5
E22AG0
E22AG2
E22AG3
E22AG4
E22AG5
E22AC0
E22AC2
E22AC3
E22AC4
E22AC5
Blue
Amber
E22AE6
E22AE9
E22AG6
E22AG9
E22AC6
E22AC9
Price
U.S. $
Clear
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
53-4122-26
53-4122-21
53-4122-22
53-4122-24
53-4122-25
53-4122-23
53-4122-27
Four- to Eight-Position Selector Switches — Non-illuminated
Black
53-2617-16
Plastic indicating light lens with insert suitable for printed legends. For
replacement Indicating Light Legend Inserts, order E22AL5. Minimum
order quantity 10 pieces.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
53-2620-16
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-79
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings
Options
Legend Plates
Engraved Legend Plates with Standard Markings — 1/8" High Character Size
Aluminum — Aluminum legend plates
have a plastisol backing to help prevent
rotation of the operator when installed
in an unnotched hole. Operators
installed with aluminum legend plates
and legend plates with clip-in inserts
maintain their UL Listed Type 4-4X-13
rating.
Plastic — Both the laminated plastic legend plates and legend plates with clip-in
inserts offer the choice of four background colors. Either side of the legend
plate or insert can be field engraved.
Letter Color
Split Field Color
Jumbo
Plastic
Push-Pull
Aluminum
0.79
(20)
1.77
(45)
1.77
(45)
Field Color
Standard
Aluminum
1.57
(40)
1.17
(30)
Background Color
Standard Aluminum
Jumbo Aluminum
0.79
(20)
Standard SelfAdhesive Plastic
Figure 47-19. Color Diagram and Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates
Nameplate Type
Standard Aluminum
with Plastisol Backing
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
and Self-Adhesives used
on Enclosures
Standard Plastic,
NEMA 1 Only
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
Black
Silver
Black
White
Black
Black
Black
Silver
Red
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
Pushbutton
Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(No Engraving)
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
E22NS36
E22NS90
E22NS11
E22NS12
—
E22NS37
—
—
—
E22NS13
E22NSP77
E22NSP90
E22NSP11
E22NSP12
—
E22NSP77
E22NSP90R
E22NSP11R
E22NSP12R
E22NSP13R
E22NSP76
E22NSP90W
E22NSP11W
E22NSP12W
—
E22NSP76
E22NSP90S
E22NSP11S
E22NSP12S
—
FAST
FASTER
FEEDER OFF
FEEDER ON
FOR
E22NS14
E22NS87
E22NS95
E22NS94
E22NS4
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP14
E22NSP87
E22NSP95
E22NSP94
E22NSP4
E22NSP14R
E22NSP87R
E22NSP95R
E22NSP94R
E22NSP4R
E22NSP14W
E22NSP87W
E22NSP95W
E22NSP94W
E22NSP4W
E22NSP14S
E22NSP87S
E22NSP95S
E22NSP94S
E22NSP4S
FORWARD
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
E22NS15
E22NS16
E22NS17
E22NS18
E22NS19
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP15
E22NSP16
E22NSP17
E22NSP18
E22NSP19
E22NSP15R
E22NSP16R
E22NSP17R
E22NSP18R
E22NSP19R
E22NSP15W
E22NSP16W
E22NSP17W
E22NSP18W
E22NSP19W
E22NSP15S
E22NSP16S
E22NSP17S
E22NSP18S
E22NSP19S
To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
Standard Size
Aluminum
Jumbo Size
Reversible
Plastic
Standard Size
Reversible
Plastic
Self-Adhesive
Plastic
Standard Size Plastic
with Clip-In Insert
Push-Pull
Operators
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-80
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings
Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates (Continued)
Nameplate Type
Standard Aluminum
with Plastisol Backing
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
and Self-Adhesives used
on Enclosures
Standard Plastic,
NEMA 1 Only
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
Black
Silver
Black
White
Black
Black
Black
Silver
Red
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
Pushbutton (Cont.)
Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
JOG FOR
JOG REV
LEFT
LOW
LOWER
E22NS96
E22NS21
E22NS10
E22NS22
E22NS23
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP96
E22NSP21
E22NSP10
E22NSP22
E22NSP23
E22NSP96R
E22NSP21R
E22NSP10R
E22NSP22R
E22NSP23R
E22NSP96W
E22NSP21W
E22NSP10W
E22NSP22W
E22NSP23W
E22NSP96S
E22NSP21S
E22NSP10S
E22NSP22S
E22NSP23S
LUBE FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR RUNNING
MOTOR STOP
MOTOR STOPPED
E22NS92
E22NS81
E22NS56
E22NS82
E22NS57
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP92
E22NSP81
E22NSP56
E22NSP82
E22NSP57
E22NSP92R
E22NSP81R
E22NSP56R
E22NSP82R
E22NSP57R
E22NSP92W
E22NSP81W
E22NSP56W
E22NSP82W
E22NSP57W
E22NSP92S
E22NSP81S
E22NSP56S
E22NSP82S
E22NSP57S
O
OFF
ON
I
OPEN
—
—
E22NS25
E22NS65
E22NS26
E22NS64
E22NS24
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP25
E22NSP65
E22NSP26
E22NSP64R
E22NSP24R
E22NSP25R
E22NSP65R
E22NSP26R
—
—
E22NSP25W
E22NSP65W
E22NSP26W
—
—
E22NSP25S
E22NSP65S
E22NSP26S
OUT
OVERLOAD TRIPPED
OVERLOAD RESET
POWER ON
RAISE
E22NS27
E22NS98
E22NS100
E22NS80
E22NS28
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP27
E22NSP98
E22NSP100
E22NSP80
E22NSP28
E22NSP27R
E22NSP98R
E22NSP100R
E22NSP80R
E22NSP28R
E22NSP27W
E22NSP98W
E22NSP100W
E22NSP80W
E22NSP28W
E22NSP27S
E22NSP98S
E22NSP100S
E22NSP80S
E22NSP28S
READY
RESET
REV
REVERSE
RIGHT
E22NS86
E22NS29
E22NS5
E22NS30
E22NS79
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP86
E22NSP29
E22NSP5
E22NSP30
E22NSP79
E22NSP86R
E22NSP29R
E22NSP5R
E22NSP30R
E22NSP79R
E22NSP86W
E22NSP29W
E22NSP5W
E22NSP30W
E22NSP79W
E22NSP86S
E22NSP29S
E22NSP5S
E22NSP30S
E22NSP79S
RUN
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
E22NS31
E22NS85
E22NS32
E22NS88
E22NS33
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP31
E22NSP85
E22NSP32
E22NSP88
E22NSP33
E22NSP31R
E22NSP85R
E22NSP32R
E22NSP88R
E22NSP33R
E22NSP31W
E22NSP85W
E22NSP32W
E22NSP88W
E22NSP33W
E22NSP31S
E22NSP85S
E22NSP32S
E22NSP88S
E22NSP33S
STOP
SUPPLY ON
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
—
E22NS61
E22NS83
E22NS93
E22NS84
E22NS34
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP61
E22NSP83
E22NSP93
E22NSP84
E22NSP34R
E22NSP61R
E22NSP83R
E22NSP93R
E22NSP84R
—
E22NSP61W
E22NSP83W
E22NSP93W
E22NSP84W
—
E22NSP61S
E22NSP83S
E22NSP93S
E22NSP84S
UNCLAMP
UP
E22NS91
E22NS35
—
—
E22NSP91
E22NSP35
E22NSP91R
E22NSP35R
E22NSP91W
E22NSP35W
E22NSP91S
E22NSP35S
INCH/REVERSE
FOR/REV
FOR/REV
HAND/AUTO
HAND/AUTO
E22NS59
E22NS101
E22NS38
E22NS102
E22NS39
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP59
E22NSP101
E22NSP38
E22NSP102
E22NSP39
E22NSP59R
E22NSP101R
E22NSP38R
E22NSP102R
E22NSP39R
E22NSP59W
E22NSP101W
E22NSP38W
E22NSP102W
E22NSP39W
E22NSP59S
E22NSP101S
E22NSP38S
E22NSP102S
E22NSP39S
HIGH/LOW
HIGH/LOW
INCH/RUN
INCH/RUN
JOG/RUN
E22NS103
E22NS40
E22NS114
E22NS60
E22NS104
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP103
E22NSP40
E22NSP114
E22NSP60
E22NSP104
E22NSP103R
E22NSP40R
E22NSP114R
E22NSP60R
E22NSP104R
E22NSP103W
E22NSP40W
E22NSP114W
E22NSP60W
E22NSP104W
E22NSP103S
E22NSP40S
E22NSP114S
E22NSP60S
E22NSP104S
JOG/ RUN
LEFT/RIGHT
LEFT/RIGHT
LOC/REM
LOC/REMOTE
E22NS41
E22NS117
E22NS66
E22NS116
E22NS63
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP41
E22NSP117
E22NSP66
E22NSP116
E22NSP63
E22NSP41R
E22NSP117R
E22NSP66R
E22NSP116R
E22NSP63R
E22NSP41W
E22NSP117W
E22NSP66W
E22NSP116W
E22NSP63W
E22NSP41S
E22NSP117S
E22NSP66S
E22NSP116S
E22NSP63S
2-Position Selector Switch
To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
Center to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Left to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-81
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Standard Markings
Table 47-113. Engraved Legend Plates (Continued)
Nameplate Type
Standard Aluminum
with Plastisol Backing
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
and Self-Adhesives used
on Enclosures
Standard Plastic,
NEMA 1 Only
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
Black
Silver
Black
White
Black
Black
Black
Silver
Red
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
2-Position Selector Switch (Cont.)
Price U.S $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Price U.S $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAN/AUTO
MAN/AUTO
O/I
O/I
OFF/ON
E22NS118
E22NS67
E22NS120
E22NS122
E22NS105
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP118
E22NSP67
E22NSP120
E22NSP122
E22NSP105
E22NSP118R
E22NSP67R
E22NSP120R
E22NSP122R
E22NSP105R
E22NSP118W
E22NSP67W
E22NSP120W
E22NSP122W
E22NSP105W
E22NSP118S
E22NSP67S
E22NSP120S
E22NSP122S
E22NSP105S
OFF/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
OPEN/CLOSE
RUN/JOG
RUN/JOG
E22NS42
E22NS106
E22NS43
E22NS107
E22NS44
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP42
E22NSP106
E22NSP43
E22NSP107
E22NSP44
E22NSP42R
E22NSP106R
E22NSP43R
E22NSP107R
E22NSP44R
E22NSP42W
E22NSP106W
E22NSP43W
E22NSP107W
E22NSP44W
E22NSP42S
E22NSP106S
E22NSP43S
E22NSP107S
E22NSP44S
SAFE/RUN
SAFE/RUN
SEQ/TEST
SEQ/TEST
START/JOG
E22NS108
E22NS45
E22NS115
E22NS62
E22NS109
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP108
E22NSP45
E22NSP115
E22NSP62
E22NSP109
E22NSP108R
E22NSP45R
E22NSP115R
E22NSP62R
E22NSP109R
E22NSP108W
E22NSP45W
E22NSP115W
E22NSP62W
E22NSP109W
E22NSP108S
E22NSP45S
E22NSP115S
E22NSP62S
E22NSP109S
START/JOG
START/STOP
START/STOP
STOP/RESET
STOP/RESET
E22NS46
E22NS110
E22NS47
—
—
—
—
—
E22NS112
E22NS58
E22NSP46
E22NSP110
E22NSP47
—
—
E22NSP46R
E22NSP110R
E22NSP47R
E22NSP112R
E22NSP58R
E22NSP46W
E22NSP110W
E22NSP47W
—
—
E22NSP46S
E22NSP110S
E22NSP47S
—
—
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
E22NS111
E22NS48
—
—
E22NSP111
E22NSP48
E22NSP111R
E22NSP48R
E22NSP111W
E22NSP48W
E22NSP111S
E22NSP48S
AUTO/OFF/HAND
FOR/OFF/REV
FOR/SAFE/REV
HAND/OFF/AUTO
I/O/II
E22NS49
E22NS50
E22NS69
E22NS51
E22NS121
—
—
—
—
—
E22NSP49
E22NSP50
E22NSP69
E22NSP51
E22NSP121
E22NSP49R
E22NSP50R
E22NSP69R
E22NSP51R
E22NSP121R
E22NSP49W
E22NSP50W
E22NSP69W
E22NSP51W
E22NSP121W
E22NSP49S
E22NSP50S
E22NSP69S
E22NSP51S
E22NSP121S
MAN/OFF/AUTO
ON/STOP/SAFE
OPEN/OFF/CLOSE
RUN/SAFE/JOG
UP/OFF/DOWN
E22NS68
—
E22NS53
E22NS70
E22NS54
—
E22NS71
—
—
—
E22NSP68
—
E22NSP53
E22NSP70
E22NSP54
E22NSP68R
E22NSP71R
E22NSP53R
E22NSP70R
E22NSP54R
E22NSP68W
—
E22NSP53W
E22NSP70W
E22NSP54W
E22NSP68S
—
E22NSP53S
E22NSP70S
E22NSP54S
—
—
E22NS73
E22NS75
E22NSP73
E22NSP75
E22NSP73R
E22NSP75R
E22NSP73W
E22NSP75W
E22NSP73S
E22NSP75S
3-Position Selector Switch
Push-Pulls Only
Pull-ON Push-OFF
Pull-START Push-STOP
To order Jumbo Legend Plates replace the 5th character with an L. For example E22NL87 is an aluminum, Jumbo Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
To order self-adhesive legend plates replace the 5th character with a C. For example E22NC87 is a Self-Adhesive Legend Plate marked “FASTER”.
Field Color is Split, green on the left side, red on the right side.
Center to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Left to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-82
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers
1.1
(27.5)
0.44
(11.2)
Standard
Figure 47-20. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-114. Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers
Nameplate Type
Plastic with Clip-In
Insert without Carrier
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Legend Plate Price U.S. $… Legend Plate Carrier Price U.S. $…
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
White
Black
Black
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
Pushbutton
47
Legend Plate Carrier
E22ND
(No Engraving)
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
E22ND77
E22ND90
E22ND11
E22ND12
—
E22ND77
E22ND90R
E22ND11R
E22ND12R
E22ND13R
E22ND76
E22ND90W
E22ND11W
E22ND12W
—
E22ND76
E22ND90S
E22ND11S
E22ND12S
—
FAST
FASTER
FEED OFF
FEEDER ON
FOR
E22ND14
E22ND87
E22ND95
E22ND94
E22ND4
E22ND14R
E22ND87R
E22ND95R
E22ND94R
E22ND4R
E22ND14W
E22ND87W
E22ND95W
E22ND94W
E22ND4W
E22ND14S
E22ND87S
E22ND95S
E22ND94S
E22ND4S
FORWARD
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
E22ND15
E22ND16
E22ND17
E22ND18
E22ND19
E22ND15R
E22ND16R
E22ND17R
E22ND18R
E22ND19R
E22ND15W
E22ND16W
E22ND17W
E22ND18W
E22ND19W
E22ND15S
E22ND16S
E22ND17S
E22ND18S
E22ND19S
JOG FOR
JOG REV
LEFT
LOW
LOWER
E22ND96
E22ND21
E22ND10
E22ND22
E22ND23
E22ND96R
E22ND21R
E22ND10R
E22ND22R
E22ND23R
E22ND96W
E22ND21W
E22ND10W
E22ND22W
E22ND23W
E22ND96S
E22ND21S
E22ND10S
E22ND22S
E22ND23S
LUBE FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR RUNNING
MOTOR STOP
MOTOR STOPPED
E22ND92
E22ND81
E22ND56
E22ND82
E22ND57
E22ND92R
E22ND81R
E22ND56R
E22ND82R
E22ND57R
E22ND92W
E22ND81W
E22ND56W
E22ND82W
E22ND57W
E22ND92S
E22ND81S
E22ND56S
E22ND82S
E22ND57S
O
OFF
ON
I
OPEN
—
—
E22ND25
E22ND65
E22ND26
E22ND64R
E22ND24R
E22ND25R
E22ND65R
E22ND26R
—
—
E22ND25W
E22ND65W
E22ND26W
—
—
E22ND25S
E22ND65S
E22ND26S
OUT
OVERLOAD TRIPPED
OVERLOAD RESET
POWER ON
RAISE
E22ND27
E22ND98
E22ND100
E22ND80
E22ND28
E22ND27R
E22ND98R
E22ND100R
E22ND80R
E22ND28R
E22ND27W
E22ND98W
E22ND100W
E22ND80W
E22ND28W
E22ND27S
E22ND98S
E22ND100S
E22ND80S
E22ND28S
READY
RESET
REV
REVERSE
RIGHT
E22ND86
E22ND29
E22ND5
E22ND30
E22ND79
E22ND86R
E22ND29R
E22ND5R
E22ND30R
E22ND79R
E22ND86W
E22ND29W
E22ND5W
E22ND30W
E22ND79W
E22ND86S
E22ND29S
E22ND5S
E22ND30S
E22ND79S
RUN
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
E22ND31
E22ND85
E22ND32
E22ND88
E22ND33
E22ND31R
E22ND85R
E22ND32R
E22ND88R
E22ND33R
E22ND31W
E22ND85W
E22ND32W
E22ND88W
E22ND33W
E22ND31S
E22ND85S
E22ND32S
E22ND88S
E22ND33S
One carrier required for each clip-in insert.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-83
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers
Table 47-114. Legend Plates and Legend Plate Carriers (Continued)
Nameplate Type
Plastic with Clip-In
Insert without Carrier
NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Legend Plate Price U.S. $… Legend Plate Carrier Price U.S. $…
Letter Color
Background Color
Field Color
White
Black
Black
White
Red
Red
Black
White
White
Black
Silver
Silver
STOP
SUPPLY ON
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
—
E22ND61
E22ND83
E22ND93
E22ND84
E22ND34R
E22ND61R
E22ND83R
E22ND93R
E22ND84R
—
E22ND61W
E22ND83W
E22ND93W
E22ND84W
—
E22ND61S
E22ND83S
E22ND93S
E22ND84S
UNCLAMP
UP
E22ND91
E22ND35
E22ND91R
E22ND35R
E22ND91W
E22ND35W
E22ND91S
E22ND35S
INCH/REVERSE
FOR/REV
FOR/REV
HAND/AUTO
HAND/AUTO
E22ND59
E22ND101
E22ND38
E22ND102
E22ND39
E22ND59R
E22ND101R
E22ND38R
E22ND102R
E22ND39R
E22ND59W
E22ND101W
E22ND38W
E22ND102W
E22ND39W
E22ND59S
E22ND101S
E22ND38S
E22ND102S
E22ND39S
HIGH/LOW
HIGH/LOW
INCH/RUN
INCH/RUN
JOG/RUN
E22ND103
E22ND40
E22ND114
E22ND60
E22ND104
E22ND103R
E22ND40R
E22ND114R
E22ND60R
E22ND104R
E22ND103W
E22ND40W
E22ND114W
E22ND60W
E22ND104W
E22ND103S
E22ND40S
E22ND114S
E22ND60S
E22ND104S
JOG/RUN
LEFT/RIGHT
LEFT/RIGHT
LOC/REM
LOC/REMOTE
E22ND41
E22ND117
E22ND66
E22ND116
E22ND63
E22ND41R
E22ND117R
E22ND66R
E22ND116R
E22ND63R
E22ND41W
E22ND117W
E22ND66W
E22ND116W
E22ND63W
E22ND41S
E22ND117S
E22ND66S
E22ND116S
E22ND63S
MAN/AUTO
MAN/AUTO
O/I
O/I
OFF/ON
E22ND118
E22ND67
E22ND120
E22ND122
E22ND105
E22ND118R
E22ND67R
E22ND120R
E22ND122R
E22ND105R
E22ND118W
E22ND67W
E22ND120W
E22ND122W
E22ND105W
E22ND118S
E22ND67S
E22ND120S
E22ND122S
E22ND105S
OFF/ON
OPEN/CLOSE
OPEN/CLOSE
RUN/JOG
RUN/JOG
E22ND42
E22ND106
E22ND43
E22ND107
E22ND44
E22ND42R
E22ND106R
E22ND43R
E22ND107R
E22ND44R
E22ND42W
E22ND106W
E22ND43W
E22ND107W
E22ND44W
E22ND42S
E22ND106S
E22ND43S
E22ND107S
E22ND44S
SAFE/RUN
SAFE/RUN
SEQ/TEST
SEQ/TEST
START/JOG
E22ND108
E22ND45
E22ND115
E22ND62
E22ND109
E22ND108R
E22ND45R
E22ND115R
E22ND62R
E22ND109R
E22ND108W
E22ND45W
E22ND115W
E22ND62W
E22ND109W
E22ND108S
E22ND45S
E22ND115S
E22ND62S
E22ND109S
START/JOG
START/STOP
START/STOP
STOP/RESET
STOP/RESET
E22ND46
E22ND110
E22ND47
—
—
E22ND46R
E22ND110R
E22ND47R
E22ND112R
E22ND58R
E22ND46W
E22ND110W
E22ND47W
—
—
E22ND46S
E22ND110S
E22ND47S
—
—
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
E22ND111
E22ND48
E22ND111R
E22ND48R
E22ND111W
E22ND48W
E22ND111S
E22ND48S
AUTO/OFF/HAND
FOR/OFF/REV
FOR/SAFE/REV
HAND/OFF/AUTO
I/O/II
E22ND49
E22ND50
E22ND69
E22ND51
E22ND121
E22ND49R
E22ND50R
E22ND69R
E22ND51R
E22ND121R
E22ND49W
E22ND50W
E22ND69W
E22ND51W
E22ND121W
E22ND49S
E22ND50S
E22ND69S
E22ND51S
E22ND121S
MAN/OFF/AUTO
ON/STOP/SAFE
OPEN/OFF/CLOSE
RUN/SAFE/JOG
UP/OFF/DOWN
E22ND68
—
E22ND53
E22ND70
E22ND54
E22ND68R
E22ND71R
E22ND53R
E22ND70R
E22ND54R
E22ND68W
—
E22ND53W
E22ND70W
E22ND54W
E22ND68S
—
E22ND53S
E22ND70S
E22ND54S
Pushbutton (Cont.)
2-Position Selector Switch
47
3-Position Selector Switch
Center to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Left to Right Throw — 45° or 60° travel.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-84
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings
Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
■
Catalog Number of Blank Legend
Plate from previous page plus suffix
“STAMP”, and describe special
engraving in Block Letters.
■ Insert the following in Order Notes:
❑ Character Size — 3/32, 1/8 or
3/16 inch (2.4, 3.2 or 4.8 mm)
❑ Field Color of Plastic Legend
Plates or Insert types.
❑ Line location by Number(s)
(1 – 17) and legend desired
Note: If legends are required in line locations
not specified, drawing must be supplied
with order.
Table 47-117. Legend Characters Available
Table 47-115. Ordering Examples
Description
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Aluminum
Letter Size:
1/8 in. (3.2 mm)
Location:
5 — POWER
6 — HOUSE
7 — PUMP
E22NS36STAMP
Maximum Allowable Number
of Characters per Line
Plastic
Letter Size:
E22NLP76STAMP
3/16 in. (4.8 mm)
Field Color: White
Location:
8 — FEEDER
9 — OPEN
Max. 11
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
1
2
3
4
Max. 10
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
10
11
Line Location Number
Max. 8
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
10
11
15C
17R
Line Location
Number
15L
15R
2-Position
Selector Switches
Center to Right
Throw
2-Position
Selector Switches
Left to Right
Throw
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Characters
Line Location Number
12
47
Figure 47-24. How to Use Illustrations
3/32 inch (2.4 mm) High Characters
3/32 inch (2.4 mm) High Characters
Line Location Number
Max. 11
Max. 8
5
Characters
Characters
per Line
per Line
6
Jumbo
Standard
7
Size Plate
Size Plate
Line Location Number
for Ordering
Maximum
Maximum
15 1 11
Number of
Number of
Characters
Characters
per Line for
per Line for
Jumbo
Standard
Size Legend
Size Legend
Plate
Plate
Line Location
Number
Line Location Number
Line Location Number
Max. 15
Characters
per Line
Jumbo
Size Plate
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
/-.,1234567890
Max. 8
Characters
per Line
Standard
Size Plate
Line Location
Number
15C
16L 17R
Line Location
Number
15L
16L
15R
17R
3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Characters
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) High Characters
Line Location Number
Max. 11
Max. 8
Characters
Characters
8
per Line
per Line
9
Jumbo
Standard
Size Plate
Size Plate
Figure 47-23. Insert Type Plates
Table 47-116. Type of Legend Plate
(Used on Selector Switch)
Description
Character Size (Height)
3/32 Inch 1/8 Inch 3/16 Inch
(2.4 mm) (3.2 mm) (4.8 mm)
3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Characters
Figure 47-21. Aluminum and Plastic Legend Plates
Character Size
(Height) Inches
Max. Number
of Characters
1/8 Inch (3.2 mm)
6
3/16 Inch (4.8 mm)
5
3/32 Inch (2.4 mm)
8
Aluminum
or Plastic
Standard Size 5
Jumbo Size
7
Insert Type:
Standard Size 5
3
5
3
5
3
—
3-Position
Selector Switches
4-Position
Selector Switches
Figure 47-25. Selector Switch Legend Plates
Line Location
Number
21
20
23
24
22
25
Figure 47-22. Enclosure Legend Plates —
Self-Adhesive
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-85
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Printed Legends
Printed Legends
For Indicating Lights, Illuminated and
Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, and
1.10, 1.57 and 1.97" (28, 40 and 50 mm)
(Plastic) Diameter Mushroom Head
Operators.
How To Order:
Select legend required from listing
below and add Suffix Code Number to
Catalog Number of operator. Example:
E22A2N25 — Red indicating light with
insert printed “ON.”
Cat. No. E22A6N5
Cat. No. E22EB2N35
Price Adder:
U.S. $ —
Table 47-118. Printed Legends
Legend
Suffix Code
Number
Legend
Suffix Code
Number
FOR
N4
RESET
N29
(Emergency Stop)
N125
REV
N5
RUN
N31
(Start)
N887
N6
START
N33
(Stop)
N888
N7
STOP
N34
(Jog)
N889
CLOSE
N11
UP
N35
(Reset)
N890
INCH
N18
O
(Off)
N64
N892
JOG
N19
l
(On)
N65
N893
OFF
N24
POWER ON
N80
N894
ON
N25
READY
N86
N895
OPEN
N26
N124
N896
l
(Push-Push)
Legend
Suffix Code
Number
Additional legends and symbols are listed in Table 47-113 on Pages 47-79 – 47-81 — to order as printed legend, add prefix N to listed Code Number and
follow instructions on how to order above. A one-time set-up charge will apply to all orders for non-listed, special legends.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-86
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Legend Plates for Four- to Eight-Position Selector Switch
Legend Plates for Selector
Switches
Legend Plates with Standard Text
Blank Plastic Legend Plates — Reversible
Table 47-121. Legend Plates with Standard Text
Legend plates have a black background with white lettering.
Legend plates without text. Black one
side, red reverse side. White text.
Size
Inches (mm)
Table 47-119. Blank and Custom Legend
Plates
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
Size
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Blank
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) E22NJP36
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) E22NGP36
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
Custom Engraved
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45) E22NJP36STAMP
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60) E22NGP36STAMP
Custom Engraved Legend Plates have
the Suffix STAMP added to the Catalog
Number.
Non-standard Legends
To order custom engraved legend
plates, specify field color, add suffix
“STAMP” to Blank Plate Catalog
Number and specify desired engraving
for each position.
Example: E22NGP36STAMP,
OFF - PUMP 1 - PUMP 2 PUMP 3 - PUMP 4, Black field.
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
Switch
Positions
2
1
2
1
2
1
Catalog
Number
3
3
4
Price
U.S. $
E22NJP215
E22NGP215
E22NJP216
E22NGP216
4
5
3
E22NJP217
E22NGP217
4
5
6
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
2
1
3
5
7
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
2
1
8
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
1
0
E22NJP218
E22NGP218
4
3
6
E22NJP219
E22NGP219
4
5
7
2
6
3
E22NJP210
E22NGP210
0.79 (20)
A
47
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
0.98
(25)
1
0
2
E22NJP211
E22NGP211
3
4
Lever Operator
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
0.79 (20)
1
0
2
E22NJP212
E22NGP212
3
4
5
A
0.98
(25)
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
Knob Operator
1
0
2
4
6
1.69 (43)
to Remove
Key
A
0.79
(20)
1.77 x 1.77 (45 x 45)
2.36 x 2.36 (60 x 60)
1
0
7
E22NJP213
E22NGP213
3
2
5
E22NJP214
E22NGP214
3
4
6
5
Key Operator
Figure 47-26. Approximate Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Table 47-120. Selector Switch Dimensions
Number of
Circuits
Dimension A
Inches (mm)
1–2
3–4
5–6
7–8
2.83 (72)
3.31 (84)
3.78 (96)
4.25 (108)
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-87
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Enclosures
Enclosures
These totally insulated, NEMA 4, 4X,
12, 13 rated polycarbonate enclosures
are available in 1, 2, 3, 4, 6 and 9 hole
configurations in single or double
depth.
Table 47-122. Enclosures — UL (NEMA) 4, 4X, 12, 13
Cover Holes, Centerlines and
Legend Plate Selection
Will Accommodate 2.65 Inch
(65 mm) Legend Plates Listed
on Page 47-74
Usable Depth
Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number
2.5 (64)
3.4 (87)
E22CSP1
E22CDP1
With Conduit Opening in Rear
of Enclosure
Note: For mounting dimensions and limitations see Pages 47-88 and 47-94.
With Safety Yellow Cover
E22CDP1R
2.2 (57)
3.15 (80)
With Conduit Opening in Rear
of Enclosure
1.42 inch (36 mm)
Price
U.S. $
E22CSP1Y
E22CDP1Y
E22CDP1RY
2.2 (57)
3.15 (80)
E22CSP2
E22CDP2
2.2 (57)
3.15 (80)
E22CSP3
E22CDP3
2.2 (57)
3.15 (80)
E22CSP4
E22CDP4
Will Accommodate
Self-Adhesive Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
1.42 inch (36 mm)
Will Accommodate
Self-Adhesive Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
1.18 inch (30 mm)
Will Accommodate
Self-Adhesive Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
47
Vertical 1.38 inch (35 mm)
Horizontal 1.89 inch (48 mm)
3.15 (80)
E22CDP6
3.15 (80)
E22CDP9
Will Accommodate Aluminum
& Plastic Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
Vertical 1.97 inch (50 mm)
Horizontal 1.38 inch (35 mm)
Will Accommodate Aluminum
& Plastic Legend Plates
Listed on Pages 47-79 – 47-81
Yellow covers comply with background requirements for EN418 Safety of Machinery Standard.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-88
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Enclosures
Operator Mounting Dimensions
Table 47-123. Enclosure Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
■
No. of
Elements
Outside Dimension
Mounting
A
B
C
D
E
F
1
2
3 or 4
6
9
2.68 (68)
3.15 (80)
3.15 (80)
4.72 (120)
4.72 (120)
2.96 (75)
4.72 (120)
6.30 (160)
4.80 (122)
7.87 (200)
2.36 (60)
2.36 (60)
2.36 (60)
—
—
3.54 (90)
3.54 (90)
3.54 (90)
3.35 (85)
3.54 (90)
2.24 (57)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
3.54 (90)
3.54 (90)
1.81 (46)
4.09 (108)
5.82 (148)
4.33 (110)
7.40 (188)
F
Front of Panel — See Product
Selection — Components
■ Rear of Panel — See Page 47-94
B
4 Mounting Holes
1.65 (42)
E
C
D
Double Depth
A
Single Depth
Conduit Entry
1 – 4 Element 0.83 (21)
6 & 9 Element 1.02 (26)
1 – 4 Element 0.87 (22)
6 & 9 Element 1.26 (32)
Figure 47-27. Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Enclosure Component Application Table
47
Use the table below to determine which operators will or will not fit in a specific
enclosure. For example, a 50 mm mushroom head pushbutton operator will only
fit in a 1-hole Cutler-Hammer enclosure.
Table 47-124. Enclosure Component Application
Number of Holes in Enclosure
1
2
3
4
6
9
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Mushroom Head Pushbuttons
1.14 inch (29 mm)
1.57 inch (40 mm)
1.97 inch (50 mm)
Push-Pull Operators
1.14 inch (29 mm)
1.57 inch (40 mm)
Selector Switch Operators
Knob
Lever — Vertical
Lever — Horizontal
Key
Illuminated Operators
With Transformer
5-Way Adapter
Over-Sized Yellow Legend Plate
45 mm
70 mm
When installed next to standard-sized operator only.
When installed in the bottom position only.
With conduit entrance at bottom.
With components mounted horizontally.
With components mounted vertically.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-89
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Approximate Dimensions
Note: Approximate dimensions in Inches (mm). For Rear of Panel Extensions. See Table 47-128 on Page 47-94.
Non-illuminated Pushbutton
Components
1.16
(29.5)
0.63 (16)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-28. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Flush
Button
1.16
(29.5)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-29. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia.
Extended Button
1.16
(29.5)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg)
Figure 47-30. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. with
Full Shroud
CA08102001E
Illuminated Pushbutton
Components
1.1
(28)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.4 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-31. E22/EM22 Series 28 mm Dia.
Mushroom Head Button
1.57
(40)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-32. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia.
Mushroom Head Button
1.97
(50)
1.02 (26)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
Figure 47-33. E22/EM22 Series 50 mm Dia.
Mushroom Head Button
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
1.16
(29.5)
0.63 (16)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-34. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Flush
Lens
1.16
(29.5)
0.79 (20)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
Figure 47-35. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia.
Extended Lens
1.16
(29.5)
1.1 (28)
Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg)
Figure 47-36. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia.
Extended Lens with Shroud
47
47-90
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Alternate Action (Push-Push)
Components
1.16
(29.5)
0.60 (15.2)
Table 47-125. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm)
Size/Type of Operator
B
Push-Push Operators up to 1.18 (30) Dia. Including Knob and Key
Operated Selector Switches — except those listed below
3-way adapter
1.18 (30)
1.97 (50)
Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or
Padlockable Cover
3-way adapter
1.38 (35)
1.97 (50)
1.60 (40.6)
Horizontal spacing for one 3-way mounting adapter.
Figure 47-37. E22 Series Non-illuminated Flush
Operator
0.94 1.16
(23.9) (29.5)
0.83 (21.0)
Dimensions
A
A
0.89 (22.5)
+0.02 (0.4)
Diameter
0.13 (3.2)
+
_ 0.01 (0.2)
0.96 (24.3)
+0.02 (0.4)
-0 (0)
B
Notch Mounting
Hole as Shown
1.83 (46.4)
Figure 47-38. E22 Series Non-illuminated
Extended Operator
1.06 1.16
(26.9) (29.5)
0.89 (22.5)
Dia.
0.05
(1.3)
1.18
(30.0) 1.79
(45.5)
0.83 (21.0)
1.83 (46.4)
Figure 47-39. E22 Series Illuminated Flush
Operator
Standard 1.17 (29.8)
Jumbo 1.57 (40.0)
Figure 47-43. Push-Push Nameplate Dimensions
47
1.16
(29.5)
Twist-to-Release, Push-Pull and Key Release Components
0.59 (15)
1.60 (40.6)
1.1
(28)
1.57
(40)
Figure 47-40. EM22 Series Non-illuminated Flush
Operator
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.4 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.94 1.16
(23.9) (29.5)
Figure 47-44. E22/EM22 Series 28 mm Diameter
Twist-to-Release Button
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-46. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia.
Push-Pull Button
0.82 (20.8)
0.94 (23.9)
Figure 47-41. EM22 Series Non-illuminated
Extended Operator
1.06 1.16
(26.9) (29.5)
0.82 (20.8)
1.57
(40)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-45. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia.
Twist-to-Release Button
1.83 (46.4)
1.97
(50)
1.02 (26)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
Figure 47-47. E22/EM22 Series 50 mm Dia.
Push-Pull Button
Figure 47-42. EM22 Series Illuminated Flush
Operator
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-91
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Push-Pull Components —
Non-illuminated Operators
1.57
(40)
1.57
(40)
1.57 (40)
to Remove Key
Ship. Wt. 2.2 oz. (0.06 kg)
0.87 (22)
Figure 47-48. E22/EM22 Series 40 mm Dia. Key
Release Button
Indicating Light Components
1.57
(40)
1.3 (33)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-56. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40
mm Dia. Lens (Spring Return to Center)
1.3 (33)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-52. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position 40 mm
Dia. Button (Maintained)
1.57
(40)
1.16
(29.5)
1.57
(40)
0.63 (16)
Ship. Wt. 0.8 oz. (0.02 kg)
Figure 47-49. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia.
Standard Lens
1.3 (33)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-57. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm
Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to
Center from Pulled Position)
1.3 (33)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-53. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm
Dia. Button (Spring Return to Center)
Non-illuminated Selector
Switches
1.16
(29.5)
0.63 (16)
Ship. Wt. 0.8 oz. (0.02 kg)
1.57
(40)
Figure 47-50. E22/EM22 Series 25 mm Dia. Lens
Insert Version
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-58. E22 Series 2-Position — 45° Throw
— Lever
1.3 (33)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
1.16
(29.5)
0.91 (23)
Ship. Wt. 1.7 oz. (0.05 kg)
0.98
(25)
Figure 47-54. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position 40 mm
Dia. Push-Pull Pushbutton (Spring Return to
Center from Pulled Position)
Push-Pull Components —
Illuminated Operators
0.98
(25)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-51. E22 Series 25 mm Dia. Glass Lens
Figure 47-59. E22 Series 3-Position — 45° Throw
— Lever
1.57
(40)
1.3 (33)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-55. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position 40 mm
Dia. Lens (Maintained)
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-60. E22 Series 2-Position — 45° Throw
— Knob
47
47-92
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
0.79
(20)
0.98
(25)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-61. E22 Series 3-Position — 45°
Throw — Knob
0.79
(20)
1.57 (40)
to Remove
Key
Ship. Wt. 2.7 oz. (0.08 kg)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-71. EM22 Series — 60° Throw —
Lever
Figure 47-66. E22/EM22 Series Key Operated
Illuminated Selector Switches
0.79
(20)
0.98
(25)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-62. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position —
60° Throw — Lever
0.98
(25)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
Figure 47-72. EM22 Series — 60° Throw — Knob
Rotary Cam Selector Switch
Figure 47-67. E22 Series 2-Position — 45° Throw
— Lever
1- or 2-Pole
Block
0.98
(25)
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
47
0.95
(24)
Figure 47-73. Rotary Cam Selector Switch
For each additional (1- or 2-pole) block add
0.47" (12 mm).
0.87 (22)
Figure 47-63. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position —
60° Throw — Lever
2.79
(71)
0.98
(25)
Figure 47-68. E22 Series 3-Position — 45° Throw
— Knob
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-64. E22/EM22 Series 2-Position —
60° Throw — Knob
0.98
(25)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.6 oz. (0.05 kg)
Figure 47-69. E22 Series 2-Position — 60° Throw
— Lever
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Ship. Wt. 1.5 oz. (0.04 kg)
Figure 47-65. E22/EM22 Series 3-Position —
60° Throw — Knob
0.79
(20)
0.87 (22)
Figure 47-70. E22 Series 3-Position — 60° Throw
— Knob
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-93
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Specialty Operators
Joystick
1.0
(25.4)
2.6 (66)
2.76 (70.0)
Dia.
0.89 +0.02 / -0
(22.5 +0.4 / -0)
A
Adjacent
Operator
B
Legend
Plate
0.89 (22.5)
Dia.
Four-Position
Joystick Operator
Adjacent
Operator
Figure 47-74. Potentiometer with Knob Operator
Figure 47-77. Joystick Mounting —
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.73 (44.0)
With Flats
Table 47-126. Minimum Panel Spacing
Between 4-Position Joystick and Adjacent
Operators in Inches (mm)
1.0
(25.4)
Size and Type of Adjacent
Operator
1.1 – 4.9
(28 – 125)
Figure 47-75. Flush Pushbutton Operator with
Mechanical Push Rod
1.28
(32.5)
2.58
(65.5)
0.25
(6.4)
Figure 47-76. Wobble Stick Operator
A
Figure 47-78. Joystick Nameplate Dimensions —
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
B
All types except those listed 2.56
below
(65)
2.56
(65)
Lever selector switches and
40 mm dia. operators
2.76
(70)
3.15
(80)
50 mm dia. operators
2.95
(75)
2.95
(75)
40 mm dia. emergency stop 3.15
pushbutton
(80)
3.15
(80)
Operators with rubber boots 2.76
or padlockable covers
(70)
3.35
(85)
40 mm dia. emergency stop 3.15
pushbutton with 70 mm
(80)
rectangular guard
3.54
(90)
Double head pushbutton
2.76
(70)
3.35
(85)
Four-position joystick
operator
3.94
(100)
3.94
(100)
47
6.41
(162.8)
1.17
(29.8)
6.14
(156.0)
1.17
(29.8)
30°
30°
3.35
(85.1)
3.26
(82.9)
30°
30°
2.17 (55.1)
One
Contact Block
3.00 (76.2)
Two
Contact Blocks
2.17 (55.1)
One
Contact Block
3.00 (76.2)
Two
Contact Blocks
Joystick without Center Lock
Joystick with Center Lock
Figure 47-79. Joystick Operator Dimensions — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
0.04
(1.0)
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-94
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series — Dimensions
Mounting
■
Table 47-127. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm)
Size/Type of Operator
Panel thickness — Inches (mm)
❑ Nominal: 0.27 (6.8)
– Legend plates, aluminum or
plastic: 0.05 (1.3)
– Locating ring: 0.06 (1.5)
– Large yellow round legend
plate: 0.04 (1.0)
– Padlockable cover: 0.06 (1.6)
– Rubber boot: 0.05 (1.3)
❑
Minimum: 0.04 (1.0)
Note: Installation of certain accessories will
increase the total (overall) panel thickness
by the amount shown. The total panel thickness with all accessories installed cannot
exceed the maximum allowable nominal
dimension of 0.27 inch (6.8 mm).
Dimensions
A
A
B
1.18 (30)
1.58 (40)
—
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
Lever Operated Selector Switch Operators
and 1.18 – 1.57 (30 – 40) Dia. Operators
1.77 (45)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50) Dia. Operators
2.16 (55)
2.16 (55)
2.16 (55)
Large Yellow Round Legend Plate — 2.76 (70) Dia.
2.95 (75)
2.95 (75)
2.95 (75)
Pushbutton Operators fitted with Rubber Boots or
Padlockable Cover
3-way adapter
5-way adapter
1.38 (35)
1.58 (40)
—
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
1.97 (50)
All Types up to 1.18 (30) Dia. Including Knob and Key
Operated Selector Switches — except those listed below
3-way adapter
5-way adapter
Horizontal spacing for one 3-way and one 5-way mounting adapter.
Horizontal spacing for two 5-way mounting adapters.
A
0.89 (22.5)
+0.02 (0.4)
Diameter
0.13 (3.2)
+
_ 0.01 (0.2)
0.96 (24.3)
+0.02 (0.4)
-0 (0)
B
Notch Mounting
Hole as Shown
Figure 47-80. Minimum Spacing in Inches (mm)
Dual Contact
Dual
Block Trans.
Block
Contact
Added Added Light Circuit
Block/
Contact
to
to
Light Unit
Unit
Block
Trans. Trans.
Unit
Unit
47
E
D
C
B
A
Figure 47-81. Rear of Panel Extensions
Table 47-128. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B
C
D
E
Single Circuit
Block — Full
Voltage and
Resistor Units
Dual
Circuit,
Contact
Block
Transformer
Light
Unit
Trans. Light
Unit and Single
Circuit
Contact Block
Trans. Light
Unit and Dual
Circuit
Contact Block
2.91 (74)
3.7 (94)
4.3 (110)
3.15 (80)
3.9 (99)
4.5 (115)
Pushbuttons All Types and Push-Pull
2.0 (51)
2.6 (66)
Key, Lever and Knob Selector Switches
2.22 (57)
2.83 (72)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-95
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Ordering Examples
Ordering Complete Devices
Ordering Complete Devices Using Single Composite Catalog Number
All Type E22 and EM22 Pushbuttons
and Indicating Lights can be ordered
as complete devices, with Light Units
and/or Contact Blocks, using a single
composite Catalog Number. The components including operator, Light Unit
and/or Contact Blocks are shipped
unassembled in an overpack bag. To
order, select the required operator
from the component listing on previous pages in this catalog and add
Suffix Codes to the Catalog Number
as listed on Page 47-98.
For illuminated operators, add Light
Unit Suffix Code first, then the Contact
Block Suffix (if required). For nonilluminated operators, simply add
Contact Block Suffix Code to operator
Catalog Number.
Table 47-129. Catalog Numbering System
E22T2 X11 C
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Operator
Ordering Example
Illuminated extended red pushbutton
operator with 120V Transformer Type
Light Unit and two contact blocks
(1NO-1NC) is shown in Table 47-129.
Contact
Blocks
1NO-1NC
Transformer
Light Unit
Example: Individually packaged components shipped in an overpack bag with single composite Catalog Number.
= Composite
Cat. No. E22T2X11C
Operator
Cat. No. E22T2
from Page 47-36
Light Unit
Suffix Code X11
from Table on Page 47-98
Contact Blocks
Suffix Code C
from Table on Page 47-98
Ordering Rotary Cam Selector Switches
Custom Switch Ordering Instructions
To order a custom assembled Rotary
Cam Selector Switch, construct a Catalog Number from Table 47-133 using
the adjacent example and the numbering guide at the bottom for reference.
Switches will accept up to 12 Poles in
any sequence. List the Code Letter or
Numbers for the Circuit Combinations
in the assembly sequence required —
the first circuit designated will be
assembled directly behind the operator
and the remaining Circuit Combinations
will be assembled in the order listed.
■
Wiring terminals accept one or two
20 – 14 AWG (0.5 – 2.5 mm2) solid or
stranded conductors. Torque wiring
terminals to 5 lb-in (0.6 Nm).
■ Rated insulation voltage (U i) is 440V.
■ Rated impulse withstand voltage
(Uimp) is 4kV.
UL 508
CSA C22.2 No. 14
■ IEC 408
■
■
Right
Left
Right & Left
Center
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
■
■
■
Lever/Knob
Key
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Table 47-130. Key Removal Code
Code
■
Up to
■
Key Removal Position
■
Circuit
Combinations
Approvals
Specifications
Rated 10A @ 300V AC
Contacts: silver with gold plating
DOL – motor rating: 120V 1/3 hp
Mechanical Life: 5,000,000 operations
IP65
Wiring terminals rated IP2X
Table 47-131. Maintained
From maintained position only.
Table 47-132. Spring Return
Circuit
Combinations
Up to
Lever/Knob
Key
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-92
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
47-96
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Ordering Examples
Ordering Example — Custom Order — Approx. 2 – 3 Weeks Delivery
Example: Three-Position Key Operated Selector Switch
with Chrome Bezel, having 5 poles assembled in order
as follows:
Key to be removable from center position only.
Base Catalog
Number
Operator
Type
Operator
Mode
Circuit
Combinations
Key
Removal Code
E22Y
D
30
DCDGC
-4
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Complete
Catalog Number
=
E22YD30DCDGC-4
Black levers and knobs are standard. For alternate color, insert Code Letter as sixth
digit from left — Red “R”, Green “G”, Yellow “Y”, White “W”, Blue “V” —
Example: E22YCR20AABBB
Table 47-133. Selection Table
Operator Type
Operator Mode
Code
Letter
Code
Number
Description
Black Bezel
E
Lever Operated
F
Knob Operated
G
Key Operated
Circuit Combinations
(Select Maximum of 12)
Code
Circuit
Letter
Description
Two-Position Selector Switch
20
Chrome Bezel
B
Lever Operated
C
Knob Operated
D
Key Operated
47
Left
Center
Right
—
—
X
O
X
O
—
—
O
X
O
X
Left
Center
Right
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
O
2-Position
Maintained
Center
to Right
25
Left
to Right
Three-Position Selector Switch
30
3-Position
Maintained
31
Spring Return
from Right
and Left
32
Spring Return
Left to Center
Four-Position Selector Switch
A
B
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
1
40
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
V
W
4
5
6
E22Y
Base Operator
Number Type
2
3
4
4-Position
Maintained
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
X
O
X
O
O
X
X
X
—
Operator
Mode
Circuit Combinations
Maximum of 12 Poles
Key Removal Code
from Table 47-130
(if Required)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-97
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Composite Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-134. E22 Catalog Numbering System
Code
Series
E22P
2 N29 X4 C
E22
Plastic Operator
EM22 Metal Operator
Operator Code
(1 to 3 Alphas)
Code
Description
Non-illuminated,
Momentary Pushbutton
P
25 mm Flush Button
E
25 mm Extended Button
M
28 mm Mushroom Button
L
40 mm Mushroom Button
JP
P50 mm Mushroom
(Plastic) Button
J
50 mm Mushroom
(Aluminum) Button
Non-illuminated, Maintained
(Latching) Pushbutton
ML
28 mm Twist-to-Release
LL
40 mm Twist-to-Release
LTA
40 mm Trigger Action
JPL
50 mm Latch-In/Pull-toRelease (Plastic)
JL
50 mm Latch-In/Pull-toRelease (Aluminum)
G
40 mm Key Release Button
LTG
40 mm Keyed Trigger
Action
Non-illuminated,
Push-Pull Pushbutton
29.5 mm, 2-Position
EH
Maintained
29.5 mm, 3-Position
FH
Spring Return Center
ED
40 mm, 2-Position
Maintained
FD
40 mm, 3-Position
Spring Return Center
Non-illuminated,
Push-Push Pushbutton
PP
25 mm Flush Button
EP
25 mm Extended Button
Non-illuminated,
Selector Switches
(Alpha + Digits)
X _ _ _ Knob, 2- and 3-Position
V _ _ _ Lever, 2- and 3-Position
K _ _ _ Key, 2- and 3-Position
Bezel Code
(1 Alpha)
Code
Description
(Blank) Chrome
B
Black (E22 Only)
F
Full Shroud for
Pushbutton
X
Full Shroud for
Illuminated Pushbutton
Color Code – Non-illuminated Operators
(1 Digit)
Code
Description
1
Black
2
Red
3
Green
4
Yellow
5
White
6
Blue
7
Gray
8
Orange
Color Code – Illuminated Operators
(1 to 2 Digits)
Code
Description
0
Clear
2
Red
22
Red (LED)
3
Green
33
Green (LED)
4
Yellow
5
White
6
Blue
66
Blue (LED)
9
Amber
For Illuminated Devices
Use These Operator Codes
PLUS Use Code From Adjacent Chart
Illuminated, Momentary Pushbuttons
N
25 mm Flush Button
T
25 mm Extended Button
Illuminated, Push-Pull Pushbuttons
GH
29.5 mm, 2-Position Maintained
HH
29.5 mm, 3-Position Spring
Return Center
GD
40 mm, 2-Position Maintained
HD
40 mm, 3-Position Spring Return Center
Illuminated, Push-Push Pushbuttons
NP
25 mm Flush Button
TP
25 mm Extended Button
Illuminated, Selector Switches
(Alpha + Digits)
S _ _ _ Knob, 2- and 3-Position
W _ _ _ Lever, 2- and 3-Position
Indicating Lights
H
25 mm Standard Lens
A
25 mm Printable Lens
F
25 mm Glass Lens
Legend Code
(N + Digits)
Code
Description
(Blank) No Legend
N___
Contact Code Alphas
Single
Dual &
Circuit
Blocks
Singles
Configuration
A
—
1NO
B
—
1NC
C
W
1NO/1NC
D
V
2NO
E
—
2NC
F
WA or VB 2NO/1NC
G
WB
1NO/2NC
H
VA
3NO
J
—
3NC
K
—
1NO/1NC Overlapping
S
—
1NO/1NC 3-Position Push-Pull
—
PP
1NO/2NC for Selector Switch
—
RR
2NO/2NC for Selector Switch
DD
VV
4NO
EE
—
4NC
CC
WW
2NO/2NC
CE
WE
1NO/3NC
DAB
VW
3NO/1NC
DDA
VVA
5NO
EEB
—
5NC
DEB
WWB
2NO/3NC
DAE
VWB
3NO/2NC
DDB
VVB
4NO/1NC
EEA
WEB
1NO/4NC
Dual &
Circuit
Dual &
Circuit
Single Configuration
Single
Configuration
VVV
6NO
—
1NO/7NC
—
6NC
VVVVA
9NO
WWW
3NO/3NC
—
9NC
VWW
4NO/2NC
WWWWA
5NO/4NC
VVW
5NO/1NC
WWWWB
4NO/5NC
VVVA
7NO
VWWWA
6NO/3NC
—
7NC
—
3NO/6NC
WWWA
4NO/3NC
VVWWA
7NO/2NC
WWWB
3NO/4NC
—
2NO/7NC
WWWE
2NO/5NC
VVVVB
8NO/1NC
VWWA
5NO/2NC
—
1NO/8NC
VVVB
6NO/1NC
VVVVV
10NO
—
1NO/6NC
—
10NC
VVVV
8NO
WWWWW
5NO/5NC
—
8NC
—
6NO/4NC
WWWW
4NO/4NC
VVWWW
7NO/3NC
WWWF
3NO/5NC
—
3NO/7NC
VWWW
5NO/3NC
VVVWW
8NO/2NC
VVWW
6NO/2NC
—
2NO/8NC
—
2NO/6NC
VVVVW
9NO/1NC
VVVW
7NO/1NC
—
1NO/9NC
Light Source Code
(X + Digits)
Code
Description
Code
Description
X2
Direct Voltage w/6V Lamp
X29 PresTest 380V
X3
Direct Voltage w/12V Lamp
Transformer,
X4
Direct Voltage w/24V Lamp
Prewired 1NO/1NC
X6
Direct Voltage w/48V Lamp
X30 PresTest 440V
X7
Direct Voltage w/60V Lamp
Transformer,
X8
Direct Voltage w/120V Lamp
Prewired 1NO/1NC
X10 120V Resistor w/60V Lamp
X37 6-12V Red LED
X11 120V Transformer w/6V Lamp X38 6-12V Green LED
X12 240V Transformer w/6V Lamp X39 6-12V Yellow LED
X13 415V Transformer w/6V Lamp X40 24V Red LED
X14 480V Transformer w/6V Lamp X41 24V Green LED
X20 PresTest 24V Direct, Prewired X42 24V Yellow LED
1NO/1NC
X43 120V Red LED
X26 PresTest 120V Resistor,
X44 120V Green LED
Prewired 1NO/1NC
X45 120V Yellow LED
X27 PresTest 120V Transformer,
X51 6-12V Blue LED
Prewired 1NO/1NC
X52 24V Blue LED
X28 PresTest 220V Transformer,
X53 48V Red LED
Prewired 1NO/1NC
X54 48V Green LED
Additional Units Available
For use with indicating lights only.
Will have tall lamp/LED for selector switch and push-pull operators. Standard size lamp and LED for all other operators.
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Code
X55
X56
X57
X58
X59
X60
X61
X87
X89
X90
X91
X92
X94
X95
X96
X97
X98
Description
48V Yellow LED
48V Blue LED
60V Red LED
60V Green LED
60V Yellow LED
60V Blue LED
120V Blue LED
48V Orange LED
6-12V White LED
24V White LED
48V White LED
120V White LED
6-12V Orange LED
24V Orange LED
120V Orange LED
60V White LED
60V Orange LED
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
22.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-98
January 2010
E22 and EM22 Series, Suffix Codes
Suffix Codes
Table 47-135. Contact Blocks
Description
Suffix Code
Single or
Combination
of Single
Circuit
Blocks
Dual or
Combination
of Dual with
Single Circuit
Blocks
Component
Reference
Cat. No.
Standard Contact Blocks for All Operators
Except 3-Position Push-Pull and Special Function
1NO
1NC
1NO-1NC
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NO
2NC
1NO-1NC
overlapping
2NO-1NC
2NO-1NC
2NO-1NC
2NC-1NO
2NC-1NO
3NO
3NO
3NC
1NO-3NC
2NO-2NC
3NO-1NC
4NO
A
B
C
—
D
—
E
K
—
—
—
W
—
V
—
—
E22B2
E22B1
E22B2 + B1
E22B11
E22B2 + B2
E22B20
E22B1 + B1
E22B3 + B4
F
—
—
G
—
H
—
J
—
—
—
—
—
WA
VB
—
WB
—
VA
—
WE
WW
VW
VV
E22B2 + B2 + B1
E22B11 + B2
E22B20 + B1
E22B1 + B1 + B2
E22B11 + B1
E22B2 + B2 + B2
E22B20 + B2
E22B1 + B1 + B1
E22B11 + B1 + B1
E22B11 + B11
E22B20 + B11
E22B20 + B20
Special Function Block Combination: For Use with 3-Position Push-Pulls
1NO-1NC
Late Break
1NO-1NO
S
—
E22B1 + B4
T
—
E22B1 + B5
Special Function Block Combination: For Use on Selector Switches
(supplied with external jumper)
1NO-2NC
2NO-2NC
47
—
—
PP
RR
E22B12
E22B11 + B11
Special Function Block Combination: For Use on Trigger-Action
Emergency Stop Pushbuttons
1NC
2NC
1NC-1NO
2NC-1NO
QB
QE
QC
QG
—
—
—
—
E22CB1
E22CB1 + CB1
E22CB11
E22CB1 + CB1 + B2
Can not be used with illuminated devices, push-pulls, twist-to-release
operators or selector switches. Operator plug E22BA2 must be installed.
E22B4 contact block not available for use with 5-way mounting adapter.
Can not be used with illuminated push-push devices. Operator plug
E22BA2P must be installed with non-illuminated devices.
Can not be used on push-push devices.
Table 47-136. Light Units — Standard Size for all Operators Excluding
Selector Switches and Push-Pull Units
Description
Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC —
Without Lamp
With 6V Lamp
With 12V Lamp
With 24V Lamp
With 48V Lamp
With 60V Lamp
Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC —
For Indicating Lights Only
With 120V Lamp
Resistor Type Light Unit AC/DC —
120V/60 Hz
Transformer Type Light Unit AC only —
120V/60 Hz
240V/60 Hz
480V/60 Hz
Neon Light Unit AC only —
120V with Lamp
240V with Lamp
PresTest Light Unit —
Prewired with 1NO-1NC
Contact Blocks — Transformer
Type 120V/60 Hz
Direct Voltage without Lamp
Direct Voltage with 24V Lamp
Resistor Type — 120V
LED Light Units — Direct Voltage
Suffix
Code
Component
Reference
Cat. No.
X1
X2
X3
X4
X6
X7
X8
E22D
E22D6
E22D12
E22D24
E22D50
E22D60
E22D120
X10
E22R2
X11
X12
X14
E22TL1
E22TL2
E22TL4
X15
X16
E22DN120
E22DN240
X27
E22TL1C
X17
E22D0C
E22D24C
X20
E22R2C
X26
See Page 47-70
Resistor unit is not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer
or full voltage LED style.
LED compatible.
Table 47-137. Light Units — For Selector Switch and Push-Pull
Operators Only
Description
Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC —
Without Tall Lamp
With 6V Tall Lamp
With 12V Tall Lamp
With 24V Tall Lamp
With 48V Tall Lamp
With 60V Tall Lamp
Direct Voltage Light Unit AC/DC —
For Indicating Lights Only
With 120V Lamp
Resistor Type Light Unit AC/DC —
120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz
Transformer Type Light Unit AC only —
120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz
240V Tall Bulb/60 Hz
480V Tall Bulb/60 Hz
PresTest Light Unit —
Prewired with 1NO-1NC
Contact Blocks — Transformer
Type 120V Tall Bulb/60 Hz
Direct Voltage without Tall Lamp
Direct Voltage with 24V Tall Lamp
Resistor Type — 120V Tall Lamp
LED Light Units — Direct Voltage
Suffix
Code
Component
Reference
Cat. No.
X1
X2
X3
X4
X6
X7
E22DE
E22DT6
E22DT12
E22DT24
E22DT50
E22DT60
X8
E22D120
X10
E22RT2
X11
X12
X14
E22TL1T
E22TL2T
E22TL4T
X27
E22TLT1C
X17
E22DT0C
E22DT24C
X20
E22RT2C
X26
See Page 47-70
Resistor unit is not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer
or full voltage LED style.
LED compatible.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-99
January 2010
E30 Series
■
Product Description
Contents
Description
Page
Product Description . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and
Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection —
Operators
Square Multifunction
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Square Multifunction
Operators and
Indicating Lights . . . . . . .
Product Selection —
Operator Components
Operating Buttons
Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Buttons and
Lens Only . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operator Lens Only . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Options
Markings and
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47-99
47-99
47-99
47-100
47-101
47-102
The E30 industrial pushbutton and
indicating light line from Eaton’s
electrical business features a wide
selection of square, multifunction
operators which conveniently mount
in a standard 30.5 mm [1-13/64 inches]
diameter panel hole. Up to six input
and indicating functions can be
grouped into a single operating head,
saving valuable panel space. Attractive
square operator styling, coupled with
custom legending of colored buttons
and lenses and many special function
accessories, makes E30 components
ideally suited for use on control consoles and for a variety of industrial
OEM applications.
Features
47-105
47-106
47-107
47-108
Type E30 control units consist of a
basic operator with one or more buttons and lenses and contact block
selection dependent on the specific
operator configuration.
■
47-109
47-112
47-113
47-114
Pushbutton operators will accommodate up to four single depth
stackable contact blocks behind
each operating button, up to eight
circuits maximum.
Indicating lights are supplied
complete with either a transformer
light unit up to 600V AC supply line
voltage or full voltage light unit up
to 120V AC/DC supply line voltage.
■ Combination pushbutton with indicating light operators are supplied
complete with a transformer or full
voltage unit. Contact blocks must be
ordered separately, up to four circuits
maximum.
Die Cast Construction
Each operator has high pressure type
seals to prevent the passage of oil and
other contaminants through the operator into the contact structure or panel
interior. Each operator uses a Buna N
cork gasket between the mounting
flange on the operator and the panel to
maintain oiltightness.
Standards and Certifications
■
■
UL Listed — File No. E131568
CSA Certified — File No. LR68551
Ingress Protection
■
Single and Dual Indicating Lights
❑ UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4,
4X, 12, 13
■
All Other Operators
❑ UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X,
12, 13
47
Multifunction
Operator
Upper Contact Block
Operating Plunger
Quarter Turn Screw —
Mounts Locking Ring to Operator
Gasket
Buttons and Lenses
Supplied Blank or
with Custom Legend(s)
Single Circuit
Contact Block
Retaining Nut
Secures Operator
to Panel
Lower Contact
Block Operating
Plunger
Locking Ring — Supplied with
Operator — Serves as Mount
for Light Element and
Contact Blocks
Transformer or
Full Voltage Light
Element — Supplied
with Operator
E30 Series
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Two Circuit
Contact Block
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-100
January 2010
E30 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Technical Data and
Specifications
Electrical Ratings
Table 47-138. Contact Block
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designation A600 and P300
Climate Conditions
■
A600 (AC)
Terminals
Make and Emergency
Interrupting Capacity (Amps)
Light Units
Normal Load Break (Amps)
■
Continuous Amperes
Terminals are saddle clamp type
for 2 stranded or solid wires up to
12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
■ Torque — 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Contact Block
■
Terminals are saddle clamp type
for 2 stranded or solid wires up to
12 AWG (4.0 mm2)
■ Torque — 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Material
■
47
Description
Operating: -20° to 150°F (-29° to 65°C)
Operator is a zinc base die casting
with a copper-nickel-chrome plated
finish. Withstands the 200 hr. salt
spray test in accordance with MIL
Spec. QQ-M-151A and NEMA 4X
testing. All internal parts, including
shafts, washers and springs, are
made of stainless steel. The buttons
and lenses are made of colorfast,
wear resistant, molded acetal resin.
The contact blocks are made of
molded, heat resistant, mineral
filled phenolic. The contact block
plungers are molded of nylon filled
phenolic. The contacts are silver.
P300 (DC)
120V
240V
480V
600V
24/28V
125V
250V
60
30
15
12
5.73
1.1
0.55
6
3
5.73
1.1
0.55
■
UL A600/P300 nominal connect 10A
1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC, 1NO-1NC, early
make, late break and overlapping
configurations
■ Mechanical positive drive operation
on NC contacts
■ Palladium alloy contact for logic level
or highly corrosive environments
■
Reliability Nibs
These nibs combine a scrubbing action
with high pressure density when the
contacts are closed. They push through
particles and films found on contact
surfaces in industrial environments.
The reliability nibs self-adjust to the
application — dry circuit, normal or
heavy-duty.
1.5
10
1.2
5
Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and
Hostile Atmosphere Applications
■
■
Maximum amperes: 0.5A
Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC
Light Unit
■
Bulbs — average life:
❑ Transformer type: 20,000 hrs.
❑ Resistor/direct voltage type:
2,500 hrs. min. @ rated voltage
❑ LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
Dry Circuit
Medium Duty
Heavy-Duty
Figure 47-82. Reliability Nibs
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-101
January 2010
E30 Series, Operators
Product Selection — Operators
When Ordering a Complete E30 Control Unit Specify
Ordering Example:
■
E30AB
E30KB130
E30KB231
E30KLA1
E30KLA2
Catalog Number of Operator
■ Catalog Number of Button(s)
■ Catalog Number of Contact Block(s)
■ Catalog Number of Accessories (if required)
“START”
“STOP”
1NO
1NC
Square Multifunction Operators
Table 47-139. Single Button Operator/without Button — Order Buttons Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operation
Special Features
Catalog
Number
Momentary
—
E30AA
Price
U.S. $
Button
Type
Button Type
Required
Single Button
Operator shown
with Extended
Button
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
Table 47-140. Two Button Operator/without Buttons — Order Buttons Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operation
Two Button
Operator shown with
Extended Buttons
Special Features
Catalog
Number
Momentary
—
E30AB
Momentary
Momentary
With Mechanical
Interlock
E30AC
Maintained
(All Contacts)
Release
(All Contacts)
Maintained
(All Contacts)
Release
(All Contacts)
Top Button
Bottom Button
Momentary
With Mechanical
Interlock
Price
U.S. $
Button
Type
Button Types
Required
E30AD
E30AP
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
47
Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
Buttons are interlocked so that one of the two is maintained at all times.
Depressing the other button releases the maintained button and maintains the depressed button.
Table 47-141. Two Button Operator with Long (OFF) Release Bar — Includes OFF Bar/Button — Order Other Buttons Separately —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operation
Two Button
Operator shown with
Long Release Bar
Special Features
Catalog
Number
Maintained
—
E30AF
Maintained
Maintained
With Mechanical
Interlock
E30AG
Maintained
Momentary
With Mechanical
Interlock
E30AH
Maintained
(All Contacts)
Maintained
(Bottom Contacts Only)
Top Button Operates
Both Top and
Bottom Contacts
E30AK
Top Button
Bottom Button
Maintained
Price
U.S. $
Button
Type
Button Types
Required
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
Operators are supplied as standard with red extended bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest
Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR100.
Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-105
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-102
January 2010
E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights
Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights
Table 47-142. Two Button Operator with (OFF) Release — Includes OFF Bar/Button(s) — Order Other Buttons Separately —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operation
Top Button
Bottom Button
Maintained
Momentary
Special Features
Catalog
Number
Release Bar for
Top Button
E30AL
Price
U.S. $
Button
Type
Button Types Required
Two Button
Operator shown
with Release Bar
for Top Button
Two Button
Operator shown
with Individual
Release Bars for
Each Button
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
Maintained
Maintained
Individual Release
Bars for Each Button
E30AN
Maintained
with Interlock
Maintained
with Interlock
Individual Release
Bars for Each Button
E30AM
Button Types Required
Order from Table
on Page 47-105
Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest
Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR101.
Table 47-143. Single Indicating Light Unit/without Lens — Order Lenses Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Lens
Type
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
120
6PSB
E30BA
Price
U.S. $
Voltage
Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30BJ
E30BM
Price
U.S. $
Lens Type Required
Single Indicating
Light Unit shown
with Lens
47
Order from Table
on Page 47-106
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Table 47-144. Dual Indicating Light Unit/without Lenses — Order Lenses Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Type of Light Element
Transformer
(60/50 Hertz AC)
Voltage
Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
120
6PSB
E30CA
Price
U.S. $
Voltage
Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30CJ
E30CM
Dual Indicating
Light Unit shown
with Lens
Lens
Type
Full Voltage
(60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Price
U.S. $
Lens Type Required
Order from Table
on Page 47-107
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-112
Buttons and Lens. . . . . . . . . Pages 47-105 – 47-107
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-108
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Replacement Lamps and
Lamp Receptacles . . . . . Page 47-113
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-103
January 2010
E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights
Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights (Continued)
Table 47-145. Single Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Button or Lens — Order Button and Lenses Separately —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operation
(Bottom
Button)
Type of Light Element
Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC)
Catalog
Voltage Lamp
Number Number
Momentary 120
6PSB
Price
U.S. $
E30DA
Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Catalog
Price
Number Number
U.S. $
24
120
24PSB
120PSB
Button/Lens
Type
E30DX3
E30DF
Button and Lens
Types Required
Single Button
Operator and
Indicating Light
shown with
Button & Lens
Order from Tables on
Pages 47-105 and
47-107
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Table 47-146. Single Button Operator with (OFF) Release Bar and Indicating Light — Includes OFF Bar/Button — Order Other Button and Lens
Separately — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operation
(Bottom
Button)
Type of Light Element
Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC)
Catalog
Voltage Lamp
Number Number
Maintained 120
6PSB
Price
U.S. $
E30DG
Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Catalog
Price
Number Number
U.S. $
24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30DX13
E30DM
Button/Lens
Type
Button and Lens
Types Required
Single Button
Operator with
Release Bar and
Indicating Light
shown with
Button & Lens
Order from Tables on
Pages 47-105 and
47-107
These operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact
your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar,
order E30KR101.
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Table 47-147. Two Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Buttons or Lens — Order Buttons and Lenses Separately —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Button
Operation
Two Button
Operator with
Indicating Light
shown with
Button & Lens
Type of Light Element
Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC)
Catalog
Voltage Lamp
Number Number
Price
U.S. $
Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Catalog
Price
Number Number
U.S. $
Momentary 120
6PSB
E30EA
24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30EX3
E30EF
Momentary 120
with
Interlock
6PSB
E30EG
24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30EX13
E30EM
Button/Lens
Type
Button and Lens
Types Required
Order from Tables on
Pages 47-106 – 47-107
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149 on Page 47-104.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons and Lens . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement lamps and
Lamp Receptacles . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-112
Pages 47-105 – 47-107
Page 47-108
Page 47-114
Page 47-113
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-104
January 2010
E30 Series, Operators & Indicating Lights
Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights (Continued)
Table 47-148. Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights/without Buttons and Lenses — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Two Button
Operator with
Dual Indicating
Lights shown
with Button &
Lens
Button
Operation
Type of Light Element
Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC)
Voltage Lamp Catalog
Price
No. Number U.S. $
Momentary
120
6PSB
E30JA
Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC)
Voltage Lamp
Catalog
Price
No.
Number U.S. $
24
120
24PSB
120PSB
E30JX3
E30JF
Button/Lens
Type
Button and
Lens Types
Required
Order from Tables on
Pages 47-106 – 47-107
Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED Part Numbers, see Table 47-149.
Table 47-149. Replacement Lamps — Incandescent and LED
Lamp
Voltage
Incandescent Lamps
Manufacturers
Base
Part Number
Style
6
12
24
28
6PSB
12PSB
24PSB
28PSB
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
48
120
48PSB
120PSB
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
Eaton’s CutlerHammer
Part Number
28-1022
28-1025
28-1026
28-1027
28-1028
28-1029
Price
U.S. $
LED Lamps
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Part Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
35-1523
35-1523-11
35-1523-4
35-1523-4
35-1523-14
35-1523-7
35-1523-17
35-1523-18
35-1523-19
35-1523-19
35-1523-20
35-1523-21
35-1523-2
35-1523-12
35-1523-5
35-1523-5
35-1523-15
35-1523-8
35-1523-3
35-1523-13
35-1523-6
35-1523-6
35-1523-16
35-1523-9
Price
U.S. $
E30 blue LED bulbs may not provide sufficient intensity for some applications.
47
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Buttons and Lens. . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Lamps and
Lamp Receptacles . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-112
Pages 47-105 – 47-107
Page 47-108
Page 47-114
Page 47-113
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-105
January 2010
E30 Series, Components — Operating Buttons
Product Selection — Operator Components
Operating Buttons Only
Table 47-150. Type A Buttons with Standard Markings
Type A
Extended
Button for Use
with Operator
E30AA, Legend
Characters
3/16 Inch
(4.8 mm) High
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Short Button
Color
Catalog
Price Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $ Number
U.S. $
Marking Extended Button
Short Button
Button
Catalog
Price Catalog
Price Application
Number
U.S. $ Number
U.S. $
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Blank
START
Blank
EMERG. STOP
OFF
STOP
Blank
E30KA100
—
E30KA200
E30KA204
E30KA218
E30KA231
E30KA300
START
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KA150
E30KA180
E30KA250
—
E30KA268
E30KA281
E30KA350
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Brown
Orange
Blue
E30KA330
E30KA400
E30KA500
E30KA600
E30KA700
E30KA800
E30KA900
E30KA380
E30KA450
E30KA550
E30KA650
E30KA750
E30KA850
E30KA950
Table 47-151. Type B Buttons with Standard Markings
Type B
Extended
Button for Use
with Operators
E30AB thru AE,
AL and DA thru
DF, Legend
Characters
3/16 Inch
(4.8 mm) High
Color Marking
Extended Button
Short Button
Color
Catalog
Price Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $ Number
U.S. $
Marking
Extended Button
Short Button
Button
Catalog
Price Catalog
Price Application
Number
U.S. $ Number
U.S. $
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E30KB100
E30KB101
E30KB102
E30KB103
E30KB105
E30KB107
E30KB109
E30KB110
E30KB111
E30KB112
E30KB113
E30KB114
E30KB115
E30KB116
E30KB117
E30KB119
E30KB120
E30KB121
E30KB122
E30KB124
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
TEST
UP
Blank
EMER. STOP
OFF
STOP
Blank
START
Blank
Blank
AUTO
HAND
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KB125
E30KB126
E30KB128
E30KB130
E30KB132
E30KB134
E30KB200
E30KB204
E30KB218
E30KB231
E30KB300
E30KB330
E30KB400
E30KB500
E30KB501
E30KB508
E30KB600
E30KB700
E30KB800
E30KB900
Blank
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN
FAST
FORWARD
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
MAN
ON
OPEN
OUT
RAISE
RESET
E30KB150
E30KB151
E30KB152
E30KB153
E30KB155
E30KB157
E30KB159
E30KB160
E30KB161
E30KB162
E30KB163
E30KB164
E30KB165
E30KB166
E30KB167
E30KB169
E30KB170
E30KB171
E30KB172
E30KB174
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Green
Yellow
White
White
White
Gray
Brown
Orange
Blue
E30KB175
E30KB176
E30KB178
E30KB180
E30KB182
E30KB184
E30KB250
—
E30KB268
E30KB281
E30KB350
E30KB380
E30KB450
E30KB550
—
—
E30KB650
E30KB750
E30KB850
E30KB950
Table 47-152. Type C Buttons with Standard Markings
Type C
Extended
Button for Use
with Operators
E30AF thru
AK, AL thru AM
and DG thru
DM, Legend
Characters
1/8 Inch
(3.2 mm) High
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Short Button
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Short Button
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blank
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN
FAST
E30KC100
E30KC101
E30KC102
E30KC103
E30KC105
E30KC150
E30KC151
E30KC152
E30KC153
E30KC155
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
E30KC124
E30KC125
E30KC126
E30KC128
E30KC130
E30KC174
E30KC175
E30KC176
E30KC178
E30KC180
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
FORWARD
HAND
HIGH
IN
INCH
E30KC107
E30KC108
E30KC109
E30KC110
E30KC111
E30KC157
E30KC158
E30KC159
E30KC160
E30KC161
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
TEST
UP
Blank
OFF
STOP
E30KC132
E30KC134
E30KC200
E30KC218
E30KC231
E30KC182
E30KC184
E30KC250
—
E30KC281
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
E30KC112
E30KC113
E30KC114
E30KC115
E30KC116
E30KC162
E30KC163
E30KC164
E30KC165
E30KC166
Green
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blank
START
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KC300
E30KC330
E30KC400
E30KC500
E30KC600
E30KC350
E30KC380
E30KC450
E30KC550
E30KC650
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
MAN
ON
OPEN
OUT
RAISE
E30KC117
E30KC119
E30KC120
E30KC121
E30KC122
E30KC167
E30KC169
E30KC170
E30KC171
E30KC172
Brown Blank
Orange Blank
Blue
Blank
E30KC700
E30KC800
E30KC900
E30KC750
E30KC850
E30KC950
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Blank Lens/Buttons
with Non-standard
Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Button
Application
Page 47-112
Page 47-108
Pages 47-109 – 47-111
Page 47-114
1CD1C
47
47-106
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E30 Series, Components — Operating Buttons & Lenses
Operating Buttons and Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking
BLACK LETTERING on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
WHITE LETTERING on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on Pages 47-109 – 47-111.
Table 47-153. Type E Buttons with Standard Markings
Color
Marking
Extended Button
Catalog
Number
Type E Button for
Use with Operators
E30EA thru EM, FA
thru FM and JA thru
JM, Legend
Characters 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) High
Color
Marking
Price
U.S. $
Extended Button
Catalog
Number
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Blank
CLOSE
DOWN
FAST
FORWARD
E30KE100
E30KE102
E30KE103
E30KE105
E30KE107
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
E30KE124
E30KE125
E30KE126
E30KE128
E30KE130
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
E30KE109
E30KE110
E30KE111
E30KE112
E30KE113
Black
Black
Red
Red
Red
TEST
UP
Blank
OFF
STOP
E30KE132
E30KE134
E30KE200
E30KE218
E30KE231
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
ON
OPEN
E30KE114
E30KE115
E30KE116
E30KE119
E30KE120
Green
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blank
START
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KE300
E30KE330
E30KE400
E30KE500
E30KE600
Black
Black
OUT
PHASE
E30KE121
E30KE122
Brown
Orange
Blue
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KE700
E30KE800
E30KE900
Price
U.S. $
Button
Application
Table 47-154. Type F Lenses with Standard Markings
47
Type F
Lens for
Use with
Operators
E30BA
thru BY,
Legend
Characters 3/16 inch
(4.8 mm) High
Color
Marking
Catalog
Number
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Blank
MOTOR RUN
ON
POWER ON
Blank
E30KF10
E30KF11
E30KF12
E30KF13
E30KF20
Green
Green
MOTOR STOP
MOTOR RUN
E30KF21
E30KF23
Price
U.S. $
Color
Marking
Catalog
Number
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
OFF
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KF22
E30KF30
E30KF40
E30KF50
E30KF60
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Application
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-112
Page 47-108
Page 47-114
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-107
January 2010
E30 Series, Components — Operator Lenses
Operator Lens Only
Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking
BLACK LETTERING on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear.
WHITE LETTERING on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray.
For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on Pages 47-109 – 47-111.
Table 47-155. Type G Lenses with Standard Markings
Type G Lens for Use with
Operators E30CA thru CM and
DA thru DM, Legend Characters
3/16 inch (4.8 mm) High Except
MOTOR RUN, POWER ON &
MOTOR STOP are 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) High
Color
Marking
Catalog
Number
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Blank
MOTOR RUN
ON
POWER ON
Blank
Green
Green
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
Price
U.S. $
Color
Marking
Catalog
Number
E30KG10
E30KG11
E30KG12
E30KG13
E30KG20
Green
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
OFF
READY
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KG22
E30KG23
E30KG30
E30KG40
E30KG50
E30KG24
E30KG21
White
Blank
E30KG60
Color
Marking
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Application
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Application
Price
U.S. $
Lens
Application
Table 47-156. Type J Lenses with Standard Markings
Type J Lens for Use with
Operators E30EA thru EM, FA
thru FM and GA thru GM, Legend
Characters 1/8 (3.2 mm) High
Color
Marking
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Blank
MOTOR RUN
ON
POWER ON
MOTOR STOP
E30KJ10
E30KJ11
E30KJ12
E30KJ13
E30KJ14
Green
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
OFF
ON
Blank
Blank
Blank
E30KJ22
E30KJ24
E30KJ30
E30KJ40
E30KJ50
Green
Green
Green
Blank
MOTOR STOP
MOTOR RUN
E30KJ20
E30KJ21
E30KJ23
White
Blank
E30KJ60
Table 47-157. Type K Lenses with Standard Markings — Sold in pairs only
Color
Type K Lenses for Use with
Operators E30JA thru JW,
Legend Characters 1/8 inch
(3.2 mm) High
Left Hand Lens
Right Hand Lens
Marking
Left Hand Lens
Right Hand Lens
Catalog
Number
Red
Red
Green
Green
Red
Green
Green
Red
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
E30KK12
E30KK13
E30KK22
E30KK23
47
Table 47-158. Type K Lenses — Blank — Sold in pairs only
Color
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Green
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Amber
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Color
Catalog
Number
Left Hand
Lens
Right Hand
Lens
E30KK10
E30KK11
E30KK17
E30KK14
E30KK15
E30KK16
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Blue
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK41
E30KK42
E30KK43
E30KK40
KE30K45
E30KK46
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK21
E30KK20
E30KK27
E30KK24
E30KK25
E30KK26
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Clear
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK51
E30KK52
E30KK53
E30KK54
E30KK50
E30KK56
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK31
E30KK32
E30KK30
E30KK34
E30KK35
E30KK36
White
White
White
White
White
White
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
E30KK61
E30KK62
E30KK63
E30KK64
E30KK65
E30KK60
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-108
January 2010
E30 Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks
Mounting Limitations
Standard Contact Blocks — Molded, phenolic construction.
Enclosed silver contacts with reliability “nibs” that improve
the reliability of switching performance under dry circuit,
corrosive atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more
extreme conditions, the Logic Level contact blocks described
below are recommended.
Figure 47-83 and Table 47-161 give the contact block mounting limitations for Type E30 pushbutton and combination
pushbutton and light operators. Mounting positions 1 thru 8
indicate single depth contact blocks. Each of these positions
can represent either a single circuit 600 volt block or a
2-circuit 120 volt block. The 2-circuit 600 volt block requires
two of the numbered positions shown.
Table 47-159. Standard Contact Block Ratings — Maximum Amperes
Current
AC Volts A600
Make & Emergency
Inter. Capacity
Normal Load Break
DC Volts P300
120
240
480
600
24/28
125
250
60
30
15
12
5.73
1.1
0.55
6
3
1.5
1.2
Continuous Current
5.73
1.1
0.55
10
Logic Level Contact Blocks — Feature palladium contacts.
Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for
voltages and currents approaching zero. When mounted in
an enclosure rated for highly corrosive environments, logic
level contact blocks can be used where exposure to chemicals may cause failure to other types of materials.
Table 47-161. Mounting Positions
Catalog Number
of Operator
E30AA thru E30AM
E30BA thru E30CM
E30DA thru E30DM
E30EA thru E30GM
E30JA thru E30JM
Contact Blocks Can Be Mounted in
Positions Listed Below
1-2-3-4
None
None
2-3-4
3-4
5-6-7-8
None
5-6-7-8
6-7-8
7-8
Upper Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger
1
Maximum Amperes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5A
Maximum Volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120V AC/DC
Logic level contact blocks are UL A600/P500 rated per table above.
Lower Stack
Except Operator E30AD, AJ or AK which will accommodate contact
blocks 1, 2, 5 and 6 only. (See figure below.)
Table 47-160. Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and Hostile
Atmosphere Application
Upper Stack
5
2
6
Upper Contact
Block Stack
3
4
7
8
Contact Block
Mounting
Positions
Lower Contact
Block Stack
Lower Contact Block Stack
Operating Plunger
Figure 47-83. Mounting Positions
Table 47-162. Contact Block Selection Table
Contact Block Type
Circuit
Pressure Terminals
STANDARD
Catalog
Number
47
1NO
Screw Terminals
Quick Connect
Terminals
LOGIC LEVEL
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
STANDARD
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC — Single Circuit
E30KLA1
E30KLAE1
E30KLB1
1NC
E30KLA2
E30KLAE2
E30KLB2
1NO-1NC
600 Volt AC, 250 Volt DC — Two Circuit
E30KLA3
E30KLAE3
E30KLB3
2NO
E30KLA4
E30KLAE4
E30KLB4
2NC
E30KLA5
E30KLAE5
E30KLB5
E30KLA6
—
E30KLB6
2NO
(One Early Closing)
E30KLA7
—
E30KLB7
2NC
(One Late Opening)
E30KLA8
—
E30KLB8
1NO-1NC
120 Volt AC Only — Two Circuit
Special Contact Operation
1NO-1NC
Overlapping
Quick Connect Terminals
E30KLA9
—
E30KLB9
Do not use with maintained operators.
Contacts must be same polarity.
Supplied with non-stacking screws. Limited to 2 contact blocks mounted in positions 1 and 5.
Individually boxed contact blocks master packed 10 per carton.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-109
January 2010
E30 Series, Options — Legend Plates
Options
Markings and Legend Plates
Buttons or Lenses with Non-standard
Horizontal Markings
Markings not listed as STANDARD
MARKINGS below are considered nonstandard. If more than one marking is
required on a button or lens, order
non-standard markings.
Description
Price Per
Pair U.S. $
No. of Characters per Line
Lenses
Buttons
Green Type B button to be marked
with non-standard legend “ALL
ELEVATORS DOWN.”
Line Position
Catalog No.: E30KB300STAMP
Letter Size:
1/8"
Pos. A — ALL
Pos. C — ELEVATORS
Pos. F — DOWN
Specify Catalog Number of blank
button or lens of desired color, plus
Suffix “STAMP” for Non-standard or
“STD” for Standard markings in Order
Price Each
U.S. $
All Types except K
Type K
Ordering Example:
Ordering Instructions
■
Table 47-163. Button Markings
Notes. See Pages 47-105 – 47-107.
Specify size, legend desired and location in Order Notes by alphas as
shown in example.
■ Do not exceed maximum number of
legend characters per line.
■
7
A
8
9
7
C
E
8
8
Figure 47-84. How to Use the Legend
Location Figure
TYPE A BUTTONS AND TYPE F LENSES
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
E
9
9
G
D
8
9
G
8
9
K
8
8
8
9
9
8
J
9
B
8
9
E
8
9
J
8
9
M
8
9
A
8
9
D
8
9
G
8
9
K
8
9
N
8
TYPE F LENS ONLY
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
9
F
9
D
8
9
H
8
8
9
B
8
9
F
8
9
K
8
9
B
8
9
E
8
9
J
8
9
K
8
A
8
C
8
F
8
J
8
L
8
TYPE B BUTTONS AND TYPE G LENSES
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
9
C
8
TYPE C BUTTONS
1/8"
(3 mm)
6 C
High
Char.
5
B
5
D
9
B
8
9
D
8
4
6
4
7
9
7
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
A
C
E
6
9
5
B
5
D
8
B
8
8
D
8
47
8
C
6 C
TYPE K BUTTONS
TYPE D BUTTONS
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
8
8
8
A
C
F
5
5
B
TYPE E BUTTONS AND TYPE J LENSES
1/8"
(3 mm)
9
B
8
High
Char.
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
A
C
7
7
A
C
8
8
6
B
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
1/8"
(3 mm)
High
Char.
9
B 4
E 4
A 4
C 4
D 4
F 4
B
3/16"
(5 mm)
High
Char.
B 4
E 4
8
Figure 47-85. Legend Locations
Table 47-164. Standard Markings
AUTO
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
FORWARD
HAND
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
MAN.
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
RAISE
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SLOW
START
STOP
TEST
UP
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
POWER ON
READY
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-110
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E30 Series, Options — Legend Plates
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM1 OR KM11
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM5 OR KM15
B
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM4 OR KM14
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM6 OR KM16
C
G
D
H
A
B
A
E
A
J
B
F
B
K
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM3 OR KM13
C
B
H
B
F
L
D
M
LEGEND PLATES
E30KM2 OR KM12
K
D
F
G
B
F
M
A
E
L
B
F
M
D
M
B
C
B
M
F
Figure 47-86. Legend Arrangements and Legend Locations
4.69 (119.1) Three Span
3.06 (77.7) Two Span
1.44
(36.6)
One Span
LINE B
L
I
N
E
L
I
N
E
A
C
LEGEND PLATES
E30KN76 OR KN76B
1/8” character size only
with a maximum of six
characters.
0.78
(19.8) 0.39
(9.9)
Large
Standard
0.08 (1.9)
0.05 (1.3)
0.02
(0.5)
47
Legend Plates
Figure 47-87. Legend Plates E30KN76 or KN76B
Figure 47-88. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Table 47-165. Maximum Number and Size of Permissible Legend Characters of Custom Stamped Legend Plates
Type
No.
of
Lines
Size and Maximum Number of Characters Per Line
One Span
3/32"
(2.5 mm)
Two Span
1/8"
(3 mm)
3/16"
(5 mm)
3/32"
(2.5 mm)
Three Span
1/8"
(3 mm)
3/16"
(5 mm
3/32"
(2.5 mm)
1/8"
(3 mm)
3/16"
(5 mm)
Standard
1
13
10
10
30
22
22
47
34
34
Large
1
2
13
13
10
10
10
10
30
30
23
23
23
23
47
47
36
36
36
36
CHARACTERS AVAILABLE FOR NON-STANDARD MARKINGS
3/32 Inch (2.5 mm) — 1/8 Inch (3 mm) — 3/16 Inch (5 mm)
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
./—,
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
1234567890
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-111
January 2010
E30 Series, Options — Legend Plates
Buttons or Lenses with Non-standard
Vertical Markings
Ordering Instructions
■
Specify Catalog Number of blank button or lens of desired color, selected
from listings on Pages 47-105 – 47-107.
■ Specify size, legend desired, location and state “vertically marked” in
Order Notes.
Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 inch (3.2 or
4.8 mm) character height. Do not exceed
maximum number of characters as outlined
in table below.
Ordering Example:
Green Type K button to be marked
with “RUN” “ON.”
Description
Legend Plates
Ordering Example:
Legend plates for Type E30 Compact
Pushbutton and Indicating Light operators hook directly onto the operator
and are clamped in place when the
operator locking nut behind the panel
is secured.
Three span legend plate to be marked
“MASTER CONTROL”, “STATION A”
and “STATION B.”
Two and three span plates are
designed for use where two or more
operators are mounted adjacent to
each other on minimum horizontal
mounting centers. These legend
plates mount in the same manner as
single span units.
Blank Legend Plates and
Legend Plates with Markings
Price Ea.
Catalog No: E30KM3STAMP
Letter Size: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)
Pos. C — MASTER CONTROL
Pos. B — STATION A
Pos. F — STATION B
Table 47-167. Blank Legend Plate
Type
One Span
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Black
Standard
Large
E30KM1
E30KM4
Price Ea.
Catalog No.: E30KK20STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
Vertically Marked
Pos. B — RUN
Pos. E — ON
Standard —
One Span
Table 47-166. Maximum Number of
Characters
Description
Description
Large —
One Span
When Ordering Legend Plates
with Markings
■
Type
Maximum Number of
Characters
1/8 Inch
(3.2 mm)
3/16 Inch
(4.8 mm)
Buttons
A
B
C
D
E
7
7
4
5
7
5
5
3
3
5
Lenses
F
G
J
K
7
7
7
3
5
5
5
2
Catalog Number of Blank Legend
Plate
■ Insert the following in Order Notes:
❑ Legends Required
❑ Size of Characters — 3/32, 1/8,
3/16 inch (2.4, 3.2, 4.8 mm)
❑ Positions of legends on one line
Standard and two line Large legend
plates by alphas as shown in
sketches on following page.
47
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-112
January 2010
E30 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-168. Accessories
Description
Color/Type
Full
Shroud
Catalog
Number
Collar — Snap on Mounting for assembly in the field. Black
Permits color coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x Red
1-19/32 x 9/16".
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Orange
Blue
Brown
E30KR1
E30KR2
E30KR3
E30KR4
E30KR5
E30KR6
E30KR8
E30KR9
E30KR10
Shroud — Similar to collar above except for extension
above the face of button to prevent accidental actuation of button. Half shroud with an extension on only
half the collar may be positioned to protect top or
bottom button.
Full Shroud
(Gray)
E30KT6
Half Shroud
(Gray)
E30KT7
Guard — Two collars deep, removable slide prevents
accidental operation. White slide can be marked with
grease pencil.
Red with
White Slide
E30KR31
Price
U.S. $
Half
Shroud
Red with
Clear Slide
Terminal Block — 2 terminals, each will accommodate
2 wire terminations.
Padlock Attachment for locking single button and
bottom button of multi-function operators in the
depressed position. Locks NC contacts open or
early closing NO contacts closed. Cannot be used in
conjunction w/collar, shroud or boot.
Transparent Boot — Guards against ingress of foreign
material and freezing rain. Note: If this boot is used in
conjunction with operator types AD or AE, an extended
type button must be used in the top position and a
short button in the lower position.
47
Square Hole Plug —
Gray Enameled
Stainless Steel
E30KR32
E30KR30
Short
Button
E30KT1
Extended
Button
E30KT2
E30KT3
E30KT4
E30KT5
Lamp and Lens Removal Tool — Will not fit
Cat. No. E30B Light Units listed on Page 47-102.
E30KV1
Octagonal Wrench for mounting operators to panel.
E22CW
Button and Lens Removal Tool
E30KV2
Color coordinating collars, padlock attachments or legend plates cannot be used with operators equipped with a transparent boot.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-114
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
47-113
January 2010
E30 Series, Accessories — Replacement Parts
Replacement Parts
Table 47-169. Replacement Light Units for E30 Components
Voltage
AC and DC
Part Numbers — Receptacles without Lamps
Single
Indicating Light
Price
U.S. $
Dual
Indicating Light
Price
U.S. $
Single Light
Single Pushbutton
Price
U.S. $
Single Light
Dual Pushbutton
Price
U.S. $
Dual Light
Dual Pushbutton
Price
U.S. $
Full Voltage Type
6V
12V
18/24V
28V
32V
48V
120V
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568-2A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2568-2A
57-2568A
57-2568A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
—
57-2579-3A
57-2579-3A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
57-2567A
42-2672A
42-2672-2A
42-2672-3A
42-2672-4A
42-2672-5A
42-2672-6A
42-2663A
42-2663-2A
42-2663-3A
42-2663-4A
42-2663-5A
42-2663-6A
42-2663A
42-2663-2A
42-2663-3A
42-2663-4A
42-2663-5A
42-2663-6A
42-2671A
42-2671-2A
42-2671-3A
42-2671-4A
42-2671-5A
42-2671-6A
42-2664A
42-2664-2A
42-2664-3A
42-2664-4A
42-2664-5A
42-2664-6A
28-1010
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
28-1010
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
28-1010
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
Transformer Type
120V
208V
240V
380V
480V
600V
Description and Part Numbers — Related Parts
Inner Lens
Retaining Nut
Gasket
Locking Ring
28-1008
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
28-1010
15-1885
16-2092
52-1116
Table 47-170. Replacement Lamps for E30 Illuminated Operators
Mfg. Lamp
Type
Voltage Base Style
Application
Part
Number
6PSB
6V
T2 Slide
E30 Transformer and Full Voltage
28-1022
12PSB
24PSB
28PSB
48PSB
60PSB
120PSB
12V
24V
28V
48V
60V
120V
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
T2 Slide
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
E30 Full Voltage
28-1025
28-1026
28-1027
28-1028
28-1598
28-1029
T3-1/4 Wedge
E30 Single Transformer
28-949
#259
6.3V
Price
U.S. $
47
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-114
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E30 Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
0.53
(13.5)
1.75
(44.5)
0.81
(20.6)
1.72
(43.7)
1.72
(43.7)
2 Circ.
Cont. Blocks
Plunger
Extends to
0.25 (6.4)
0.81
(20.6)
0.53
(13.5)
1.75
(44.5)
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
0.88
(22.4)
1.88
(47.8)
1.47
(37.3) 0.63 (16)
Std.
Square
Button
0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button
Panel
0.88 0.88
0.06 (1.5) Min.
0.25 (6.4) Max. (22.4) (22.4)
1 Circ.
Cont. Blocks
Pushbutton Operators
0.53
(13.5)
1.75
(44.5)
0.81
(20.6)
1.13
(28.7)
Transformer
Types DA – DL
0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4)
Plunger Extends
Panel
0.84
to 0.25 (6.4) on
0.06 (1.5) Min.
(21.3)
0.25 (6.4) Max. Contact Blocks
Combination Pushbutton & Indicating Light Operators
Operator
Types E30EA
– E30GM
Operator
Types E30JA
– E30JW
Transformer
or Full Voltage
Light Element
Panel
Plungers
0.06 (1.5) Min.
Extended
0.25 (6.4) Max. to 0.25 (6.4)
Combination Pushbutton & Indicating Light Operators
Full Voltage
Types DF,
DM and DX
0.88
(22.4)
1.88
(47.8)
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1.72
(43.7)
1.47
(37.3)
Square
1.72
(43.7)
0.84
(21.3)
0.53
(13.5)
1.75
(44.5)
0.81
(20.6)
1.13
(28.7)
1.72
(43.7)
0.88
(22.4)
1.88
(47.8)
Operator
Types E30BA
– E30BM
Operator
Types E30CA
– E30CM
1.47
(37.3)
Square
Panel
0.84
0.06 (1.5) Min.
(21.3)
0.25 (6.4) Max.
Indicating Light Operators
47
0.69
(17.5)
1.63
(41.3)
0.5 (12.7)
0.75
(19.1)
1.44
(36.6)
0.11 (2.8)
Max.
2.25
(57)
ø 1.20 (30.5)
Drilling Dimensions – Minimum Spacing
0.31 (7.9)
Dia. Hole
Padlocking Attachment
0.6
(15)
1.59
(40.4) 0.56
(14.2)
1.13
(28.7)
Drill .14
(3.5)
Half Shroud E30KT7
Figure 47-89. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Drilling Dimensions — Minimum Spacing
Dimensions shown allow adequate
space for the addition of one or two
high legend plates and color coordinating collars.
Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.136"
(3.5 mm) drill. Alternate to drilling mounting
holes use Greenlee Tool Co. punch (No.
730-S) to punch the hole and (No. 730-K)
to punch the notch.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-115
January 2010
10250T Series
Product Description
Contents
Description
Page
Product Description . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Operation . . . . . . . . .
Standards and
Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point-of-Purchase
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Non-illuminated
Momentary Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Momentary
Pushbutton Units. . . . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons
and Indicating Lights. . . .
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . .
Selector Switch
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch
Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Selector
Switch Operators. . . . . . .
Joysticks Units . . . . . . . . . .
Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roto-Push® Units. . . . . . . .
Roto-Push Operators . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Options
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering Complete
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47-115
47-116
47-116
47-116
47-116
47-116
47-117
47-118
47-119
Grounding Nibs
The 30.5 mm pushbutton line features
a zinc die cast construction with
chrome-plated housing and mounting
nut. The same durable construction is
also available with the corrosive resistant E34 line of pushbuttons. See E34
section on Pages 47-166 – 47-189.
10250T line operators have “grounding
nibs” — four metal points on the operator casting designed to bite through
most paints and other coatings on
metal panels to enhance the ground
connection when the operator is
securely tightened.
Grounding
Nibs
Reliability Nibs
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® contact
blocks feature enclosed silver contacts
with pointed “reliability nibs” for reliable performance from logic level up
to 600V. To ensure reliable switching,
nibs bite through oxide which can form
on silver contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level blocks
for most applications.
Grounding Nibs
Diaphragm Seal with Drainage Holes
Liquid Drainage
47-122
47-123
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer pushbutton
operators offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut,
these holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which can prevent
operation in freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm seal,
ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4.
Dry Circuit
47-124
47-125
Medium Duty
47-126
47-128
47-129
47-132
Heavy-Duty
Figure 47-90. Reliability Nibs
47-133
47-135
47-138
47-139
47-139
47-142
47-143
47-148
Reliability nibs improve performance
in dry circuit, corrosive, fine dust and
other contaminated atmospheres.
Under normal environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage
is 5V and the minimum operational
current is 1 mA, AC/DC. For operation
under a wider range of environmental
conditions, logic level contact blocks
with inert palladium tipped contacts
are recommended.
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Flexible
Diaphragm
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Colorfast
Molded
Button
Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut
47-151
47-153
47-155
47-157
47-159
47-160
Figure 47-91. Diaphragm Seal
Terminal Clamps Shipped
Ready to Wire
47-163
47-164
Mounting Nut
Legend Plate
Operator
Color Coded Plungers
Red = NC Green = NO
10250T Series
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Stackable Contact
Blocks up to 12
Circuits per Operator
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-116
January 2010
10250T Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Features
■
Benefits
Life
❑ Pushbuttons: 10 x 10 6 operations
❑ Contact blocks: 10 x 10 6 operations
❑ PresTest units: 10 x 10 6 operations
❑ Lever and key selector switches:
0.25 x 10 6 operations
❑ Twist to release pushbuttons:
0.3 x 10 6 operations
■ Shock resistance
❑ Duration: 20 mS ≥ 5g
■
Climate Conditions
■
Heavy-duty zinc die cast construction
■ Enclosed silver contacts with
reliability nibs
■ Diaphragm seals with drainage
holes
■ Grounding nibs on the operator
casing
Reliability nibs improve contact
reliability even under dry circuit and
fine dust conditions
■ Drainage holes prevent buildup of
liquid inside the operator which
can prevent operation in freezing
environments
■ Grounding nibs bit through paint
and other coatings to provide
secure ground
Electrical Ratings
■
■
Short Circuit Coordination to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
■
Rated conditional short circuit current: 1 kA
■ Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA
10, Red Spot Type gG, 10A,
660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
■
Operating Temperature: 1° to 150°F
(-17° to 66°C)
■ Storage Temperature: -40° to 176°F
(-40° to 80°C)
■ Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m)
■ Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60°C
Fuse
■
UL rating: A600, P600
❑ AC load life duty cycle
1200 operations/hour
– 10A: 110V pf 0.4 – 1 x 10 6
operations
– 5A: 250V pf 0.4 – 1 x 10 6
operations
– 2A: 660V pf 0.4 – 1 x 10 6
operations
■
Switching capacity
❑ AC15 rated make/break
(11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
– 6A: 120V pf 0.3
– 4A: 240V pf 0.3
– 2A: 660V pf 0.3
Terminals
■
Contact Operation
Slow make and break. All normally
closed contacts have positive opening
operation, i.e., normally closed contacts
are forced open in the event of contact
weld or spring breakage.
Standards and Certifications
■
47
CE EN60947-5-1
UL 508 — File No. 131568
■ CSA C22.2 No. 14 — File No. LR68551
■
Ingress Protection
When mounted in similarly rated
enclosure —
■
Standard Indicating Lights
❑ UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4,
4X, 12, 13
❑ IEC IP65
■
All Other Operators
❑ UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X,
12, 13
❑ IEC IP65
Technical Data and
Specifications
Mechanical Ratings
■
Frequency of operation
❑ All pushbuttons:
6000 operations/hr.
❑ Key and lever selector switches:
3000 operations/hr.
❑ Auto-latch devices:
1200 operations/hr.
Insulation: Ui = 660V AC or DC
Thermal: lth = 10A
Marking
❑ NC-NO on the contact block to meet
the NEMA requirements. Dual
marking system 1 – 2 for normally
closed, 3 – 4 for normally open to
meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005)
■ Clamps
❑ Terminals are saddle clamp type
for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14
AWG (2.5 mm2) conductors
■ Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
■
Degree of protection against
direct electrical contact: IP2X
with fingerproof shroud
❑
Light Units
■
Transformers: will withstand short
circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60997-5-1
■ Bulbs — average life
❑ Transformer type: 20,000 hrs.
❑ Resistor/direct voltage type:
2500 hrs. minimum @ rated V
❑ LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
■
DC13 rated make/break
(1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
– 1.0A: 125V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– .55A: 250V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– .1A: 660V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– 10A: 110V pure resistive
Maximum ratings for logic level
and hostile atmosphere application
❑ Maximum amperes: 0.5A
❑ Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC
Table 47-171. Contact Block
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Description
Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz
120
Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity (Amp)
Normal Load Break (Amp)
Thermal Current (Amp)
Voltamperes:
Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity
Normal Load Break
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
60
6
10
240
30
3
10
480
15
1.5
10
7200 7200 7200
720 720 720
Volts DC
600
12
1.2
10
7200
720
24/28 125
5.7
5.7
5.0
138
138
1.1
1.1
5.0
138
138
250
0.55
0.55
5.0
138
138
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-117
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Stations Point-of-Purchase Packaging
Point-of-Purchase Packaged
Pilot Devices
Table 47-172. 10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices
Product
Description
Catalog
Number
Red Non-illuminated
Push-Pull
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
10250T5B62-1-POP
Red Mushroom
Pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved
legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP.
10250T32R-POP
Red Jumbo
Mushroom Pushbutton
Engraved EMERG. STOP with 1NO-1NC contact block.
10250T33-POP
Black Flush
Pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two
square engraved legend plates: START and JOG.
10250T30B-POP
Red Extended
Pushbutton
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes one square engraved
legend plate: STOP.
10250T31R-POP
Red Indicating LIght
Full voltage 24V AC/DC with two extra lenses: Green and Amber.
Also includes two square engraved legend plates: RUN and JOG.
10250T206NC1N-POP
Red Indicating Light
Resistor 120V AC/DC with two extra lenses: Green and Amber.
Also includes one square engraved legend plate: RUN and JOG.
10250T34R-POP
Red Illuminating
Pushbutton
Full voltage 24V AC/DC with 1NO-1NC contact block and two extra lenses:
Green and Amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
10250T476C21-1-POP
Red Illuminating
Pushbutton
Resistor 120V AC/DC with 1NO-1NC contact block and two extra lenses:
Green and Amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: POWER ON.
10250T411C21-1-POP
Black Knob Two-Position
Selector Switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes three square engraved
legend plates: OFF/ON, HAND/AUTO and RUN/JOG.
10250T20KB-POP
Black Knob ThreePosition Selector Switch
1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes 1 square engraved
legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO.
10250T22KB-POP
Price
U.S. $
Emergency Stop Operators
Momentary Pushbuttons
Indicating Lights
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Selector Switches
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-118
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Momentary Pushbutton Units
Product Selection
Non-illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
■
Flush, Extended, Mushroom Head or Jumbo Mushroom Head Operators
Table 47-173. Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact
Type
Button Color
Extended Button
Mushroom Button
Jumbo Mushroom
Flush Button — Black
Cat. No. 10250T23B
Extended Button — Red
Cat. No.10250T31R
Mushroom Button — Red
Cat. No.10250T32R
Jumbo Mushroom — Red
Cat. No.10250T17213-3
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
1NO
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T23B
10250T23R
10250T23G
10250T23Y
—
10250T25B
10250T112-53
10250T25G
10250T25Y
—
10250T26B
10250T122-53
10250T26G
10250T26Y
—
10250T27B
10250T172-53
10250T27G
10250T27Y
10250T17213-53
1NC
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T101-51
10250T102-51
10250T103-51
10250T104-51
—
10250T111-51
10250T25R
10250T113-51
10250T120-51
—
10250T121-51
10250T26R
10250T123-51
10250T124-51
—
10250T171-51
10250T27R
10250T173-51
10250T174-51
10250T29
1NO-1NC
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T30B
10250T30R
10250T30G
10250T30Y
—
10250T31B
10250T31R
10250T31G
10250T31Y
—
10250T32B
10250T32R
10250T32G
10250T32Y
—
10250T33B
10250T33R
10250T33G
10250T33Y
10250T33
2NO
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T101-2
10250T102-2
10250T103-2
10250T104-2
—
10250T111-2
10250T112-2
10250T113-2
10250T120-2
—
10250T121-2
10250T122-2
10250T123-2
10250T124-2
—
10250T171-2
10250T172-2
10250T173-2
10250T174-2
10250T17213-2
2NC
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
10250T101-3
10250T102-3
10250T103-3
10250T104-3
—
10250T111-3
10250T112-3
10250T113-3
10250T120-3
—
10250T121-3
10250T122-3
10250T123-3
10250T124-3
—
10250T171-3
10250T172-3
10250T173-3
10250T174-3
10250T17213-3
47
Flush Button
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-119
January 2010
10250T Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components
Pushbuttons
Note: To order complete assembled unit
using one composite Catalog Number, add
Contact Block and Legend Plate Suffix to the
end of Operator Catalog Number.
Example: 10250T101-1TS33
Table 47-174. Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color
Catalog
Number
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
10250T101
10250T102
10250T103
10250T104
10250T105
10250T106
10250T108
10250T109
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
10250T111
10250T112
10250T113
10250T120
10250T116
10250T118
10250T119
Price
U.S. $
Flush Button
Operator
10250T101
Extended Button
Half Shrouded Button
Vertical
Horizontal
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
10250T501
10250T502
10250T503
10250T504
10250T505
10250T506
10250T508
10250T509
10250T511
10250T512
10250T513
10250T514
10250T515
10250T516
10250T518
10250T519
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
10250T121
10250T122
10250T123
10250T124
10250T129
Contact Block
10250T1
Mushroom Button
Legend Plate
10250TS33
Jumbo Mushroom Button
Black
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Yellow
10250T171
10250T172
10250T17213
10250T173
10250T174
Low Operating Force — Jumbo Mushroom
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Clear
10250ED1164-2
10250ED1164-3
10250ED1164-4
10250ED1164-5
10250ED1164
To order operator with factory assembled Extended Retaining Nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel
applications, add Suffix Letter E to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T101E
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Operating Force — Standard = 2.4 lb; Low Force = 1.6 lb.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-120
January 2010
10250T Series, Interlocked and Padlockable Components
Pushbuttons (Continued)
Table 47-175. Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Description
Catalog
Number
Minimum hole centers 1.62", maximum 250".
Mounts in extra deep enclosures only.
Black flush and green flush
Black flush and long red
Black flush and red mushroom head
Black flush and lock-down red mushroom head
10250TA66
10250TA67
10250TA68
10250TA69
Black flush and red jumbo mushroom head
Green flush and long red
Black long and long red
Green flush and red mushroom head
Green flush and black flush
10250TA76
10250TA72
10250TA73
10250TA77
10250TA75
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Adjustable
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
0.88 (22.4)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block
1.07
(27.2)
0.89
(22.6)
NC contacts must be mounted behind lock-down mushroom head operator to ensure lockout.
Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments
The following pushbutton and mushroom operators include an integral
padlock attachment for applications
requiring lockout/tagout of specific
machine functions. They are available
in styles which allow locking
of a button in the down position
Table 47-176. Padlockable in the Down Position
47
(stopped position) or locking a button
in the up position (to prevent starting).
Select the “Hand” latch type which
functions as a momentary pushbutton
until the operator presses the button
and moves the padlock attachment
into position for locking, or choose the
—
“Spring Loaded” latch type where the
padlock attachment springs into place
when the button is pressed. Units
accept a customer supplied 1/4"
padlock.
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator
Type
Color
Latch Type
Catalog
Number
Flush Head
Red
Hand
10250TA16
Mushroom
Head
Red
Red
Hand
Spring Loaded
10250TA42
10250TA45
Jumbo
Head
Red
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Hand
Spring Loaded
Spring Loaded
10250TA52
10250TA55
10250ED952
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.13
(28.7)
1.78
(45.2)
2.03
(51.6)
1.09
(27.7)
2.0
(50.8)
Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included.
Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists.
Table 47-177. Padlockable in the Up Position — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Type Color
Latch Type
Catalog
Number
Mushroom
Head
Hand
Hand
10250TA41
10250TA43
Black
Green
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2.5 (63.5)
1.63
(41.4)
2.0 (50.8)
1.75
(44.5)
1.5
(38.1)
Jumbo
Mushroom
Head
Black
Green
Yellow
Hand
Hand
Hand
10250TA51
10250TA53
10250TA54
2.31
(58.7)
2.38
(60.5)
1.75
(44.5)
2.5 (63.5)
Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included.
Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists.
Note: Hand Attachment must be manually
moved into place for locking. Spring
Loaded: when operator is pressed — attachment springs into place. Must be moved
manually to release button.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-121
January 2010
10250T Series, Special Pushbutton Components
Pushbuttons (Continued)
Key Pushbutton Operator
These devices incorporate an integral
locking mechanism which enables
locking units in various positions
(Locked Down), locking units to prevent operation (Locked Up) or setting
unit to lock when the button is pressed
(Push to Lock), requiring the key to be
inserted to return to normal operation.
With the key in the center position,
these operators function as a normal
momentary pushbutton (Free).
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks
for Key Operators Below
Table 47-178. Replacement Keys
Listed operators have identical locks
and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog
Number 10250ED824. For dissimilar
lock and key combinations, see listing
on Page 47-136.
Description
Catalog
Number
Replacement Keys
(Code H661)
10250ED824
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-179. Key Pushbutton Operator — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Key Position and
Pushbutton Operations
C
L
R
Key
Removal
Positions
Vertical
Mounting
Catalog
Number
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Price
U.S. $
3-Position
Lock Up
Lock Up
Lock Up
Free
Free
Free
Lock Down
Lock Down
Lock Down
All
L and R
C and R
10250T430
10250T431
10250T432
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
Free
—
—
Lock Down
Lock Down
Push to Lock
Push to Lock
L and C
L
C and R
R
C and R
R
10250T433
10250T434
10250T435
10250T436
10250T437
10250T438
1.13
(28.7)
1.38
(35.1)
2-Position
Lock Up
Lock Up
—
—
—
—
1.5
(38.1)
Key Operated
Pushbutton
Horizontal mounting available on request.
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator
Table 47-180. Operator Only with Button — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Description
Catalog
Number
Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator with Red
Mushroom Head Button
10250ED1043-4
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
0.24 (6)
0.86
(21.8)
47
1.55 (39.3)
Spring Return
2.37 (60.3)
Auto-Latch
1.5
(38.1)
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Page 47-148
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-122
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units
■
LED or Incandescent
Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■ Plastic Lenses
■
24V Full Voltage
Illuminated Pushbutton — Red
Catalog Number 10250T476C21-53
Table 47-181. Illuminated Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Color
Illuminated Pushbutton
1NO
1NO-1NC
Catalog
Number
LED
Incandescent
Full
Voltage
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
24V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T397LRD24-53
10250T397LGD24-53
10250T397LAD24-53
10250T397LYD24-53
10250T397LLD24-53
10250T397LWD24-53
10250T397LRD24-1
10250T397LGD24-1
10250T397LAD24-1
10250T397LYD24-1
10250T397LLD24-1
10250T397LWD24-1
10250T397LRD24-51
10250T397LGD24-51
10250T397LAD24-51
10250T397LYD24-51
10250T397LLD24-51
10250T397LWD24-51
120V
AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T397LRD2A-53
10250T397LGD2A-53
10250T397LAD2A-53
10250T397LYD2A-53
10250T397LLD2A-53
10250T397LWD2A-53
10250T397LRD2A-1
10250T397LGD2A-1
10250T397LAD2A-1
10250T397LYD2A-2
10250T397LLD2A-1
10250T397LWD2A-1
10250T397LRD2A-51
10250T397LGD2A-51
10250T397LAD2A-51
10250T397LYD2A-51
10250T397LLD2A-51
10250T397LWD2A-51
Transformer
120V
AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T411LRD06-53
10250T411LGD06-53
10250T411LAD06-53
10250T411LYD06-53
10250T411LLD06-53
10250T411LWD06-53
10250T411LRD06-1
10250T411LGD06-1
10250T411LAD06-1
10250T411LYD06-1
10250T411LLD06-1
10250T411LWD06-1
10250T411LRD06-51
10250T411LGD06-51
10250T411LAD06-51
10250T411LYD06-51
10250T411LLD06-51
10250T411LWD06-51
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T476C21-53
10250T476C22-53
10250T476C43-53
10250T476C23-53
10250T476C24-53
10250T476C25-53
10250T476C26-53
10250T476C21-1
10250T476C22-1
10250T476C43-1
10250T476C23-1
10250T476C24-1
10250T476C25-1
10250T476C26-1
10250T476C21-51
10250T476C22-51
10250T476C43-51
10250T476C23-51
10250T476C24-51
10250T476C25-51
10250T476C26-51
#757
Resistor
120V
AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T471C21-53
10250T471C22-53
10250T471C43-53
10250T471C23-53
10250T471C24-53
10250T471C25-53
10250T471C26-53
10250T471C21-1
10250T471C22-1
10250T471C43-1
10250T471C23-1
10250T471C24-1
10250T471C25-1
10250T471C26-1
10250T471C21-51
10250T471C22-51
10250T471C43-51
10250T471C23-51
10250T471C24-51
10250T471C25-51
10250T471C26-51
120MB
Transformer
120
AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T75R
10250T75G
10250T75A
10250T75Y
10250T75B
10250T75C
10250T75W
10250T76R
10250T76G
10250T76A
10250T76Y
10250T76B
10250T76C
10250T76W
10250T77R
10250T77G
10250T77A
10250T77Y
10250T77B
10250T77C
10250T77W
#755
47
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
1NC
Bayonet
Base
For flashing module Catalog Number 10250TFL1, add Suffix Code FM to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T75RFM.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-123
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light Units
■
LED or Incandescent
Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■ Standard and PresTest Types
■ Plastic Lenses
■
PresTest — This device incorporates a
press-to-test feature whereby depressing the lens disconnects the light from
the source being monitored and connects the lamp to a continuously energized circuit for immediate detection
of faulty lamps.
Table 47-182. Indicating Light Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Lamp
LED
Type
Full Voltage
Transformer
Incandescent
Voltage
Color
Indicating Light
PresTest
24V Full Voltage
Indicating Light — Red
Catalog Number 10250T206NC1N
120V AC Transformer
PresTest — Green
Catalog Number 10250T74NG
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T197LRP24
10250T197LGP24
10250T197LAP24
10250T197LYP24
10250T197LLP24
10250T197LWP24
10250T297LRP24
10250T297LGP24
10250T297LAP24
10250T297LYP24
10250T297LLP24
10250T297LWP24
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T197LRP2A
10250T197LGP2A
10250T197LAP2A
10250T197LYP2A
10250T197LLP2A
10250T197LWP2A
10250T297LRP2A
10250T297LGP2A
10250T297LAP2A
10250T297LYP2A
10250T297LLP2A
10250T297LWP2A
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
White
10250T181LRP06
10250T181LGP06
10250T181LAP06
10250T181LYP06
10250T181LLP06
10250T181LWP06
10250T221LRP06
10250T221LGP06
10250T221LAP06
10250T221LYP06
10250T221LLP06
10250T221LWP06
LED/Lamp
Number
Price
U.S. $
Bayonet
Base
47
Full Voltage
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T206NC1N
10250T206NC2N
10250T206NC19N
10250T206NC3N
10250T206NC4N
10250T206NC5N
10250T206NC6N
10250T235NC21
10250T235NC22
10250T235NC43
10250T235NC23
10250T235NC24
10250T235NC25
10250T235NC26
#757
Resistor
120V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T201NC1N
10250T201NC2N
10250T201NC19N
10250T201NC3N
10250T201NC4N
10250T201NC5N
10250T201NC6N
10250T231NC21
10250T231NC22
10250T231NC43
10250T231NC23
10250T231NC24
10250T231NC25
10250T231NC26
120MB
Transformer
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250T34R
10250T34G
10250T34A
10250T34Y
10250T34B
10250T34C
10250T34W
10250T74NR
10250T74NG
10250T74NA
10250T74NY
10250T74NB
10250T74NC
10250T74NW
#755
Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well.
For flashing lamp add letter F to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T34RF.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Page 47-157
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-124
January 2010
10250T Series, Illuminated Components
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
■
■
LED or Incandescent
Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer Type
Table 47-183. Operators without Lens
Light Unit Type Type
Voltage Illuminated
Pushbutton
Catalog
Number
Incandescent
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage
AC/DC
PresTest
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Master Test
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
LED/Lamp
Number
Price
U.S. $
6
12
24
32
48
10250T473
10250T474
10250T476
10250T477
10250T478
10250T203N
10250T204N
10250T206N
10250T207N
10250T208N
10250T232N
10250T233N
10250T235N
10250T238N
10250T239N
—
—
—
—
—
#755
#756
#757
#1828
#1835
Resistor
AC/DC
120
240
10250T471
10250T472
10250T201N
10250T202N
10250T231N
10250T240N
—
—
120MB
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
10250T416
10250T411
10250T422
10250T419
10250T413
10250T414
10250T415
—
10250T181N
10250T182N
10250T198N
10250T183N
10250T184N
10250T185N
—
10250T221N
10250T222N
—
10250T223N
10250T224N
10250T225N
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
#755
Neon
AC/DC
120
240
—
—
10250T226N
10250T227N
—
—
—
—
NE51H-R22
NE51H-R68
Solid-State
50/60 Hz Only
120
—
—
—
10250T189N
120MB
Full Voltage
—
10250T397L
10250T197L
10250T297L
—
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
10250T416L
10250T411L
10250T412L
10250T419L
10250T413L
10250T414L
10250T415L
—
10250T181L
10250T182L
10250T198L
10250T183L
10250T184L
10250T185L
—
10250T221L
10250T222L
—
10250T223L
10250T224L
10250T225L
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Bayonet
Base
47
Price
U.S. $
Indicating Light
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color. See Page 47-157 for LED Selection and Page 47-165 for Catalog
Numbering System.
Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T181NF.
Resistant to shock and vibration. For best illumination use amber, yellow or clear lens.
Table 47-184. Indicating and Master Test Lenses
Color
Plastic
Catalog
Number
Plastic
Glass
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Table 47-186. PresTest Lenses
Glass
Color
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
10250TC1N
10250TC2N
10250TC19N
10250TC3N
10250TC4N
10250TC5N
10250TC6N
Plastic
Price
U.S. $
10250TC7N
10250TC8N
10250TC9N
—
10250TC10N
10250TC11N
10250TC12N
Catalog
Number
Plastic
Glass
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC43
10250TC23
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
Glass
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
10250TC13N
10250TC14N
10250TC15N
—
10250TC16N
10250TC17N
10250TC18N
Table 47-185. Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
Color
Catalog
Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC23
10250TC43
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-125
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■
■
Two- and Three-Position
Non-illuminated
Table 47-187. 2-Position Push-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Pull
Button Type/Color
Push-Pull
Push
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
A
B
2-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
40 mm/Red
O
X
10250T5B62-1X
X
O
O
X
X
O
1NO
1NC
40 mm Engraved
EMERG. STOP/Red
10250T5B63-1X
1NO
1NC
65 mm Alum. Engraved 10250T5J63-1X
EMERG. STOP/Red
O
X
1NO
1NC
X
O
65 mm Alum. Engraved 10250ED1080-2
EMERG. STOP/Red
O
X
X
O
1NO
1NC
Special Security Jumbo
Mushroom Head
Table 47-188. 3-Position Pull-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Pull
Intermediate
Button Type/Color
Push
Push-Pull
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
A
B
47
3-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/ Black
40 mm/Red
40 mm Engraved
EMERG. STOP/Red
10250T9B60-3X
10250T9B62-3X
10250T9B63-3X
40 mm/Black
40 mm/Red
40 mm/Black
40 mm/Red
10250T4B60-3X
10250T4B62-3X
10250T10B60-1X
10250T10B62-1X
1NC
1NC
3-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
X
O
1NC
1NC
1NO
1NC
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table below.
Example: 10250T5B64-1X.
Table 47-189. Button and Color Selection Table
Standard — 40 mm
Color
Suffix Catalog
Code Number
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Black
Blue
B62
B63
B61
B60
B64
Price
U.S. $
Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum —
65 mm
10250TB62
10250TB63
10250TB61
10250TB60
10250TB64
Color
Suffix Catalog
Code Number
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Black
Yellow
J62
J63
J61
J60
J64
Price
U.S. $
10250TJ62
10250TJ63
10250TJ61
10250TJ60
10250TJ64
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-126
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
■
LED or Incandescent
Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■ Two-Position Maintained
■
2-Position Push-Pull Operator
with Red Button (Standard)
and Full Voltage Light Unit
Table 47-190. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Lamp
Maintained —
Pull
Maintained —
Push
O
X
X
O
Type
Red Standard Push-Pull
Voltage
Catalog
Number
LED
Full Voltage
24V AC/DC
X
O
Incandescent Full Voltage
Resistor
10250T563LRD06-1X
24V AC/DC
10250T579C47-1X
120V AC/DC 10250T580C47-1X
120V AC
Contact Mounting Location LED/Lamp
Type
Number
A
B
1NO
1NC
Bayonet
Base
1NO
1NC
#757
10250T589LRD06-1X
120V AC
Transformer 24V AC
10250T597LRD24-1X
120V AC/DC 10250T597LRD2A-1X
Transformer 24V AC
O
X
Price
U.S. $
10250T589C47-1X
120MB
#755
10250T563C47-1X
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table below. Example: 10250T579C63-1X.
For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131.
Table 47-191. Lens and Color Selection Table
Type
Lens Color
Incand.
Suffix
Code
LED
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Standard – 40 mm
Red
Red (EMERGENCY STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
C47
C53
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
WD
CD
10250TC47
10250TC53
10250TC48
10250TC49
10250TC50
10250TC51
10250TC52
Side-Lighted
Aluminum – 40 mm
Red
Red (EMERGENCY STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
Yellow
White
Clear
C57
C63
C58
C59
C64
C60
C61
C62
RS
ES
GS
LS
AS
YS
WS
CS
10250TC57
10250TC63
10250TC58
10250TC59
10250TC64
10250TC60
10250TC61
10250TC62
Aluminum Transparent
Center – 40 mm
Red
Green
Amber
C65
C66
C67
RH
GH
AH
10250TC65
10250TC66
10250TC67
47
Price
U.S. $
Clear anodized aluminum and colored lens.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Light Units . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Page 47-131
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-127
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
(Continued)
■
LED or Incandescent
Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■ Three-Position Momentary
■
3-Position Push-Pull Operator
with Red Button (Standard)
and Transformer Light Unit
Table 47-192. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Momentary — Maintained — Momentary —
Pull
Intermediate Push
Catalog
Number
LED
O
X
O
O
X
O
Full
Voltage
Transformer
Full
Voltage
X
X
O
X
O
O
Transformer
IncanFull
descent Voltage
O
O
X
O
Transformer
Full
Voltage
120V AC
10250T1097LRD2A-1X
24V AC
10250T1089LRD06-1X
120V AC
10250T1063LRD06-1X
O
X
O
O
Transformer
Price
U.S. $
Mounting
Location
A
B
120V AC
10250T497LRD2A-3X
24V AC
10250T489LRD06-3X
120V AC
10250T463LRD06-3X
1NO
1NC
Bayonet
Base
1NC
1NC
24V AC/DC 10250T1079C47-1X
#757
120MB
10250T1080C47-1X
24V AC
10250T1089C47-1X
120V AC
10250T1063C47-1X
1NO
1NC
#755
24V AC/DC 10250T479C47-3X
#757
120MB
10250T480C47-3X
24V AC
10250T489C47-3X
120V AC
10250T463C47-3X
LED/
Lamp
Number
Bayonet
Base
24V AC/DC 10250T497LRD24-3X
Resistor 120V AC
X
X
Contact
Type
24V AC/DC 10250T1097LRD24-1X
Resistor 120V AC
O
X
Red Standard Push-Pull
1NC
1NC
#755
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-126.
Example: 10250T1079C53-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Light Units . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Page 47-131
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Page 47-157
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-128
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units & Potentiometers
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
(Continued)
■
LED or Incandescent
Full Voltage, Resistor or Transformer
Type
■ Three-Position — Maintained Push,
Momentary Pull
■
3-Position Push-Pull Operator
with Red Button (Standard)
and Full Voltage Light Unit
Table 47-193. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Momentary — Maintained — Maintained —
Pull
Intermediate Push
LED
X
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
Price
U.S. $
Full
Voltage
24V AC/DC 10250T997LRD24-3X
Transformer
24V AC
10250T989LRD06-3X
120V AC
10250T963LRD06-3X
IncanFull
descent Voltage
X
X
Red Standard Push-Pull
Catalog
Number
120V AC
Contact
Type
10250T997LRD2A-3X
Mounting Location LED/
Lamp
B
Number
A
Bayonet
Base
1NC
1NC
#757
24V AC/DC 10250T979C47-3X
Resistor 120V AC
10250T980C47-3X
Transformer
24V AC
10250T989C47-3X
120V AC
10250T963C47-3X
1NC
1NC
120MB
#755
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-126.
Example: 10250T979C53-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-131.
Potentiometers
Table 47-194. Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate — Linear Type ±10% — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13
Vertical or Horizontal
One-Hole Mounting
Potentiometer
Ohms
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single
Potentiometer with Standard
Aluminum Dial Plate
47
Catalog
Number
1000
2500
5000
10000
25000
50000
10250T331
10250T332
10250T338
10250T333
10250T334
10250T335
Operator Only
10250T330
Alternative — Black Plastic Large
Legend with Standard Markings
E34LP99
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Price
U.S. $
With Standard
Aluminum Dial Plate
Large Dial Plate
1.88
(47.8)
Std. Dial Plate
1.09
1.0
(27.7) (25.4)
1.31
(33.3)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
0.75
(19.1)
Potentiometer
Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to Catalog Number.
Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote below.
Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 inch high. For custom stamped legend plates,
order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping.
For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page 47-161.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Light Units . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Page 47-131
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-129
January 2010
10250T Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators
■
An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton
unit, arranged for one-hole mounting,
can replace two pushbuttons and a
pilot light or the non-illuminated form
can replace two pushbuttons. These
units are available in three basic types:
■
Maintained — (Two-Position).
Maintains in the pulled or pushed
position until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
■ Momentary — (Three-Position).
Spring returns to an intermediate
position when pulled or pushed and
released.
Momentary Pull, Maintained
Push — (Three-Position). Spring
returns to intermediate position
when pulled. Maintains in pushed
position until manually returned to
intermediate (ready to reset) position. Maintained stop holds circuit
open and will prevent other series
connected operators from starting
the system.
The Operators, Buttons, Contact
Blocks, etc., are offered as building
block components that can be intermixed to satisfy many requirements.
This minimizes the need for a varied
and costly inventory.
2-Position Maintained Push-Pull
without Button on Lens
Catalog Number 10250T5
Table 47-195. Typical Applications
Control
3-Wire
3-Position
Momentary
Line – Diagram
L1
Operator
Push-Pull
Operator
A Circuit
M
B Circuit
2-Wire
2-Position
Maintained
L2
Operator Mode
Momentary 2NC
START (Mom.)
Push & Pull Contact Block
10250T4
10250T3
Normal Pos. (Maint.)
STOP (Mom.)
No
Intermediate
Position
STOP (Maint.)
OL
Momentary 1NO-1NC
Push & Pull Contact Block
10250T10
10250T1
M
Push-Pull
Operator
M
L1
Circuits
L2
OL
Maintained 1NC
START (Maint.)
Push & Pull Contact Block
10250T5
10250T51
47
A or B Circuit
3-Wire
Momentary
L1
Pull
Maintained
Push
A Circuit
Push-Pull
Operator
M
B Circuit
OL
L2
Maintained 2NC
START (Mom.)
Push &
Contact Block
Momentary 10250T3
Pull
10250T9
Normal Pos. (Maint.)
STOP (Maint.)
M
Note: A and B circuits shown in the application illustrations are defined in the “Application Guide” on the following page.
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-130
January 2010
10250T Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators (Continued)
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of contact
blocks, the sketch to the right shows
pictorially by symbols A and B locations
of contact circuits after assembly of
contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The chart below shows the effect
of the push and pull operations on
either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open)
Locating Nib
A
B
Figure 47-92. Contact Circuit Locations
Table 47-196. Push-Pull Operator Components
Type of Operator
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact Block —
Max. of 2 Blocks,
4 Circuits
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out — Pull
Intermediate
In — Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
A
B
A
B
A
B
2-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained Push-Pull
Maintained Push-Pull with
Anti-Theft Jumbo Mushroom
10250T5
10250ED1080
1NO
1NC
O
or
X
O
X
No Intermediate
Position
X
or
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
1NO
1NC
O
or
X
O
X
X
or
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
O
1NO
1NC
O
or
X
O
X
O
or
O
O
X
X
or
O
O
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
1NO
1NC
O
or
X
O
X
O
or
O
O
O
X
or
O
X
O
2NO
2NC
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
No Intermediate
Position
3-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary Push-Pull
47
10250T4
Maintained Push-Momentary Pull
10250T9
Momentary Push-Pull
10250T10
Special function contact blocks shown on Page 47-148 CANNOT be used with 3-position push-pull operators 10250T4, 10250T9 or 10250T10.
Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-131
Page 47-148
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-131
January 2010
10250T Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators (Continued)
Table 47-198. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Color
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Table 47-197. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit
Type
Type
Voltage Catalog
Number
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage
—
Incandescent
10250T97L
Transformer 24
AC Only
120
50/60 Hz
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89L
10250T63L
10250T64L
10250T65L
10250T82L
10250T66L
10250T67L
10250T68L
Full Voltage
AC or DC
10250T69
10250T70
10250T79
10250T83
Resistor
AC or DC
Price
U.S. $
6
12
24/28
32
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
C47
C53
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
10250TC47
10250TC53
10250TC48
10250TC49
10250TC50
10250TC51
10250TC52
Price
U.S. $
Standard
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
Bayonet
Base
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
WD
—
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
120
240
10250T80
10250T81
120MB
Transformer 24
AC Only
120
50/60 Hz
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89
10250T63
10250T64
10250T65
10250T82
10250T66
10250T67
10250T68
#755
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
Yellow
White
Clear
C57
C63
C58
C59
C64
C60
C61
C62
RS
ES
GS
LS
AS
YS
WS
—
10250TC57
10250TC63
10250TC58
10250TC59
10250TC64
10250TC60
10250TC61
10250TC62
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red
Green
Amber
Blue
White
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens
color, see Page 47-157.
C65
C66
C67
C69
C68
RH
GH
AH
—
—
10250TC65
10250TC66
10250TC67
10250TC69
10250TC68
Suffix Codes should only be used for assembling composite Catalog
Numbers. To order lens above, order by Catalog Number.
Table 47-199. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Color
Ordering example with one composite number:
Nonilluminated 10250T5 + 10250TB62 + 10250T1 =
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
B62
B63
B61
B60
B64
10250TB62
10250TB63
10250TB61
10250TB60
10250TB64
Price
U.S. $
Standard
10250T579C47-1X
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Blue
10250T5 + 10250T97L + 10250TC47 +Voltage Code + 10250T1 =
Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum
10250T597LRD24-1X
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Yellow
10250T5B62-1X
Incandescent 10250T5 + 10250T79 + 10250TC47 + 10250T1 =
LED
Incand. LED
Suffix Suffix
Code
Code
06 — 6V AC/DC
12 — 12V AC/DC
24 — 24V AC/DC
48 — 48V AC/DC
60 — 60V AC/DC
2A — 120V AC
2D — 120V DC
J62
J63
J61
J60
J64
10250TJ62
10250TJ63
10250TJ61
10250TJ60
10250TJ64
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light
applications.
Legend Plates
For a complete listing of available Legend Plates see Pages
47-151 – 47-152.
Jumbo
Standard
P
S
R
T
Figure 47-93. Legend Plates
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-148
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-132
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units
3-Position
Maintained Switch
Catalog Number
10250T21KB
■
Two-, Three- and Four-Position
Maintained
■ Non-illuminated and Illuminated
3-Position
Maintained Switch
Catalog Number
10250T22KB
Table 47-200. 2-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
X
O
O
X
Operator Non-illuminated
Action Black Knob Black Lever
M
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
10250T20KB
10250T20LB
Illuminated — 120V Transformer
Price
U.S. $
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
10250ED1117-KR
10250ED1117-LR
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
A
B
1NC
1NO
M
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: 10250T20KG.
Table 47-201. 3-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
47
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
Operator
Action
M
M
Non-illuminated
Illuminated — 120V Transformer
Black Knob Black Lever Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Catalog
Red Knob
Red Lever
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Number
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
10250T21KB
10250T21LB
10250ED1117-2KR
10250ED1117-2LR
1NO
1NO
10250T22KB
10250T22LB
10250ED1117-3KR
10250ED1117-3LR
1NO
M
Mounting
Location
A
B
2NC
(Series)
1NO
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: 10250T20KG.
Table 47-202. 4-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Operator
Action
M
M
Non-illuminated
Black Knob
Illuminated — 120V Transformer
Red Lever
Catalog
Number
Black Lever
Price Red Knob
U.S. $ Catalog
Catalog
Number
Number
10250T46KB
10250T46LB
10250ED1117-4LR
Catalog
Number
10250ED1117-4KR
Price
U.S. $
Mounting
Location
A
B
1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC
M
M
Contact
Type
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: 10250T20KG.
Table 47-203. Color Selection
Illuminated
Non-illuminated
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Color
Code
Letter
Red
Green
R
G
White
Blue
W
B
Amber
Clear
A
C
Black
Red
B
R
Green
White
G
W
Blue
Orange
L
O
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Circuit
Arrangements . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Pages 47-133 – 47-134
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-133
January 2010
10250T Series, Components — Selector Switch Selection
Table 47-204. Example Selection Table
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector
Switch. In this circuit, one incoming
line is distributed to two other outgoing
circuits by the switch. The two circuits
can be looked at individually.
10250T Series
Selector Switch Selection
Step 1: Elementary Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your mind, a
simple elementary diagram of the
switching scheme as follows:
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their varied forms
(2-position, 3-position and 4-position)
are a big factor contributing to the
great flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons” can
achieve. Because of their flexibility,
they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application. The
following systematic approach should
simplify that task.
Cam and contact block selection is
better understood if you:
■
Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately.
■ Recognize the terms NO and NC
only identify the type of contact by
its mode before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table (Page 47134) shows how that contact will act
after assembly to the operator with
the selected cam shape. X = closed
circuit, O = open circuit.
■ Up to six NO or NC contacts may be
mounted behind each plunger location for a total of twelve contacts.
Single circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the other side
of the block “open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks transmit
motion to blocks behind them only
for the position containing the circuit.
■ Each cam has two separate lobes,
each of which operates one of the
two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are
identified as position A (locating nib
side) and position B (opposite of
locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and
mounting of the contact blocks (see
Figure 47-94).
Locating Nib
A
B
Figure 47-94. Contact Circuit Locations
CA08102001E
HAND
Incoming
Line
Outgoing
Circuit
OFF
AUTO
No. “X-O”
Pattern
1
X O O
4
O O X
HAND OFF AUTO
X O O
In this circuit, you want a contact
closed on the left (HAND) but open in
the center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the “X-O” diagram
would look like this:
HAND OFF AUTO
O O X
Putting them together, the complete
“X-O” diagram is:
XOO
OOX
Once the “X-O” diagram has been
generated, the next step is to select the
cam and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the desired “X-O”
functions. The selection table on the
following page lists the various types
(shapes) of cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in
your “X-O” diagram.
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select determines
the operation of all contact blocks
mounted to the operator. It is selected
on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O”
diagram. The selection tables of the
following page show all the “X-O”
combinations. For the purpose of this
example, the applicable portion of
those tables is shown in Table 47-204.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Cam Code #3
Top Bottom
A
B
Top
A
NC
NO
NO
Bottom
B
NO
NO
Wired in series.
Now to make the cam selection, make
a simple worksheet such as:
Outgoing
Circuit
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary diagram, you can
construct an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts are to be
closed (X) or open (O) in the various
positions of the switch. The “X-O” for
the HAND circuit looks like this:
Cam Code #2
XOO
OOX
Cam 2
(A)NO – (B)NC
(B)NO
Cam 3
(A)NO
(B)NO
It becomes immediately obvious that
cam 3 is the better choice for two reasons, (1) the series combination can be
avoided making it simpler to wire, (2)
only two contacts are required, which
is less expensive than the three contacts
required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block Selection.
Having selected the cam, contact block
selection is simply a matter of gathering the A position and B position circuits
into pairs which make up the most convenient contact block arrangement. If
there is an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then single circuit
blocks must be selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet, having selected
cam 3 do this:
X O X
O O X
ANO
BNO
10250T2
Step 5: Selector Switch Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose from the
many types of operators — knob and
lever in various colors or keyed. Also
what combinations of maintained and
spring return functions are required.
Selection of these operators can be
found on Page 47-135. For the above
example you may want a 3-position
maintained black knob, cam 3 —
Catalog Number 10250T1323.
The Complete Switch: 10250T1323 with
one 10250T2 or, for one composite
catalog number, 10250T21KB found
on Page 47-132.
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-134
January 2010
10250T Series, Components — Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection
(Continued)
Table 47-206. 3-Position Switch — Cam and Contact Block Selection
No.
Table 47-205. 2-Position Selector Switch
Contact Block Selection
No.
Desired Circuit
and
Operator
Position
Bottom
Plunger
B
1
X
2
X
X
Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location
Mounting Location
Top Plunger
A
Bottom Plunger
B
Top Plunger
A
NO
NC
NO
O
X
O
NC
X
O
NO
NO
4
O
O
X
NO
Circuits shown illustrate connections
to obtain a selector switch circuit combination and are shown with their
appropriate line diagrams. Field wiring
of jumper connections required as
shown.
X = Closed Circuit
O = Open Circuit
47
NO
NO
Diagrams
Series Connection
NC
X
X
NO
Bottom Plunger
B
NC
3
O
O
Operator with Cam Code #2
O
NC
2
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Top
Plunger
A
1
Desired Circuit
and
Operator
Position
5
O
X
X
NC
6
O
NO
X
NO
NC
O
NC
NC
NC
Table 47-207. 4-Position Switch — Contact Block Selection
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Top
Plunger
A
Figure 47-95. Wiring of Jumper Connections
1
X
O
O
O
2
O
X
O
O
For selection and number of available
contact blocks per operator, see Page
47-148.
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
10
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
4
O
O
O
X
NO
NC
NO
11
X
X
X
O
NC
5
X
O
O
7
8
9
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
NO
NO
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NC
NO
NC
NC
12
O
NC
NO
X
NC
6
Bottom
Plunger
B
O
NO
3
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Mounting
Location
NC
Contact Blocks
Com- Desired Circuit and
bina- Operator Position
tion
No.
Mounting
Location
Parallel Connection
Note: 4-Position Selector Switches limited
to 4 contact blocks.
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
O
X
X
X
O
NO
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
X
13
X
O
X
X
O
X
NO
NC
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
14
X
X
O
X
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-135
January 2010
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators
2-Position Maintained
Black Knob Selector
Switch — Cam 1
Cat. No. 10250T1311
3-Position Maintained Black
Lever Selector Switch —
Cam 3
Cat. No. 10250T3023
2-Position Maintained
Horizontal Mount, Key
Removal #1 Keyed
Selector Switch — Cam 1
Cat. No. 10250T16111
Selector Switch Operators with Caps
Table 47-208. Selector Switch Operators with Caps — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Positions
2-Position — 60° Throw
Operator Action Black Knob Selector Switch — Vertical Mounting
Cam Code
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
1
10250T1311
1
10250T3011
1
10250T1371
1
10250T3071
M
2
3
10250T1322
10250T1323
2
3
10250T3022
10250T3023
M
2
3
10250T1332
10250T1333
2
3
10250T3032
10250T3033
S
2
3
10250T1342
10250T1343
2
3
10250T3042
10250T3043
S
2
3
10250T1352
10250T1353
2
3
10250T3052
10250T3053
7
10250T1367
7
10250T3067
M
M
M
S
3-Position — 60° Throw
M
M
M
S
M
S
M
M
4-Position — 40° Throw
M
M
M
M
Black Lever Selector Switch — Vertical Mounting
Cam Code
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 – 47-134.
Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
Table 47-209. Key Operators with Cam — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Positions
2-Position — 60° Throw
Operator Action Cam Code
Optional Key
Removal Positions
Vertical Mounting
Catalog
Number
Horizontal Mounting
Catalog
Number
1
1, 2, 3
10250T1511_
10250T1611_
1
2
10250T1571_
10250T1581_
2
3
1–7
M
10250T1522_
10250T1523_
10250T1622_
10250T1623_
2
3
1, 4, 5
M
10250T1532_
10250T1533_
10250T1632_
10250T1633_
2
3
4
S
10250T1542_
10250T1543_
10250T1642_
10250T1643_
2
3
2, 4, 6
S
10250T1652_
10250T1653_
10250T1662_
10250T1663_
7
7
10250T1677_
10250T1687_
M
M
M
S
3-Position — 60° Throw
M
M
M
S
M
S
M
M
4-Position — 40° Throw
M
M
M
Price
U.S. $
M
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 – 47-134.
Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-210 on Page 47-136. Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number.
Example: 10250T15112.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Page 47-148
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-136
January 2010
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators (Continued)
Table 47-210. Key Removal Positions
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring return from”
positions not recommended.
C
L
R
Figure 47-96. Key Removal Positions
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for
Key Operators
Operators listed on Page 47-135 have
identical locks and keys (Key Code
H661) Catalog Number 10250ED824.
For dissimilar lock and key combinations, see listing at right.
Selector Switch Operators with Dissimilar
Locks and Keys — UL (NEMA) 4, 4X and 13
The locks in all key operators listed on
Pages 47-121, 47-135 and 47-180) are
identical and use key code number
H661. Two keys are supplied with
every lock. For additional code number
H661 keys, order Catalog Number
10250ED824. For others, order
10250ED1130 and designate lock number. When dissimilar locks for each
operator or each group of operators
are required, select from the lock and
key combination listed below. When
Ordering Operator Only or a Complete
Control Unit with a substitute lock,
order from table below and add
“except Lock and Key Code No. …”
Table 47-212. “H” Series Locks without
Master Key — with Key Slot Cover
Lock and Key Code Numbers
H501
H620
H621
H634
H635
H639
H643
H654
Table 47-213. “M” Series Locks with Master
Key — with Key Slot Cover
Lock and Key Code Numbers
MD1
MD2
MD3
MD4
MD5
MD7
MD9
MD10
MD11
MD13
MD14
MD15
MD16
MD19
MD20
ME2
ME3
ME5
ME6
ME7
ME8
ME11
ME16
ME17
ME18
ME19
MJ1
MJ3
MJ4
MJ5
Adder
U.S. $
MJ6
MJ10
MJ11
MJ13
MJ15
MJ16
MD17
Table 47-214. Master Keys for Above Locks
Application
For Code:
MD1 – MD20
ME2 – ME18
MJ1 – MJ16
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
10250ED825-3
10250ED825-4
10250ED825-5
Adder
U.S. $
H663
H675
H683
H688
Table 47-211. Replacement Key
Description
Catalog
Number
Replacement Keys
(Code H661)
10250ED824
Price
U.S. $
47
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-137
January 2010
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators (Continued)
Selector Switch Operators without Caps
2-Position
Selector Switch
Maintained,
Cam Code 1
Catalog Number
10250T4011
Note: Operators below can be ordered with
caps assembled to them by adding the
Code Number from Table 47-216 to the
end of Catalog Number below.
Example: 10250T4011KB
Table 47-215. Selector Switch Operators without Caps
Operator Action
Positions
2-Position — 60° Throw
Cam Code
Catalog
Number
1
10250T4011
1
10250T4081
M
2
3
10250T4022
10250T4023
M
2
3
10250T4032
10250T4033
S
2
3
10250T4042
10250T4043
S
2
3
10250T4052
10250T4053
7
10250T4067
M
M
M
S
3-Position — 60° Throw
M
M
M
S
M
S
M
M
4-Position — 40° Throw
M
M
M
Price
U.S. $
M
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see
selection instructions and table on Pages 47-133 – 47-134.
Table 47-216. Operating Caps
Color
Knob
Catalog and
Code Number
Lever
Price
U.S. $
Catalog and
Code Number
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blue
Orange
10250TKB
10250TKR
10250TKG
10250TKY
10250TKW
10250TKA
10250TKL
10250TKO
10250TLB
10250TLR
10250TLG
10250TLY
10250TLW
10250TLA
10250TLL
10250TLO
Color
Lever
Coin Slot
Catalog and
Code Number
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blue
Orange
10250TSB
10250TSR
10250TSG
10250TSY
10250TSW
10250TSA
10250TSL
10250TSO
Price Catalog and
U.S. $ Code Number
47
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
10250TCB
10250TCR
10250TCG
10250TCY
10250TCW
10250TCA
10250TCL
10250TCO
Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Page 47-148
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-138
January 2010
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
2-Position Maintained 120V AC
Transformer Selector Switch,
Cam Code 1
Catalog Number 10250T5971
Illuminated Selector Switches without Caps
Table 47-217. Operator without Knob or Lever
Operator Action
Positions
Transformer Type — 50/60 Hz
6 Volt #755 Lamp
2-Position – 60° Throw
M
M
3-Position – 60° Throw
M
M
M
M
M
S
M
S
M
47
M
S
S
4-Position – 40° Throw
M
M
M
M
Price
U.S. $
Full Voltage Type — AC or DC
Lamps: 6V — #755, 12V — #756, 24V — #757,
48V — #1835, 120/240V — 120MB
Voltage
Catalog and
Cam
Price
Code Number Code
U.S. $
Voltage
Catalog and
Code Number
Cam
Code
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
10250T5961
10250T5971
10250T6511
10250T5981
10250T5991
10250T6001
10250T6011
10250T602_
10250T603_
10250T652_
10250T604_
10250T605_
10250T606_
10250T607_
10250T654_
10250T620_
10250T655_
10250T656_
10250T657_
10250T658_
10250T659
10250T660_
10250T621_
10250T661_
10250T662_
10250T663_
10250T664_
10250T665_
10250T614_
10250T615_
10250T653_
10250T616_
10250T617_
10250T618_
10250T619_
10250T6087
10250T6097
10250T6547
10250T6107
10250T6117
10250T6127
10250T6137
1
6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T6201
10250T6211
10250T6221
10250T6231
10250T6361
10250T6371
1
+ 2 or 3
6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T624_
10250T625_
10250T626_
10250T627_
10250T638_
10250T639_
+ 2 or 3
+ 2 or 3
6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T612_
10250T632_
10250T642_
10250T672_
10250T622_
10250T682_
+ 2 or 3
+ 2 or 3
6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T613_
10250T633_
10250T643_
10250T673_
10250T623_
10250T683_
+ 2 or 3
+ 2 or 3
6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T628_
10250T629_
10250T630_
10250T631_
10250T640_
10250T641_
+ 2 or 3
7
6
12
24
48
120
240
10250T6327
10250T6337
10250T6347
10250T6357
10250T6427
10250T6437
7
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Pages 47-133 – 47-134.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Table 47-218. Illuminated Knobs and Levers
Color
Knob
Cat. and Code
No.
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Amber
10250TER
10250TEG
10250TEA
10250TEL
10250TEC
10250TEW
10250TEM
Lever
Price
U.S. $
Cat. and Code
No.
Price
U.S. $
10250TFR
10250TFG
10250TFA
10250TFL
10250TFC
10250TFW
10250TFM
Amber, Clear and White lenses have a black arrow (pointer), Red,
Green and Blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 – 47-152
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-139
January 2010
10250T Series, Joystick Units and Components
Joystick Units
Table 47-219. Joystick Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Two-Position
Up
Center
Down
O
O
X
Operator
Action
2-Position Assembled Unit
Catalog
Number
S
Price
U.S. $
Contact Mounting Location
Type
A
B
10250T452-3X
1NC
M
O
O
S
X
1NC
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa.
Joysticks
be allowed. These operators are field
convertible from momentary to maintained operation or vice versa.
Two-Position Joystick Operators
The device mounts in the standard
30.5 mm mounting hole. Allow sufficient panel space for lever movement.
The maximum travel of the knob operator (full up to full down) is 2.2" (24°)
momentary, 2.5" (30°) maintained, but
ample space for lever operation must
The use of NC contacts is preferred
because they provide positive drive
contact opening and a direct relationship between lever movement and
affected terminal, i.e., up movement
affects the top terminals.
2-Position Joystick Operator
Table 47-220. 2-Position Joystick Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact Block Limitations
Description
Momentary Mode
4NC Contact Blocks Max.
3NO Contact Blocks Max.
2-Position Operator Only — AC Applications Only
Maintained Mode
2 Contact Blocks Max.
Catalog
Number
Momentary Up and Down
Maintained Up — Momentary Down
Maintained Down — Momentary Up
Maintained Up and Down
Price
U.S. $
10250T452
10250T4521
10250T4522
10250T4525
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Contact 0.89
Block (22.6)
2.2 (55.9)
mom.
2.5 (63.5)
main.
2.06
(52.3)
2.13
(54.1)
0.88 (22.4)
per Block
Handle Position
Up
Center Down
Contact Block
Catalog
Number
0.06 (1.5) to
0.26 (6.6)
Panel Thickness
1.25
(31.8)
Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. To expedite shipment of maintained
types, order momentary operator 10250T452 which is a stocked device.
Table 47-221. Contact Block Operation and Selection
3.88
(98.6)
X
O
O
O
Price
U.S. $
Type
O
10250T51
O
X
10250T51
1NC
X
O
10250T45
X
O
O
10250T3
2LONC
(Series)
1NC
O
X
O
X
X
O
10250T45
1NC
1LONC
O
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
10250T44
Mounting Location
Top
Bottom
A
B
1NC
1LONC
1NC
1NO
1NC
1NO
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
See Figure 47-97 for “A” and “B” mounting location.
NO = Normally Open, NC = Normally Closed, LONC = Late Opening Normally Closed.
Four circuits in single block depth — rated 300V max.
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Locating Nib
Top
Contacts
Up
Center
Bottom
Contacts
Up
NC Contact
at Top Is
Closed, NO
at Bottom
Is Closed
Down
Center
All NC and NO
Contacts Are
Open (1/2 Way),
Late Opening
NC Is Closed
Down
NC Contact
at Bottom
Is Closed,
NO at Top
Is Closed
Figure 47-97. A and B Mounting Location
Application Caution
Joystick operators are not recommended on certain DC applications
above 24V DC which may involve
lightly engaging the contacts (teasing)
to achieve speed control, positioning,
jogging, etc. Excessive arcing and
deterioration of the contacts will occur.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
Page 47-148
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-140
January 2010
10250T Series, Joystick Components
Joysticks (Continued)
Four-Position Joystick Operators
The joystick operated control unit is
intended for AC application only. For
other use, see Application Caution on
preceding page.
The panel area required for the
4-position operator is equivalent to
two standard pushbutton operators.
Note: The latch holds the lever in the center
position. The trigger latch must be released
before lever can moved into any position.
4-Position Joystick
Operator
4-Position Joystick
Operator with
Latch
Table 47-222. 4-Position Joystick Operators — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact Block Limitations
Description
4 Contact Blocks Max. —
2 in Each Position
Operator Only — AC Application Only
Catalog
Number
4-Position — without Latch
4-Position — with Latch
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
10250T451_
10250T461_
1.25
(31.8)
4.0
(101.6)
Hole Plug
To plug unused hole
10250TA7
1.88
(47.8)
0.88 (22.4)
per Unit
1.19
(30.2)
3.75
(95.3)
Momentary operators — spring return to center. For maintained operators add Suffix Code from Table 47-223.
Example: 10250T45110. Operator without latch, maintained in left and right positions.
Field Conversion — Gate
The factory assembled 4-position
operator is assembled with a gate
arranged for four handle positions.
47
4-Position
Gate
The 8-position gate controls the four
functions shown as “Up,” “Down,”
“Left” and “Right.” The remaining
four diagonal positions each actuate
two adjacent functions (see Figure 47100); for example, “Left Down” actuates both “Left” and “Down.” The
operator may be arranged for spring
return of handle to center position, or
maintained in up to eight positions
(see description of maintained position operator).
Figure 47-98. Handle Positions
Three additional gates, supplied with
every operator, allow on the job conversion to 3- or 8-position operation as
illustrated below.
Left
Up
Up
Left
or
2-Position
Gate
or
or
Right
Up
Right
or
3-Position
Gate
Left
Down
Down
Right
Down
Table 47-223. Maintained Positions
Maintained Positions
Up
Down
Left
Right
Suffix
Number
X
—
—
—
X
X
X
—
—
—
X
X
X
—
X
—
X
—
—
X
—
—
X
X
—
X
X
—
X
X
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
X
—
X
X
—
X
X
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
X
—
X
X
—
X
X
X
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note: On an 8-position gate, when an
adjacent vertical and horizontal position
are both maintained, the included diagonal
position is also maintained.
Figure 47-100. Adjacent Functions
8-Position
Gate
Figure 47-99. 2-, 3- or 8-Position Operation
Maintained Position
For maintained position (non-spring
return), locate required maintained
position or positions of operating lever
in Table 47-223 and add appropriate
Suffix Number to the Catalog Number
selected from Table 47-222.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-148
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-141
January 2010
10250T Series, Joystick Components
Joysticks (Continued)
Four-Position Joystick Operators (Continued)
Contact Block Operation
Contact blocks mount directly to the
back of the operator. For reliable operation, the maximum number of contact
blocks that should be installed behind
each operator lever is 2 (4 total).
The contact blocks and their mounting
locations would be as follows:
2nd
1st
Circuit Circuit
Figure 47-101 identifies the circuits
activated by each of the eight possible
lever positions. Contact block plungers
1, 2, 3, 4 are depressed (change state)
when handle is in the position indicated by arrows below.
NO
NO
NC
NO
10250T1 10250T2
NC
NO
NO
10250T1 10250T2
1
A complete bill of material for this
example would include:
Table 47-225. Example Order
3
4
Figure 47-101. Circuit Activation
Note: Joystick in its resting state, center
position, does not activate contact block
plungers.
Ordering Example:
Suppose you are looking for a 4-position
momentary joystick without a latch
and the following circuit arrangements.
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit.
Table 47-224. Example Circuit Arrangements
Up
Down
Left
Right
1st Circuit
X
X
X
X
2nd Circuit
X
O
O
X
2-position legend plate to be marked
“UP” “DOWN.”
Catalog No.: 10250TJ2S4STAMP
Letter Size: 3/16 inch (4.8 mm)
Pos. K — UP
Pos. M — DOWN
Table 47-226. 2-Position
K
NO
Figure 47-102. Example Contact Blocks and
Locations
2
Ordering Example:
Qty.
Catalog Number
1
2
2
10250T451
10250T2
10250T1
Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators
When ordering engraved legend
plates, order by Catalog Number and
insert the following into Order Notes:
■
Legend required
Size of characters: 3/16, 1/8, 3/32
inch (4.8, 3.2, 2.4 mm)
■ Location by letter (A – N)
■
Locations K and M can accommodate
up to 2 lines horizontally; L and N up to
2 lines vertically.
2.19
(55.6)
Sq.
K
L
N
M
M
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Blank Plate
10250TJS3
10250TJS4
Engraved Plate
10250TJS3STAMP 10250TJS4STAMP
Table 47-227. 4-Position
C
A
B
D
C
F
E
G
J
D
F
E
H
Catalog
Number
A
B
G
J
H
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Blank Plate
10250TJS1
10250TJS2
Engraved Plate
10250TJS1STAMP 10250TJS2STAMP
Maximum number of characters:
■
Horizontal
3/16" — 13, 1/8" — 14, 3/32" — 19
■ Vertical
3/16" — 10, 1/8" — 13, 3/32" — 14
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-142
January 2010
10250T Series, Assembled Devices — Roto-Push Units
Roto-Push® Units
Locating
Nib
Two-Position Momentary
Complete assembled Two-Position
Roto-Push Units are listed below.
These operators have black flush
buttons and are arranged for vertical
mounting. Order legend plates
separately.
A
B
Figure 47-103. Mounting Location
Table 47-228. Roto-Push Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Typical
Applications
(Most Common
Examples)
Operator Position
Collar
Left
Roto-Push Assembled
with Contact Blocks
Collar
Right
Catalog
Number
Contact Mounting Location
Type
Price
U.S. $
A
B
Normal Depressed Normal Depressed
2-Position
Roto-Push — Black
Flush Button for
Vertical Mounting
Cat. No. 10250T24111-1
FORWARD/REVERSE;
HIGH/LOW; OPEN/CLOSE;
UP/DOWN; etc.
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
JOG/RUN; MAN./AUTO;
etc.
O
O
X
O
O
X
RUN/JOG; START/JOG;
etc.
O
X
X
X
SAFE/RUN; etc.
O
O
O
O
10250T2411-2
1NO
1NO
X
X
10250T24111-2
1NO
1NO
O
O
X
O
10250T24111-1
1NO
1NC
O
X
X
X
10250T2415-2
1NO
1NO
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit.
Two-Position Latched
47
O
The Two-Position Roto-Push Latch
Unit is fully assembled and only
requires a legend plate for a great variety of applications. When the selector
collar is in the extreme left position,
the button is in the free or normal
position and can be operated as a
standard pushbutton. Rotating the
collar to the extreme right position
automatically depresses and latches
the button in the depressed position.
The white filled groove in the button
indicates the selector collar position.
The selector collar has spring return to
the left position except when in the
extreme right latched position.
Table 47-229. Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Color and Type Contact Vertical Mounting
of Button
Block
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Red Long
1NC
2NC
10250T72
10250T73
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Circuit
Arrangements . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 – 47-156
Pages 47-133 – 47-134
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-143
January 2010
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators
Roto-Push Components
When Ordering Specify
A Roto-Push control unit combines the
function of a pushbutton and a selector
switch. The contacts are operated by
the combined action of rotating the
outer collar and pushing a button contained in the collar.
■
In selecting the cam and contact blocks
for the listed function, the analysis
involves considering the function with
the collar rotated to the given position
with the button free (designated as “N”)
and then in that same position with the
button depressed (designated “D”).
This is done for each rotational position
of the collar.
Catalog Number of Operator with
Cam Code Suffix from tables below
and on following pages, Example:
10250T2411.
■ Catalog Number(s) for Contact
Blocks and Legend Plates if required.
■ To select the cam and contact blocks
needed for 2-position and 3-position
switches, use the tables on following
pages.
Operator and Cam
10250T24111
Table 47-230. Operator and Cam
Color and
Type of
Button
Vertical
Mounting
Horizontal
Mounting
Cam Code No.
Select from
Catalog and Catalog and Tables
Code
Code
Number
Number
Black Flush
Red Flush
Green Flush
Black Long
Red Long
Green Long
10250T241_
10250T242_
10250T243_
10250T261_
10250T262_
10250T263_
10250T251_
10250T252_
10250T253_
10250T271_
10250T272_
10250T273_
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
+ 1 to 18
1.13
(28.7)
1.38
(35.1)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
1.53
(38.9)
Not to be used for Emergency Stop application.
47
Two-Position Roto-Push Operator — Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode
Special Rotor Latch
Special Roto Latch —
Red Long Button
Catalog Number
10250T3213
This differs from the other Roto-Push
operators in that as the collar is
rotated to the right it depresses the
button and releases the button when
rotated left. But the button in the
released position can be momentarily
pushed independent of the collar or its
position. As the button is depressed by
rotating the collar, the button also
rotates and indicates its mode by a
white line on the button face. This
button can be used as an emergency
stop or latched stop.
Table 47-231. Special Rotor Latch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color and Type
of Button
Vertical Mounting
Red Long
Black Long
10250T3213
10250T3214
Catalog
Number
Overall Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Price
U.S. $
1.13
(28.7)
1.38
(35.1)
1.53
(38.9)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-148
Pages 47-153 – 47-154
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-144
January 2010
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators (Continued)
Table 47-232. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push
Combination
Number
Collar Position
Cam Code
1
Cam Code
2
Cam Code
3
Cam Code
4
—
—
Cam Code
5
Cam Code
6
Circuit Sequence
N D
N D
1
O O
O X
2
O O
X O
3
O O
X X
4
O X
O O
5
O X
O X
6
O X
X O
7
O X
X X
8
X O
O O
9
X O
O X
A
NO
—
—
—
—
—
A
NC
B
NO
B
NO
A
B
NO
NO
B
NO
X O
X O
11
X O
X X
12
X X
O O
13
X X
O X
14
X X
X O
47
—
—
—
—
A or B NO
—
A
NC
B
NC
B
NC
—
—
B
NC
A
B
NO
NC
—
NC
B
NO
B
NO
B
NO
—
—
A
NO
A
NC
B
NO
—
—
—
—
—
B
NO
B
NC
B
NO
B
NC
—
—
—
—
—
NC
A
NO
—
—
—
—
—
A
—
A
NC
—
—
—
A
A or B NC
—
NO
NC
A
—
A
A
—
—
—
—
NO
—
—
10
A
A
B
—
—
—
—
NC
—
NO
NC
B
NC
A
B
NO
NC
A
NC
—
A
B
NO
NC
A
NC
—
—
N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
A
B
NO
NC
Series Connection
A
B
NO
NC
Parallel Connection
Figure 47-104. Series and Parallel
Connections
The connections are not made at the
factory. They are illustrated in the
selection table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Locating
Nib
A
B
Figure 47-105. Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B” represent the
locations which the two circuits of a
contact block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the operator.
Figure 47-104 illustrates this pictorially.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-145
January 2010
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators (Continued)
Table 47-232. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push (Continued)
Combination
Number
Collar Position
Cam Code
10
Cam Code
11
Cam Code
12
Cam Code
13
Cam Code
14
—
—
—
Circuit Sequence
N D
N D
15
O O
O X
16
O O
X O
—
—
17
O O
X X
18
O X
O O
19
O X
O X
20
O X
X O
21
O X
X X
22
X O
O O
A
B
NO
NO
A
NC
B
NO
B
NO
B
NO
A
NO
A
B
NO
NC
A
NO
A or B NC
A
NC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
B
—
—
NO
NO
A
B
NO
NO
A
B
NC
NO
A
NC
A
NC
B
NC
B
NC
A
B
NO
NC
—
—
—
A
B
—
—
—
—
X O
O X
24
X O
X O
25
X O
X X
A
26
X X
O O
B
27
X X
O X
28
X X
X O
—
—
A
NC
NC
A
B
NO
NO
NC
B
NC
A
B
NO
NC
A
B
NC
NC
B
—
NO
NC
—
47
NC
—
—
B
—
—
NC
NO
—
A
B
23
NO
NO
A
B
—
NC
—
B
—
A
—
NC
—
A or B NO
A
—
NO
A
—
NO
—
N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
A
B
NO
NC
Series Connection
A
B
NO
NC
Parallel Connection
Figure 47-106. Series and Parallel
Connections
The connections are not made at the
factory. They are illustrated in the
selection table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Locating
Nib
A
B
Figure 47-107. Circuit Location
Letters “A” and “B” represent the
locations which the two circuits of a
contact block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the operator.
Figure 47-106 illustrates this pictorially.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-146
January 2010
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators (Continued)
Table 47-233. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push
Combination
Number
Collar Position
Cam Code
7
Cam Code
8
Cam Code
9
Cam Code
15
Cam Code
16
Cam Code
17
Cam Code
18
Circuit Sequence
1
N D
N D
N D
O O
O O
O X
2
O O
O O
X X
3
O O
O X
O O
4
O O
O X
O X
A
B
NO
NO
—
O O
O X
X X
6
O O
X X
O O
7
O O
X X
O X
8
O O
X X
X O
B
NC
O O
X X
X X
10
O X
O O
O O
11
O X
O O
O X
12
O X
O O
X X
13
O X
O X
O O
B
NO
B
NO
A
B
NO
NC
—
—
—
—
—
—
NC
NO
B
NO
A
B
NO
NC
A
NO
14
O X
O X
O X
15
O X
X X
O O
16
O X
X X
O X
17
O X
X X
X X
NO
—
A
B
NO
NO
B
NO
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
A
B
NO
NO
B
NO
A
B
NO
NO
NC
A
NO
A
NO
A
B
NO
NO
A
B
NO
NO
—
—
B
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NO
A
B
NO
NO
NO
NC
—
—
A
A
B
—
—
—
—
NO
—
—
—
NO
—
—
—
A
B
A
B
NC
B
—
—
—
A
—
A
—
47
NO
—
—
B
—
B
—
—
A
A
NO
—
—
9
—
—
—
5
A
NO
NO
A
NO
A
B
NO
NO
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NO
NO
Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page 47-148.
N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
A
B
NO
NC
Series Connection
A
B
NO
NC
Parallel Connection
Figure 47-108. Series and Parallel
Connections
The connections are not made at the
factory. They are illustrated in the
selection table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
Locating
Nib
A
Letters “A” and “B” represent the
locations which the two circuits of a
contact block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the operator.
Figure 47-108 illustrates this pictorially.
B
Figure 47-109. Circuit Location
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-147
January 2010
10250T Series, Roto-Push Components
Roto-Push Operators (Continued)
Table 47-233. Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push (Continued)
Combination
Number
Collar Position
Cam Code
7
Cam Code
8
Cam Code
9
Cam Code
15
Cam Code
16
Cam Code
17
Cam Code
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Circuit Sequence
18
N D
N D
N D
X O
O O
O O
A
NC
B
NC
—
19
X O
O O
X X
20
X O
O O
X O
—
—
21
X O
X X
X O
X X
X X
23
X O
X X
X O
X O
A
B
A
B
NC
NC A
NO B
NC
NO
—
—
—
—
—
NC
—
X O
X O
X X
26
X X
O O
O O
B
27
X X
O O
O X
A
B
28
X X
O O
X O
29
X X
O O
X X
30
X X
X X
O O
31
X X
X X
X O
32
X X
X O
X O
33
X X
X O
X X
—
—
—
A
B
—
—
NC
NO
NC
NC
A
NC
NC
—
B
NC
—
B
NC
—
A
B
—
—
A
NC
B
NC
A
NC
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NC
NO
—
NC
A
—
—
B
—
NC
NO
NC
—
—
NC
NC
—
B
NO
NC
A
B
—
—
NC A
NO B
—
NC
NC
—
—
NC A
NC B
B
A
A
—
A
A
B
NC
—
—
B
A
B
—
NC
X O
25
A
—
—
X O
NC
O O
22
24
A
A
B
NC
—
—
—
—
NC
NO
NC
NC
47
—
A
B
B
A
B
NO
NC
NC
NC
NC
Limited to 4 contact blocks.
N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed.
A
B
NO
NC
Series Connection
A
B
NO
NC
Parallel Connection
Figure 47-110. Series and Parallel Connection
The connections are not made at the
factory. They are illustrated in the
selection table as requirements, but
must be made on the job.
CA08102001E
Locating
Nib
A
Letters “A” and “B” represent the
locations which the two circuits of a
contact block will occupy in relation
to the locating nib of the operator.
Figure 47-110 illustrates this pictorially.
B
Figure 47-111. Circuit Location
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-148
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-148
January 2010
10250T Series, Components — Contact Blocks
■
Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
■
■
■
■
■
■
UL A600/P600 rated
Color-coded plungers – red/green
for NC/NO circuits
Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
Gray (opaque) or amber (translucent) housings
Pressure plate or spade terminals
Fingerproof shrouds (for pressure
terminals only)
Logic Level Contact Blocks
■
■
■
■
■
UL A600/P600 rated
Color-coded plungers
Inert palladium knife-blade contacts
Gray (opaque) housings
Pressure plate or spade terminals
Special Function Contact Blocks
UL A600/P600 rated
Color-coded plungers
■ Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
■ Gray (opaque) housings
■ Pressure plate terminals only
Therefore standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level applications where the contacts are not
exposed to any harsh environmental
conditions.
Special Purpose Contact Block
Palladium, which is more inert than
gold, is well suited for voltages and
currents approaching zero and is recommended for applications where
environmental conditions are a factor.
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Maximum 300V rated
Black plungers
Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
Black (opaque) housings
Pressure plate terminals only
Fingerproof shrouds not available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the hallmark of
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer contact blocks.
A pointed silver nib on the contact tip
ensures reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V applications.
Palladium Contacts
Maximum Contact Block Mounting per Operator Type
Operator
Max. Operator
Stack
Pushbuttons
6
Push-Pull
Operators
Roto-Push
Operators
2
4
Max.
Stack
2- or 3-Position
Selector Switches
4-Position
Selector Switches
Joysticks
6
4
4
Table 47-234. Contact Blocks
Symbol
Circuit
Descriptio
n/
Notes
10250T1
Standard
Pressure
Terminals
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Spade
Terminals
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Spade
Terminals
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51
10250T59
10250T51E
10250T59E
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53
10250T60
10250T53E
10250T60E
NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1
10250T40
10250T1E
10250T40E
2NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3
10250T42
10250T3E
10250T42E
2NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2
10250T41
10250T2E
10250T41E
10250T71E
—
10250T47E
—
10250T57E
—
10250T45E
—
10250T55E
—
47
Special Function Blocks
Blank
No
Plunger
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
(6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T71
—
ECNO
-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 10250T47
blocks unless otherwise noted.
—
ECNO
-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T57
—
10250T45
—
10250T55
—
10250T44
—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6
blocks unless otherwise noted.
LONCECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
Four circuits in single block depth. Rated 300V
max. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise
noted.
Special Purpose Blocks
2NO2NC
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for
Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices.
Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per
operator and minimum spacing between
devices is 2.5” (63.5 mm). Not suitable for
use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with
fingerproof shrouds.
Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks
are not suitable on selector switches or rotopush operators. Okay to use with 3-position
push-pull operators only on low voltage
(30V or less) circuits. Fingerproof shrouds
not available.
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-149
January 2010
10250T Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks (Continued)
Table 47-235. Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Symbol
Circuit
Description/
Notes
10250T1CP
Standard
Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Pressure
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T51P
10250T51EP
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T53P
10250T53EP
NO-NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T1P
10250T1EP
2NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T3P
10250T3EP
2NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T2P
10250T2EP
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P
10250T71EP
ECNO-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P
10250T47EP
ECNO-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T57P
10250T57EP
2LONC
Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T45P
10250T45EP
LONC-ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T55P
10250T55EP
Price
U.S. $
Special Function Blocks
Blank
No
Plunger
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable
for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34
devices.
To order contact blocks with translucent
amber housing, change Suffix P to CP in
Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP.
Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
47
Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-150
January 2010
10250T Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks (Continued)
Table 47-236. Amber Contact Blocks
Symbol
Standard
Circuit Description/
Notes
Pressure
Terminals
10250T1C
Catalog
Number
Logic Level
Spade
Terminals
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Pressure
Terminals
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Spade
Terminals
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51C
10250T59C
10250T51EC
10250T59EC
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53C
10250T60C
10250T53EC
10250T60EC
NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1C
10250T40C
10250T1EC
10250T40EC
2NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3C
10250T42C
10250T3EC
10250T42EC
2NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2C
10250T41C
10250T2EC
10250T41EC
10250T71C
—
10250T71EC
—
10250T47EC
—
10250T57EC
—
10250T45EC
—
10250T55EC
—
Special Function Blocks
Blank
No
Plunger
47
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
(6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
ECNO
-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack
up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T47C
—
ECNO
-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack
up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T57C
—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack
up to 6 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T45C
—
LONC- Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4
ECNO blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T55C
—
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable
for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34
devices.
To order amber contact blocks with fingerproof shrouds, change Suffix to CP in the
Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP. Not available with spade terminals.
Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per
operator and minimum spacing between
devices is 2.5” (63.5 mm). Not suitable for
use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with
fingerproof shrouds.
Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-151
January 2010
10250T Series, Legend Plates
Options
Legend Plates
Legend Plates with Standard Markings
The legend plates listed below are sized for all standard
commercial enclosures and Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer cast
enclosures. For vertical spacing less than 1.75", replace the S
in the Catalog Number with MS, or the M with P (except PushPull). No change in price. The smaller size legend plates,
“MS” or “P” size, have limited space for legend.
Table 47-237. For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights —
Standard
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend
Color of
Field
Catalog Number
Square
1/2 Round
Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Table 47-243 on Page 47-152
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
10250TS90
10250TS73
10250TS74
10250TS13
10250TS75
10250TM90
10250TM11
10250TM12
10250TM13
10250TM14
FASTER
FEEDER ON
FEEDER OFF
FORWARD
HIGH
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS87
10250TS94
10250TS95
10250TS15
10250TS16
10250TM87
10250TM94
10250TM95
10250TM15
10250TM16
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS17
10250TS18
10250TS19
10250TS20
10250TS21
10250TM17
10250TM18
10250TM19
10250TM20
10250TM21
LOW
LOWER
LUBE-FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS22
10250TS23
10250TS92
10250TS81
10250TS82
10250TM22
10250TM23
10250TM92
10250TM81
10250TM82
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
POWER ON
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS24
10250TS25
10250TS26
10250TS27
10250TS80
10250TM24
10250TM25
10250TM26
10250TM27
10250TM80
RAISE
READY
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS28
10250TS86
10250TS29
10250TS30
10250TS31
10250TM28
10250TM86
10250TM29
10250TM30
10250TM31
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
STOP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
10250TS85
10250TS32
10250TS88
10250TS33
10250TS34
10250TM85
10250TM32
10250TM88
10250TM33
10250TM34
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
UNCLAMP
UP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
10250TS83
10250TS93
10250TS84
10250TS91
10250TS35
10250TM83
10250TM93
10250TM84
10250TM91
10250TM35
Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower
portion.
Table 47-238. Blank Plastic Legend Plates — Square
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color
Catalog Number
Square
Legend Plate
Catalog Number
10250TS41
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend
Color of
Catalog Number
Field
1/2 Round
Square
Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . See Table 47-243 on Page 47-152
2-Position — 5/32" High Lettering
FOR. REV.
HAND AUTO
HIGH LOW
JOG RUN
MAN. AUTO
OFF ON
OPEN CLOSE
RUN JOG
SAFE RUN
START JOG
START STOP
UP DOWN
AUTO OFF HAND
FOR. OFF REV.
FOR. SAFE REV.
HAND OFF AUTO
MAN. OFF AUTO
OPEN OFF CLOSE
RUN SAFE JOG
UP OFF DOWN
ON STOP SAFE
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
10250TS49
10250TS50
10250TS69
10250TS51
10250TS68
10250TS53
10250TS70
10250TS54
10250TS71
10250TM49
10250TM50
10250TM69
10250TM51
10250TM68
10250TM53
10250TM70
10250TM54
10250TM71
Field
Catalog
Number
Yellow or Red
10250TRP78
Yellow or Red
Yellow
10250TRP76
10250TRP79
Price
U.S. $
45 mm
Blank
70 mm
Blank
Red EMERG. STOP
If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
Table 47-241. For Push-Pull Units
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend
Color of
Catalog Number
Field
Square
1/2 Round
Standard Size — Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32" High
PULL START/PUSH STOP
PUSH ON/PULL OFF
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN
Green/Red
Black
Black
Black
10250TPP2
10250TPP5
10250TPP8
10250TPP11
10250TR2
10250TR5
10250TR8
10250TR11
Jumbo Size — Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8" High
PULL START/PUSH STOP
PULL ON/PUSH OFF
PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE
PULL UP/PUSH DOWN
Standard
Jumbo
10250TSP76
10250TLP76
10250TEP76
10250TSP77
10250TLP77
10250TEP77
If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required.
Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for
most sheet metal enclosures.
10250TM38
10250TM39
10250TM40
10250TM41
10250TM67
10250TM42
10250TM43
10250TM44
10250TM45
10250TM46
10250TM47
10250TM48
Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower
portion.
Color
Lettering
Field
10250TS38
10250TS39
10250TS40
10250TS41
10250TS67
10250TS42
10250TS43
10250TS44
10250TS45
10250TS46
10250TS47
10250TS48
Table 47-240. 45 mm and 70 mm Plastic — Round
White or
Silver
Red or
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
3-Position — 1/8" High Lettering
Black
White
70 mm Round —
Plastic
Catalog Number
10250TRP79
Table 47-239. For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators —
Standard Size
Lettering
Extra Large
1/2 Round
Legend Plate
Catalog Number
10250TM38
Green/Red
Black
Black
Black
10250TPP3
10250TPP6
10250TPP9
10250TPP12
10250TR3
10250TR6
10250TR9
10250TR12
All Push-Pull Legend Plates include the symbols ≠Ø in the center of the
plate.
Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower
portion.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-152
January 2010
10250T Series, Legend Plates
Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings
Blackening Kit
When Ordering Specify
Solution blackens aluminum exposed
by engraving process. Must be applied
immediately after engraving. 0.3 oz.
bottle — sufficient for approximately
1100 legend plates.
■
Catalog Number of Blank Plate
Phase plus Suffix “STAMP.”
■ Insert the following into Order
Notes: Legend, Letter Size and
Locations (letters A – W) — combine
letters for definitive locations as
shown.
Small Size
10250TMS or TP Series
A
Jumbo Size
10250TL or TJ Series
A
B
C
D
K
Table 47-242. Blackening Kit
Catalog Number
Price U.S. $
10250TBK
Ordering Example:
Standard Size
10250TS or TM Series
Catalog No.: 10250TS36STAMP
Letter Size: 3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
Pos. A — POWER HOUSE
Pos. B — START PUMP 1
Extra Large Size
Cat. No. 10250TNP99
A
B
G
F
AB
AE
AF
A
B
Legend Characters Available
C
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ/-.,1234567890
Legend characters on black and red
plates are white — on satin aluminum
plates, characters are black.
D
B4
K
C4
A4
A
H
D4
L
G
I
Figure 47-113. Legend Positions
Figure 47-112. Legend Positions
Table 47-243. Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates
Style
Color
Small
Standard
Jumbo
Extra
Large
4-Position
Selector Switch
Push-Pull
with Symbols
Price U.S. $
Custom
Standard
Standard
Jumbo
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Square
Black
Red
Green/Red
Satin Alum.
10250TMS36
10250TMS37
—
—
10250TS36
10250TS37
—
—
10250TL36
10250TL37
—
—
—
—
—
10250TNP99
10250TS76
—
—
—
10250TS72
—
—
—
10250TPP17
—
10250TPP20
—
10250TPP18
—
10250TPP21
—
1/2
Round
Black
Red
Green/Red
Satin Alum.
10250TP36
10250TP37
—
—
10250TM36
10250TM37
—
10250TM89
10250TJ36
10250TJ37
—
10250TJ89
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10250TM72
—
—
—
10250TR17
—
10250TR20
—
10250TR18
—
10250TR21
—
47
Blank
Custom
Engraved
All Push-Pull Legend Plates include the symbols ≠Ø in the center of the plate.
When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures.
Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion.
Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space — fits cast enclosures.
Table 47-244. Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic)
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Width
Style
Height
Character Size
3/32" High
1/8" High
3/16" High
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Small
1.59 (40.4)
1.59 (40.4)
Square
1/2 Round
1
1
17
15
—
1
—
12
—
1
—
9
Standard and
Custom
1.75 (44.5)
1.75 (44.5)
Square
1/2 Round
2
2
18
15
2
2
13
12
1
1
9
9
Jumbo
2.19 (55.6)
2.19 (55.6)
Square
1/2 Round
5
5
23
19
3
4
18
15
2
2
12
11
Extra Large
2.44 (62)
2.44 (62)
Square
6
25
3
18
3
12
Recommended only when mounting on minimum centers [less than 1-3/4 inch (44.5 mm) vertical centers].
Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.
When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures.
Legend Plates for
Joystick Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-141
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-153
January 2010
10250T Series, Enclosures
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Table 47-245. Enclosures (Case and Cover) — Surface Mounting
Number of
Elements
1 Contact Block Depth
Catalog
Number
2 Contact Block Depth
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cast Enclosure — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
Die Cast Enclosure —
Cat. No.10250TN11
1
2
3
4
10250TN1
10250TN2
10250TN3
10250TN4
10250TN11
10250TN12
10250TN13
10250TN14
Polyester — In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
2
3
4
Polyester Enclosure —
Cat. No. E34N52
—
—
—
—
E34N51
E34N52
E34N53
E34N54
Stainless Steel — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
Stainless Steel Enclosure —
Cat. No. 10250TN35
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
10250TN33
10250TN34
10250TN35
10250TN36
For spacing increments, see Page 47-154.
All cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. See listing on Page 47-156.
When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
14 gauge, type 304.
When used with resistor light units, only the 2 contact block depth enclosure can be used.
Table 47-246. Approximate Dimensions
Number Element
of
Arrangement
Elements
Surface Mounting
Conduit Approximate Dimensions
Entrance
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
47
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
Cast
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
5.13 (130.3)
7.0 (177.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3/4
3/4
1
1
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
6.63 (168.4)
8.88 (225.6)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
4.88 (124.0)
7.13 (181.1)
9.38 (238.3)
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
9.00 (228.6)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
7.50 (190.5)
9.00 (228.6)
12.00 (304.8)
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
Polyester
1
2
3
4
E
B
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as
required.
Depth given is for two contact block deep
stations. One contact block deep stations
subtract 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
C
Surface
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1
One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
Note: 2-position joystick must be used with
two contact block deep enclosures (maximum
number of contact blocks = 1). 4-position
joysticks can not be used within these
enclosures.
D
A
Figure 47-114. Enclosure Layouts
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-154
January 2010
10250T Series, Enclosures
Die Cast and Stainless Steel — Flush Mount, Covers Only
Table 47-247. Covers Only — Flush Mounting
Number of
Elements
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Flush Cast Covers
Flat
Cover
1
2
3
4
Deep
Cover
In-Line Deep Cover
In-Line Flat Cover
10250TF11
10250TF12
10250TF13
10250TF14
10250TF1
10250TF2
10250TF3
10250TF4
In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates
1
2
3
4
With Pullbox
Without Pullbox
10250TS10
10250TS11
10250TS12
10250TS14
10250TS1
10250TS2
10250TS3
10250TS4
Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.
Table 47-248. Approximate Dimensions
Number of
Elements
Flush Mounting
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.63 (92.2)
5.50 (139.7)
6.0 (152.4)
9.25 (235)
Cast
1
2
3
4
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size
for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger
E
B
Stainless Steel
47
1
2
3
4
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
6.88 (174.8)
8.63 (219.2)
10.50 (266.7)
2.50
2.50
2.50
2.50
(63.5)
(63.5)
(63.5)
(63.5)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
1.88 (47.8)
3.63 (92.2)
5.50 (139.7)
7.25 (184.2)
D
C
A
Surface or Pendant
Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deeper.
Depth given includes pull box.
Table 47-249. Spacing Increments
Type
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
F
G
H
Cast
2.44 (62)
2.5 (63.5)
1.88 (47.8)
Polyester
1.88 (47.8)
Min. 2.13 (54.1)
2.25 (57.2)
Stainless Steel
1.69 (42.9)
Min. 1.73 (43.9)
2.25 (57.2)
Top – For Vertical Mounting
G
F
Figure 47-115. Spacing Increments for
Enclosures
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
H
Figure 47-116. Enclosure Arrangement
Diagram
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-155
January 2010
10250T Series, Accessories
Accessories
Padlocks not included with padlocking attachments. For operators with built-in padlock attachment, see Page 47-120.
Table 47-250. Accessories
Description
Catalog
Number
Padlock Attachments
Description
Price
U.S. $
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot
For use with button operators
(extended buttons preferred).
Temperature to -25°F (-32°C)
Black
10250TA3
Red
10250TA4
10250TA10
Green
(See Page 47-156 for 10250TA96
Tightening Tool.)
Padlocking Attachment for Use
10250TA26
with Extended Pushbutton
Permits locking NC contacts in open
position with 1/4" padlock.
Transparent Boot
For regular illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest —
Temperature to -38°F (-39°C)
10250TA36
Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard
10250TA38
When used with a 1/4" padlock,
makes flush and long button and
knob selector switch unaccessible,
but not locked down. Without the
padlock, it is a flip-up guard. Padlock
hasp can be removed before
assembly.
Padlocking Attachment for Use
with Flexible Weather Resistant
Boot
Used on long button operators.
Stainless steel. Use only for locking
NC contacts open.
Boot for Flush Pushbutton
Clear
Black
Red
Green
10250TA25
10250TA46
10250TA47
10250TA48
10250TA49
Hardware and Kits
10250TA63
Padlock Attachment
10250TA64
For use with Illuminated Pushbuttons and maintained Push-Pull
operators having standard button or
lens only. Use 1/4” padlock. Locks in
down position only.
Padlocking Attachment for
Non-illuminated Knob Selector
Switches
Provision for up to 5, 1/4" padlocks.
Thrust Washers —
To meet Ford Motor Co.
mounting specifications.
10250TK3
Contact Block Tape Seal —
Seals plunger openings on last
contact block. Order in multiples
of 10 pieces.
10250TK5
Selector Switch Operator
Gasket —
Seals out dust from getting inbetween the cam and contact
block plungers. Supplied as
standard with all selector
switches.
56-9337
Special Retaining Nut —
to accommodate thick panel:
Indicating lights
PresTest, pushbuttons and
selector switches
10250TA11
47
10250TA30
10250TA31
10250TA6
Terminal Block —
Two terminals, each will
accommodate two wire
terminations.
10250TA62
Shroud for Mushroom
Head Operator
Prevents accidental operation.
(Not for push-pull operators.)
10250TA12
Spacer Ring —
Used when legend plate
is not required.
10250TA8
Extended Retaining Nut
Replaces standard nut and
provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators.
10250TA79
Guard for Illuminated
Pushbutton
10250TA15
Stacking Screw —
Replaces transformer mounting
screws on indicating light so
terminal block 10250TA62 can be
mounted to light to support and
connect a series resistor. This
screw also fits all contact
blocks. Order in multiples of 10.
Shrouds and Guards
Shroud
For jumbo mushroom head
operator.
Gray
Yellow
Price
U.S. $
Boots
Padlocking Attachment for Flush
10250TA2
Pushbutton Operators
Permits locking NC contacts in open
position with 1/4" padlock. Will not
lock NO contact.
Padlocking Cover Guard
Cover locked over flush button
makes it unaccessible or on
extended button locks NC contacts
open. Takes 1/4" shank size padlock.
Catalog
Number
10250TA56
10250TA56Y
Half Shroud – Yellow
For jumbo mushroom head
operator.
10250ED1241
Fingerproof Shroud —
10 per Package
Fits new style contact blocks and
light units.
10250TA101
Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure.
Cover is too thick.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-156
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
10250T Series, Accessories
Table 47-250. Accessories (Continued)
Description
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Hardware and Kits (Continued)
Base Mounting
Spacers —
Equivalent to contact
1 Block
block in depth —
Deep
Complete with screws,
2 Block
washers, etc.
Deep
Grounding Kits —
Kits consist of a ring connector
and a #6 screw for mounting
connector to rear of contact
block mounting screw.
All components except Standard
Indicating Lights and PresTest
Indicating Lights
Standard Indicating Lights
PresTest Indicating Lights
Contact Block Terminal
Jumpers —
Available in multiples of 100 only.
Term. to Term. —
within Block (short)
100 per pkg.
1000 per pkg.
Term. to Term. —
Block to Block (long)
100 per pkg.
1000 per pkg.
47
Maintained Contact Attachment
Release Button Assembly
Mechanically interlocks with
another pushbutton and contact
block (not included). Provides
mode indication. Minimum hole
centers 1.62 inch (41.1 mm),
maximum 2.313 inch (58.8 mm).
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Same with Long Button — Black
Maintained Contact
Attachment
Mechanically interlocks two
buttons and provides position
indication for one. Use with two
pushbutton operators and one or
more contact blocks.
Roto-Push Lever Operator —
Used to provide lever operation
for Roto-Push operators.
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Special Light Modules
Master Test (Dual Input) Module
— Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation
between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T,
E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48V DC
10250TMT8
10250TA22
10250TA23
Flasher Module —
Changes any AC illuminated
device to a controlled flashing
light. Fits 10250T, E30 and E34
devices.
24V
120V
10250TKG1
10250TKG2
10250TKG3
10250TFL2
10250TFL1
Flashing Incandescent Lamp
10250ED986-4
— For use with 120V transformer type or 6V full voltage
type Indicating Lights including
PresTest and most E29 devices.
Hole Plugs
10250TA70
10250TA70-2
Plug —
For unused holes —
Steel, painted gray
(Stainless steel, use E30KT5,
see Page 47-112)
10250TA7
10250TA5
Octagonal 10250T
(notched to fit over selector
switch lever), E29 and E30
10250TA95
10250TA14
E22, E30, E34 and Octagonal
E22CW
10250T (will not fit over selector
switch levers)
10250TA71
10250TA71-2
Tools
Special Operators and Attachments
Wobble Stick
Complete with retaining nut —
fits standard button.
Lever Operator
For use with two vertically
mounted flush pushbuttons.
Description
Tool for Tightening Boots —
Used to install boot Catalog
Numbers, 10250TA3, A4,
A10 and A25.
10250TA96
10250T, E34 Allen Wrench —
Used for removal of jumbo
mushroom head.
10250TA102
Lamp Removal Tools —
10250TA74
For transformer type illuminated
pushbuttons, push-pull and
selector switches. Fits #12
lamp.
10250TA17
10250TA18
10250TA19
10250TA20
10250TA39
10250TA1
For full voltage and resistor
E30KV1
type illuminated pushbuttons,
push-pull and selector switches
and E30.
Standard indicating lights.
E29KLT
Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6.
10250TA13
Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled)
stations.
Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure.
Cover is too thick.
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-157
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Renewal Parts
Renewal Parts
Table 47-251. Replacement Lamps — For 10250T Illuminated Operators
Mfg.
Lamp Type
Voltage Base
Style
120MB
120V
#267
#755
#756
#757
6.3V
6.3V
12V
24V
#1828
32V
#1835
55V
NE48
120V
NE51H-R22 120V
NE51H-R68 240V
Application
Part
Number
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Resistor Indicating Light
28-3044
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Flasher
10250T Transformer, PresTest and Full Voltage
10250T Full Voltage
10250T Full Voltage
10250ED986-4
28-2202
28-5184
28-5185
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 4-1/2 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Full Voltage
10250T Resistor
10250T Neon
10250T Neon
10250T Neon
28-5186
28-5187
28-494
28-3754
28-3755
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-252. Replacement LED Lamps — For 10250T, E34 and E22 Units
Voltage
Color
Continuous
AC/DC
Catalog
Number
6V – 12V
Flashing
Price
U.S. $
AC
DC
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED612RN
E22LED612ON
E22LED612YN
E22LED612GN
E22LED612BN
E22LED612WN
E22LED006RAF
E22LED006OAF
E22LED006YAF
E22LED006GAF
E22LED006BAF
E22LED006WAF
E22LED006RDF
E22LED006ODF
E22LED006YDF
E22LED006GDF
E22LED006BDF
E22LED006WDF
24V
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED024RN
E22LED024ON
E22LED024YN
E22LED024GN
E22LED024BN
E22LED024WN
E22LED024RAF
E22LED024OAF
E22LED024YAF
E22LED024GAF
E22LED024BAF
E22LED024WAF
E22LED024RDF
E22LED024ODF
E22LED024YDF
E22LED024GDF
E22LED024BDF
E22LED024WDF
48V
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED048RN
E22LED048ON
E22LED048YN
E22LED048GN
E22LED048BN
E22LED048WN
E22LED048RAF
E22LED048OAF
E22LED048YAF
E22LED048GAF
E22LED048BAF
E22LED048WAF
E22LED048RDF
E22LED048ODF
E22LED048YDF
E22LED048GDF
E22LED048BDF
E22LED048WDF
60V
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED060RN
E22LED060ON
E22LED060YN
E22LED060GN
E22LED060BN
E22LED060WN
E22LED060RAF
E22LED060OAF
E22LED060YAF
E22LED060GAF
E22LED060BAF
E22LED060WAF
E22LED060RDF
E22LED060ODF
E22LED060YDF
E22LED060GDF
E22LED060BDF
E22LED060WDF
120V
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RN
E22LED120ON
E22LED120YN
E22LED120GN
E22LED120BN
E22LED120WN
E22LED120RAF
E22LED120OAF
E22LED120YAF
E22LED120GAF
E22LED120BAF
E22LED120WAF
E22LED120RDF
E22LED120ODF
E22LED120YDF
E22LED120GDF
E22LED120BDF
E22LED120WDF
Standard
LED Lamp
Price
U.S. $
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-158
January 2010
10250T Series, Renewal Parts
2-Position
Joystick Operator
4-Position Joystick
Operator
(w/o Latch)
Flush Head
Pushbutton
Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton
Operator
Illuminated Pushbutton
Operator
Mushroom Head
Operator with
Padlock Attachment
Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Transformer Type
Indicating Light
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator
Potentiometers
Table 47-253. 10250T Style Operator Renewal Parts
Item Description
No.
47
No. Part
Req. Number
1
Gasket
1
16-1548
2
Mounting Nut
1
15-1530
Price
U.S. $
Item Description
No.
No. Part
Req. Number
Price
U.S. $
15
Round Head Screw
(#4-40 x 0.344" Long)
(Supplied with Basic Unit)
2
11-4553
16
Mounting Screw
2
11-1632
17
Simple Potentiometer
(Does Not Include
Items 18, 28 or 29)
1,000 Ohms
2,500 Ohms
5,000 Ohms
10,000 Ohms
25,000 Ohms
50,000 Ohms
1
As Req. Below
—
—
—
—
—
—
41-782-2
41-782-3
41-782-10
41-782-4
41-782-5
41-782-6
3
Handle
1
24-5045
4
Knob
Knob (Not Shown) for Joystick
Operator with Latch
1
1
53-3157
53-3159
5
Common Gate
(Supplied with Operator)
2
16-3400
6
Set Screw
(#6-32 x 0.250" Long Hollow Hex)
2
11-2014
7
Mushroom Head Button
(Includes (2) Item 6)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
1
As Req. Below
—
—
—
—
—
53-1317
53-1317-2
53-1317-3
53-1317-4
53-1317-22
18
Connector
(Includes Screw and Lug)
2
25-1851
19
Indicating Plate
Standard Size (Without Legend)
Large Size (Specify Legend)
1
—
—
As Req. Above
30-4460
10250TR30
Set Screw
2
(#10-32 x 0.250" Long Hollow Hex)
11-544
20
Retaining Nut
1
15-1547
Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
(Aluminum — Includes (2) Item 8)
Red
Black
Yellow
Green
1
As Req. Below
21
1
1
53-1314
11-2014
—
—
—
—
53-1317-9
53-1317-10
53-1317-11
53-1317-12
Knob
Socket Set Screw
(#6-32 x 0.250" Long)
29-3749-2
8
9
10
Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
1
(Aluminum — Red EMERG. STOP)
Does Not Include Item (8)
11
Position Gate:
2 Position
3 Position
4 Position
8 Position
53-1349-18
1
1
1
1
54-7278
54-7173
54-12278
54-12279
Mounting Screw
(#6-32 x 0.710" Long)
Washer
2
10250TA79
2
16-2038
13
Terminal Screw and Lug (Captive)
Req. 80-5502
14
Gasket (Supplied with Basic Unit)
1
12
22
Coupling
1
23
Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.188" Long)
1
11-1199
24
Spacer
2
56-1066-18
25
Connector
(Includes Screw and Lug)
1
25-1851-2
26
Mounting Nut
1
15-1938
27
4-Position Joystick Operating
Mechanism (Complete)
1
24-6565
28
(Not Shown) 4-Position Joystick
Operating Mechanism
(With Latch) Complete
1
24-6565-2
29
Spring Loaded Latch
1
52-1214-2
30
Hand Operated Latch
1
52-913-3
32-803
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-159
January 2010
10250T Series, Mounting Options
Mounting
Terminals on Top
Panel Thickness
■
Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm)
■ Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) including
legend plate
■ Maximum can be increased to 0.375
inch (15.9 mm) using optional
retaining nut
❑ Indicating light: 10250TA30
❑ Pushbutton/selector switch:
10250TA31
Table 47-254. Mounting Matrix
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B
C
D
Small
1.63
(41.3)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.63
(41.3)
Medium
1.75
(44.5)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.75
(44.5)
Large
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
B
Min.
0.6
(15.2)
D
Min.
A
Min.
C
Min.
1.22
(31)
Terminals at Side
Horizontal Mounting
Vertical Mounting
Figure 47-117. Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Horizontal mounting means terminals
are located top and bottom of contact
block. Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent
operators with easy access to terminals.
Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 inch
(3.6 mm) #29 drill.
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
0.6
(15.2)
1.20
(30.5)
Figure 47-118. Drilling Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
47
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-160
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
10250T Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
1.81
(46)
1.09
(27.7)
1.06
(26.9)
0.38
(9.7)
Long
Button
Only
1.38
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
Flush and Long Pushbutton
Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton
with Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back
0.88
0.88
(22.4) (22.4)
2.5
1.5 (63.5)
(38.1)
1.13
0.88 (22.4) (28.7)
for Each
Additional
Contact Block
0.25
(6.4)
1.13
(28.7)
1.75
(44.5)
1.91
(48.5)
2.5
(63.5)
Illuminated Pushbutton
2.03
(51.6)
1.78
(45.2)
1.75
(44.5)
1.09
(27.7)
2.0
(50.8)
1.5
(38.1)
Flush Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
2.31
(58.7)
1.8
(45.7)
1.78
1.38 (45.2)
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
1.1
(27.9)
1.38
(35.1)
2.19
(55.6)
A
Indicating Light – Transformer Type
1.94
(49.3)
PresTest Indicating Light – Transformer Type
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1.1
(27.9)
Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator
with Padlock Attachment
B
Spade Terminal
1.63
(41.4)
1.38
(35.1)
A
Screw Terminal
1.38
(35.1)
1.78
(45.2)
A
Indicating Light – Resistor and Neon Type
Lens
2.5
(63.5)
Plastic 1.38 (35.1)
Glass 1.59 (40.4)
1.78
(45.2)
2.38
(60.5)
1.75
(44.5)
1.56
(39.6)
1.88
(47.8)
1.81
(46)
2.0
(50.8)
1.63
(41.4)
1.78
(45.2)
Push-Pull Switch
47
1.38
(35.1)
1.38
(35.1)
Pushbutton with
Cylinder Lock
1.13
(28.7)
2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)
1.13
(28.7)
0.69
(17.5)
1.09
(27.7)
1.63
(41.4)
Mushroom and
Jumbo Head Pushbutton
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
1.09
(27.7)
1.13
(28.7)
1.88
(47.8)
1.56
(39.6)
PresTest Indicating Light – Resistor Type
Dimension A
Plastic
1.38 (35.1)
Glass
1.56 (39.6)
Master Test Indicating Light
Description
Relay Type
Solid-State Type
Dim. in Inches (mm)
B
C
4.38 (111.2)
2.94 (74.7)
4.28 (108.7)
2.88 (73.2)
Figure 47-119. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-161
January 2010
10250T Series, Dimensions
Threaded
Bushing
A
Large Dial Plate
1.88
(47.8)
Std. Dial Plate
Potentiometer
1.31
(33.3)
1.09
1.0
(27.7) (25.4)
Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
A
0.94
(23.9)
B
B
Shaft
C
0.94
(23.9)
2 Watt Single
0.94
(23.9)
25 Watt —
2.38 1.19 0.81
Up to 25M Ohms (60.5) (30.2) (20.6)
0.75
(19.1)
Shaft Dimensions of Potentiometer
That C-H Operator Will Accept
1.31 0.94 0.94
(33.3) (23.9) (23.9)
50M Ohms
2.56
(65)
1.69 1.25
(42.9) (31.8)
Cat. No.
Operator
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
10250T330
0.38 (9.7) Dia. x 0.25 (6.4) Dia. x
0.38 (9.7) Long 0.63 (16) Long
A
Potentiometer
B
10250TH3872 0.38 (9.7) Dia. x 0.25 (6.4) Dia. x
0.38 (9.7) Long 0.88 (22.4) Long
Coin Slot
Knob
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
1.13
(28.7)
Operator Dim. A
Knob
1.38 (35.1)
Lever
1.50 (38.1)
1.38
(35.1)
Coin Slot 1.38 (35.1)
Lever
A
1.75
(44.5)
1.09
(27.7)
Key Operated
Selector Switch
Contact 0.89
Block (22.6)
0.88 (22.4)
per Block
0.06 (1.5) to
0.26 (6.6)
Panel Thickness
1.25
(31.8)
21°
1.19
1.88
(47.8) 0.88 (22.4) (30.2)
Per Unit
1.22
(31)
Wobble Stick
Catalog No. 10250TA5
1.47
(37.3)
1.59
(40.4)
1.33
(33.8)
1.88
(47.8)
1.59
(40.4)
1.88
(47.8)
3.75
(95.3)
Flexible Boot for
Protecting Flush or
Long Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA3
Typical
0.94
(23.9)
0.38
(9.7)
1.06
(26.9)
2.06
(52.3)
1.63
(41.4)
0.25
(6.4)
Padlock Attachment
for Flush Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA2
0.84
(21.3)
1.5
(38.1)
Padlock Attachment
for Extended Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA26
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Padlock Attachment
for Knob Selector Switch
Catalog No. 10250TA11
0.97
(24.6)
Adjustable
1.62 (41.1)
Min.
1.63 (41.4)
Min.
2.5 (63.5)
Max.
2.31 (58.7)
Max.
0.88
(22.4)
for Each
0.89
Additional
1.07 (22.6)
Contact
(27.2)
Block
Maintained Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA66 Typical
Figure 47-120. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
1.63
(41.4)
0.44
(11.2)
Transparent Flexible Boot
for Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA25
Lever Operator
(For Use with Two Vertically
Mounted Flush Pushbuttons)
Catalog No. 10250TA14
CA08102001E
21°
3.75
(95.3)
4-Position Joystick Operator
3.59
(91.2)
0.84
(21.3)
2.44
(62)
1.38
(35.1)
Cam
0.75
(19.1)
1.44
(36.6)
1.25
(31.8)
4.0
(101.6)
2-Position Joystick Operator
2.19
(55.6)
1.53
(38.9)
Illuminated Selector
Switch
2.2 (55.9)
mom.
2.5 (63.5)
main.
2.13
(54.1)
0.38 (9.7)
Long
Button
Only
Roto-Push
1.96
(49.8)
3.88
(98.6)
2.06
(52.3)
1.38
(35.1)
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
0.91
(23.1)
Maintained Contact
Attachment
Catalog No. 10250TA17 Typical
47
47-162
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
10250T Series, Dimensions
0.38
(9.7)
0.75
(19.1)
2.19
(55.6)
1.16
(29.5)
0.38
(9.7)
1.0
(25.4)
3.25
(82.6)
2.19
(55.6)
1.91
(48.5)
0.94
(23.9)
0.91
(23.1)
1.47
(37.3)
1.25
(31.8)
1.65
(41.9)
Protecting Shroud for
Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA56
Padlock Attachment
for Maintained Push-Pull Operator
Catalog No. 10250TA64
Padlock Cover Gaurd
for Flush Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA36
0.44
(11.2)
1.53
(38.9)
1.75
(44.5)
0.84
(21.3)
1.69
(42.9)
1.50
(38.1)
1.31
(33.3)
1.50
(38.1)
1.38
(35.1)
1.75
(44.5)
1.81
(46)
1.25
(31.8)
Protecting Shroud for
Mushroom Head Button
Catalog No. 10250TA6
Protecting Shroud for
Illuminated Pushbutton
Catalog No. 10250TA15
Terminals on Top
1.31
(33.3)
2.16
(54.9)
Vertical Rows
Master Test Module,
Flasher Module
A
Dim. in Inches (mm)
A Min.
1.63 (41.4)
1.75 (44.5)
2.25 (57.2)
2.50 (63.5)
Legend
Plate
1.88
(47.8)
B Min.
1.88 (47.8)
1.88 (47.8)
2.25 (57.2)
2.50 (63.5)
Legend Plate
Dim. in Inches (mm)
A
B
1/2 Round Legend Plates
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.60 (66)
0.75
(19.1)
Multiple Button Guard
4 Circuit Contact Block 10250T44
Small or None
Standard
Jumbo
Extra Large
1.14
(29)
6 Mounting Holes
1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks
Small or None
Standard
Jumbo
Extra Large
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.60 (66)
If Jumbo plates are to be placed one
above the other vertically, add 0.13 (3.3)
to minimum dimensions listed.
Number of
Elements
Dimension
A
2
3
4
7
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.88 (200.2)
13.38 (339.9)
Small
Standard
Jumbo
1.56 (39.6)
1.59 (40.4)
2.06 (52.3)
0.91 (23.1)
1.07 (27.2)
1.53 (38.9)
Square Legend Plates
Small
Standard
Jumbo
Extra Large
1.59 (40.4) Sq.
1.75 (44.5) Sq.
2.19 (55.6) Sq.
2.44 (62.0) Sq.
0.90 (22.9)
1.06 (26.9)
1.50 (38.1)
1.63 (41.4)
For plastic legend plate, Dimension B is
1.12 (28.4).
Note: Locating nib hole or notch is
1.36" – 1.4" (34.5 – 35.6 mm) #29 drill.
Enclosure Size
(No. of
Elements)
A
B
1.22
(31)
Panel Drilling and Minimum Spacing
Legend
Plate
1.78
(45.2)
1.31
(33.3)
A
Min.
Horizontal Rows
Lever for Roto-Push Operator
Catalog No. 10250TA13
1.63
(41.4)
Terminals at
Side
47
Extended Retaining Nut
Catalog No. 10250TA12
0.6
(15.2)
B
Min.
A
Min.
B
Min.
Padlock Hasp or
Flip-Up Guard
Catalog No. 10250TA38
0.38 (9.7)
Dia. Hole
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
2, 3, & 4
3.75 (95.3)
1.94 (49.3)
0.13 (3.3)
2.69 (68.3)
1.38 (35.1)
6&7
4.0 (101.6)
2.19 (55.6)
0.13 (3.3)
2.88 (73.2)
1.63 (41.4)
B E
D
A
C
Chain Hook Bracket
Figure 47-121. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-163
January 2010
10250T Series, Ordering Example
Ordering Complete Devices
Complete 10250T Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights and/or Selector Switch
operators including contact block(s)
and legend plate can be ordered using
a single composite catalog number.
The individually packaged components will be shipped unassembled in
a single overpack carton marked with
the composite Catalog Number. Construct Catalog Number as follows.
Ordering Example
Example: Illuminated Pushbutton
Device — Catalog Number
10250T411C21-153S33
Table 47-255. Catalog Numbering System
10250T411 C21 – 1 53 S33
Insert
Hyphen
Before
Contact
Block(s)
Operator
Lens
10250TC21
Legend
Plate
10250TS33
Contact
Blocks
10250T1 &
10250T53
For a complete Catalog Number breakdown, see Pages 47-164 – 47-165.
47
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-164
January 2010
10250T Series, Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-256. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System
10250T
10 1 –
1
Circuit
Operator
10 =
11 =
12 =
17 =
50 =
51 =
Flush
Extended
40 mm Mushroom
65 mm Mushroom
1/2 Shroud Vertical Mount
1/2 Shroud Horizontal Mount
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
Button Color
1=
2=
3=
4=
5=
6=
8=
9=
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Table 47-257. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Push-Pulls Catalog Numbering System
10250T
5 63 C47
–
1
Circuit
Operator
5=
4=
9=
10 =
Incandescent
Light Unit
Blank =
89 =
63 =
64 =
65 =
82 =
66 =
67 =
68 =
69 =
70 =
79 =
83 =
80 =
81 =
47
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
2-Position Maintained
3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull
3-Position MT Push-Mom-Pull
3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull
Non-ill.
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
208V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
LED
Light Unit
Blank =
89L =
63L =
64L =
65L =
82L =
66L =
67L =
68L =
97L =
LED Voltage
Non-ill.
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
208V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
Blank =
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
Non-ill.
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Non-illuminated
Button
B60 =
B62 =
B63 =
B61 =
B64 =
J60 =
J62 =
J63 =
J61 =
J64 =
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
Black 40 mm
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm – “E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Black 65 mm
Red 65 mm
Red 65 mm – “E” STOP
Green 65 mm
Yellow 65 mm
Illuminated
Incandescent
LED
Lens Type
C47 = RD = Red 40 mm
C53 = ED = Red 40 mm – “E” STOP
C48 = GD = Green 40 mm
C49 = LD = Blue 40 mm
C50 = AD = Amber 40 mm
C51 = WD = White 40 mm
C52 =
– = Clear 40 mm
C57 = RS = Red Side Light
C63 = ES = Red Side Lt. – “E” STOP
C58 = GS = Green Side Light
C59 = LS = Blue Side Light
C64 = AS = Amber Side Light
C60 = YS = Yellow Side Light
C61 = WS = White Side Light
C62 =
– = Clear Side Light
C65 = RH = Red Heavy-Duty
C66 = GH = Green Heavy-Duty
C67 = AH = Amber Heavy-Duty
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight
47-165
January 2010
10250T Series, Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-258. Illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System
10250T
Incandescent Light Unit
416 =
412 =
412 =
419 =
413 =
414 =
415 =
473 =
474 =
476 =
477 =
478 =
471 =
472 =
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
–
1
LED Light Unit
416L =
411L =
412L =
419L =
413L =
414L =
415L =
397L =
Circuit
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
LED Voltage
Incandescent Lens Color
C21 =
C22 =
C23 =
C26 =
C24 =
C43 =
C25 =
416 C21
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
LED Lens Color
RD =
GD =
YD =
WD =
LD =
AD =
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Table 47-259. Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test Catalog Numbering System
10250T
203N C1N
Light Unit Type
Standard – Incandescent
181N =
182N =
198N =
183N =
184N =
185N =
203N =
204N =
206N =
207N =
208N =
201N =
202N =
226N =
227N =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
120V/Neon
240V/Neon
LED Voltage
Standard – LED
181L =
182L =
198L =
183L =
184L =
185L =
197L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
Plastic
Glass
Lens Color
Plastic
Glass
Lens Color
Standard/Master/PresTest – LED
C1N = C7N = Red
C2N = C8N = Green
C3N =
– = Yellow
C6N = C12N = White
C4N = C10N = Blue
C19N = C9N = Amber
C5N = C11N = Clear
RP =
GP =
YP =
WP =
LP =
AP =
PresTest – Incandescent
C21 =
C22 =
C23 =
C26 =
C24 =
C43 =
C25 =
C13N =
C14N =
–=
C18N =
C16N =
C15N =
C17N =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Master Test – Incandescent
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
CA08102001E
47
Standard/Master – Incandescent
187N = 120V/XFR
189N = 240V AC – SS
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
PresTest – LED
221L =
222L =
223L =
224L =
225L =
297L =
PresTest – Incandescent
221N =
222N =
223N =
224N =
225N =
232N =
233N =
235N =
238N =
239N =
231N =
240N =
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
RG =
GG =
–=
WG =
LG =
AG =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
47-166
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E34 Series
Product Description
Contents
47
Description
Page
Product Description . . . . . . . . .
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and
Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . . .
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons
and Indicating Lights . . . .
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pulls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . . .
Selector Switch Selection. . .
Selector Switch Operators . .
Illuminated Selector
Switch Operators . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . .
Options
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering Complete
Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number
Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47-166
47-166
47-167
47-167
47-168
47-168
47-169
47-170
47-171
47-172
47-174
47-175
47-177
47-178
47-180
47-181
47-182
Liquid Drainage
Operator
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® E34 Series
30.5 mm pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast construction of
our 10250T line with an additional twolayer 100% solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating. This coating
provides a flat black smooth, consistent, corrosion resistant surface that
has passed a demanding 600 hour salt
spray test. (The industry standard for
this 4X test requires only 200 hours.)
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer pushbutton
operators offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut,
these holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which can prevent
operation in freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm seal,
ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4.
Ultraviolet Light
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
E34 cathodic coating is not recommended for use in applications where
exposure to ultraviolet light exists —
use NEMA 4X 10250T operators.
Flexible
Diaphragm
Reliability Nibs
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer contact blocks
feature enclosed silver contacts with
pointed “reliability nibs” for reliable
performance from logic level up to
600V. To ensure reliable switching,
nibs bite through oxide which can form
on silver contacts, eliminating the
need for expensive logic level blocks
for most applications.
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
Colorfast
Molded
Button
Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut
Figure 47-123. Diaphragm Seal
Features
47-184
47-185
47-187
47-189
47-190
47-191
■
Epoxy-coated metal operators
Corrosion resistant
■ Integral ground screw terminal on
operators
■ FDA approved for sanitary chemical
resistance requirements
Dry Circuit
■
Medium Duty
47-192
Heavy-Duty
47-193
Figure 47-122. Reliability Nibs
Octagonal Mounting Nut Self-Adjusts to
Panel Thickness — Eliminates Spacer Washers
and Set Screws
Die Cast Construction with Thick,
Tough Corrosion Resistant Coating
Internal Sealing Diaphragm
for Excellent Sealing
3 Styles of Legend Plates
in 4 Sizes
Terminal Clamps Shipped
Open Ready to Wire
Wide Variety of Operator
Types and Colors
Stackable Contact Blocks up
to 12 Circuits per Operator
E34 Series
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-167
January 2010
E34 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Standards and Certifications
■
CE EN60947-5-1
■ UL 508 — File No. E131568
■ CSA C22.2 No. 14 — File No. LR68551
■ FDA 3-A Sanitary Standards
Ingress Protection
When mounted in similarly rated
enclosure —
■
■
Standard Indicating Lights
❑ UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4,
4X, 12, 13
❑ IEC IP65
All Other Operators
❑ UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X,
12, 13
❑ IEC IP65
Technical Data and
Specifications
Electrical Ratings
Table 47-260. Contact Block
Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC
Description
Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz
120
Make and Emergency
Interrupting Capacity (Amp)
Normal Load Break (Amp)
Thermal Current (Amp)
Voltamperes:
Make and Emergency
Interrupting Capacity
Normal Load Break
■
■
240
■
■
Frequency of operation
❑ All pushbuttons:
6000 operations/hr.
❑ Key and lever selector switches:
3000 operations/hr.
❑ Auto-latch devices:
1200 operations/hr.
Life
❑ Pushbuttons: 10 x 10 6 operations
❑ Contact blocks: 10 x 10 6 operations
❑ PresTest units: 10 x 10 6 operations
❑ Lever and key selector switches:
0.25 x 10 6 operations
❑ Twist to release pushbuttons:
0.3 x 10 6 operations
5.7
1.1
0.55
6
10
3
10
1.5
10
1.2
10
5.7
5.0
1.1
5.0
0.55
5.0
7200
7200
7200
7200
138
138
138
720
720
720
720
138
138
138
Insulation: Ui = 660V AC or DC
Thermal: lth = 10A
Fuse
■
Operating Temperature: 1° to 150°F
(-17° to 66°C)
■ Storage Temperature: -40° to 176°F
(-40° to 80°C)
■ Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m)
■ Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60°C
CA08102001E
UL rating: A600, P600
❑ AC load life duty cycle
1200 operations/hour
– 10A: 110V pf 0.4 – 1 x 10 6
operations
– 5A: 250V pf 0.4 – 1 x 10 6
operations
– 2A: 660V pf 0.4 – 1 x 10 6
operations
Switching capacity
❑ AC15 rated make/break
(11 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
– 6A: 120V pf 0.3
– 4A: 240V pf 0.3
– 2A: 660V pf 0.3
❑
Climate Conditions
■
250
12
Rated conditional short circuit current: 1 kA
■ Fuse type: GE Power Controls TIA
10, Red Spot Type gG, 10A,
660V AC, 460V DC, BS88-2,
IEC 60269-2-1
Shock resistance
❑ Duration: 210 mS ≥ 5g
125
15
■
■
24/28
30
Short Circuit Coordination to
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
■
Volts DC
600
60
Mechanical Ratings
■
480
DC13 rated make/break
(1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue)
– 1.0A: 125V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– 0.55A: 250V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– 0.1A: 660V L/R ≥ 0.95 at 300 mS
– 10A: 110V pure resistive
Maximum ratings for logic level
and hostile atmosphere application
❑ Maximum amperes: 0.5A
❑ Maximum volts: 120V AC/DC
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
■
Low voltage switching: Conical
shaped points or “reliability nibs”
improve performance in dry circuit,
corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under
normal environmental conditions,
the minimum operational voltage is
5V and the minimum operational
current is 1 mA, AC/DC.
■ Contact operation: Slow make and
break. All normally closed contacts
have positive opening operation,
i.e., normally closed contacts are
forced open in the event of contact
weld or spring breakage.
Light Units
■
Transformers: will withstand short
circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60947-5-1
■ Bulbs — average life:
❑ Transformer type: 20,000 hrs.
❑ Resistor/direct voltage type:
2500 hrs. minimum @ rated V
❑ LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
Terminals
■
Marking: NC-NO on the contact block
to meet the NEMA requirements.
Dual marking system 1 – 2 for normally closed, 3 – 4 for normally open
to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005).
■ Clamps: Terminals are saddle clamp
type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to
2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) conductors.
■ Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
■ Degree of protection against direct
electrical contact: IP2X with fingerproof shroud
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-168
January 2010
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Momentary Pushbutton and Indicating Light Units
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units
■
Non-illuminated
Table 47-261. Pushbutton Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Contact
Type
Button Color
Flush Button
Catalog
Number
Extended Button
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Mushroom Button
Jumbo Mushroom
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
1NO
Black
Red
Green
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
E34PB1-53X
E34PB2-53X
E34PB3-53X
—
E34EB1-53X
E34EB2-53X
E34EB3-53X
—
E34LB1-53X
E34LB2-53X
E34LB3-53X
—
E34JB1-53X
E34JB2-53X
E34JB3-53X
E34JB2N8-53X
1NC
Black
Red
Green
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
E34PB1-51X
E34PB2-51X
E34PB3-51X
—
E34EB1-51X
E34EB2-51X
E34EB3-51X
—
E34LB1-51X
E34LB2-51X
E34LB3-51X
—
E34JB1-51X
E34JB2-51X
E34JB3-51X
E34JB2N8-51X
1NO-1NC
Black
Red
Green
Red — Engraved
EMERG. STOP
E34PB1-1X
E34PB2-1X
E34PB3-1X
—
E34EB1-1X
E34EB2-1X
E34EB3-1X
—
E34LB1-1X
E34LB2-1X
E34LB3-1X
—
E34JB1-1X
E34JB2-1X
E34JB3-1X
E34JB2N8-1X
Anodized aluminum head — may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Indicating Light Units
■
47
Plastic Lenses
24V Full Voltage
Indicating Light — Red
Catalog Number
E34FB24H2X
Table 47-262. Indicating Light Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Color
Indicating Light
Catalog
Number
LED
Incandescent
Full Voltage
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
E34FB197LRP24
E34FB197LGP24
E34FB197LAP24
Bayonet Base
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
E34FB197LRP2A
E34FB197LGP2A
E34FB197LAP2A
Full Voltage
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
E34FB24H2X
E34FB24H3X
E34FB24H9X
#757
Resistor
120V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
E34RB120H2X
E34RB120H3X
E34RB120H9X
120MB
Transformer
120V AC
50/60 Hz
Red
Green
Amber
E34TB120H2X
E34TB120H3X
E34TB120H9X
#755
Anodized aluminum head — may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators
where exposed to ultraviolet light, see
Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Additional Light Units . . . . . Page 47-170
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-169
January 2010
E34 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components
Pushbuttons
Table 47-263. Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated — UL
(NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color
Catalog
Number
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E34PB1
E34PB2
E34PB3
E34PB4
E34PB5
E34PB6
E34PB7
E34PB8
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
E34EB1
E34EB2
E34EB3
E34EB4
E34EB5
E34EB6
E34EB7
E34EB8
Price
U.S. $
Contact Blocks
See Page 47-182 for additional contact blocks, fingerproof
shrouds and Transparent Amber colored blocks.
Flush Button
Extended Button
Contact Block
Table 47-264. Contact Blocks
Symbol
Blank
No
Plunger
Half Shrouded Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
Vertical
Horizontal
E34EVB1
E34EVB2
E34EVB3
E34EVB4
E34EVB5
E34EVB6
E34EVB7
E34EVB8
E34EHB1
E34EHB2
E34EHB3
E34EHB4
E34EHB5
E34EHB6
E34EHB7
E34EHB8
Blank
No
Plunger
Circuit
Catalog
Number
NC
10250T51
NO
10250T53
NO-NC
10250T1
2NC
10250T3
2NO
10250T2
Price
U.S. $
Mushroom Button
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
E34LB1
E34LB2
E34LB3
E34LB4
E34LB6
47
Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button
Black
Red
Red
(Engraved EMER. STOP)
Green
Yellow
E34JB1
E34JB2
E34JB2N8
E34JB3
E34JB4
Anodized aluminum head — may not be suitable for some corrosive
environments.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-170
January 2010
E34 Series, Illuminated Components
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Table 47-265. Operators without Lens
Light Unit Type
Type
Voltage
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Catalog
Number
LED
(LEDs not included)
Incandescent
47
Indicating
Light
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
PresTest
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Lamp Number
Price
U.S. $
Full Voltage
—
E34CB497L
E34FB197L
E34FPB297L
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
E34XB024L
E34XB120L
E34XB240L
E34XB277L
E34XB380L
E34XB480L
E34XB600L
—
E34TB120L
E34TB240L
E34TB277L
E34TB380L
E34TB480L
E34TB600L
—
E34TPB120L
E34TPB240L
—
E34TPB380L
E34TPB480L
E34TPB600L
Bayonet
Base
Full Voltage
AC/DC
6
12
24
32
48
E34CB06
E34CB12
E34CB24
E34CB32
E34CB48
E34FB06
E34FB12
E34FB24
E34FB32
E34FB48
E34FPB06
E34FPB12
E34FPB24
E34FPB32
E34FPB48
#755
#756
#757
#1828
#1835
Resistor
AC/DC
120
240
E34SB120
E34SB240
E34RB120
E34RB240
E34RPB120
E34RPB240
120MB
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
E34XB024
E34XB120
E34XB240
E34XB277
E34XB380
E34XB480
E34XB600
—
E34TB120
E34TB240
E34TB277
E34TB380
E34TB480
E34TB600
—
E34TPB120
E34TPB240
—
E34TPB380
E34TPB480
E34TPB600
#755
Neon
AC/DC
120
240
—
—
E34NB120
E34NB240
—
—
NE51H-R-22
NE51H-4-68
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page 47-157 for LED Selection and Pages 47-193 – 47-194 for Catalog
Numbering Structure.
Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Table 47-266. Indicating Light Lens
Color
Table 47-268. PresTest Lens
Glass
Plastic
Catalog
Number
Plastic
Glass
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Price
U.S. $
E34H2
E34H3
E34H4
E34H5
E34H6
E34H9
E34H0
Catalog
Number
Color
Price
U.S. $
E34G2
E34G3
E34G4
E34G5
E34G6
E34G9
E34G0
Plastic
Glass
Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel.
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Glass
Plastic
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V5
E34V6
E34V9
E34V0
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34P2
E34P3
E34P4
E34P5
E34P6
E34P9
E34P0
Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel.
Table 47-267. Illuminated Pushbutton Lens
Color
Catalog
Number
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V5
E34V6
E34V9
E34V0
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-171
January 2010
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■
■
Two- and Three-Position
Non-illuminated
Table 47-269. 2-Position Push-Pull Units Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Pull
Button Type/Color
Push
Push-Pull
Catalog
Number
Contact Type
Price
U.S. $
Mounting Location
A
B
Maintained Push, Maintained Pull
O
X
X
O
40 mm/Red
E34GDBC2-1X
40 mm Engraved
EMERGENCY STOP/Red
E34GDBC2N8-1X
65 mm Alum. Engraved
EMERGENCY STOP/Red
E34GDBJ2N8-1X
1NO
1NC
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table below.
Example: E34GDBC6-1X.
Table 47-270. 3-Position Push-Pull Units Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Pull
Button Type/Color
Intermediate
Push
Push-Pull
Catalog
Number
Contact Type
Price
U.S. $
Mounting Location
A
B
Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
O
40 mm/ Black
E34GFBC1-3X
40 mm/Red
E34GFBC2-3X
40 mm Engraved
EMERGENCY STOP/Red
E34GFBC2N8-3X
40 mm/Black
E34GEBC1-3X
1NC
1NC
Momentary Push, Momentary Pull
X
X
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
1NC
40 mm/Red
E34GEBC2-3X
1NC
40 mm/Black
E34GHBC1-1X
1NO
40 mm/Red
E34GHBC2-1X
1NC
47
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table
below. Example: E34GDBC6-1X.
Table 47-271. Button and Color Selection Table
Standard — 40 mm
Color
Suffix Catalog
Code Number
Black
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Blue
C1
C2
C2N8
C3
C6
Price
U.S. $
Jumbo Mushroom Head
(Anodized) Aluminum — 65 mm
E34C1
E34C2
E34C2N8
E34C3
E34C6
Color
Suffix Catalog
Code Number
Red
J2
Red (EMER. STOP) J2N8
Price
U.S. $
E34J2
E34J2N8
Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Page 47-191
Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Page 47-184
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-172
January 2010
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
■
■
Two-Position Maintained
Illuminated
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
Table 47-272. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Maintained — Pull Maintained — Push
Catalog
Number
LED
O
X
O
X
Full Voltage
Price
U.S. $
Contact Mounting Location
Type
A
B
24V AC/DC E34GDB97LRD24-1X
120V AC/DC E34GDB97LRD2A-1X
X
O
X
O
Red Standard Push-Pull
Transformer
IncanFull Voltage
descent Resistor
24V AC
E34GDB89LRD06-1X
120V AC
E34GDB63LRD06-1X
1NO
Transformer
24V AC
E34GDB89M2-1X
120V AC
E34GDB63M2-1X
Bayonet
Base
1NC
24V AC/DC E34GDB79M2-1X
120V AC/DC E34GDB80M2-1X
LED/Lamp
Number
#757
1NO
120MB
1NC
#755
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from Lens and Color Selection Table below.
Example: E34GDB79 M3-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176.
Table 47-273. Lens and Color Selection Table
47
Type
Color
Incand.
Suffix Code
LED
Suffix Code
Catalog
Number
Standard
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
M2
M2N8
M3
M6
M9
M5
M0
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
WD
CD
E34M2
E34M2N8
E34M3
E34M6
E34M9
E34M5
E34M0
Price
U.S. $
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see
Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Additional Light Units . . . . Page 47-176
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-173
January 2010
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
(Continued)
■
■
Three-Position Momentary
Illuminated
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
Table 47-274. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Momentary —
Pull
Lamp
Voltage
Maintained — Momentary —
Intermediate Push
O
O
X
O
Full
24V AC/DC
Voltage
Transformer
O
X
O
O
Transformer
E34GHB97LRD2A-1X
24V AC
E34GHB89LRD06-1X
120V AC
E34GHB63LRD06-1X
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
Price
U.S. $
Mounting
Location
A
E34GEB97LRD2A-3X
24V AC
E34GEB89LRD06-3X
120V AC
E34GEB63LRD06-3X
E34GHB80M2-1X
Transformer
24V AC
E34GHB89M2-1X
120V AC
E34GHB63M2-1X
Full
24V AC/DC
Voltage
E34GEB79M2-3X
Resistor 120V AC
E34GEB80M2-3X
Transformer
24V AC
E34GEB89M2-3X
120V AC
E34GEB63M2-3X
B
1NO
1NC
Bayonet
Base
1NC
1NC
#757
E34GHB79M2-1X
Resistor 120V AC
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
Base
E34GEB97LRD24-3X
120V AC
Incan- Full
24V AC/DC
descent Voltage
Contact
Type
E34GHB97LRD24-1X
120V AC
Full
24V AC/DC
Voltage
X
X
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Catalog
Number
LED
O
X
Type
1NO
1NC
120MB
#755
47
#757
1NC
1NC
120MB
#755
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from Lens and Color Selection Table on the bottom
of Page 47-172. Example: E34GEB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Light Units . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Page 47-176
Page 47-191
Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Page 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-174
January 2010
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units and Potentiometers
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
(Continued)
■
Three-Position — Maintained Push,
Momentary Pull
■ Illuminated
Illuminated
Push-Pull Unit
Table 47-275. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position
Momentary —
Pull
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Maintained — Maintained —
Intermediate Push
Catalog
Number
LED
X
X
O
X
O
O
Red Standard
Push-Pull
Contact
Type
Price
U.S. $
1NC
Transformer
1NC
E34GFB89LRD06-3X
120V AC
E34GFB63LRD06-3X
Incan- Full
24V AC/DC E34GFB79M2-3X
descent Voltage
X
X
O
X
O
O
A
Full
24V AC/DC E34GFB97LRD24-3X
Voltage 120V AC
E34GFB97LRD2A-3X
24V AC
Resistor 120V AC
E34GFB80M2-3X
Transformer
24V AC
E34GFB89M2-3X
120V AC
E34GFB63M2-3X
Mounting Location LED/Lamp
Number
B
Bayonet
Base
#757
1NC
120MB
1NC
#755
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from table on the bottom of Page 47-172.
Example: E34GFB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page 47-176.
Potentiometers
Table 47-276. Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate — Linear Type ±10% — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Vertical or Horizontal
One-Hole Mounting
Potentiometer
Ohms
2 Watt (60V Max.) Single
Potentiometer with Standard
Aluminum Dial Plate
Catalog
Number
47
1000
2500
5000
10000
25000
50000
Operator
Price
U.S. $
E34PDB1F1
E34PDB1F2
E34PDB1F5
E34PDB1F10
E34PDB1F25
E34PDB1F50
Only
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Large Dial Plate
1.88
(47.8)
Std. Dial Plate
E34PDB1A0
Alternative – Black Plastic Large
Legend with Standard Markings
1.09
1.0
(27.7) (25.4)
1.31
(33.3)
0.94
(23.9)
0.94
(23.9)
E34LP99
0.94
(23.9)
0.75
(19.1)
With Standard
Aluminum Dial Plate
Potentiometer
Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add Suffix 36 to Catalog Number. Example: E34PDB1F136. To order separately,
see footnote below.
Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 inch high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and
specify stamping.
For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page 47-161.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Light Units . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Page 47-176
Page 47-191
Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Page 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-175
January 2010
E34 Series, Push-Pull Components
■
2-Position Maintained
Push-Pull without
Button on Lens
Catalog Number
E34GDB
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton
unit, arranged for one-hole mounting,
can replace two pushbuttons and a
pilot light or the non-illuminated form
can replace two pushbuttons. These
units are available in three basic types:
■
Maintained — (Two-Position).
Maintains in the pulled or pushed
position until manually actuated to
the opposite mode.
Application Guide
Momentary — (Three-Position).
Spring returns to an intermediate
position when pulled or pushed and
released.
■ Momentary Pull, Maintained Push
— (Three-Position). Spring returns
to intermediate position when pulled.
Maintains in pushed position until
manually returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position. Maintained
stop holds circuit open and will
prevent other series connected
operators from starting the system.
To assist in the selection of contact
blocks, the sketch to the right shows
pictorially by symbols A and B locations
of contact circuits after assembly of
contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The chart below shows the effect
of the push and pull operations on
either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact
closed, O = contact open)
Locating Nib
The Operators, Buttons, Contact
Blocks, etc., are offered as building
block components that can be intermixed to satisfy many requirements.
This minimizes the need for a varied
and costly inventory.
A
B
Figure 47-124. Contact Circuit Locations
Table 47-277. Push-Pull Operator Components
Type of Operator
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact Block —
Max. of 2 Blocks,
4 Circuits
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out — Pull
Intermediate
In — Push
Contact Block Mounting Location
A
B
A
B
A
No Intermediate
Position
X
O
B
2-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained Push-Pull
E34GDB
1NO
1NC
O
X
2NO
2NC
O
X
1NO
1NC
O
X
2NO
2NC
O
X
1NO
1NC
O
X
2NO
2NC
O
X
or
O
X
O
X
or
X
O
X
O
X
O
3-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary Push-Pull
E34GEB
Maintained Push-Momentary Pull
E34GFB
Momentary Push-Pull
E34GHB
or
or
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
or
or
O
X
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
or
O
O
O
O
or
X
O
X
O
Special function contact blocks shown on Page 47-182 CANNOT be used with 3-position push-pull operators E34GEB, E34GFB or E34GHB.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Note: See Typical Applications on Page 47-129.
Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-176
Page 47-182
Page 47-191
Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Page 47-184
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-176
January 2010
E34 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators (Continued)
Table 47-281. LED Selection Table
Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons
Table 47-278. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Light Unit Type Type
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Incandescent
Voltage Catalog
Number
Full Voltage
—
10250T97L
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89L
10250T63L
10250T64L
10250T65L
10250T82L
10250T66L
10250T67L
10250T68L
Full Voltage
AC or DC
6
12
24/28
32
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
Base
10250T69
10250T70
10250T79
10250T83
#755
#756
#757
#1828
Resistor
AC or DC
120
240
10250T80
10250T81
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89
10250T63
10250T64
10250T65
10250T82
10250T66
10250T67
10250T68
#755
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens
color from chart at right.
Voltage
Color
Catalog
Number
6V AC/DC
Suitable for
Use with
Transformers
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED006RN
E22LED006ON
E22LED006YN
E22LED006GN
E22LED006BN
E22LED006WN
12V AC/DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED012RN
E22LED012ON
E22LED012YN
E22LED012GN
E22LED012BN
E22LED012WN
24V AC/DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED024RN
E22LED024ON
E22LED024YN
E22LED024GN
E22LED024BN
E22LED024WN
48V AC/DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED048RN
E22LED048ON
E22LED048YN
E22LED048GN
E22LED048BN
E22LED048WN
60V AC/DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED060RN
E22LED060ON
E22LED060YN
E22LED060GN
E22LED060BN
E22LED060WN
120V AC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RA
E22LED120OA
E22LED120YA
E22LED120GA
E22LED120BA
E22LED120WA
120V DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RD
E22LED120OD
E22LED120YD
E22LED120GD
E22LED120BD
E22LED120WD
Table 47-279. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices
47
Color
Incand.
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Black
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Blue
C1
C2
C2N8
C3
C6
E34C1
E34C2
E34C2N8
E34C3
E34C6
Jumbo — Red
Jumbo — Red
(EMERGENCY STOP)
J2
J2N8
E34J2
E34J2N8
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
Note: For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page 47-165.
Ordering example with one composite number:
Non-illuminated E34GDB + E34C2 + 10250T1 =
E34GDBC2-1X
Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive
applications.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Incandescent
E34GDB + 10250T79 + E34M2 + 10250T1 =
E34GDB79M2-1X
LED
E34GDB + 10250T97L + E34M2 +Voltage Code + 10250T1 =
E34GDB97LRD24-1X
Table 47-280. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Color
Incand.
Suffix
Code
LED
Catalog
Suffix
Number
Code
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
M2
M2N8
M3
M6
M9
RD
ED
GD
LD
AD
E34M2
E34M2N8
E34M3
E34M6
E34M9
White
Clear
M5
M0
WD
—
E34M5
E34M0
Price
U.S. $
Suffix Codes should only be used for assembling composite Catalog
Numbers. To order lens, order by Catalog Number.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
06 — 6V AC/DC
12 — 12V AC/DC
24 — 24V AC/DC
48 — 48V AC/DC
60 — 60V AC/DC
2A — 120V AC
2D — 120V DC
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
Page 47-182
Page 47-191
Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Page 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-177
January 2010
E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units
■
Two-, Three- and Four-Position —
Maintained
■ Non-illuminated and Illuminated
4-Position
Maintained
Switch Lever
2-Position
Maintained
Switch Knob
Table 47-282. 2-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator
Position
X
O
Operator
Action
Non-illuminated
Price
U.S. $
Illuminated — 120V Transformer
Black Knob Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E34VFB120ER-1X
E34VFB120FR-1X
Catalog
Number
E34VFBK1-1X E34VFBL1-1X
O
X
M
Price Contact Mounting
U.S. $ Type
Location
A
Cam
Code
B
1NC
1
M
1NO
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: E34VFBK2-X1.
Table 47-283. 3-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Non-illuminated
Action
Operator
Position
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
Illuminated — 120V Transformer
Price
U.S. $
Black Knob
Black Lever
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E34VHBK1-2X
E34VHBL1-2X
E34VHB120TER-2X
E34VHB120TFR-2X
Contact
Type
Mounting
Location
A
Cam
Code
B
1NO
3
1NO
E34VHBK1-23X E34VHBL1-23X
M
M
O
Price
U.S. $
E34VHB120TER-23X E34VHB120TFR-23X
1NO
3
M
2NC
(Series)
1NO
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: E34VFBK2-X1.
47
Table 47-284. 4-Position Selector Switch — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Operator Position Operator Non-illuminated
Action Black Knob
Black Lever
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Price
U.S. $
Illuminated — 120V Transformer
Red Knob
Red Lever
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
E34VTBK1-23X
E34VTBL1-23X
E34VRB120TER-23X E34VRB120TFR-23X
M
M
M
M
Price
U.S. $
Contact Mounting
Type
Location
A
Cam
Code
B
1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC
7
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Color Selection table.
Example: E34VFBK2-X1.
Table 47-285. Color Selection, Non-illuminated
Color
Code Letter
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CA08102001E
Note: For Light Unit Voltage Suffix and
Knobs, Levers tables, see Page 47-181.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators
where exposed to ultraviolet light, see
Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-187 – 47-188
Additional Circuit
Arrangements . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-178 – 47-179
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-184
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-178
January 2010
E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Table 47-286. Example Selection Table
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector
Switch. In this circuit, one incoming
line is distributed to two other outgoing
circuits by the switch. The two circuits
can be looked at individually.
E34 Series
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their varied forms
(2-position, 3-position and 4-position)
are a big factor contributing to the
great flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons” can
achieve. Because of their flexibility,
they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application. The
following systematic approach should
simplify that task.
Cam and contact block selection is
better understood if you:
■
47
Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately.
■ Recognize the terms NO and NC only
identify the type of contact by its mode
before mounting to the operator.
The “X-O” chart (Page 47-179)
shows how that contact will act after
assembly to the operator with the
selected cam shape. X = closed circuit,
O = open circuit.
■ Up to six NO or NC contacts may be
mounted behind each plunger location for a total of twelve contacts.
Single circuit contact blocks have
only one plunger with the other side
of the block “open.” Therefore, single
circuit contact blocks transmit motion
to blocks behind them only for the
position containing the circuit.
■ Each cam has two separate lobes,
each of which operates one of the
two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are
identified as position A (locating nib
side) and position B (opposite of
locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and
mounting of the contact blocks (see
Illustration below).
Locating Nib
A
B
Step 1: Elementary Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your mind, a
simple elementary diagram of the
switching scheme as follows:
HAND
Incoming
Line
Outgoing
Circuit
OFF
AUTO
No. “X-O”
Pattern
1
X O O
4
O O X
HAND OFF AUTO
X O O
In this circuit, you want a contact
closed on the left (HAND) but open in
the center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the “X-O” diagram
would look like this:
HAND OFF AUTO
O O X
Putting them together, the complete
“X-O” diagram is:
XOO
OOX
Once the “X-O” diagram has been
generated, the next step is to select the
cam and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the desired “X-O”
functions. The selection table on the
following page lists the various types
(shapes) of cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in
your “X-O” diagram.
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select determines the
operation of all contact blocks mounted
to the operator. It is selected on the
basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram.
The selection tables of the following
page show all the “X-O” combinations.
For the purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those charts is
shown in Table 47-286.
Cam Code #3
Top Bottom
A
B
Top
A
NC
NO
NO
Bottom
B
NO
NO
Wired in series.
Now to make the cam selection, make
a simple worksheet such as:
Outgoing
Circuit
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary diagram, you can
construct an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts are to be
closed (X) or open (O) in the various
positions of the switch. The “X-O” for
the HAND circuit looks like this:
Cam Code #2
XOO
OOX
Cam 2
(A)NO – (B)NC
(B)NO
Cam 3
(A)NO
(B)NO
It becomes immediately obvious that
cam 3 is the better choice for two reasons, (1) the series combination can be
avoided making it simpler to wire, (2)
only two contacts are required, which
is less expensive than the three contacts
required by cam 2.
Step 4: Contact Block Selection.
Having selected the cam, contact block
selection is simply a matter of gathering the A position and B position circuits
into pairs which make up the most convenient contact block arrangement. If
there is an imbalance in the number of
circuits under A or B, then single circuit
blocks must be selected for these leftover
circuits.
Back to the worksheet, having selected
cam 3 do this:
X O X
O O X
ANO
BNO
10250T2
Step 5: Selector Switch Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose from the
many types of operators — knob and
lever in various colors or keyed. Also
what combinations of maintained and
spring return functions are required.
Selection of these operators can be
found on Page 47-180. For the above
example you may want a 3-position
maintained black knob, cam 3 —
Catalog Number E34VHBK1.
The Complete Switch: E34VHBK1 with
one 10250T2 or, for one composite
catalog number, E34VHBK1-Y1 found
on Page 47-177.
Figure 47-125. Contact Circuit Locations
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-179
January 2010
E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection
(Continued)
Table 47-288. 3-Position Switch — Cam and Contact Block Selection
No.
Table 47-287. 2-Position Selector Switch
Contact Block Selection
No.
Desired Circuit
and
Operator
Position
Bottom
Plunger
B
1
X
2
X
X
Operator with Cam Code #3
Mounting Location
Mounting Location
Top Plunger
A
Bottom Plunger
B
Top Plunger
A
NO
NC
NO
O
X
O
NC
X
O
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
4
O
O
X
NO
Diagrams
Circuits shown illustrate connections
to obtain a selector switch circuit combination and are shown with their
appropriate line diagrams. Field wiring
of jumper connections required as
shown.
X = Closed Circuit
O = Open Circuit
Series Connection
NC
X
or
X
5
O
X
NC
6
O
NO
X
X
NO
NC
O
NC
NC
NC
Table 47-289. 4-Position Switch — Contact Block Selection
No.
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Top
Plunger
A
Note: 4-Position Selector Switches limited
to 4 contact blocks.
1
X
O
O
O
2
O
X
O
O
Com- Desired Circuit and
bina- Operator Position
tion
No.
Bottom
Plunger
B
Top
Plunger
A
10
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
4
O
O
O
X
NO
NC
NO
11
X
X
X
O
NC
5
X
O
O
7
8
9
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
NO
NO
NC
NO
NO
NC
NC
NC
NO
NC
NC
12
O
NC
NO
X
NC
6
Bottom
Plunger
B
O
NO
3
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Mounting
Location
NC
Contact Blocks
For selection and number of available
contact blocks per operator, see Page
47-182.
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Mounting
Location
Parallel Connection
Figure 47-126. Wiring of Jumper Connections
CA08102001E
Bottom Plunger
B
NC
3
O
O
Operator with Cam Code #2
or
O
NC
2
Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function
(Jumpers must be installed where indicated)
Contact Blocks
Required to
Accomplish
Circuit Function
Top
Plunger
A
1
Desired Circuit
and
Operator
Position
O
X
X
X
O
NO
NO
NO
NC
NC
NO
X
13
X
O
X
X
O
X
NO
NC
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
14
X
X
O
X
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-180
January 2010
E34 Series, Selector Switch Components
Table 47-291. Key Operators with Cam and Cap — UL (NEMA)
Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Positions
2-Position Maintained Black
Knob Selector Switch — Cam 1
Catalog Number E34VFBK1
3-Position Maintained
Keyed Selector Switch
Catalog Number E34KGHB1
Operator
Action
2-Position —
60° Throw
Cam Key
Vertical
Code Removal Mounting
Positions Catalog
Number
Horiz.
Mounting
1
1, 2, 3
E34KFB_
E34KFHB_
1
2
E34KEB_
E34KEHB_
2
3
1–7
M
E34KGB_
E34KHB_
E34KGHB_
E34KHHB_
2
3
1, 4, 5
M
E34KJB_
E34KKB_
E34KJHB_
E34KKHB_
2
3
4
S
E34KLB_ E34KLHB_
E34KMB_ E34KMHB_
2
3
2, 4, 6
S
E34KNB_
E34KPB_
E34KNHB_
E34KPHB_
7
7
E34KTB_
E34KTHB_
M
M
M
S
Selector Switch Operators
Table 47-290. Operators with Knob Assembled — UL (NEMA)
Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Positions
Black Knob Selector Switch —
Vertical Mounting
Operator
Action
2-Position —
60° Throw
M
M
M
M
S
M
M
S
S
M
M
S
M
M
47
M
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1
E34VFBK1
1
E34VEBK1
2
3
E34VGBK1
E34VHBK1
2
3
E34VJBK1
E34VKBK1
2
3
E34VLBK1
E34VMBK1
2
3
E34VNBK1
E34VPBK1
Table 47-292. Key Removal Positions
7
E34VTBK1
S
M
S
M
M
Catalog
Number
S
M
4-Position —
40° Throw
M
M
Cam
Code
M
M
3-Position —
60° Throw
3-Position —
60° Throw
Price
U.S. $
M
4-Position —
40° Throw
M
M
M
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper
circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-178 –
47-179.
Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-292.
Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: E34KFB2.
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
M
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper
circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-178 –
47-179.
Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting.
For other colors of either the knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the Catalog Number with the appropriate Suffix Code from
Alternate Knob and Lever Table below. Example: E34VFBL2.
M
Note: Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
Dissimilar Locks and Keys
C
L
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
R
Listed operators have identical locks and
keys (Key Code H661), Catalog Number
10250ED824. For dissimilar lock and key
combinations, see Page 47-136.
Figure 47-127. Key
Removal Positions
Table 47-293. Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators Above
Color
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Gray
Orange
Knob
Lever
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
K1
K2
K3
K4
K5
K6
K7
K8
E34K1
E34K2
E34K3
E34K4
E34K5
E34K6
E34K7
E34K8
Price
U.S. $
Lever Designed
for Added Ingress
Protection
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
E34L1
E34L2
E34L3
E34L4
E34L5
E34L6
E34L7
E34L8
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E34A1
E34A2
E34A3
E34A4
E34A5
E34A6
E34A7
E34A8
Price
U.S. $
For use on maintained operators only.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-187 – 47-188
Page 47-191
Page 47-184
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-181
January 2010
E34 Series, Selector Switch Components
2-Position Maintained
120V AC Transformer
Selector Switch, Cam 1
Catalog Number E34VFB120
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators
Table 47-294. Operator without Knob or Lever
Positions
Operator Action
Transformer Type — 50/60 Hz
Full Voltage Type — AC or DC
6 Volt #755 Lamp
Lamps — #755, #757, #1835, 120MB
Catalog
Number
2-Position — 60° Throw
M
M
3-Position — 60° Throw
M
M
S
S
Cam Code 3
Cam Code 2
Cam Code 3
E34VHB_
E34SGB_
E34SHB_
E34VPB_
E34SNB_
E34VKB_
E34SJB_
E34SKB_
E34VLB_
E34VMB_
E34SLB_
E34SMB_
E34VRB_
—
E34SRB_
—
S
M
M
M
M
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Pages 47-178 – 47-179.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed in Page 47-157.
120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
Add Code Suffix for Light Unit Voltage to listed Catalog Number from Light Unit Voltage Suffix Table at bottom of page.
Example: For 24V transformer type light unit, order E34VFB024.
120 and 240V transformer only.
120 full voltage only.
Table 47-296. Knobs, Levers
Color
Type of Light Unit
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Voltage
Suffix
Code
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
E34SPB_
E34VJB_
Table 47-295. Light Unit Voltage Suffix — Add to operator Catalog
Number listed in table above.
M
M
E34SFB_
2
Price
U.S. $
S
M
E34VFB_
E34VNB_
M
4-Position — 40° Throw
Cam Code 1
E34VGB_
M
Catalog
Number
Cam Code 1
Cam Code
M
Price
U.S. $
Voltage
Suffix
Code
024
120
208
240
380
6
12
24
48
120
06
12
24
48
120
480
600
240
240
Lever
Catalog Number
and Code Number
Full Voltage Type
AC or DC
Adder
U.S. $
Knob
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Amber
Adder
U.S. $
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by
changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed in Page 47-157.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
10250TER
10250TEG
10250TEA
10250TEL
10250TEC
10250TEW
10250TEM
10250TFR
10250TFG
10250TFA
10250TFL
10250TFC
10250TFW
10250TFM
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green
and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Pages 47-115 – 47-165.
Contact Blocks. . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
Price
U.S. $
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-182
Page 47-191
Pages 47-185 – 47-186
Page 47-184
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-182
January 2010
E34 Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks
Special Function Contact Blocks
Standard Contact Blocks
■
■
■
■
■
■
UL A600/P600 rated
Color-coded plungers – red/green
for NC/NO circuits
Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
Black (opaque) or amber (translucent) housings
Pressure plate or spade terminals
Fingerproof shrouds (for pressure
terminals only)
■
■
■
■
■
■
Special Purpose Contact Block
■
■
■
Logic Level Contact Blocks
■
■
■
■
■
■
UL A600/P600 rated
Black plungers
Inert palladium knife-blade contacts
Black (opaque) housings
Pressure plate or spade terminals
Fingerproof shrouds not available
UL A600/P600 rated
Black plungers
Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
Black (opaque) housings
Pressure plate terminals only
Fingerproof shrouds not available
■
■
■
Maximum 300V rated
Black plungers
Silver contact tips with “reliability
nibs”
Black (opaque) housings
Pressure plate terminals only
Fingerproof shrouds not available
Reliability Nibs
Reliability nibs are the hallmark of
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer contact blocks.
A pointed silver nib on the contact tip
ensures reliable switching from logic
level (5V) up to 600V applications.
Therefore standard contact blocks can
be used for most logic level applications where the contacts are not
exposed to any harsh environmental
conditions.
Palladium Contacts
Palladium, which is more inert than
gold, is well suited for voltages and
currents approaching zero and is recommended for applications where
environmental conditions are a factor.
Maximum Contact Block Mounting per Operator Type
Operator
Max. Operator
Stack
Pushbuttons
6
Push-Pull
Operators
Roto-Push
Operators
2
4
Max.
Stack
2- or 3-Position
Selector Switches
4-Position
Selector Switches
Joysticks
6
4
4
Table 47-297. Contact Blocks
Symbol
Circuit
Description/
Notes
10250T1
Standard
Pressure
Terminals
Catalog
Price
Number U.S. $
Spade
Terminals
Catalog
Price
Number U.S. $
Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Spade
Terminals
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T51
10250T59
10250T51E
10250T59E
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T53
10250T60
10250T53E
10250T60E
NO-NC Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T1
10250T40
10250T1E
10250T40E
2NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T3
10250T42
10250T3E
10250T42E
2NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits)
unless otherwise noted.
10250T2
10250T41
10250T2E
10250T41E
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
(6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T71
—
10250T71E
—
ECNO
-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T47
—
10250T47E
—
ECNO
-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO.
Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T57
—
10250T57E
—
2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6
blocks unless otherwise noted.
10250T45
—
10250T45E
—
LONCECNO
10250T55
—
10250T55E
—
Four circuits in single block depth. Rated 300V
10250T44
max. Stack up to 4 blocks unless otherwise noted.
—
47
Special Function Blocks
Blank
No
Plunger
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
Special Purpose Blocks
2NO2NC
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for
Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices.
Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per
operator and minimum spacing between
devices is 2.5” (63.5 mm). Not suitable for
use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with
fingerproof shrouds.
Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks
are not suitable on selector switches or rotopush operators. Okay to use with 3-position
push-pull operators only on low voltage
(30V or less) circuits.
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-116
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-183
January 2010
E34 Series, Components — Contact Blocks
Contact Blocks (Continued)
Table 47-298. Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds
Symbol
Circuit
Description/
Notes
10250T1CP
Standard
Logic Level
Pressure
Terminals
Pressure
Terminals
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Blank
No
Plunger
1NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T51P
10250T51EP
Blank
No
Plunger
1NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T53P
10250T53EP
NO-NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T1P
10250T1EP
2NC
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T3P
10250T3EP
2NO
Stack up to 6 blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted.
10250T2P
10250T2EP
LONC
Late opening NC. Stack up to 6 blocks (6 circuits) unless
otherwise noted.
10250T71P
10250T71EP
ECNO-NC
Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to 6 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T47P
10250T47EP
ECNO-NO
Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to 4 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T57P
10250T57EP
2LONC
Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to 6 blocks
unless otherwise noted.
10250T45P
10250T45EP
LONC-ECNO
Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 4 blocks unless
otherwise noted.
10250T55P
10250T55EP
Price
U.S. $
Special Function Blocks
Blank
No
Plunger
All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable
for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable
for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34
devices.
To order contact blocks with translucent
amber housing, change Suffix P to CP in
Catalog Number e.g. 10250T51CP.
Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, 3position push-pull operators, or 4-position
selector switches.
ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use
with 2-position joysticks or when operators
are used with padlock attachments.
47
Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-167
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-184
January 2010
E34 Series, Legend Plates
Options
Legend Plates
Field Color
Legend plates can be supplied printed
on black, red, silver or white field. To
order legend printed on a color other
than indicated — add Suffix Code to the
end of the Catalog Number as follows:
Example: E34SP26R — Standard plate
with red field marked OPEN.
Table 47-299. For Pushbutton Operators and
Indicating Lights
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Color
of
Field
Catalog Number
Standard
Jumbo
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High
47
Jumbo
Table 47-300. For Selector Switch Operators
“R” for Red field;
“W” for White field; or
“S” for Silver field.
Legend
Standard
Price Each — U.S. $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend
Legend
Color Catalog Number
of
Standard Jumbo
Field
PULL ON/
PUSH OFF
PULL OPEN/
PUSH CLOSE
PULL UP/
PUSH DOWN
Black E34PP5
E34R5
Black E34PP8
E34R8
Black E34PP11
E34R11
Color Catalog Number
of
Standard Jumbo
Field
2 Position — 3/16" High Lettering
FOR. REV.
HAND AUTO
HIGH LOW
JOG RUN
MAN. AUTO
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP38
E34SP39
E34SP40
E34SP41
E34SP67
E34LP38
E34LP39
E34LP40
E34LP41
E34LP67
OFF ON
OPEN CLOSE
RUN JOG
SAFE RUN
START JOG
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP42
E34SP43
E34SP44
E34SP45
E34SP46
E34LP42
E34LP43
E34LP44
E34LP45
E34LP46
START STOP
UP DOWN
Black E34SP47
Black E34SP48
E34LP47
E34LP48
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
E34SP90
E34SP73
E34SP74
E34SP13
E34SP75
E34LP90
E34LP73
E34LP74
E34LP13
E34LP75
FASTER
FEEDER ON
FEEDER OFF
FORWARD
HIGH
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP87
E34SP94
E34SP95
E34SP15
E34SP16
E34LP87
E34LP94
E34LP95
E34LP15
E34LP16
AUTO OFF HAND
FOR. OFF REV.
FOR. SAFE REV.
HAND OFF AUTO
MAN. OFF AUTO
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP49
E34SP50
E34SP69
E34SP51
E34SP68
E34LP49
E34LP50
E34LP69
E34LP51
E34LP68
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP17
E34SP18
E34SP19
E34SP20
E34SP21
E34LP17
E34LP18
E34LP19
E34LP20
E34LP21
OPEN OFF CLOSE
RUN SAFE JOG
UP OFF DOWN
ON STOP SAFE
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP53
E34SP70
E34SP54
E34SP71
E34LP53
E34LP70
E34LP54
E34LP71
LOW
LOWER
LUBE-FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP22
E34SP23
E34SP92
E34SP81
E34SP82
E34LP22
E34LP23
E34LP92
E34LP81
E34LP82
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
POWER ON
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP24
E34SP25
E34SP26
E34SP27
E34SP80
E34LP24
E34LP25
E34LP26
E34LP27
E34LP80
RAISE
READY
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP28
E34SP86
E34SP29
E34SP30
E34SP31
E34LP28
E34LP86
E34LP29
E34LP30
E34LP31
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
STOP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
E34SP85
E34SP32
E34SP88
E34SP33
E34SP34
E34LP85
E34LP32
E34LP88
E34LP33
E34LP34
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
UNCLAMP
UP
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
E34SP83
E34SP93
E34SP84
E34SP91
E34SP35
E34LP83
E34LP93
E34LP84
E34LP91
E34LP35
Table 47-301. For Push-Pull Units
Price Each — U.S. $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3/32 inch (2.4 mm) high lettering.
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) high lettering.
1.77
(45)
3 Position — 3/16" High Lettering
1.77
(45)
Standard
2.19
(55.6)
2.19
(55.6)
Jumbo
Figure 47-128. Approximate Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
Table 47-302. Blank Plastic Legend Plates — Square
Price Each — U.S. $. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Colors
Lettering
Black
White
Catalog Number
Field
Side 1
Side 2
White
Red
Silver
Black
Standard
Jumbo
Extra Large
10250TSP76
10250TSP77
10250TLP76
10250TLP77
10250TEP76
10250TEP77
Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings or Aluminum Legend Plates
See 10250T listing on Page 47-152.
3/32" high lettering.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-185
January 2010
E34 Series, Enclosures
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Table 47-303. Enclosures (Case and Cover) — Surface Mounting
Number of
Elements
1 Contact Block Depth
2 Contact Block Depth
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cast Enclosure — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
Die Cast Enclosure —
Cat. No. E34N11
Polyester Enclosure —
Cat. No. E34N52
1
2
3
4
E34N1
E34N2
E34N3
E34N4
E34N11
E34N12
E34N13
E34N14
Polyester — In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
E34N51
E34N52
E34N53
E34N54
Stainless Steel — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
Stainless Steel Enclosure —
Cat. No. 10250TN35
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
10250TN33
10250TN34
10250TN35
10250TN36
For spacing increments, see Page 47-186.
All cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. See listing on Page 47-156.
When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used.
14 gauge, type 304.
Table 47-304. Approximate Dimensions
Number
of
Elements
Element
Arrangement
Surface Mounting
Conduit
Entrance
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
47
Cast
1
2
3
4
Approximate Dimensions
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
5.13 (130.3)
7.0 (177.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3/4
3/4
1
1
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
6.63 (168.4)
8.88 (225.6)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
4.88 (124.0)
7.13 (181.1)
9.38 (238.3)
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
9.00 (228.6)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
7.50 (190.5)
9.00 (228.6)
12.00 (304.8)
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
Polyester
1
2
3
4
E
B
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as
required.
Depth given is for two contact block deep
stations. One contact block deep stations
subtract 3/4 inch (19.1 mm).
C
Surface
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1
One Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
Two Contact
Block Depth
Enclosure
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
Note: These E34 Die Cast Enclosures feature
a corrosion resistant coating identical to
finish on the E34 operators except gray in
color. Not for use in ultraviolet light
applications.
D
A
Figure 47-129. Enclosure Layouts
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-186
January 2010
E34 Series, Enclosures
Enclosures (Continued)
Die Cast and Stainless Steel — Flush Mount, Covers Only
These E34 Die Cast Covers feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to the finish on the E34 operators except gray in color.
Table 47-305. Covers Only — Flush Mounting
Number of
Elements
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Flush Cast Covers
Flat
Cover
1
2
3
4
Deep
Cover
In-Line Deep Cover
In-Line Flat Cover
E34F11
E34F12
E34F13
E34F14
E34F1
E34F2
E34F3
E34F4
In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates
1
2
3
4
With Pullbox
Without Pullbox
10250TS10
10250TS11
10250TS12
10250TS14
10250TS1
10250TS2
10250TS3
10250TS4
Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only.
Table 47-306. Approximate Dimensions
Number of
Elements
Flush Mounting
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
0.25 (6.4)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.63 (92.2)
5.50 (139.7)
6.0 (152.4)
9.25 (235)
Cast
1
2
3
4
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
Screw Size for 12 Element
and Larger
E
B
Stainless Steel
47
1
2
3
4
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
5.0 (127)
6.88 (174.8)
8.63 (219.2)
10.50 (266.7)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
2.50 (63.5)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
3.25 (82.6)
1.88 (47.8)
3.63 (92.2)
5.50 (139.7)
7.25 (184.2)
D
C
A
Surface or Pendant
Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deeper.
Depth given includes pull box.
Table 47-307. Spacing Increments
Type
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
F
G
H
Cast
2.44 (62)
2.5 (63.5)
1.88 (47.8)
Polyester
1.88 (47.8)
Min. 2.13 (54.1)
2.25 (57.2)
Stainless Steel
1.69 (42.9)
Min. 1.73 (43.9)
2.25 (57.2)
Top – For Vertical Mounting
G
F
Figure 47-130. Spacing Increments for
Enclosures
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
H
Figure 47-131. Enclosure Layouts
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-187
January 2010
E34 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-308. Accessories
Description
Catalog
Number
Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators.
Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4"
padlock. Will not lock NO contact.
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
E34TA2
0.84
(21.3)
0.75
(19.1)
0.94
(23.9)
1.63
(41.4)
0.25
(6.4)
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush
pushbutton operators.
Clear
Black
Red
Green
10250TA46
10250TA47
10250TA48
10250TA49
Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with button
operators (extended buttons preferred).
Black
Red
Green
Clear
10250TA3
10250TA4
10250TA10
10250TA85
Transparent Boot for regular, illuminated pushbutton
operators and PresTest.
10250TA25
1.47
(37.3)
1.59
(40.4)
1.92
(48.8)
1.59
(40.4)
Special Retaining Nut — to accommodate thick panel.
Indicating light
PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches
Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator — prevents
accidental operation. (Not for Push-Pull operators.)
E34TA30
E34TA31
E34TA6
1.53
(38.9)
47
1.50
(38.1)
Extended Retaining Nut — Replaces standard nut and
provides guard for flush type pushbutton operators.
E34TA12
1.25
(31.8)
1.38
(35.1)
Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton
1.31
(33.3)
E34TA15
1.63
(41.4)
1.50
(38.1)
Padlocking Attachment for non-illuminated knob selector
switches — accommodates up to 5, 1/4" padlocks.
E34TA11
Should not be used on flush button for STOP function.
Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47-188
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E34 Series, Accessories
Table 47-308. Accessories (Continued)
Description
Catalog
Number
Thrust Washer — To meet Ford Motor Company
mounting specifications.
Contact Block Terminal Jumps — Available in multiples
of 100 only. Term. to Term. — Within Block (short):
100 per package
1000 per package
Price
U.S. $
Overall Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
E34TK3
0.45
(11.4)
Terminal to Terminal — Block to Block (long):
100 per package
1000 per package
10250TA71
10250TA71-2
Master Test (Dual Input) Module — Internal Form C
relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical
isolation between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated
10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices.
48V DC
10250TMT8
0.25
(6.4)
0.25
(6.4)
10250TA70
10250TA70-2
0.86
(21.8)
1.63
(41.4)
Flasher Module — Internal Form C relay suitable for AC
applications. One unit required for each operator in master
test circuit.
24V AC
120V AC
1.78
(45.2)
1.31
(33.3)
10250TFL2
10250TFL1
1.14
(29)
6 Mounting Holes
Panel Mounting Nut Wrench — E22, E30, E34 and
Octagonal 10250T.
E22CW
Fingerproof Shroud — 10 per Package
Fits new style contact blocks and light units.
10250TA101
47
Table 47-309. Replacement Lamps — For E34 Illuminated Operators
Mfg.
Lamp Type
Voltage Base
Style
120MB
120V
#267
#755
#756
#757
6.3V
6.3V
12V
24V
#1828
32V
#1835
55V
NE48
120V
NE51H-R22 120V
NE51H-R68 240V
Application
Part
Number
Price
U.S. $
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Resistor Indicating Light
28-3044
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Flasher
10250T Transformer, PresTest and Full Voltage
10250T Full Voltage
10250T Full Voltage
10250ED986-4
28-2202
28-5184
28-5185
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 4-1/2 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
T 3-1/4 Bayonet
10250T Full Voltage
10250T Resistor
10250T Neon
10250T Neon
10250T Neon
28-5186
28-5187
28-494
28-3754
28-3755
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-189
January 2010
E34 Series, Renewal Parts
Renewal Parts
Flush Head
Pushbutton Operator
Mushroom Head
Pushbutton Operator
Jumbo Mushroom
Head Operator
Transformer Type
Indicating Light
Knob-Operated
Selector Switch
Operator
Illuminated
Pushbutton Operator
Potentiometers
Full Voltage, Resistor
and Transformer Type
Illuminated Selector Switch
Table 47-310. Numbers Listed Are for E34 Style Operators
Item Description
No.
No. Part
Req. Number
Price
U.S. $
Item Description
No.
No. Part
Req. Number
1
Gasket
1
16-1548
12
Mounting Screw
2
11-1632
2
Mounting Nut
1
15-1530-4
13
1
As Req. Below
3
Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.250" Long
Hollow Hex)
2
11-2014
4
Mushroom Head Button
(Includes (2) Item 5)
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
Blue
1
As Req. Below
—
—
—
—
—
53-1317
53-1317-2
53-1317-3
53-1317-4
53-1317-22
Simple Potentiometer (Does Not
Include Items 18, 28 or 29)
1,000 Ohms
2,500 Ohms
5,000 Ohms
10,000 Ohms
25,000 Ohms
50,000 Ohms
—
—
—
—
—
—
41-782-2
41-782-3
41-782-10
41-782-4
41-782-5
41-782-6
14
Connector (Includes Screw
and Lug)
2
25-1851
5
Set Screw (#10-32 x 0.250" Long
Hollow Hex)
2
11-544
15
6
Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
(Aluminum — Includes (2) Item 5)
Red
Black
Yellow
Green
1
As Req. Below
Indicating Plate
Standard Size (Without Legend)
Large Size (Specify Legend)
1
—
—
As Req. Above
30-4460
10250TR30
16
Retaining Nut
1
15-1547-3
—
—
—
—
53-1317-9
53-1317-10
53-1317-11
53-1317-12
17
Knob
Socket Set Screw
(#6-32 x 0.250" Long)
1
1
53-1314
11-2014
18
Coupling
1
1
11-2014
29-3749-2
19
Set Screw (#6-32 x 0.188" Long)
1
11-1199
20
Spacer
2
56-1066-18
21
Connector (Includes Screw
and Lug)
1
25-1851-2
22
Mounting Nut
1
15-1938-2
7
8
Jumbo Mushroom Head Button
1
(Aluminum — Red EMERG. STOP)
Does Not Include Item 5
53-1349-18
Mounting Screw
(#6-32 x 0.710" Long)
Washer
2
10250TA79
2
16-2038
9
Terminal Screw and Lug (Captive)
Req. 80-5502
10
Gasket (Supplied with Basic Unit)
1
32-803
11
Round Head Screw
(#4-40 x 0.344" Long)
(Supplied with Basic Unit)
2
11-4553
Price
U.S. $
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-190
January 2010
E34 Series, Mounting Options
Mounting
Terminals on Top
Panel Thickness
■
Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm)
Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) including legend plate
■ Maximum can be increased to
0.375 inch (15.9 mm) using optional
retaining nut
❑ Indicating light: E34TA30
❑ Pushbutton/selector switch:
E34TA31
■
B
Min.
A
Min.
Horizontal Mounting
1.22
(31)
Vertical Mounting
Figure 47-132. Mounting Options in Inches (mm)
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B
C
D
Small
1.63
(41.3)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.63
(41.3)
Medium 1.75
(44.5)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
1.75
(44.5)
Note: Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 inch
(3.6 mm)
Large
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
2.25
(57.2)
C
Min.
Terminals at Side
Horizontal mounting means terminals
are located top and bottom of contact
block. Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block.
This allows close spacing of adjacent
operators with easy access to terminals.
Table 47-311. Mounting Matrix
0.6
(15.2)
D
Min.
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
0.14 (3.6)
Dia.
0.6
(15.2)
1.20
(30.5)
Figure 47-133. Drilling Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
47
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-191
January 2010
E34 Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
1.06
(26.9)
0.88
(22.4)
Extended Pushbutton
Flush Pushbutton
0.88
(22.4)
Contact
Blk.
0.88
(22.4)
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.78
(45.2)
1.09
(27.7)
2.50
(63.5)
0.88
(22.4)
0.25
(6.4)
Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton
1.09
(27.7)
2.63
(66.8)
1.65
(41.9)
1.13
(28.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
1.1
(27.9)
1.09
(27.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.09
(27.7)
0.69
(17.5)
Illuminated Pushbutton
1.5
(38.1)
1.58 (40.1)
to Remove
Key
Selector Switch
0.88
(22.4)
Keyed Selector Switch
Figure 47-134. Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
1.58
(40.1)
Knob
Light
Unit
0.88
1.09
(22.4) (27.7)
1.58
(40.1)
Lever
Each Additional
Contact Block
Contact
Block
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
Contact
Block
Each Additional
Contact Block
1.58
(40.1)
Knob
1.09
(27.7)
47
1.38
(35.1)
1.13
(28.7)
PresTest Indicating Light
0.88
(22.4)
1.38
(35.1)
Indicating Light
Light
Unit
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.38
(35.1)
1.09
(27.7)
Mushroom Pushbutton
1.78
(45.2)
0.69
(17.5)
1.50
(38.1)
0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4)
Panel Thickness
1.13
(28.7)
CA08102001E
0.88
(22.4)
1.09
(27.7)
Push-Pull Switch
1.9
(48.3)
1.78
(45.2)
1.78
(45.2)
Half Shroud Pushbutton
Contact Light
Block Unit
1.75
(44.5)
1.38
(35.1)
Contact
Blk.
1.09
(27.7)
1.78
(45.2)
1.63
(41.4)
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.38
(35.1)
Contact
Blk.
0.88
(22.4)
1.44
(36.6)
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.09
(27.7)
Contact
Blk.
1.78
(45.2)
1.38
(35.1)
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
0.88
(22.4)
Contact
Blk.
Each Addl.
Contact Blk.
1.78
(45.2)
1.44
(36.6)
1.09
(27.7)
1.58
(40.1)
Lever
Illuminated Selector Switch
47-192
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
E34 Series, Ordering Example
Ordering Complete Devices
Complete E34 Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights and/or Selector
Switch operators including contact block(s) and legend plate
can be ordered using a single composite catalog number.
The individually packaged components will be shipped
unassembled in a single overpack carton marked with the
composite Catalog Number.
Table 47-312. Catalog Numbering System
E34XB120 V2 –
Operator
153 SP90
Insert
Hyphen
Before
Contact
Block(s)
Ordering Example
Illuminated Pushbutton Device —
Catalog Number E34XB120V2-153SP90
Lens
E34V2
Legend
Plate
E34SP90
Contact
Blocks
10250T1 &
10250T53
For a complete Catalog Number breakdown, see
Pages 47-193 – 47-194.
47
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-193
January 2010
E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-313. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System
E34
PB 1 –
1
Circuit
Operator
PB =
EB =
LB =
JB =
EVB =
EHB =
Flush
Extended
40 mm Mushroom
65 mm Mushroom
1/2 Shroud Vertical Mount
1/2 Shroud Horizontal Mount
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
Button Color
1=
2=
3=
4=
7=
5=
6=
8=
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Table 47-314. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Push-Pulls Catalog Numbering System
E34
GDB 63 M2
–
1
Circuit
Operator
GDB =
GEB =
GFB =
GHB =
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
2-Position Maintained
3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull
3-Position MT Push-Mom-Pull
3-Position Mom Push-Mom Pull
Incandescent
Light Unit
Blank =
89 =
63 =
64 =
65 =
82 =
66 =
67 =
68 =
69 =
70 =
79 =
83 =
80 =
81 =
Non-ill.
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
208V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
LED
Light Unit
Blank =
89L =
63L =
64L =
65L =
82L =
66L =
67L =
68L =
97L =
LED Voltage
Non-ill.
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
208V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
Blank =
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
Button
Black 40 mm
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm – “E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Black 65 mm
Red 65 mm
Red 65 mm – “E” STOP
Green 65 mm
Yellow 65 mm
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
CA08102001E
Non-ill.
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
Non-illuminated
C1 =
C2 =
C2N8 =
C3 =
C6 =
–=
J2 =
J2N8 =
–=
–=
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Illuminated
Incandescent
LED
M2 = RD =
M2N8 = ED =
M3 = GD =
M6 = LD =
M9 = AD =
M5 = WD =
M0 =
–=
Lens Type
Red 40 mm
Red 40 mm – “E” STOP
Green 40 mm
Blue 40 mm
Amber 40 mm
White 40 mm
Clear 40 mm
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight
47-194
January 2010
E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure
Table 47-315. Illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Numbering System
E34
XB 24 V2
–
1
Light Unit Type
Circuit
XB = Transformer
CB = Full Voltage
SB = Resistor
Incandescent Light Unit
024 =
120 =
240 =
277 =
380 =
480 =
600 =
06 =
12 =
24 =
32 =
48 =
120 =
240 =
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
Blank =
1=
2=
3=
51 =
53 =
LED Light Unit
024L =
120L =
240L =
277L =
380L =
480L =
600L =
497L =
24V/XFR
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
Operator Only
1NO-1NC
2NO
2NC
1NC
1NO
LED Voltage
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
Incandescent Lens Color
V2 =
V3 =
V4 =
V5 =
V6 =
V9 =
V0 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
LED Lens Color
RD =
GD =
YD =
WD =
LD =
AD =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
Table 47-316. Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test Catalog Numbering System
E34
FB06 H2
Light Unit Type
Standard –
Incandescent
47
TB120 =
TB240 =
TB277 =
TB380 =
TB480 =
TB600 =
FB06 =
FB12 =
FB24 =
FB32 =
FB48 =
RB120 =
RB240 =
NB120 =
NB240 =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
120V/Neon
240V/Neon
LED Voltage
Standard –
LED
TB120L =
TB240L =
TB277L =
TB380L =
TB480L =
TB600L =
FB197L =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
277V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
PresTest – LED
TPB120L =
TPB240L =
TPB380L =
TPB480L =
TPB600L =
FPB297L =
Blank =
06 =
12 =
24 =
48 =
60 =
2A =
2D =
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
Full Voltage
Plastic
Lens Color
Standard/Master – Incandescent
PresTest – Incandescent
TPB120 =
TPB240 =
TPB380 =
TPB480 =
TPB600 =
FPB06 =
FPB12 =
FPB24 =
FPB32 =
FPB48 =
RPB120 =
RPB240 =
Glass
Incand.
6V AC/DC
12V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
48V AC/DC
60V AC/DC
120V AC
120V DC
120V/XFR
240V/XFR
380V/XFR
480V/XFR
600V/XFR
6V/FV
12V/FV
24V/FV
32V/FV
48V/FV
120V/RES
240V/RES
H2 =
H3 =
H4 =
H5 =
H6 =
H9 =
H0 =
G2 =
G3 =
G4 =
G5 =
G6 =
G9 =
G0 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Plastic
Glass
Lens Color
Standard/Master/PresTest – LED
RP =
GP =
YP =
WP =
LP =
AP =
RG =
GG =
YG =
WG =
LG =
AG =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
PresTest – Incandescent
V2 =
V3 =
V4 =
V5 =
V6 =
V9 =
V0 =
P2 =
P3 =
P4 =
P5 =
P6 =
P9 =
P0 =
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Amber
Clear
Add X at end of Catalog Number to receive parts assembled from factory.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-195
January 2010
HT800 Series
Product Description
Benefits
Description
Page
The Cutler-Hammer® HT800 Series
■
Product Description . . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and
Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated
Pushbutton Units. . . . . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . . .
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . . .
Selector Switch Contact
Block Selection . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . .
Options
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47-195
47-195
47-195
from Eaton’s electrical business is a
family of 30.5 mm pushbutton devices
which includes momentary, illuminated and mushroomhead pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating
lights and push-pull switches. The
HT800 devices have a familiar appearance found in most industrial applications and are suitable for replacement
of several other manufacturers’ 30.5
mm pushbutton devices.
■
Features
■
Contents
47-195
47-196
■
■
■
47-197
47-198
47-200
47-201
47-203
47-205
47-205
47-206
47-208
47-210
47-214
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Anodized aluminum mounting rings
Watertight double V-gasket seals
Extended height bulbs
Transparent housing contact blocks
Color-coded contact blocks
Gold-plated contacts (on low
voltage contact block)
Reliability ridge on movable contact
Stackable screw-mounted contact
blocks
Contact blocks can be mounted in
left/right or top/bottom positions
Standard NC contact opens before
NO contact closes (break before
make operation)
Bright and long lasting LED indicating lights in six colors
Field convertible maintained selector
switches — from two- to threeposition and vice versa
Field selectable knob/lever
mounting positions — at any
22.5° increment
HT800 Series
CA08102001E
■
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
■
■
Corrosion resistant NEMA 4X finish
Watertight and oiltight NEMA 4, 13
ingress protection
Increased side illumination of
indicating lights and illuminated
pushbuttons
Easy visual inspection of contact
conditions
Easily identifiable NO (white) or
NC (black) contact blocks
Gold-plated contacts suitable for
logic level circuits
Reliability ridge penetrates contamination buildup on stationary
contacts
Left/right or top/bottom mounted
contact blocks allow correct positioning in retrofit applications
All-purpose selector switches are
convertible and can rotate in 22.5°
increments to suit panel layouts
Standards and Certifications
■
■
UL508 per File No. E131568
CSA C22.2 No. 14 per File No.
LR68551
Ingress Protection
■
UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12
and 13 when mounted in similarly
rated enclosures
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-196
January 2010
HT800 Series, Technical Data and Specifications
Technical Data and Specifications
Table 47-317. HT800 — Specifications
Description
Specification
Mechanical Ratings
Frequency of Operation
Pushbuttons
Selector Switches
Push-Pull Operators
6,000 Operations per hour
3,000 Operations per hour
3,000 Operations per hour
Mechanical Endurance/Life
Pushbuttons
Selector Switches
Push-Pull Operators
10 x 106 Operations 6K Ops/Hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
250 x 103 Operations 3K Ops/Hr with 2 NO on left and 2 NC on right
250 x 103 Operations 3K Ops/Hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right
Climatic Conditions
Operating Temperature
10° to 140°F (-12° to 60°C)
Storage Temperature
-40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
Altitude
6,562 ft. (2,000m)
Humidity
95% RH @ 60°C
Terminals
Contact Blocks
#6-32 posi-drive saddle clamp type, 1 x 16 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG,
12 in-lbs max.
Light Units
#6-32 posi-drive saddle clamp type, 1 x 22 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG,
7 in-lbs max.
Electrical Ratings
Standard Contact Blocks
UL (NEMA) Rating
See Table 47-318.
Logic Level Contact Block
Power Rating
5V 1 mA (minimum)
28V 500 mA (maximum)
Table 47-318. Electrical Ratings — HT800 Standard Contact Blocks, UL Rating
Description/Function
47
Contact
Type
Catalog
Number
AC
DC
Standard Normally Open contact
NO
HT8A
A600
P600
Standard Normally Closed contact
NC
HT8B
A600
P600
Normally Open Early Make Contact will make
circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings
do not apply.
NOEM
HT8C
A600
—
Normally Closed Late Break contact will open
after standard NC contact. DC ratings do not
apply.
NCLB
HT8D
A600
—
Logic level, low voltage NO contact.
Gold plated contacts.
NO
HT8E
5V 1 mA (minimum)
28V 500 mA (maximum)
Heavy duty.
Standard duty.
Table 47-319. UL A600 and P600 Ratings
Description
Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity (Amp)
Normal Load Break (Amp)
Thermal Current (Amp)
Voltamperes:
Make and Emerg. Interrupting Capacity
Normal Load Break
Volts DC
Volts AC 50 or 60 Hz
120
240
60
6
10
30
3
10
7200
720
7200
720
480
15
1.5
10
7200
720
600
12
1.2
10
7200
720
125
1.1
1.1
5
138
138
250
0.55
0.55
5
138
138
600
0.2
0.2
5
138
138
DC ratings do not apply to NOEM (Normally Open Early Make) and NCLB (Normal Closed Late
Break) contact blocks HT8C and HT8D.
Maximum make or break volt-amperes at 300V or less.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-197
January 2010
HT800 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Units
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-illuminated
■
Flush, Extended or 40 mm Mushroom Head Operators
Flush Head Operator
Cat. No. HT8AAH
Extended Head Operator
Cat. No. HT8ABH
40 mm Mushroom Head Operator
Cat. No. HT8AEH
Table 47-320. Momentary Contact Pushbutton Units, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Contact Type
Button Color
Flush Head
Extended Head
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Mushroom Head (40 mm)
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
No Contact
Black
Red
Green
HT8AAH
HT8AAR
HT8AAG
HT8ABH
HT8ABR
HT8ABG
HT8AEH
HT8AER
HT8AEG
1NO
Black
Red
Green
HT8AAHA
HT8AARA
HT8AAGA
HT8ABHA
HT8ABRA
HT8ABGA
HT8AEHA
HT8AERA
HT8AEGA
1NC
Black
Red
Green
HT8AAHB
HT8AARB
HT8AAGB
HT8ABHB
HT8ABRB
HT8ABGB
HT8AEHB
HT8AERB
HT8AEGB
1NO-1NC
Black
Red
Green
HT8AAHAB
HT8AARAB
HT8AAGAB
HT8ABHAB
HT8ABRAB
HT8ABGAB
HT8AEHAB
HT8AERAB
HT8AEGAB
2NO-2NC
Black
Red
Green
HT8AAHF1Q1
HT8AARF1Q1
HT8AAGF1Q1
HT8ABHF1Q1
HT8ABRF1Q1
HT8ABGF1Q1
HT8AEHF1Q1
HT8AERF1Q1
HT8AEGF1Q1
Price
U.S. $
47
NO Contact Block
NC Contact Block
Table 47-321. Contact Blocks
Description/Function
Contact
Type
Catalog
Number
Standard Normally Open contact
NO
HT8A
Standard Normally Closed contact
NC
HT8B
Normally Open Early Make contact will
make circuit before standard NO contact.
DC ratings do not apply.
NOEM
HT8C
Normally Closed Late Break contact will
NCLB
open after standard NC contact. DC ratings
do not apply.
HT8D
Logic level, low voltage NO contact.
Gold plated contacts.
HT8E
NO
Price
U.S. $
Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks
recommended.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-208
Page 47-210
Page 47-206
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-198
January 2010
HT800 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
■
Incandescent or LED
Full Voltage or Transformer Type
■ 24V and 120V
■
Illuminated Pushbutton Operator
Cat. No. HT8GBRV7
Table 47-322. Illuminated Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Type
Volts
Lens
Color
Operator Only
1NO
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
1NO-1NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
2NO-2NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent Lamp
Full
Voltage
Transformer
47
120V
No Lens
AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBFV
HT8GBRV7
HT8GBGV7
HT8GBAV7
HT8GBCV7
HT8GBWV7
HT8GBYV7
HT8GBBV7
—
HT8GBRAV7
HT8GBGAV7
HT8GBAAV7
HT8GBCAV7
HT8GBWAV7
HT8GBYAV7
HT8GBBAV7
—
HT8GBRBV7
HT8GBGBV7
HT8GBABV7
HT8GBCBV7
HT8GBWBV7
HT8GBYBV7
HT8GBBBV7
—
HT8GBRABV7
HT8GBGABV7
HT8GBAABV7
HT8GBCABV7
HT8GBWABV7
HT8GBYABV7
HT8GBBABV7
—
HT8GBRF1Q1V7
HT8GBGF1Q1V7
HT8GBAF1Q1V7
HT8GBCF1Q1V7
HT8GBWF1Q1V7
HT8GBYF1Q1V7
HT8GBBF1Q1V7
24V
No Lens
AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBFV
HT8GBRV3
HT8GBGV3
HT8GBAV3
HT8GBCV3
HT8GBWV3
HT8GBYV3
HT8GBBV3
—
HT8GBRAV3
HT8GBGAV3
HT8GBAAV3
HT8GBCAV3
HT8GBWAV3
HT8GBYAV3
HT8GBBAV3
—
HT8GBRBV3
HT8GBGBV3
HT8GBABV3
HT8GBCBV3
HT8GBWBV3
HT8GBYBV3
HT8GBBBV3
—
HT8GBRABV3
HT8GBGABV3
HT8GBAABV3
HT8GBCABV3
HT8GBWABV3
HT8GBYABV3
HT8GBBABV3
—
HT8GBRF1Q1V3
HT8GBGF1Q1V3
HT8GBAF1Q1V3
HT8GBCF1Q1V3
HT8GBWF1Q1V3
HT8GBYF1Q1V3
HT8GBBF1Q1V3
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBT1
HT8GBRT1
HT8GBGT1
HT8GBAT1
HT8GBCT1
HT8GBWT1
HT8GBYT1
HT8GBBT1
—
HT8GBRAT1
HT8GBGAT1
HT8GBAAT1
HT8GBCAT1
HT8GBWAT1
HT8GBYAT1
HT8GBBAT1
—
HT8GBRBT1
HT8GBGBT1
HT8GBABT1
HT8GBCBT1
HT8GBWBT1
HT8GBYBT1
HT8GBBBT1
—
HT8GBRABT1
HT8GBGABT1
HT8GBAABT1
HT8GBCABT1
HT8GBWABT1
HT8GBYABT1
HT8GBBABT1
—
HT8GBRF1Q1T1
HT8GBGF1Q1T1
HT8GBAF1Q1T1
HT8GBCF1Q1T1
HT8GBWF1Q1T1
HT8GBYF1Q1T1
HT8GBBF1Q1T1
120V
No Lens
AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBFV
HT8GBRF7
HT8GBGF7
HT8GBAF7
HT8GBCF7
HT8GBWF7
HT8GBYF7
HT8GBBF7
—
HT8GBRAF7
HT8GBGAF7
HT8GBAAF7
HT8GBCAF7
HT8GBWAF7
HT8GBYAF7
HT8GBBAF7
—
HT8GBRBF7
HT8GBGBF7
HT8GBABF7
HT8GBCBF7
HT8GBWBF7
HT8GBYBF7
HT8GBBBF7
—
HT8GBRABF7
HT8GBGABF7
HT8GBAABF7
HT8GBCABF7
HT8GBWABF7
HT8GBYABF7
HT8GBBABF7
—
HT8GBRF1Q1F7
HT8GBGF1Q1F7
HT8GBAF1Q1F7
HT8GBCF1Q1F7
HT8GBWF1Q1F7
HT8GBYF1Q1F7
HT8GBBF1Q1F7
24V
No Lens
AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBFV
HT8GBRF3
HT8GBGF3
HT8GBAF3
HT8GBCF3
HT8GBWF3
HT8GBYF3
HT8GBBF3
—
HT8GBRAF3
HT8GBGAF3
HT8GBAAF3
HT8GBCAF3
HT8GBWAF3
HT8GBYAF3
HT8GBBAF3
—
HT8GBRBF3
HT8GBGBF3
HT8GBABF3
HT8GBCBF3
HT8GBWBF3
HT8GBYBF3
HT8GBBBF3
—
HT8GBRABF3
HT8GBGABF3
HT8GBAABF3
HT8GBCABF3
HT8GBWABF3
HT8GBYABF3
HT8GBBABF3
—
HT8GBRF1Q1F3
HT8GBGF1Q1F3
HT8GBAF1Q1F3
HT8GBCF1Q1F3
HT8GBWF1Q1F3
HT8GBYF1Q1F3
HT8GBBF1Q1F3
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GBT1
HT8GBRL1
HT8GBGL1
HT8GBAL1
HT8GBCL1
HT8GBWL1
HT8GBYL1
HT8GBBL1
—
HT8GBRAL1
HT8GBGAL1
HT8GBAAL1
HT8GBCAL1
HT8GBWAL1
HT8GBYAL1
HT8GBBAL1
—
HT8GBRBL1
HT8GBGBL1
HT8GBABL1
HT8GBCBL1
HT8GBWBL1
HT8GBYBL1
HT8GBBBL1
—
HT8GBRABL1
HT8GBGABL1
HT8GBAABL1
HT8GBCABL1
HT8GBWABL1
HT8GBYABL1
HT8GBBABL1
—
HT8GBRF1Q1L1
HT8GBGF1Q1L1
HT8GBAF1Q1L1
HT8GBCF1Q1L1
HT8GBWF1Q1L1
HT8GBYF1Q1L1
HT8GBBF1Q1L1
120V
AC
LED
Full
Voltage
Transformer
120V
AC
Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-208
Page 47-210
Page 47-206
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-199
January 2010
HT800 Series, Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton
Units
■
Incandescent or LED
Full Voltage or Transformer Type
■ 24V and 120V
■
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Operator
Cat. No. HT8GDRV7
Table 47-323. Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Type
Volts
Lens
Color
Operator Only
1NO
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
1NO-1NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
2NO-2NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent Lamp
Full
120V
No Lens
Voltage AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDFV
HT8GDRV7
HT8GDGV7
HT8GDAV7
HT8GDCV7
HT8GDWV7
HT8GDYV7
HT8GDBV7
—
HT8GDRAV7
HT8GDGAV7
HT8GDAAV7
HT8GDVAV7
HT8GDWAV7
HT8GDYAV7
HT8GDBAV7
—
HT8GDRBV7
HT8GDGBV7
HT8GDABV7
HT8GDCBV7
HT8GDWBV7
HT8GDYBV7
HT8GDBBV7
—
HT8GDRABV7
HT8GDGABV7
HT8GDAABV7
HT8GDCABV7
HT8GDWABV7
HT8GDYABV7
HT8GDBABV7
—
HT8GDRF1Q1V7
HT8GDGF1Q1V7
HT8GDAF1Q1V7
HT8GDCF1Q1V7
HT8GDWF1Q1V7
HT8GDYF1Q1V7
HT8GDBF1Q1V7
24V
No Lens
AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDFV
HT8GDRV3
HT8GDGV3
HT8GDAV3
HT8GDCV3
HT8GDWV3
HT8GDYV3
HT8GDBV3
—
HT8GDRAV3
HT8GDGAV3
HT8GDAAV3
HT8GDVAV3
HT8GDWAV3
HT8GDYAV3
HT8GDBAV3
—
HT8GDRBV3
HT8GDGBV3
HT8GDABV3
HT8GDCBV3
HT8GDWBV3
HT8GDYBV3
HT8GDBBV3
—
HT8GDRABV3
HT8GDGABV3
HT8GDAABV3
HT8GDCABV3
HT8GDWABV3
HT8GDYABV3
HT8GDBABV3
—
HT8GDRF1Q1V3
HT8GDGF1Q1V3
HT8GDAF1Q1V3
HT8GDCF1Q1V3
HT8GDWF1Q1V3
HT8GDYF1Q1V3
HT8GDBF1Q1V3
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDT1
HT8GDRT1
HT8GDGT1
HT8GDAT1
HT8GDCT1
HT8GDWT1
HT8GDYT1
HT8GDBT1
—
HT8GDRAT1
HT8GDGAT1
HT8GDAAT1
HT8GDCAT1
HT8GDWAT1
HT8GDYAT1
HT8GDBAT1
—
HT8GDRBT1
HT8GDGBT1
HT8GDABT1
HT8GDCBT1
HT8GDWBT1
HT8GDYBT1
HT8GDBBT1
—
HT8GDRABT1
HT8GDGABT1
HT8GDAABT1
HT8GDCABT1
HT8GDWABT1
HT8GDYABT1
HT8GDBABT1
—
HT8GDRF1Q1T1
HT8GDGF1Q1T1
HT8GDAF1Q1T1
HT8GDCF1Q1T1
HT8GDWF1Q1T1
HT8GDYF1Q1T1
HT8GDBF1Q1T1
Full
120V
No Lens
Voltage AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDFV
HT8GDRF7
HT8GDGF7
HT8GDAF7
HT8GDCF7
HT8GDWF7
HT8GDYF7
HT8GDBF7
—
HT8GDRAF7
HT8GDGAF7
HT8GDAAF7
HT8GDCAF7
HT8GDWAF7
HT8GDYAF7
HT8GDBAF7
—
HT8GDRBF7
HT8GDGBF7
HT8GDABF7
HT8GDCBF7
HT8GDWBF7
HT8GDYBF7
HT8GDBBF7
—
HT8GDRABF7
HT8GDGABF7
HT8GDAABF7
HT8GDCABF7
HT8GDWABF7
HT8GDYABF7
HT8GDBABF7
—
HT8GDRF1Q1F7
HT8GDGF1Q1F7
HT8GDAF1Q1F7
HT8GDCF1Q1F7
HT8GDWF1Q1F7
HT8GDYF1Q1F7
HT8GDBF1Q1F7
24V
No Lens
AC/DC Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDFV
HT8GDRF3
HT8GDGF3
HT8GDAF3
HT8GDCF3
HT8GDWF3
HT8GDYF3
HT8GDBF3
—
HT8GDRAF3
HT8GDGAF3
HT8GDAAF3
HT8GDCAF3
HT8GDWAF3
HT8GDYAF3
HT8GDBAF3
—
HT8GDRBF3
HT8GDGBF3
HT8GDABF3
HT8GDCBF3
HT8GDWBF3
HT8GDYBF3
HT8GDBBF3
—
HT8GDRABF3
HT8GDGABF3
HT8GDAABF3
HT8GDCABF3
HT8GDWABF3
HT8GDYABF3
HT8GDBABF3
—
HT8GDRF1Q1F3
HT8GDGF1Q1F3
HT8GDAF1Q1F3
HT8GDCF1Q1F3
HT8GDWF1Q1F3
HT8GDYF1Q1F3
HT8GDBF1Q1F3
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8GDT1
HT8GDRL1
HT8GDGL1
HT8GDAL1
HT8GDCL1
HT8GDWL1
HT8GDYL1
HT8GDBL1
—
HT8GDRAL1
HT8GDGAL1
HT8GDAAL1
HT8GDCAL1
HT8GDWAL1
HT8GDYAL1
HT8GDBAL1
—
HT8GDRBL1
HT8GDGBL1
HT8GDABL1
HT8GDCBL1
HT8GDWBL1
HT8GDYBL1
HT8GDBBL1
—
HT8GDRABL1
HT8GDGABL1
HT8GDAABL1
HT8GDCABL1
HT8GDWABL1
HT8GDYABL1
HT8GDBABL1
—
HT8GDRF1Q1L1
HT8GDGF1Q1L1
HT8GDAF1Q1L1
HT8GDCF1Q1L1
HT8GDWF1Q1L1
HT8GDYF1Q1L1
HT8GDBF1Q1L1
Transformer
120V
AC
LED
Transformer
120V
AC
Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-208
Page 47-210
Page 47-206
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-200
January 2010
HT800 Series, Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light Units
■
Incandescent or LED
Full Voltage or Transformer Type
■ Standard and PresTest Types
■ 24V and 120V
■
PresTest — This device incorporates a
press-to-test feature whereby depressing the lens disconnects the light from
the source being monitored and connects the lamp to a continuously energized circuit for immediate detection
of faulty lamps.
Indicating Light Unit
Cat. No. HT8HFRV7
PresTest Light Unit
Cat. No. HT8GTRV7
Table 47-324. Indicating Light Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Type
Volts
Lens
Color
Indicating Light
120V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HFFV
HT8HFRV7
HT8HFGV7
HT8HFAV7
HT8HFCV7
HT8HFWV7
HT8HFYV7
HT8HFBV7
HT8GTFV
HT8GTRV7
HT8GTGV7
HT8GTAV7
HT8GTCV7
HT8GTWV7
HT8GTYV7
HT8GTBV7
24V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HFFV
HT8HFRV3
HT8HFGV3
HT8HFAV3
HT8HFCV3
HT8HFWV3
HT8HFYV3
HT8HFBV3
HT8GTFV
HT8GTRV3
HT8GTGV3
HT8GTAV3
HT8GTCV3
HT8GTWV3
HT8GTYV3
HT8GTBV3
120V AC
50/60 Hz
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HBT1
HT8HBRT1
HT8HBGT1
HT8HBAT1
HT8HBCT1
HT8HBWT1
HT8HBYT1
HT8HBBT1
HT8GTT1
HT8GTRT1
HT8GTGT1
HT8GTAT1
HT8GTCT1
HT8GTWT1
HT8GTYT1
HT8GTBT1
120V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HFFV
HT8HFRF7
HT8HFGF7
HT8HFAF7
HT8HFCF7
HT8HFWF7
HT8HFYF7
HT8HFBF7
HT8GTFV
HT8GTRF7
HT8GTGF7
HT8GTAF7
HT8GTCF7
HT8GTWF7
HT8GTYF7
HT8GTBF7
24V
AC/DC
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HFFV
HT8HFRF3
HT8HFGF3
HT8HFAF3
HT8HFCF3
HT8HFWF3
HT8HFYF3
HT8HFBF3
HT8GTFV
HT8GTRF3
HT8GTGF3
HT8GTAF3
HT8GTCF3
HT8GTWF3
HT8GTYF3
HT8GTBF3
120V AC
50/60 Hz
No Lens
Red
Green
Amber
Clear
White
Yellow
Blue
HT8HBT1
HT8HBRL1
HT8HBGL1
HT8HBAL1
HT8HBCL1
HT8HBWL1
HT8HBYL1
HT8HBBL1
HT8GTT1
HT8GTRL1
HT8GTGL1
HT8GTAL1
HT8GTCL1
HT8GTWL1
HT8GTYL1
HT8GTBL1
Catalog
Number
PresTest
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent
Full
Voltage
Transformer
47
LED
Full
Voltage
Transformer
Light unit base operator without lens or bulb.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-208
Page 47-210
Page 47-206
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-201
January 2010
HT800 Series, Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■
40 mm Mushroom Head
Two-Position Maintained
■ Non-illuminated
■
Table 47-325. 2-Position Push-Pull, Maintained, Non-illuminated —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Contact
Type
Operator Position
Button
Color
2-Position Maintained
Push-Pull
Round Head
Flat Head
Mushroomhead Button Mushroomhead Button
Maintained
Maintained
Out
In
Catalog
Number
No Contact
NCLB
NCLB
Price
U.S. $
—
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBH
HT8CBR
HT8CBG
HT8DBH
HT8DBR
HT8DBG
O
X
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHA
HT8CBRA
HT8CBGA
HT8DBHA
HT8DBRA
HT8DBGA
X
O
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHB
HT8CBRB
HT8CBGB
HT8DBHB
HT8DBRB
HT8DBGB
O
X
X
O
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHAB
HT8CBRAB
HT8CBGAB
HT8DBHAB
HT8DBRAB
HT8DBGAB
X
X
O
O
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHD1B
HT8CBRD1B
HT8CBGD1B
HT8DBHD1B
HT8DBRD1B
HT8DBGD1B
X
X
O
O
Black
Red
Green
HT8CBHD1D
HT8CBRD1D
HT8CBGD1D
HT8DBHD1D
HT8DBRD1D
HT8DBGD1D
NC
NCLB
NC
Catalog
Number
—
NO
NO-NC
Price
U.S. $
Round Head
2-Position Push-Pull Unit
Cat. No. HT8CBR
Flat Head
2-Position Push-Pull Unit
Cat. No. HT8DBH
NCLB = Normally Closed Late Break.
47
NO Contact Block
NC Contact Block
Table 47-326. Contact Blocks
Description/Function
Contact
Type
Catalog
Number
Standard Normally Open contact
NO
HT8A
Standard Normally Closed contact
NC
HT8B
Normally Open Early Make contact will make circuit
before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply.
NOEM
HT8C
Normally Closed Late Break contact will open after
standard NC contact. DC ratings do not apply.
NCLB
HT8D
Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated
contacts.
NO
HT8E
Price
U.S. $
Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks recommended.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-208
Page 47-210
Page 47-206
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-202
January 2010
HT800 Series, Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
■
Incandescent or LED
Full Voltage or Transformer Type
■ 24V and 120V
■
Illuminated Push-Pull Unit
Cat. No. HT8FBRABV7
Table 47-327. Illuminated Push-Pull Units — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Type
Volts
Lens
Color
Operator Only
1NO
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
1NO-1NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
2NCLB
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent Lamp
Full
Voltage
Transformer
120V
Red
AC/DC Green
HT8FBRV7
HT8FBGV7
HT8FBRAV7
HT8FBGAV7
HT8FBRBV7
HT8FBGBV7
HT8FBRABV7
HT8FBGABV7
HT8FBRD1DV7
HT8FBGD1DV7
24V
Red
AC/DC Green
HT8FBRV3
HT8FBGV3
HT8FBRAV3
HT8FBGAV3
HT8FBRBV3
HT8FBGBV3
HT8FBRABV3
HT8FBGABV3
HT8FBRD1DV3
HT8FBGD1DV3
120V
AC
Red
Green
HT8FBRT1
HT8FBGT1
HT8FBRAT1
HT8FBGAT1
HT8FBRBT1
HT8FBGBT1
HT8FBRABT1
HT8FBGABT1
HT8FBRD1DT1
HT8FBGD1DT1
120V
Red
AC/DC Green
HT8FBRF7
HT8FBGF7
HT8FBRAF7
HT8FBGAF7
HT8FBRBF7
HT8FBGBF7
HT8FBRABF7
HT8FBGABF7
HT8FBRD1DF7
HT8FBGD1DF7
24V
Red
AC/DC Green
HT8FBRF3
HT8FBGF3
HT8FBRAF3
HT8FBGAF3
HT8FBRBF3
HT8FBGBF3
HT8FBRABF3
HT8FBGABF3
HT8FBRD1DF3
HT8FBGD1DF3
120V
AC
HT8FBRL1
HT8FBGL1
HT8FBRAL1
HT8FBGAL1
HT8FBRBL1
. HT8FBGBL1
HT8FBRABL1
HT8FBGABL1
HT8FBRD1DL1
HT8FBGD1DL1
LED
Full
Voltage
Transformer
Red
Green
Complete illuminated push-pull switches will not fit in a standard 3" deep enclosure.
47
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-208
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-197
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-210
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-206
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-203
January 2010
HT800 Series, Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units
■
■
Two-, Three- and Four-Position
Non-illuminated
Standard Knob
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JAH3A
Standard Lever
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JDH3A
Table 47-328. 2-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Contact
Type
Operator Position
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Standard Black Knob
Catalog
Number
No Contacts
2NO-2NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
—
—
M
S
M
M
M
S
HT8JAH3A
HT8JKH3A
HT8JNH3A
HT8JDH3A
HT8JLH3A
HT8JPH3A
O
X
M
S
M
M
M
S
HT8JAH3AA5
HT8JKH3AA5
HT8JNH3AA5
HT8JDH3AA5
HT8JLH3AA5
HT8JPH3AA5
X
O
O
X
M
S
M
M
M
S
HT8JAH3AAA5
HT8JKH3AAA5
HT8JNH3AAA5
HT8JDH3AAA5
HT8JLH3AAA5
HT8JPH3AAA5
X
O
X
O
O
X
O
X
M
S
M
M
M
S
HT8JAH3AF1Q1
HT8JKH3AF1Q1
HT8JNH3AF1Q1
HT8JDH3AF1Q1
HT8JLH3AF1Q1
HT8JPH3AF1Q1
1NO
2NO
Standard Black Lever
Price
U.S. $
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
47
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-208
Page 47-205
Page 47-210
Page 47-206
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-204
January 2010
HT800 Series, Selector Switch Units
Standard Knob
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JBH1D
Standard Lever
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JEH1D
Table 47-329. 3-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Contact
Type
Operator Position
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Standard Black Knob
Catalog
Number
No Contacts
2NO-2NC
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
—
—
—
M
S
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
HT8JBH1D
HT8JRH1D
HT8JUH1D
HT8JXH1D
HT8JEH1D
HT8JSH1D
HT8JVH1D
HT8JYH1D
X
O
O
O
O
X
M
S
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
HT8JBH1DAA5
HT8JRH1DAA5
HT8JUH1DAA5
HT8JXH1DAA5
HT8JEH1DAA5
HT8JSH1DAA5
HT8JVH1DAA5
HT8JYH1DAA5
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
M
S
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
HT8JBH1DF1Q1
HT8JRH1DF1Q1
HT8JUH1DF1Q1
HT8JXH1DF1Q1
HT8JEH1DF1Q1
HT8JSH1DF1Q1
HT8JVH1DF1Q1
HT8JYH1DF1Q1
X
O
O
X
O
X
O
X
O
X
X
O
M
S
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
HT8JBH1DF1Q1
HT8JRH1DF1Q1
HT8JUH1DF1Q1
HT8JXH1DF1Q1
HT8JEH1DF1Q1
HT8JSH1DF1Q1
HT8JVH1DF1Q1
HT8JYH1DF1Q1
2NO
2NO-2NC
Standard Black Lever
Price
U.S. $
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
For OXO, NC contacts must be wired in series — see Table 47-332 on Page 47-205.
47
Standard Knob
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JCH8E
Standard Lever
Operator
Cat. No.
HT8JFH8E
Table 47-330. 4-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13
Contact
Type
Operator Position
Operating Mode
M = Maintained
S = Momentary
Standard Black Knob
Catalog
Number
No Contacts
2NO-2NC
—
—
—
—
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Standard Black Lever
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
HT8JCH8E
HT8LNH8E
HT8LRH8E
HT8JFH8E
HT8LPH8E
HT8LSH8E
M
S
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
HT8JCH8EF1Q1
HT8LNH8EF1Q1
HT8LRH8EF1Q1
HT8JFH8EF1Q1
HT8LPH8EF1Q1
HT8LSH8EF1Q1
Price
U.S. $
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-208
Page 47-205
Page 47-210
Page 47-206
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-205
January 2010
HT800 Series, Selector Switch Selection, Contact Blocks
Selector Switch Contact Block Selection
Contact Blocks
For 2-, 3- and 4-Position Selector Switches
Table 47-331. 2-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 3A)
Operator Position
Left
Right
NO Contact Block
X
Table 47-334. Contact Blocks
O
O
NO
X
NC
or
NC
or
NO
Table 47-332. 3-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 1D)
Operator Position
X
O
O
Left
O
X
Right
NC
O
X
O
X
X
X
X
O
Contact
Type
Catalog
Number
Standard Normally Open contact
NO
HT8A
Standard Normally Closed contact
NC
HT8B
Normally Open Early Make contact will NOEM
make circuit before standard NO contact.
DC ratings do not apply.
HT8C
Normally Closed Late Break contact will NCLB
open after standard NC contact. DC
ratings do not apply.
HT8D
Logic level, low voltage NO contact.
Gold plated contacts.
HT8E
NO
Price
U.S. $
See Page 47-196 for contact block electrical ratings.
Table 47-335. Contact Block Location (Viewed from Rear) Suffix Codes
O
O
Description/Function
NO
NC Contact Block
NC
NO
NC
NC
Left
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Right Side
A
A2
B1
B2
C
C2
D1
D2
E1
F1
F4
A5
A6
B
B6
C5
C6
D
D6
E5
Q1
Table 47-333. 4-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 8E)
Operator Position
Left Side
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
1NO-1NC
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
Maximum of (2) contact blocks per side or a total of (4) contact blocks
recommended.
Right
NO
NC
NO
NC
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
47-206
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
HT800 Series, Legend Plates
Options
Legend Plates
Standard
Jumbo
Table 47-336. For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights
Legend
Color of
Field
Catalog
Number
(Standard)
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
(Jumbo)
Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16" High
47
CLAMP
CLOSE
DOWN
EMERG. STOP
FAST
FASTER
FEEDER ON
FEEDER OFF
FORWARD
HIGH
IN
INCH
JOG
JOG FOR.
JOG REV.
LOW
LOWER
LUBE-FAIL
MOTOR RUN
MOTOR STOP
OFF
ON
OPEN
OUT
POWER ON
RAISE
READY
RESET
REVERSE
RUN
SAFE
SLOW
SLOWER
START
STOP
TEST
TRANSFER
TRIP
UNCLAMP
UP
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Red
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
HT8SP90
HT8SP73
HT8SP74
HT8SP13
HT8SP75
HT8SP87
HT8SP94
HT8SP95
HT8SP15
HT8SP16
HT8SP17
HT8SP18
HT8SP19
HT8SP20
HT8SP21
HT8SP22
HT8SP23
HT8SP92
HT8SP81
HT8SP82
HT8SP24
HT8SP25
HT8SP26
HT8SP27
HT8SP80
HT8SP28
HT8SP86
HT8SP29
HT8SP30
HT8SP31
HT8SP85
HT8SP32
HT8SP88
HT8SP33
HT8SP34
HT8SP83
HT8SP93
HT8SP84
HT8SP91
HT8SP35
Table 47-337. For Selector Switch Operators
Price
U.S. $
Legend
Color of
Field
Catalog
Number
(Standard)
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
(Jumbo)
Price
U.S. $
2-Position — 3/16" High Lettering
HT8LP90
HT8LP73
HT8LP74
HT8LP13
HT8LP75
HT8LP87
HT8LP94
HT8LP95
HT8LP15
HT8LP16
HT8LP17
HT8LP18
HT8LP19
HT8LP20
HT8LP21
HT8LP22
HT8LP23
HT8LP92
HT8LP81
HT8LP82
HT8LP24
HT8LP25
HT8LP26
HT8LP27
HT8LP80
HT8LP28
HT8LP86
HT8LP29
HT8LP30
HT8LP31
HT8LP85
HT8LP32
HT8LP88
HT8LP33
HT8LP34
HT8LP83
HT8LP93
HT8LP84
HT8LP91
HT8LP35
FOR. REV.
Black
HT8SP38
HT8LP38
HAND AUTO
Black
HT8SP39
HT8LP39
HIGH LOW
Black
HT8SP40
HT8LP40
JOG RUN
Black
HT8SP41
HT8LP41
MAN. AUTO
Black
HT8SP67
HT8LP67
OFF ON
Black
HT8SP42
HT8LP42
OPEN CLOSE
Black
HT8SP43
HT8LP43
RUN JOG
Black
HT8SP44
HT8LP44
SAFE RUN
Black
HT8SP45
HT8LP45
START JOG
Black
HT8SP46
HT8LP46
START STOP
Black
HT8SP47
HT8LP47
UP DOWN
Black
HT8SP48
HT8LP48
3-Position — 3/16" High Lettering
AUTO OFF HAND Black
HT8SP49
HT8LP49
FOR. OFF REV.
Black
HT8SP50
HT8LP50
FOR. SAFE REV.
Black
HT8SP69
HT8LP69
HAND OFF AUTO Black
HT8SP51
HT8LP51
MAN. OFF AUTO Black
HT8SP68
HT8LP68
OPEN OFF CLOSE Black
HT8SP53
HT8LP53
RUN SAFE JOG
Black
HT8SP70
HT8LP70
UP OFF DOWN
Black
HT8SP54
HT8LP54
ON STOP SAFE
Black
HT8SP71
HT8LP71
Table 47-338. For Push-Pull Units
Legend
Color of
Field
Catalog
Price
Number
U.S. $
(Standard)
Catalog
Number
(Jumbo)
ON / OFF
Black
HT8PP5
HT8R5
OPEN / CLOSE
Black
HT8PP8
HT8R8
UP / DOWN
Black
HT8PP11
HT8R11
Price
U.S. $
3/32" high lettering.
1/8" high lettering.
Table 47-339. Blank Plastic Legend Plates — Square
Legend
Color of
Field
Catalog
Number
(Standard)
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
(Jumbo)
Black
White/Silver
HT8SP76
HT8LP76
White
Red/ Black
HT8SP77
HT8LP77
Price
U.S. $
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-213
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-207
January 2010
HT800 Series, Legend Plates
Legend Plates with Non-standard Markings
When Ordering Specify
■
Catalog Number of Blank Plate per
Table 47-340.
■ Insert the following into Order
Notes: Legend, Letter Size per
Table 47-341 and Locations per
Figure 47-135.
Ordering Example:
Jumbo Size
HT8LP Series
Catalog No.: HT85P76STAMP
Letter Size: 3/32 inch (2.4 mm)
Pos. A — POWER HOUSE
Pos. B — START PUMP 1
A
B
C
D
K
Legend Characters Available
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX
YZ/-.,1234567890
Standard Size
HT8SP Series
A
B4
B
G
F
AB
AE
AF
C4
A4
A
H
D4
G
I
Figure 47-135. Legend Positions
Table 47-340. Blank Plastic Legend Plates for Non-standard Markings — Plastic
Legend
Black
White
Color of
Field
Standard
White/Silver
Red/Black
HT8SP76STAMP
HT8SP77STAMP
Catalog
Number
Jumbo
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
HT8LP76STAMP
HT8LP77STAMP
Table 47-341. Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions
Top
(Aluminum
and Plastic)
Approximate Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
Width
Style
Height
Character Size
3/32" High
Number
of Lines
1/8" High
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
3/16" High
Number of
Characters
Number
of Lines
Number of
Characters
Standard
1.75 (44.5)
1.75 (44.5)
Square
2
18
2
13
1
9
Jumbo
2.19 (55.6)
2.19 (55.6)
Square
5
23
3
18
2
12
Can be used on top row only of any enclosure.
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
47-208
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
HT800 Series, Accessories
Accessories
Table 47-342. HT800 Accessories
47
Description
Catalog
Number
Illuminated Pushbutton Guard
HT8A15
Wrench Tool
HT8WRENCH
Lamp/Bulb Removal Tool
HT8LAMPTOOL
Thrust Washer (Anti-rotation)
(Included with every operator)
HT8X1
Trim Ring
(Included with every operator)
HT8X2
Sealing/Spacer Washer
(Five included with every operator)
HT8X3
Grounding Kit for Pushbuttons and Selector Switches
(Included with every operator)
HT8GR1
Grounding Kit for Indicating Lights
(Included with indicating lights)
HT8GR2
Price
U.S. $
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-209
January 2010
HT800 Series, Accessories
Table 47-343. Light Units
Type
Voltage
Catalog
Number
Full Voltage
24V AC/DC
120V AC/DC
HT8F3V3
HT8F7V8
Transformer
120V AC
HT8L1T1
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-344. Replacement Bulbs and LEDs
Light Unit
Voltage
Color
Catalog
Number
—
—
—
HT8BULBV1
HT8BULBV3
HT8BULBV7
Red
Green
Amber/Orange
HT8LEDRF1
HT8LEDGF1
HT8LEDAF1
White/Clear
Yellow
Blue
HT8LEDWF1
HT8LEDYF1
HT8LEDBF1
Red
Green
Amber/Orange
HT8LEDRF3
HT8LEDGF3
HT8LEDAF3
White/Clear
Yellow
Blue
HT8LEDWF3
HT8LEDYF3
HT8LEDBF3
Red
Green
Amber/Orange
HT8LEDRF7
HT8LEDGF7
HT8LEDAF7
White/Clear
Yellow
Blue
HT8LEDWF7
HT8LEDYF7
HT8LEDBF7
Price
U.S. $
Incandescent
6V
24V
120V
LED
6 – 12V
(For use with transformers
with 6V secondary winding)
Incandescent
Bulb
LED
Bulb
24V
120V
Table 47-345. Replacement Lenses
Color
Indicating Lights
Price
U.S. $
PresTest Lights
Illuminated Pushbuttons
Amber
Blue
Clear
Green
HT8LA
HT8LB
HT8LC
HT8LG
HT8BA
HT8BB
HT8BC
HT8BG
Red
White
Yellow
HT8LR
HT8LW
HT8LY
HT8BR
HT8BW
HT8BY
Price
U.S. $
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-210
January 2010
HT800 Series, Dimensions
Dimensions
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
4.60 (116.8)
3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7)
2.00 (50.8)
Panel
0.90 (22.9)
Extended
1.40
(35.6)
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
0.75 (19.1)
Flush
1.00
(25.4)
Side View
2.00 (50.8)
Back View
Recommended maximum of 4 tandem
stacks of contact blocks behind operator.
At users’ discretion, two additional tandem
stacks may be added.
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Optional
2 Stacks
Bottom View
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Pushbutton Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Figure 47-136. Momentary Pushbuttons — Non-illuminated — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
47
5.15 (130.8)
4.35 (110.5)
3.55 (90.2)
2.75 (69.9)
Panel
1.50
(38.1)
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
1.40
(35.6)
Contact Block
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1.00
(25.4)
2.00 (50.8)
Back View
Side View
Recommended maximum of 4 tandem
stacks of contact blocks behind operator.
At users’ discretion, two additional tandem
stacks may be added.
Optional
2 Stacks
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Pushbutton Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Figure 47-137. Illuminated Pushbuttons — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-211
January 2010
HT800 Series, Dimensions
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
4.60 (116.8)
3.70 (94.0)
2.90 (73.7)
2.00 (50.8)
Panel
1.50
(38.1)
1.40
(35.6)
#6-32 Posi-drive
1.00
Saddle Clamp Type
(25.4)
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
2.00 (50.8)
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
Back View
Recommended maximum of 4 tandem
stacks of contact blocks behind operator.
At users’ discretion, two additional tandem
stacks may be added.
Side View
Optional
2 Stacks
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Mushroom Head Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Figure 47-138. Mushroom Head Pushbuttons and Round Head MRH Push-Pull Operators — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Light Unit
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
5.15 (130.8)
4.35 (110.5)
Panel
1.30
(33.0)
3.55 (90.2)
2.75 (69.9)
1.40
(35.6)
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Contact Block
1.00
#6-32 Posi-drive
(25.4)
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
2.00 (50.8)
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
Back View
Side View
Recommended maximum of 4 tandem
stacks of contact blocks behind operator.
At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added.
Contact blocks mount directly to operator
adaptor in non-illuminated version.
Optional
2 Stacks
Recommended 4 Stacks
(8 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Push-Pull Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Figure 47-139. Illuminated and Non-illuminated Flat Head MRH Push-Pull Operators — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
47-212
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
January 2010
HT800 Series, Dimensions
Panel
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
7 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1.30
(33.0)
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
1.68
(42.7)
Back View
Side View
Light Unit
Assembly
1.67
(42.4)
1.26
(32.0)
Bottom View
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Indicating Light Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Figure 47-140. Indicating Lights — Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Stacking Screw Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Panel
2.90 (73.7)
2.00 (50.8)
1.20
(38.1)
47
1.40
(35.6)
#6-32 Posi-drive
Saddle Clamp Type
1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG
Terminal Torque:
12 in-lbs Max.
Copper Wire Only
1.00
(25.4)
Side View
2.00 (50.8)
Back View
Recommended
2 Stacks
(4 Contact Blocks Total)
Bottom View
Back, Side and Bottom Views of Selector Switch Operator with Attached Contact Blocks
Figure 47-141. Selector Switches— Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-213
January 2010
HT800 Series, Dimensions
2.50 (63.5)
0.18 (4.6)
2.19
(55.6)
0.68
(17.3)
1.77
(45)
2.50
(63.5)
2.19
(55.6)
1.77
(45)
Optional Notch
Locations
Standard
Jumbo
1.20 (30.5)
Diameter
Figure 47-142. Mounting Matrix and Minimum Panel Spacing
Requirements in Inches (mm)
Figure 47-143. Legend Plates — Approximate Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
47
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight
47-214
January 2010
HT800 Series, Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
For deciphering Catalog Numbers. Not all combinations are suitable for ordering.
Table 47-346. HT800 Catalog Numbering System for Pushbuttons, Push-Pulls and Indicating Lights
HT8 GB R
AB T1
Style
Pushbuttons
AA = Flush
AB = Extended
AE = Mushroomhead
Illuminated Pushbuttons
GB = Illuminated PB
Push-Pull Operators
CB = 2-Position, Maintained
Indicating Lights
HF = Full Voltage/Resistor Type
HB = Transformer Type
Push-to-Test Operators
GT = All Types
Light Unit Type/Voltage
F3 = 24V FV, LED
F7 = 120V FV, LED
L1 = 120V Transformer, LED
T1 = 120V Transformer, Incand.
V3 = 24V FV, Incand.
V7 = 120V Res., Incand.
Button Color
G = Green
H = Black
R = Red
Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear)
Left Side
Lens Color
A = Amber/Orange
B = Blue
C = Clear
G = Green
R = Red
W = White
Y = Yellow
A
A2
B1
B2
C
C2
D1
D2
E1
F1
F4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Right Side
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
1NO-1NC
A5
A6
B
B6
C5
C6
D
D6
E5
Q1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
Maximum of (4) contact blocks per side or a total of (8) contact blocks recommended.
Table 47-347. HT800 Selector Switch Catalog Numbering System
HT8 JA H
3A F 1 Q 1
Style
Selector Switches
JA = 2-Pos., Knob, Maint.
JB = 3-Pos., Knob, Maint.
JC = 4-Pos., Knob, Maint.
JD = 2-Pos., Lever, Maint.
JE = 3-Pos., Lever, Maint.
JF = 4-Pos., Lever, Maint.
JK = 2-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Left
JL = 2-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Left
JN = 2-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Right
JP = 2-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Right
JR = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Left
JS = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Left
JU = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Right
JV = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Right
JX = 3-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Both
JY = 3-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Both
LN = 4-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Pos 1 to 2
LP = 4-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Pos 1 to 2
LR = 4-Pos., Knob, Spr. Rtn., Pos 4 to 3
LS = 4-Pos., Lever, Spr. Rtn., Pos 4 to 3
47
Contact Block Location
(viewed from rear)
Switch Color
Left Side
H = Black
Cam Location/Type
1D – For all 3-Pos.
3A – For all 2-Pos.
8E – For all 4-Pos.
A
A2
B1
B2
C
C2
D1
D2
E1
F1
F4
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
1NO-1NC
Right Side
A5
A6
B
B6
C5
C6
D
D6
E5
Q1
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
NO
2NO
NC
2NC
NOEM
2 NOEM
NCLB
2 NCLB
NOEM-NCLB
NO & NC
Maximum of (2) contact blocks per side or a total of (4) contacts blocks recommended.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-215
January 2010
10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant
Contents
Description
Page
Description
Page
Product Description . . . . . . . .
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and
Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Non-illuminated
Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Pushbutton
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicating Light Units . . . .
Illuminated Pushbuttons
and Indicating Lights. . . .
Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Push-Pull
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Push-Pulls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selector Switch Units . . . .
Selector Switch Selection . .
Selector Switch Operators .
Illuminated Selector
Switch Operators. . . . . . .
47-215
47-216
47-216
Options
Contact Block and
Mounting Adapters . . . . .
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting and Assembly . . . .
Catalog Number
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47-239
47-240
47-241
47-216
47-217
47-242
Product Description
47-218
47-220
47-221
47-223
47-224
47-225
47-226
47-229
47-231
47-233
47-235
47-237
All the Industry-Proven Quality of
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer® 10250T
and E34 Series of Logic Devices,
plus Class I Division 2 Certification
The 10250T1H consists of a normally
open-normally closed factory sealed
contact block that is UL Listed for use
in Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and
D (NEC 500 – 503) — Class I, Zone 2, IIB
+ H2 (NEC 505) hazardous locations
and is rated for both NEMA A600 and
NEMA Q300. 10250T and E34 illuminated components have also been UL
Listed for use in Class I, Division 2,
Groups B, C and D (NEC 500 – 503) —
Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC 505).
This, combined with the industryproven Cutler-Hammer 10250T
30.5 mm pushbutton line, offers a
complete solution to Division 2 hazardous location requirements.
Class I Division 2
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Single composite catalog numbers
for complete assembled stations and
operators for use in Division 2 hazardous
locations are featured throughout this
section.
Operator
The 30.5 mm 10250T pushbutton line
features a zinc die cast construction
with chrome-plated housing and
mounting nut.
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer E34 Series
30.5 mm pushbutton line features the
same rugged die cast construction of
our 10250T line with an additional twolayer 100% solid thermosetting
cathodic epoxy coating. This coating
provides a flat black smooth, consistent, corrosion resistant surface that
has passed a demanding 600 hour salt
spray test. (The industry standard for
this 4X test requires only 200 hours.)
Ultraviolet Light
E34 epoxy coating is not recommended for use in applications where
exposure to ultraviolet light exists —
use NEMA 4X 10250T operators.
Ratings
Our Class I Division 2 line of pushbuttons
are UL Listed (NEMA type) 1, 2, 3, 3R,
4, 4X, 12 and 13. Our Class I Division 2
E34 line meets IEC 947-1 IP66 standards
and the cathodic coating meets FDA
3A sanitary chemical resistance
requirements. For a complete listing of
all applicable ratings see Page 47-217.
47
47-216
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
January 2010
10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant
Liquid Drainage
E34 Grounding
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer pushbutton
operators offer front of panel drainage
via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut,
these holes prevent buildup of liquid
inside the operator, which can prevent
operation in freezing environments.
The holes also provide a route for
escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure
from the internal diaphragm seal,
ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4.
E34 line of operators is equipped with
a ground screw terminal as part of its
die cast construction. This earthing
terminal provides an easily accessible
point for grounding operators when
used in a painted or nonmetallic enclosure and eliminates the need for extra
kits when daisy chain grounding is
required.
Standards and Certifications
■
UL 508 — File No. E131568
UL 1604 — File No. E10323
■ CSA Certified C22.2 No.14 —
File No. LR 68551
■ CSA Certified C22.2 No. 213-M1987
— File No. LR 20713
■
Ingress Protection
■
Standard Indicating Lights
❑ UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X,
12, 13
❑ IEC IP65
■
All Other Operators
❑ UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X,
12, 13
❑ IEC IP65
Nib
Foam Neoprene
Panel Sealing Gasket
Drainage Hole
Earth
Terminal
Flexible
Diaphragm
Features
Colorfast
Molded
Button
■
Drainage Hole
Mounting Nut
47
E34 Grounding Nibs
Stainless
Steel
Operating
Spring
■
■
■
■
Figure 47-144. Diaphragm Seal
■
10250T Grounding
■
10250T line operators have “grounding
nibs” — four metal points on the operator casting designed to bite through
most paints and other coatings on
metal panels to enhance the grounding
connection when the operator is
securely tightened.
10250T Grounding Nibs
Factory sealed contact blocks
Heavy-duty zinc die cast construction
NEMA rated 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Front-of-panel drainage holes
Grounding nibs on the operator casing
Solid thermosetting cathodic epoxy
coating on E34
Corrosion resistance in E34
Benefits
■
Pushbutton for hazardous locations
Drainage holes prevent buildup of
liquid inside the operator which
can prevent operation in freezing
environments
■ Grounding nibs bite through paint
and other coatings to provide
secure ground
■ Suitable for corrosive environments
(E34 only)
■ Earth terminal provides additional
grounding point and allows for
daisy chain grounding (E34 line)
■
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-217
January 2010
10250T Heavy-Duty Oiltight and E34 Corrosion Resistant
Technical Data and
Specifications
Electrical Ratings
Table 47-348. Contact Block
Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300
Mechanical Ratings
■
■
■
Frequency of Operation
❑ All pushbuttons: 6000 operations/hr.
❑ Key and lever selector switches:
3000 operations/hr.
Life
❑ Pushbuttons: 10 x 106 operations
❑ Contact block: 10 x 106 operations
❑ Key and lever selector switches:
0.25 x 106 operations
Shock Resistance
❑ Duration/force: 20 mS ≥5g
Climatic Conditions
■
Operating: 32° to 140°F (0° to 60°C)
Storage: -40° to 176°F (-40° to 80°C)
■ Altitude: 6,562 ft. (2,000m)
■ Humidity: Max. 95% RH @ 60°C
Description
A600 (AC)
240V
480V
600V
125V
250V
60
30
15
12
0.55
0.27
Make and Emergency
Interrupting Capacity (Amps)
Normal Load Break (Amps)
6
3
10
10
10
10
7200
720
7200
720
7200
720
7200
720
Thermal Current (Amps)
Voltamperes
Max. Make
Max. Break
■
Terminals
All illuminated devices have operating
temperatures below 100°C except for
the following Catalog Numbers with
temperature codes per NEC table
500-5(d) and UL 1604:
Terminals are saddle clamp type
for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 sq. mm) to 2 x
14 AWG (4.0 sq. mm) conductors
■ Torque = 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
■
Degree of protection against direct
electrical contact: IP2X with fingerproof shroud
Contact Blocks
■
Terminals are Stainless Steel saddle
clamp type for 1 x 18 – 14 AWG
(0.75 – 2.5 sq. mm) solid or stranded
copper conductor
■ Torque = 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) with size 2
Phillips screwdriver
■ Degree of protection against direct
electrical contact: IP2X with fingerproof shroud
1.2
0.55
0.27
2.5
2.5
69
69
69
69
Bulbs — Average Life
❑ Transformer type: 20,000 hrs.
❑ Resistor/direct voltage type:
2,500 hrs. min. @ rated voltage
❑ LED: 60,000 to 100,000 hrs.
Note: For additional technical information,
see Pub. TD.7.4.T.E.04.
■
1.5
Light Units
■
Light Units
Q300 (DC)
120V
Table 47-349. Temperature Codes
10250T
E34
Temp.
Code
10250T201H
E34RB120H
T3C
10250T202H
E34RB240H
T3A
10250T471H
E34SB120H
TC3
10250T472H
E34SB240H
T3B
10250T80H
—
T3C
10250T81H
—
T3B
47
All Selector Switches w/120MB Lamp T3C
All Illuminated Devices with
Lamp 1835
T4A
Mounting and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-241
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-218
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Momentary Pushbutton Units
Product Selection
Momentary Pushbutton Units
Table 47-350. Non-illuminated Flush and Extended Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Contact Type
Button
Color
Flush Button
Extended Button
10250T
Catalog
Number
E34
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
10250T
Price
U.S. $
E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
1NO-1NC
Black
Red
Green
10250T706B
10250T706R
10250T706G
E34EX706B
E34EX706R
E34EX706G
10250T708B
10250T708R
10250T708G
E34EX708B
E34EX708R
E34EX708G
2NO-2NC
Black
Red
Green
10250T707B
10250T707R
10250T707G
E34EX707B
E34EX707R
E34EX707G
10250T709B
10250T709R
10250T709G
E34EX709B
E34EX709R
E34EX709G
Price
U.S. $
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T706Y
Table 47-351. Non-illuminated Mushroom and Jumbo Mushroom Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D
Contact Type
Button
Color
Mushroom Button
Catalog
Number
47
Jumbo Mushroom Button
10250T
10250T
E34
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
1NO-1NC
Black
Red
Green
10250T710B
10250T710R
10250T710G
E34EX710B
E34EX710R
E34EX710G
10250T712B
10250T712R
10250T712G
E34EX712B
E34EX712R
E34EX712G
2NO-2NC
Black
Red
Green
10250T711B
10250T711R
10250T711G
E34EX711B
E34EX711R
E34EX711G
10250T713B
10250T713R
10250T713G
E34EX713B
E34EX713R
E34EX713G
Price
U.S. $
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T710Y
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet applications.
Table 47-352. Color Selection Table
Color
Suffix Code
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
Red (EMERG. STOP)
B
R
G
Y
W
L
N
E
Blue not available on Jumbo Mushroom
Pushbutton.
Orange is only available on Flush or
Extended Pushbuttons.
Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button
head for Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton
only.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators
where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Accessories . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . .
Discount Symbol. .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-219
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Momentary Pushbutton Units
Momentary Pushbutton Units (Continued)
■
Momentary Contact
Non-illuminated
■ Booted or Guarded
■
Table 47-353. 10250T Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Contact Type
Button Color
Booted Flush Button
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Booted Extended Button
Guarded Extended Button
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Price
U.S. $
1NO-1NC
Black
Red
Green
10250T706BB
10250T706RB
10250T706GB
10250T708BB
10250T708RB
10250T708GB
10250T706BG
10250T706RG
10250T706GG
2NO-2NC
Black
Red
Green
10250T707BB
10250T707RB
10250T707GB
10250T709BB
10250T709RB
10250T709GB
10250T707BG
10250T707RG
10250T707GG
Red Booted Flush Pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T706YG
Table 47-354. E34 Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Contact Type
Button Color
Booted Flush Button
Booted Extended Button
Guarded Extended Button
47
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
1NO-1NC
Black
Red
Green
E34EX706BB
E34EX706RB
E34EX706GB
E34EX708BB
E34EX708RB
E34EX708GB
E34EX706BG
E34EX706RG
E34EX706GG
2NO-2NC
Black
Red
Green
E34EX707BB
E34EX707RB
E34EX707GB
E34EX709BB
E34EX709RB
E34EX709GB
E34EX707BG
E34EX707RG
E34EX707GG
Red Booted Flush Pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function.
To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Color Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T706YG
Table 47-355. Color Selection Table
Color
Suffix Code
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
B
R
G
Y
W
L
N
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators
where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Accessories . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . .
Discount Symbol .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-220
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Momentary Pushbutton Components
Pushbuttons
Table 47-356. Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color
Flush Button
10250T
Catalog
Number
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
Gray
White
Blue
Orange
10250T101
10250T102
10250T103
10250T104
10250T105
10250T106
10250T108
10250T109
Extended Button
E34
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
10250T
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
E34PB1
E34PB2
E34PB3
E34PB4
E34PB5
E34PB6
E34PB7
E34PB8
Half Shrouded Button
E34
10250T
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
10250T111
10250T112
10250T113
10250T120
—
10250T116
10250T118
10250T119
Price Vertical
U.S. $ Catalog
Number
E34EB1
E34EB2
E34EB3
E34EB4
E34EB5
E34EB6
E34EB7
E34EB8
10250T501
10250T502
10250T503
10250T504
10250T505
10250T506
10250T508
10250T509
E34
Horizontal
Catalog
Number
Price Vertical
U.S. $ Catalog
Number
10250T511
10250T512
10250T513
10250T514
10250T515
10250T516
10250T518
10250T519
E34EVB1
E34EVB2
E34EVB3
E34EVB4
E34EVB5
E34EVB6
E34EVB7
E34EVB8
Horizontal
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34EHB1
E34EHB2
E34EHB3
E34EHB4
E34EHB5
E34EHB6
E34EHB7
E34EHB8
To order operator with factory assembled Extended Retaining Nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add Suffix letter E to listed Catalog Number.
Table 47-357. Mushroom Head Non-illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Color
Mushroom Button
10250T
Catalog
Number
47
Black
Red
Red (EMERG. STOP)
Green
Yellow
Blue
10250T121
10250T122
—
10250T123
10250T124
10250T129
Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button
10250T
E34
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34LB1
E34LB2
—
E34LB3
E34LB4
E34LB6
Catalog
Number
10250T171
10250T172
10250T17213
10250T173
10250T174
—
E34
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34JB1
E34JB2
E34JB2N8
E34JB3
E34JB4
—
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications.
Anodized aluminum head may not be suitable for some corrosive environments.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Accessories . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . .
Dimensions . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . .
Discount Symbol. .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Page 47-239
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-221
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Illuminated Pushbutton Units
■
Momentary Contact
Illuminated
■ Plastic Lenses
■
Table 47-358. Illuminated Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Color
Contact
10250T
E34
Catalog
Number
LED
Incandescent
Full Voltage
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Bayonet
Base
E34EX828RD24
E34EX828GD24
E34EX828AD24
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
Base
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T828RD24
10250T828GD24
10250T828AD24
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T828RD2A
10250T828GD2A
10250T828AD2A
E34EX828RD2A
E34EX828GD2A
E34EX828AD2A
Transformer
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T802RD06
10250T802GD06
10250T802AD06
E34EX802RD06
E34EX802GD06
E34EX802AD06
Bayonet
Base
6V AC
Full Voltage
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T818RD
10250T818GD
10250T818AD
#757
E34EX818RD
E34EX818GD
E34EX818AD
#757
Resistor
120V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T824RD
10250T824GD
10250T824AD
120MB
E34EX824RD
E34EX824GD
E34EX824AD
120MB
Transformer
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T802RD
10250T802GD
10250T802AD
#755
E34EX802RD
E34EX802GD
E34EX802AD
#755
6V AC
To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Lenses Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T828YD24
Table 47-359. Lenses Selection Table
10250T
Color
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
R
G
Y
A
L
C
W
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC23
10250TC43
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
Price
U.S. $
E34
Color
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
R
G
Y
A
L
C
W
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V9
E34V6
E34V0
E34V5
Price
U.S. $
Additional Light
Units . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-224
Dimensions. . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-222
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Pushbutton Units
Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units
■
Momentary Contact
Guarded Illuminated
■ Plastic Lenses
■
Table 47-360. Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Color
Contact
10250T
E34
Catalog
Number
LED
Incandescent
47
Full Voltage
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Bayonet
Base
E34EX828RG24
E34EX828GG24
E34EX828AG24
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
Base
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T828RG24
10250T828GG24
10250T828AG24
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T828RG2A
10250T828GG2A
10250T828AG2A
E34EX828RG2A
E34EX828GG2A
E34EX828AG2A
Transformer
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T802RG06
10250T802GG06
10250T802AG06
E34EX802RG06
E34EX802GG06
E34EX802AG06
Full Voltage
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T818RG
10250T818GG
10250T818AG
#757
E34EX818RG
E34EX818GG
E34EX818AG
#757
Resistor
120V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T824RG
10250T824GG
10250T824AG
120MB
E34EX824RG
E34EX824GG
E34EX824AG
120MB
Transformer
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
1NO-1NC
10250T802RG
10250T802GG
10250T802AG
#755
E34EX802RG
E34EX802GG
E34EX802AG
#755
6V AC
To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from Lenses Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T828YG24
Table 47-361. Lenses Selection Table
10250T
Color
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
R
G
Y
A
L
C
W
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC23
10250TC43
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
Price
U.S. $
E34
Color
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
R
G
Y
A
L
C
W
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V9
E34V6
E34V0
E34V5
Additional Light
Units. . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . .
Discount Symbol. .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Price
U.S. $
Page 47-224
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-223
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Indicating Light Units
Indicating Light Units
■
■
Standard
Plastic Lens
Table 47-362. Indicating Lights — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Color
10250T
E34
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
LED
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
10250T197HLRP24
10250T197HLGP24
10250T197HLAP24
E34FB197HLRP24
E34FB197HLGP24
E34FB197HLAP24
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
10250T197HLRP2A
10250T197HLGP2A
10250T197HLAP2A
E34FB197HLRP2A
E34FB197HLGP2A
E34FB197HLAP2A
Transformer
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
10250T181HLRP06
10250T181HLGP06
10250T181HLAP06
E34TB120HLRP06
E34TB120HLGP06
E34TB120HLAP06
Full Voltage
24V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
10250T206HRP
10250T206HGP
10250T206HAP
E34FB24HRP
E34FB24HGP
E34FB24HAP
#757
Resistor
120V AC/DC
Red
Green
Amber
10250T201HRP
10250T201HGP
10250T201HAP
E34RB120HRP
E34RB120HGP
E34RB120HAP
120MB
Transformer
120V AC
Red
Green
Amber
10250T181HRP
10250T181HGP
10250T181HAP
E34HB120HRP
E34HB120HGP
E34HB120HAP
#755
Full Voltage
Incandescent
LED/Lamp
Number
Bayonet
Base
To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters in the Catalog Number with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lenses Selection
Table below. Example: 10250T201HYP
Table 47-363. Lenses Selection Table
Color
10250T
Plastic
Plastic
Glass
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
47
E34
Glass
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
RP
GP
AP
YP
LP
CP
WP
10250TC1N
10250TC2N
10250TC19N
10250TC3N
10250TC4N
10250TC5N
10250TC6N
Price Suffix
U.S. $ Code
RG
GG
AG
—
LG
CG
WG
Plastic
Catalog
Number
10250TC7N
10250TC8N
10250TC9N
—
10250TC10N
10250TC11N
10250TC12N
Price
U.S. $
Glass
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
RP
GP
AP
YP
LP
CP
WP
E34H2
E34H3
E34H9
E34H4
E34H6
E34H0
E34H5
Price Suffix
U.S. $ Code
RG
GG
AG
YG
LG
CG
WG
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34G2
E34G3
E34G9
E34G4
E34G6
E34G0
E34G5
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Additional Light
Units . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . .
Discount Symbol .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-224
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-224
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Illuminated Pushbutton and Indicating Light Components
Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights
Table 47-364. Operators without Lens — NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Light Unit
Type
Type
Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton
10250T
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
10250T
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
LED/Lamp
Number
E34
Catalog
Number
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage
—
10250T397HL
E34CB497HL
10250T197HL
E34FB197HL
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
10250T416HL
10250T411HL
10250T412HL
10250T419HL
10250T413HL
10250T414HL
10250T415HL
E34XB024HL
E34XB120HL
E34XB240HL
E34XB277HL
E34XB380HL
E34XB480HL
E34XB600HL
—
10250T181HL
10250T182HL
10250T198HL
10250T183HL
10250T184HL
10250T185HL
—
E34TB120HL
E34TB240HL
E34TB277HL
E34TB380HL
E34TB480HL
E34TB600HL
Incandescent
Full Voltage
AC/DC
6
12
24
32
48
10250T473H
10250T474H
10250T476H
10250T477H
10250T478H
E34CB06H
E34CB12H
E34CB24H
E34CB32H
E34CB48H
10250T203H
10250T204H
10250T206H
10250T207H
10250T208H
E34FB06H
E34FB12H
E34FB24H
E34FB32H
E34FB48H
#755
#756
#757
#1828
#1835
Resistor
AC/DC
120
240
10250T471H
10250T472H
E34SB120H
E34SB240H
10250T201H
10250T202H
E34RB120H
E34RB240H
120MB
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
24
120
240
277
380
480
600
10250T416H
10250T411H
10250T412H
10250T419H
10250T413H
10250T414H
10250T415H
E34XB024H
E34XB120H
E34XB240H
E34XB277H
E34XB380H
E34XB480H
E34XB600H
—
10250T181H
10250T182H
10250T198H
10250T183H
10250T184H
10250T185H
—
E34TB120H
E34TB240H
E34TB277H
E34TB380H
E34TB480H
E34TB600H
#755
Neon
AC/DC
120
240
—
—
—
—
10250T226H
10250T227H
E34NB120H
E34NB240H
NE51H-R-22
NE51H-4-68
47
Indicating Light
E34
Bayonet
Base
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from the LED Selection Table on Page 47-230.
Resister units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style.
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Table 47-365. Indicating Light Lens
Plastic
Color
10250T
Catalog
Number
10250T
E34
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
E34
Price
U.S. $
10250TC1N
10250TC2N
10250TC19N
10250TC3N
10250TC4N
10250TC5N
10250TC6N
Catalog
Number
Glass
Color
Price
U.S. $
E34H2
E34H3
E34H9
E34H4
E34H6
E34H0
E34H5
10250T
Catalog
Number
10250T
E34
Red
Green
Amber
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC7N
10250TC8N
10250TC9N
—
10250TC10N
10250TC11N
10250TC12N
E34
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
E34G2
E34G3
E34G9
E34G4
E34G6
E34G0
E34G5
Table 47-366. Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses
Color
10250T
Catalog
Number
10250T
E34
Red
Green
Yellow
Amber
Blue
Clear
White
10250TC21
10250TC22
10250TC23
10250TC43
10250TC24
10250TC25
10250TC26
E34
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
E34V2
E34V3
E34V4
E34V9
E34V6
E34V0
E34V5
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Accessories . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . .
Dimensions . . . . . .
Enclosures. . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . .
Discount Symbol. .
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Page 47-239
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-225
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Push-Pull Units
Push-Pull Units
■
■
Two- and Three-Position
Non-illuminated
Table 47-367. 2-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operator Function (Position)
Maintained
Maintained
(Pull)
(Push)
O
X
X
O
Red Standard Push-Pull
10250T
E34
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Price
U.S. $
E34EX714R
10250T714R
Mounting Location
1
2
1NO
1NC
O
X
10250T715R
E34EX715R
X
O
2NO
O
X
2NC
X
O
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table
below. Example: 10250T714G
Table 47-368. 3-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operator Function (Position)
Momentary Maintained
Maintained
(Pull)
(Intermediate) (Push)
Red Standard Push-Pull
10250T
E34
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
1
2
Price
U.S. $
O
X
O
O
X
O
10250T716R
E34EX716R
1NO
1NC
X
X
O
X
O
O
10250T717R
E34EX717R
1NC
1NC
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table
below. Example: 10250T716G
Table 47-369. 3-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operator Function (Position)
Momentary Maintained
Momentary
(Pull)
(Intermediate) (Push)
Red Standard Push-Pull
10250T
E34
Catalog
Number
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact
Type
Mounting Location
1
2
Price
U.S. $
O
X
O
O
X
O
10250T718R
E34EX718R
1NO
1NC
X
X
O
X
O
O
10250T721R
E34EX721R
1NC
1NC
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate Suffix Code from the Button and Color Selection Table
below. Example: 10250T718G
Table 47-370. Button and Color Selection Table
Standard Color
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Blue
Suffix Catalog Number
Code
R
E
G
B
L
10250TB62
10250TB63
10250TB61
10250TB60
10250TB64
E34C2
E34C2N8
E34C3
E34C1
E34C6
Price Jumbo Mushroom Head Color
U.S. $ (Anodized) Aluminum
Suffix Catalog Number
Code
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Yellow
RJ
EJ
GJ
BJ
YJ
10250TJ62
10250TJ63
10250TJ61
10250TJ60
10250TJ64
Price
U.S. $
E34J2
E34J2N8
—
—
—
Accessories . . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Dimensions. . . . . . . Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Discount Symbol . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-226
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units
■
■
Two-Position Maintained
Illuminated
Table 47-371. 2-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D
Operator Position
Maintained Maintained
— Pull
— Push
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Red Standard Push-Pull
10250T
E34
Catalog
Number
LED
O
X
X
O
Full Voltage
Transformer
IncanFull Voltage
descent
Resistor
O
X
47
X
O
Transformer
Contact Mounting Location
Type
1
2
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
24V AC/DC
10250T853RD24
E34EX853RD24
120V AC
10250T853RD2A
E34EX853RD2A
24V AC
10250T843RD06
E34EX843RD06
120V AC
10250T844RD06
E34EX844RD06
24V AC/DC
10250T849RD
E34EX849RD
120V AC/DC 10250T851RD
E34EX851RD
24V AC
10250T843RD
E34EX843RD
120V AC
10250T844RD
E34EX844RD
1NO
1NC
1NO
1NC
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table
below. Example: 10250T851GS
Table 47-372. Lens and Color Selection Table
Color
10250T
E34
Suffix Catalog
Code Number
Color
Price Suffix Catalog
U.S. $ Code Number
Standard
Red
Red
(EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
10250T
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum
RD
ED
10250TC47
10250TC53
RD
ED
E34M2
E34M2N8
GD
LD
AD
WD
CD
10250TC48
10250TC49
10250TC50
10250TC51
10250TC52
GD
LD
AD
WD
CD
E34M3
E34M6
E34M9
E34M5
E34M0
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
Yellow
White
Clear
RS
ES
GS
LS
AS
YS
WS
CS
10250TC57
10250TC63
10250TC58
10250TC59
10250TC64
10250TC60
10250TC61
10250TC62
RH
GH
AH
10250TC65
10250TC66
10250TC67
HD Alum. with Transparent Center
Red
Green
Amber
Standard
Side-Lighted
(Anodized)
Aluminum
HD Alum. with
Transparent Center
Accessories . . . . . .
Additional Light
Units. . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . .
Enclosures. . . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . .
Discount Symbol. . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Page 47-224
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-227
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued)
■
■
Three-Position — Maintained Push, Momentary Pull
Illuminated
Table 47-373. 3-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D
Operator Position
Lamp
Momentary Maintained — Maintained
— Pull
Intermediate — Push
Type
Voltage
Red Standard Push-Pull
10250T
E34
Catalog
Number
LED
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
10250T864RD24
E34EX864RD24
120V
AC
10250T864RD2A
E34EX864RD2A
24V
AC
10250T854RD06
E34EX854RD06
120V
AC
10250T855RD06
E34EX855RD06
24V
AC/DC
10250T875RD24
E34EX875RD24
120V
AC
10250T875RD2A
E34EX875RD2A
24V
AC
10250T865RD06
E34EX865RD06
120V
AC
10250T866RD06
E34EX866RD06
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T860RD
E34EX860RD
Resistor
120V
AC
10250T862RD
E34EX862RD
Transformer
24V
AC
10250T854RD
E34EX854RD
120V
AC
10250T855RD
E34EX855RD
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T871RD
E34EX871RD
Resistor
120V
AC
10250T873RD
E34EX873RD
Transformer
24V
AC
10250T865RD
E34EX865RD
120V
AC
10250T866RD
E34EX866RD
Transformer
O
O
Transformer
Incandescent
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
24V
AC/DC
Full
Voltage
Full
Voltage
X
X
Contact
Type
Price
U.S. $
Mounting
Location
1
2
1NO
1NC
1NC
1NC
47
1NO
1NC
1NC
1NC
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table
on the bottom of Page 47-226. Example: 10250T862AS
Accessories . . . . .
Additional Light
Units . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . .
Discount Symbol .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Page 47-224
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-228
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Illuminated Push-Pull Units
Illuminated Push-Pull Units (Continued)
■
■
Three-Position Momentary
Illuminated
Table 47-374. 3-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2,
Groups B, C and D
Operator Position
Lamp
Type
Voltage
Momentary Maintained — Maintained
— Pull
Intermediate — Push
Red Standard Push-Pull
10250T
Catalog
Number
LED
O
X
O
O
X
O
O
X
10250T886RD24
E34EX886RD24
120V
AC
10250T886RD2A
E34EX886RD2A
24V
AC
10250T876RD06
E34EX876RD06
120V
AC
10250T877RD06
E34EX877RD06
24V
AC/DC
10250T897RD24
E34EX897RD24
120V
AC
10250T897RD2A
E34EX897RD2A
24V
AC
10250T887RD06
E34EX887RD06
120V
AC
10250T888RD06
E34EX888RD06
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T882RD
E34EX882RD
Resistor
120V
AC
10250T884RD
E34EX884RD
Transformer
24V
AC
10250T876RD
E34EX876RD
120V
AC
10250T877RD
E34EX877RD
Full
Voltage
24V
AC/DC
10250T893RD
E34EX893RD
Resistor
120V
AC
10250T895RD
E34EX895RD
Transformer
24V
AC
10250T887RD
E34EX887RD
120V
AC
10250T888RD
E34EX888RD
Transformer
O
O
47
Transformer
Incandescent
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
24V
AC/DC
Full
Voltage
Full
Voltage
X
X
Contact
Type
E34
Price
U.S. $
Mounting
Location
1
2
1NO
1NC
1NC
1NC
1NO
1NC
1NC
1NC
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Lens and Color Selection Table
on the bottom of Page 47-226. Example: 10250T884GD
Accessories . . . . .
Additional Light
Units. . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . .
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . .
Discount Symbol. .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Page 47-224
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Page 47-157
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-229
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators
An illuminated Push-Pull pushbutton
unit, arranged for one-hole mounting,
can replace two pushbuttons and a
pilot light or the non-illuminated form
can replace two pushbuttons. These
units are available in three basic types:
■
Maintained — (Two-Position). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position
until manually actuated to the opposite mode.
■ Momentary — (Three-Position).
Spring returns to an intermediate
position when pulled or pushed and
released.
■ Momentary Pull, Maintained Push
— (Three-Position). Spring returns to
intermediate position when pulled.
Maintains in pushed position until
manually returned to intermediate
(ready to reset) position. Maintained
stop holds circuit open and will prevent other series connected operators
from starting the system.
Application Guide
To assist in the selection of contact
blocks, the sketch to the right shows
pictorially by symbols 1 and 2 locations of contact circuits after assembly
of contact blocks and adapter to the
operator. The chart below shows the
effect of the push and pull operations
on either NO or NC contacts.
(X = contact closed, O = contact open)
2-Position Maintained Push-Pull
without Button on Lens
Catalog Number E34GDB
Locating Nib
1
2-Position Maintained Push-Pull
without Button on Lens
Catalog Number 10250T5
2
Figure 47-145. Locating Nibs
The Operators, Buttons, Contact Blocks,
etc., are offered as building block
components that can be intermixed to
satisfy many requirements. This minimizes the need for a varied and costly
inventory.
Table 47-375. Push-Pull Operator Components
Type of Operator
10250T
E34
Contact
Block
Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement
Out — Pull
Intermediate
In — Push
47
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Contact Block Mounting Location
1
2
1
2
1
2
2-Position Operator without Lens
Maintained Push-Pull
10250T5
E34GDB
1NO
1NC
O
X
2NO
2NC
O
X
or
O
X
No Intermediate
Position
O
X
X
X
or
O
O
X
O
X
O
3-Position Operator without Lens
Momentary Push-Pull
10250T4
E34GEB
1NO
1NC
O
X
Maintained Push-Momentary Pull
10250T9
E34GFB
2NO
2NC
O
X
Momentary Push-Pull
10250T10
E34GHB
1NO
1NC
O
X
2NO
2NC
O
X
or
or
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
or
or
O
X
X or O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
X
or
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light.
Button or Lens . . . . . . . . . .
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-230
Page 47-239
Pages 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-230
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Push-Pull Components
Push-Pull Operators (Continued)
Table 47-378. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices
(Continued)
Push-Pull Light Units, Lens and Buttons
Color
10250T
Table 47-376. Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices —
NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D
Light Unit
Type
Type
Voltage Catalog
Number
LED
(LEDs not
included)
Full Voltage
—
10250T97HL
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89HL
10250T63HL
10250T64HL
10250T65HL
10250T82HL
10250T66HL
10250T67HL
10250T68HL
Incandescent
Full Voltage
AC or DC
6
12
24/28
32
Catalog
Number
Price LED/Lamp
U.S. $ Number
#755
#756
#757
#1828
120
240
10250T80H
10250T81H
120MB
Transformer
AC Only
50/60 Hz
24
120
208
240
277
380
480
600
10250T89H
10250T63H
10250T64H
10250T65H
10250T82H
10250T66H
10250T67H
10250T68H
#755
Table 47-379. LED Selection Table
Voltage
Color
Catalog
Number
6V AC/DC
Suitable for
Use with
Transformers
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED006RN
E22LED006ON
E22LED006YN
E22LED006GN
E22LED006BN
E22LED006WN
12V AC/DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED012RN
E22LED012ON
E22LED012YN
E22LED012GN
E22LED012BN
E22LED012WN
24V AC/DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED024RN
E22LED024ON
E22LED024YN
E22LED024GN
E22LED024BN
E22LED024WN
48V AC/DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED048RN
E22LED048ON
E22LED048YN
E22LED048GN
E22LED048BN
E22LED048WN
60V AC/DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED060RN
E22LED060ON
E22LED060YN
E22LED060GN
E22LED060BN
E22LED060WN
120V AC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RA
E22LED120OA
E22LED120YA
E22LED120GA
E22LED120BA
E22LED120WA
120V DC
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Blue
White
E22LED120RD
E22LED120OD
E22LED120YD
E22LED120GD
E22LED120BD
E22LED120WD
E34
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
White
Clear
10250TC47
10250TC53
10250TC48
10250TC49
10250TC50
10250TC51
10250TC52
E34M2
E34M2N8
E34M3
E34M6
E34M9
E34M5
E34M0
Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Blue
Amber
Yellow
White
Clear
10250TC57
10250TC63
10250TC58
10250TC59
10250TC64
10250TC60
10250TC61
10250TC62
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center
Red
Green
Amber
10250TC65
10250TC66
10250TC67
—
—
—
Table 47-378. Buttons for Non-illuminated Push-Pull Devices
Color
10250T
Catalog
Number
10250TB62
10250TB63
10250TB61
10250TB60
10250TB64
Price
U.S. $
For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page 47-157.
E34
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
Price
U.S. $
Standard
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Blue
E34J2
E34J2N8
—
—
—
Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use with ultraviolet light
applications.
These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens
color from Table 47-379.
10250T
10250TJ62
10250TJ63
10250TJ61
10250TJ60
10250TJ64
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light.
Table 47-377. Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices
47
Red
Red (EMER. STOP)
Green
Black
Yellow
10250T69H
10250T70H
10250T79H
10250T83H
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum
Bayonet
Base
Resistor
AC or DC
Color
E34
Price Catalog
U.S. $ Number
E34C2
E34C2N8
E34C3
E34C1
E34C6
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-239
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-160 & 47-191
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-240
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 47-151 & 47-184
Replacement
Lamps/LEDs . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-157
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-231
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units
■
■
Two- and Three-Position
Non-illuminated
Table 47-380. 2-Position Selector Switch — Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operator Position
Operator Action
Black Knob — Selector Switch
10250T
Catalog
Number
M
X
O
X
O
X
O
M
O
X
O
X
O
X
M
S
M
M
M
S
Contact
Type
E34
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Mounting Location
1
2
E34EX722BK
10250T722BK
10250T724BK
E34EX724BK
10250T723BK
E34EX723BK
10250T725BK
E34EX725BK
Cam
Code
1
1NC
1NO
1
1NC
1NO
1NC
1NO
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the table on Page 47-232.
Example: 10250T722LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T722T13
Table 47-381. 3-Position Selector Switch — Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operator Position
Operator Action
Black Knob — Selector Switch
10250T
Catalog
Number
M
M
O
O
O
X
S
M
M
M
M
M
10250T730BK
E34EX730BK
10250T732BK
E34EX732BK
10250T727BK
E34EX727BK
10250T729BK
E34EX729BK
10250T731BK
E34EX731BK
10250T733BK
E34EX733BK
S
M
E34EX728BK
M
S
10250T728BK
2
3
1NO
1NO
3
M
S
M
E34EX726BK
1
S
M
O
O
X
10250T726BK
Price
U.S. $
Cam
Code
S
M
O
X
O
Catalog
Number
M
S
X
O
O
Price
U.S. $
Mounting Location
M
M
X
O
Contact
Type
E34
1NO
1NC-1NC
(Series)
1NO
S
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Switch and Color Selection
Table on Page 47-232. Example: 10250T726LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position).
Example: 10250T726T13
Accessories . . . . .
Additional Circuit
Arrangements .
Dimensions. . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . .
Discount Symbol .
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Pages 47-233 – 47-234
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-232
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Assembled Devices — Selector Switch Units
Selector Switch Units (Continued)
■
■
Four-Position Maintained
Non-illuminated
Table 47-382. 4-Position Selector Switch — Non-illuminated — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Operator Position
Operator Action
Black Knob — Selector Switch
10250T
Catalog
Number
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
X
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
E34EX743BK
10250T743BK
M
M
M
M
Contact
Type
E34
Price
U.S. $
Mounting
Location
1
Cam
Code
2
1NC
1NO
1NO
1NC
7
Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
M = Maintained.
To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate Suffix Code from the Switch and Color
Selection Table below.
Example: 10250T743LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam) + _ (key removal position). Example: 10250T743T77
Table 47-383. Switch and Color Selection Table
Color
Knob
Suffix
Code
47
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Gray
Blue
Orange
Adder
U.S. $
BK
RK
GK
YK
WK
AK
LK
NK
Suffix
Code
Adder
U.S. $
BL
RL
GL
YL
WL
AL
LL
NL
Suffix
Code
Coin Slot
Adder
U.S. $
BA
RA
GA
YA
WA
AA
LA
NA
Suffix
Code
Adder
U.S. $
BC
RC
GC
YC
WC
AC
LC
NC
Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only.
10250T only.
Table 47-384. Key Operated Selection Table
Number of
Position
Operator
Action
Suffix and Removal
Positions
2
M M
MS
T1 + 1, 2, 3
T1 + 2
3
M M M
SM M
SMS
M MS
T3 + 1 – 7
T3 + 1, 4, 5
T3 + 4
T3 + 2, 4, 6
4
MMMM
T7 + 7
Lever
Lever
Table 47-385. Key Removal Positions
Code
Suffix
1
2
3
4
Key
Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Key
Removal
Positions
C
L
R
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
Figure 47-146. Key Removal Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring return from”
positions not recommended.
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction
of arrow ().
Accessories . . . . .
Additional Circuit
Arrangements .
Dimensions . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . .
Legend Plates. . . .
Discount Symbol. .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pages 47-155 & 47-187
Pages 47-233 – 47-234
Pages 47-239, 47-160 & 47-191
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 & 47-184
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-233
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Table 47-386. Example Selection Table
Systematic Approach
Application: HAND-OFF-AUTO Selector
Switch. In this circuit, one incoming
line is distributed to two other outgoing
circuits by the switch. The two circuits
can be looked at individually.
10250T
E34
Step 1: Elementary Diagram.
Construct on paper, or in your mind, a
simple elementary diagram of the
switching scheme as follows:
Selector Switch Selection
Cam and Contact Block Selection
Selector switches in their varied forms
(2-position, 3-position, and 4-position)
are a big factor contributing to the
great flexibility of control that a well
rounded line of “pushbuttons” can
achieve. Because of their flexibility, they
tend to cause difficulty with product
selection and application. The following
systematic approach should simplify
that task.
Cam and contact block selection is
better understood if you:
HAND
Incoming
Line
Outgoing
Circuit
Locating Nib
CA08102001E
4
Cam Code #3
Contact
Blocks &
Mounting
Location
Contact
Blocks &
Mounting
Location
1
2
1
NO
NC
NO
2
X O O
O O X
AUTO
Outgoing
Circuit
Step 2: “X-O” Pattern.
From the elementary diagram, you can
construct an “X-O” diagram which
describes when the contacts are to be
closed (X) or open (O) in the various
positions of the switch. The “X-O” for
the HAND circuit looks like this:
NO
NO
Wired in series.
Now to make the cam selection, make
a simple worksheet such as below.
(1) or (2) = mounting location from chart
above:
XOO
OOX
Cam 2
(1)NO – (2)NC
(2)NC
Cam 3
(1)NO
(2)NO
HAND OFF AUTO
Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately.
■ Recognize the terms NO and NC
only identify the type of contact by
its mode before mounting to the
operator. The “X-O” table (Page 47234) shows how that contact will act
after assembly to the operator with
the selected cam shape.
X = closed circuit, O = open circuit.
■ One NO-NC contact block may be
mounted behind each plunger of the
mounting adapter for a total of four
circuits.
■ Each cam has two separate lobes,
each of which operates one of the
two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are
identified as position 1 (locating nib
side) and position 2 (opposite of
locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and
mounting of the contact blocks (see
Figure 47-147).
Figure 47-147. Contact Circuit Locations
1
Cam Code #2
OFF
■
1
No. Desired
Circuit &
Operator
Position
2
X O O
In this circuit, you want a contact
closed on the left (HAND) but open in
the center and right.
For the AUTO circuit, the “X-O” diagram
would look like this:
HAND OFF AUTO
O O X
Putting them together, the complete
“X-O” diagram is:
XOO
OOX
Once the “X-O” diagram has been
generated, the next step is to select the
cam and contact block, or blocks,
needed to perform the desired “X-O”
functions. The selection table on the
following page lists the various types
(shapes) of cams by number to choose
from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in
your “X-O” diagram.
Step 3: Cam Selection.
The cam you select determines the
operation of all contact blocks mounted
to the operator. It is selected on the
basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram.
The selection tables of the following
page show all the “X-O” combinations.
For the purpose of this example, the
applicable portion of those tables is
shown in Table 47-386.
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
It becomes obvious that cam 3 is the
better choice because the series connection can be avoided, making it
simpler to wire.
Step 4: Contact Block Selection.
Having selected the cam, contact block
selection is simply a matter of determining if you require one NO-NC contact
block (Cat. No 10250T1H) or two. Given
the limitations of the factory sealed
contact block and the desired “X-O”
application, you may have circuits that
will not be needed — as seen here
with the two additional NC circuits.
(1) or (2) = mounting location from chart
above.
Qty
2
Catalog No.
10250TIH
Cam 3
(1)NO (2)NC
(1)NC (2)NO
Step 5: Selector Switch Operator.
Lastly, you have to choose from the
many types of operators — knob and
lever in various colors or keyed. Also
what combinations of maintained and
spring return functions are required.
Selection of these operators can be
found on Page 47-235. For the above
example you may want a 3-position
maintained black knob, cam 3 —
Catalog Number 10250T1323 (or
34VHBK1).
The Complete Switch: 10250T1323 (or
34VHBK1) with two 10250T1H or for
one composite catalog number —
10250T726BK (or E34EX726BK) found
on Page 47-231.
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-234
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Selector Switch Selection
Selector Switch Selection (Continued)
Circuits shown illustrate connections to obtain a selector
circuit combination and are shown with their appropriate
line diagrams in BOLD. Field wiring of jumper connections
required as shown.
Table 47-389. 4-Position Selector Switch
Number
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #7
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit
1
2
Table 47-387. 2-Position Selector Switch
Number
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
Cam Code #1
1
X
O
O
O
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
1
1
X
2
or
O
NC
2
O
X
O
O
NO
NC
2
O
NC
3
or
X
NO
Desired Circuit and
Operator Position
O
X
O
NO
NO
Table 47-388. 3-Position Selector Switch
No.
O
4
Cam Code #2
Cam Code #3
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
Contact Blocks and
Mounting Location
1
1
O
O
O
X
NC
2
2
5
X
O
O
X
NC (Parallel) NC
1
X
O
O
NO (Series) NC
6
NO
O
X
X
O
47
NO (Parallel) NO
2
X
X
O
NC
NC
7
O
O
X
X
NO (Parallel) NC
3
X
O
X
NO (Parallel) NO
NO
8
X
X
O
O
NC (Parallel) NO
4
O
O
X
NO
NO
9
O
X
O
X
NO/NC
(Parallel)
5
O
X
X
NC (Parallel) NO
NC
10
X
O
X
O
NO/NC
(Parallel)
6
O
X
O
NC
NC (Series) NC
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-235
January 2010
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators
Table 47-392. Key Removal Positions
10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key
Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
Table 47-390. 10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Positions
Operator Action
Black Knob Selector Switch
— Vertical Mounting
Black Lever Selector Switch
— Vertical Mounting
Note: Key removal in “spring return from”
positions not recommended.
C
2-Position —
60° Throw
Cam
Code
Catalog
Number
1
10250T1311
1
10250T3011
1
10250T1371
1
10250T3071
M
2
3
10250T1322
10250T1323
2
3
10250T3022
10250T3023
Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for
Above Key Operators
M
2
3
10250T1332
10250T1333
2
3
10250T3032
10250T3033
S
2
3
10250T1342
10250T1343
2
3
10250T3042
10250T3043
Listed operators have identical locks
and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog
Number 10250ED824.
S
2
3
10250T1352
10250T1353
2
3
10250T3052
10250T3053
7
10250T1367
7
10250T3067
M
M
M
S
M
3-Position —
60° Throw
M
M
S
M
S
M
M
4-Position —
40° Throw
M
M
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
L
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see
selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 – 47-234.
Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap.
R
Figure 47-148. Key Removal Positions
Table 47-393. Replacement Keys
Description
Catalog
Number
Replacement Keys
(Code H661)
10250ED824
M
M
Price Cam
U.S. $ Code
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-391. 10250T Key Operators with Cam — UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Positions
2-Position —
60° Throw
3-Position —
60° Throw
Operator
Action
10250T1511_
10250T1611_
1
2
10250T1571_
10250T1581_
2
3
1–7
M
10250T1522_
10250T1523_
10250T1622_
10250T1623_
2
3
1, 4, 5
M
10250T1532_
10250T1533_
10250T1632_
10250T1633_
2
3
4
S
10250T1542_
10250T1543_
10250T1642_
10250T1643_
2
3
2, 4, 6
S
10250T1652_
10250T1653_
10250T1662_
10250T1663_
7
7
10250T1677_
10250T1687_
M
S
M
M
S
M
S
M
M
4-Position —
40° Throw
M
M
Catalog
Number
1, 2, 3
M
M
Catalog
Number
1
M
M
M
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see
selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 – 47-234.
Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-392. Add key removal Code
No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: 10250T15112.
CA08102001E
47
Cam
Optional
Vertical Mounting Horizontal Mounting Price
Code Key Removal
U.S. $
Positions
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
Page 47-239
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-236
January 2010
E34 Series, Selector Switch Components
Selector Switch Operators (Continued)
Table 47-395. E34 Key Operators with Cam and Cap —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Table 47-394. E34 Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled —
UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13
Positions
Operator
Action
Black Knob Selector Switch —
Vertical Mounting
Cam Code
2-Position
— 60° Throw
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
47
E34KFHB_
1
2
E34KEB_
E34KEHB_
2
3
1–7
M
E34KGB_
E34KHB_
E34KGHB_
E34KHHB_
2
3
1, 4, 5
M
E34KJB_
E34KKB_
E34KJHB_
E34KKHB_
2
3
4
S
E34KLB_ E34KLHB_
E34KMB_ E34KMHB_
2
3
2, 4, 6
S
E34KNB_
E34KPB_
E34KNHB_
E34KPHB_
7
7
E34KTB_
E34KTHB_
S
M
E34VEBK1
S
2
3
E34VGBK1
E34VHBK1
S
M
M
M
2
3
M
M
E34VJBK1
E34VKBK1
S
2
3
E34VNBK1
E34VPBK1
7
E34VTBK1
M
E34KFB_
M
1
2
3
M
M
3-Position
— 60°
Throw
4-Position
— 40°
Throw
E34VLBK1
E34VMBK1
M
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper
circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 –
47-234.
Field convertible to Horizontal Mounting.
For other colors of either knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the Catalog Number with the appropriate Suffix Code from
Alternate Knob and Lever Table below. Example: E34VFBL2
M
Catalog
Number
1, 2, 3
M
E34VFBK1
Catalog
Number
1
M
1
S
M
S
2-Position
— 60°
Throw
S
S
4-Position
— 40° Throw
Price
U.S. $
M
M
3-Position
— 60° Throw
Catalog
Number
Positions Operator Cam Key
Vertical
Horizontal
Action Code Removal
Mounting Mounting
Positions
M
Price
U.S. $
M
M
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper
circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages 47-233 –
47-234.
Choose key removal position required for application from Table 47-396.
Add key removal Code No. to listed Catalog Number. Example: E34KFB2
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Page 47-235.
Table 47-396. Key Removal Positions
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Positions
Code
Suffix
Key Removal
Positions
1
2
3
4
Right Only
Left Only
Right & Left
Center Only
5
6
7
Right & Center
Left & Center
All Positions
Note: Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended.
C
L
R
Figure 47-149. Key Removal Positions
Table 47-397. Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators Above
Color
Knob
Suffix
Code
Lever
Catalog
Number
Black
K1
E34K1
Red
K2
E34K2
Green
K3
E34K3
Yellow
K4
E34K4
White
K5
E34K5
Blue
K6
E34K6
Gray
K7
E34K7
Orange
K8
E34K8
For use on maintained operators only.
Price
U.S. $
Lever Designed
for Added Ingress
Protection
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
E34L1
E34L2
E34L3
E34L4
E34L5
E34L6
E34L7
E34L8
Price
U.S. $
Suffix
Code
Catalog
Number
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
E34A1
E34A2
E34A3
E34A4
E34A5
E34A6
E34A7
E34A8
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Price
U.S. $
Page 47-239
Page 47-191
Page 47-240
Page 47-184
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-237
January 2010
10250T Series, Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switch
Operators
2-Position Maintained
120V AC Transformer
Selector Switch,
Cam Code 1
Catalog Number
10250T5971
Table 47-398. 10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Operator Action
Positions
2-Position – 60° Throw
M
M
3-Position – 60° Throw
M
M
M
M
M
S
M
S
M
M
S
S
4-Position – 40° Throw
M
M
M
M
Transformer Type — 50/60 Hz
Full Voltage Type — AC or DC
6 Volt #755 Lamp
Lamps: 6V — #755, 12V — #756, 24V — #757,
48V — #1835, 120/240V — 120MB
Voltage
Cam
Code
Catalog and
Code Number
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
1
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
Price
U.S. $
Voltage
Cam
Code
Catalog and
Code Number
10250T5961H
10250T5971H
10250T6511H
10250T5981H
10250T5991H
10250T6001H
10250T6011H
6
12
24
48
120
240
1
10250T6201H
10250T6211H
10250T6221H
10250T6231H
10250T6361H
10250T6371H
+ 2 or 3
10250T602_H
10250T603_H
10250T652_H
10250T604_H
10250T605_H
10250T606_H
10250T607_H
6
12
24
48
120
240
+ 2 or 3
10250T624_H
10250T625_H
10250T626_H
10250T627_H
10250T638_H
10250T639_H
120
240
+ 2 or 3
10250T620_H
10250T656_H
120
+ 2 or 3
10250T622_H
120
240
+ 2 or 3
10250T621_H
10250T662_H
120
+ 2 or 3
10250T623_H
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
+ 2 or 3
10250T614_H
10250T615_H
10250T653_H
10250T616_H
10250T617_H
10250T618_H
10250T619_H
6
12
24
48
120
240
+ 2 or 3
10250T628_H
10250T629_H
10250T630_H
10250T631_H
10250T640_H
10250T641_H
24
120
208
240
380
480
600
7
10250T6087H
10250T6097H
10250T6547H
10250T6107H
10250T6117H
10250T6127H
10250T6137H
6
12
24
48
120
240
7
10250T6327H
10250T6337H
10250T6347H
10250T6357H
10250T6427H
10250T6437H
Price
U.S. $
M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ().
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Page 47-234.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Table 47-399. Knobs, Levers
Color Catalog and Code Number
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Amber
Knob
Lever
10250TER
10250TEG
10250TEA
10250TEL
10250TEC
10250TEW
10250TEM
10250TFR
10250TFG
10250TFA
10250TFL
10250TFC
10250TFW
10250TFM
Price
U.S. $
Amber, Clear and White lenses have a black
arrow (pointer), Red, Green and Blue lenses
have a white arrow (pointer).
CA08102001E
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-239
Pages 47-160 – 47-162
Page 47-240
Pages 47-151 – 47-152
1CD1C
47
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-238
January 2010
E34 Series, Selector Switch Components
Illuminated Selector Switch Operators (Continued)
2-Position Maintained 120V AC
Transformer Selector Switch, Cam 1
Catalog Number E34VFB120
Table 47-400. E34 Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever
Positions
Operator Action
Transformer Type — 50/60 Hz
Full Voltage Type — AC or DC
6 Volt #755 Lamp
Lamps — #755, #757, #1835, 120MB
Catalog Number
2-Position — 60° Throw
M
3-Position — 60° Throw
M
M
M
M
M
M
S
S
47
Cam Code 1
E34VFB_H
E34SFB_H
Cam Code 2
Cam Code 3
Cam Code 2
Cam Code 3
E34VGB_H
E34VHB_H
E34SGB_H
E34SHB_H
E34VNB_H
E34VPB_H
E34SNB_H
E34SPB_H
E34VJB_H
E34VKB_H
E34SJB_H
E34SKB_H
E34VLB_H
E34VMB_H
E34SLB_H
E34SMB_H
E34VRB_H
—
E34SRB_H
—
S
M
M
Cam Code 1
M
M
Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws.
For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Page 47-234.
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157.
120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators.
Replace underscore with proper voltage Suffix Code from Light Unit Voltage Suffix Table below. Example: 3-position maintained with 120V transformer type light unit: E34VGB120H
120 and 240V transformer only.
120 full voltage only.
Table 47-401. Light Unit Voltage Suffix — Add to operator Catalog
Number listed in table above.
Table 47-402. Knobs, Levers
Color
Type of Light Unit
Transformer Type
50/60 Hz
Full Voltage Type
AC or DC
Voltage
Suffix Code
Voltage
Suffix Code
24
120
208
240
380
024
120
208
240
380
6
12
24
48
120
06
12
24
48
120
480
600
480
600
240
240
Price
U.S. $
M
M
Catalog Number
S
M
4-Position — 40° Throw
Price
U.S. $
Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by
changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page 47-157.
Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density.
Red
Green
Yellow
Blue
Clear
White
Amber
Catalog Number
and Code Number
Price
U.S. $
Knob
Lever
10250TER
10250TEG
10250TEA
10250TEL
10250TEC
10250TEW
10250TEM
10250TFR
10250TFG
10250TFA
10250TFL
10250TFC
10250TFW
10250TFM
Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green
and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer).
Note: Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet
light, see Page 47-237.
Contact Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Legend Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Page 47-239
Page 47-191
Page 47-240
Page 47-184
1CD1C
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-239
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters
Contact Block
Catalog Number 10250T1H
Mounting Adapter
Catalog Number 10250TD2
Options
Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters
Table 47-403. Contact Block — NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D
Units
Description
Catalog
Number
1NO-1NC
Class I Div. 2 Factory Sealed Contact Block
10250T1H
Description
Catalog
Number
Mounting Adapter for Pushbuttons
10250TD2
Mounting Adapter for Selector Switches
10250TD3
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-404. Mounting Adapter
Units
Price
U.S. $
Table 47-405. Mounting Adapters with Contact Block(s) — Overpacked — NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D
Units
Description
Catalog
Number
Pushbutton Adapter with 1NO-1NC
10250TD21H
Pushbutton Adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC)
10250TD21H1H
Selector Switch Adapter with 1NO-1NC
10250TD31H
Selector Switch Adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC)
10250TD31H1H
Price
U.S. $
47
Approximate Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches (mm). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes.
1.88
(47.8)
1.85
(47.0)
1.70
(43.2)
1.43
(36.3)
1.86
(47.2)
1.02
(25.9)
0.25
(6.4)
2.57
(65.3)
1.72
(43.7)
0.84
(21.3)
Figure 47-150. Contact Block
0.44
(11.2)
1.23
(31.2)
Figure 47-151. Mounting Adapter
Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 47-217
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-240
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Enclosures
Enclosures
Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures
Table 47-406. Enclosures (Case and Cover) — Surface Mounting
Number of
Elements
10250T
E34
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Catalog
Number
Price
U.S. $
Cast Enclosure — Deep Cover — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13
Die Cast
Enclosure
Catalog Number 10250TN11
1
2
3
4
10250TN11
10250TN12
10250TN13
10250TN14
E34N11
E34N12
E34N13
E34N14
Polyester — In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12
Polyester
Enclosure
Catalog Number E34N52
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
E34N51
E34N52
E34N53
E34N54
Stainless Steel — In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12
Stainless Steel
Enclosure
Catalog Number 10250TN35
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
10250TN33
10250TN34
10250TN35
10250TN36
For spacing increments, see Page 47-154.
14 gauge, type 304.
Table 47-407. Approximate Dimensions
Number
of
Elements
Element
Arrangement
Surface Mounting
Conduit
Entrance
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Wide
A
High
B
Deep
C
Mounting
D
E
Cast
47
1
2
3
4
Approximate Dimensions
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
3.88 (98.6)
4.0 (101.6)
5.88 (149.4)
7.75 (196.9)
9.63 (244.6)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
3.0 (76.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
2.69 (68.3)
3.25 (82.6)
5.13 (130.3)
7.0 (177.8)
8.88 (225.6)
3/4
3/4
1
1
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
3.81 (96.8)
6.63 (168.4)
6.63 (168.4)
8.88 (225.6)
11.13 (282.7)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
3.38 (85.9)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
2.94 (74.7)
4.88 (124.0)
4.88 (124.0)
7.13 (181.1)
9.38 (238.3)
3.00 (76.2)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
3.50 (88.9)
6.75 (171.5)
9.00 (228.6)
11.25 (285.8)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
3.00 (76.2)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
4.25 (108.0)
7.50 (190.5)
9.00 (228.6)
12.00 (304.8)
4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for
1 – 4 Element Die Cast/
Stainless Steel Enclosure
7/32 Screw Size for
Polyester
Polyester
1
2
3
4
E
B
Stainless Steel
1
2
3
4
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
In-Line
D
A
C
Surface
No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required.
Application Notes:
2. Polyester enclosures must be
used when mounting illuminated
operators.
Top – For Vertical Mounting
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
Top – For Horizontal
Mounting
1. Operators need to be mounted in
their horizontal orientation for all
enclosures. For die cast enclosures
remove locating nib on operators
and use thrust washer (Catalog
Number 10250TK3).
Figure 47-152. Enclosure Layouts
Discount Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1CD1C
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
47-241
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Mounting Options
Mounting and Assembly
Panel Thickness
Table 47-408. Mounting Matrix
■
Minimum: 0.06 inch (1.6 mm)
■ Maximum: 0.25 inch (8 mm) including legend plate
■ Maximum can be increased to 0.375" (15.9 mm) using
optional retaining nut
❑ Indicating Light: 10250TA30/E34TA30
❑ Pushbutton/Selector Switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31
Notch for
Locating Nib
Legend
Plate
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
A
B
C
D
Small
2.87 (72.6)
2.25 (57.2)
2.25 (57.2)
2.87 (72.6)
Jumbo
2.87 (72.6)
2.32 (58.6)
2.32 (58.6)
2.87 (72.6)
Extra Large
2.87 (72.6)
2.56 (65.2)
2.52 (64.1)
2.87 (72.6)
Terminals for
Light Unit
“B” Min.
ø.14
(ø3.4)
Terminals for
Light Unit
“D” Min.
.19
(5.0)
.60
(15.2)
“C” Min.
“A” Min.
.67
(17.0)
Notch for
Locating Nib
ø1.2
(ø30.5)
ø1.2
(ø30.5)
NOTE: Suitable for Use
in This Alternate
Mounting Hole.
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Horizontal Rows.
Drilling for One Hole Mounting
and Dimensions for Minimum
Spacing in Vertical Rows.
Figure 47-153. Panel Spacing and Drilling Drawings
Illuminated
Pushbutton
Lens
Washer
47
Nameplate
Thrust
Washer
(Optional)
Operator Operator
Gasket
E34 Earth
Terminal
Contact Block
Mounting Adapter
RATINGS ARE STAMPED
ON LIGHT UNIT
AND CONTACT BLOCK
Lamp
Indicator
Light
Push/Pull
Retaining Nut
5 lb-ft (6.8 Nm)
Panel
0.06" – 0.25"
(1.6 – 8 mm)
with Optional
Retaining Nut
Up to 0.375"
(15.9 mm)
Light Unit
Terminal Clamp:
One or Two Copper Conductors
22 – 12 AWG (0.34 – 4.0 mm2)
7 lb-in (0.8 Nm)
Figure 47-154. Operator Assembly
CA08102001E
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Contact Block
Terminal Clamp:
Single Copper Conductor
18 – 14 AWG (0.75 – 2.5 mm2)
9 lb-in (1.0 Nm)
47-242
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations
January 2010
10250T/E34 Series, Catalog Number Structure
Catalog Number Structure
2
1
Gasket
Operator
Legend Plate
Mounting Nut
Contact
Blocks
Locating
Nib
Adapter
10250T/E34 Series
Table 47-409. Non-illuminated Assembled Operators — Class I Division 2 Catalog Numbering System
10250T 718 E
J
Operator Type
ACC/SS Type
10250T = Heavy-Duty Oiltight
E34EX = Corrosion Resistant Oiltight
Blank =
J=
B=
G=
K=
L=
A=
C=
Operator and Contact Block
47
706 =
707 =
708 =
709 =
710 =
711 =
712 =
713 =
714 =
715 =
716 =
717 =
718 =
721 =
722 =
723 =
724 =
725 =
726 =
727 =
728 =
729 =
730 =
731 =
732 =
733 =
743 =
Flush 1NO-1NC
Flush 2NO-2NC
Extended 1NO-1NC
Extended 2NO-2NC
Mushroom 1NO-1NC
Mushroom 2NO-2NC
JMB Mushroom 1NO-1NC
JMB Mushroom 2NO-2NC
2P MT Push-Pull 1NO-1NC
2P MT Push-Pull 2NO-2NC
3P MT Push-Mom Pull 1NO-1NC
3P MT Push-Mom Pull 2NO-2NC
3P Mom Push-Pull 1NO-1NC
3P Mom Push-Pull 2NO-2NC
2P SS MT XO,OX-CAM1
2P SS MT XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
2P SS SPR-R XO,OX-CAM1
2P SS SPR-R XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1
3P SS MT XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS MT XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-L XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-L XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-R XOO,OOX-CAM3
3P SS SPR-R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3
4P SS MT XOOO,OXOO,OOXO,OOOX-CAM7
__ __
None
JMB Push-Pull
Booted-FL/EXT
Guarded-FL
Knob-SS
Lever-SS
Lever W/IP-SS
Coin-SS
Keyed-SS
Cam
1
2
3
7
Key Removal
1=
2=
3=
4=
5=
6=
7=
RT Only
LT Only
RT & LT
CT Only
RT & CT
LT & CT
All
Button Color
B=
R=
G=
Y=
W=
L=
N=
E=
T=
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Blue
Orange
Red EMERG STOP
Keyed-SS
CA08102001E
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Ratings
47-243
January 2010
NEC 500 – 505, Class I Division 2
Summary of NEC Article 500
The NEC Article 500 explains in great
detail the requirements for the installation of wiring and electrical equipment
in hazardous locations. The purpose of
this summary is for general reference
only, the National Electric Code along
with other applicable authorities having
jurisdiction over the site should be the
installer’s guidelines when wiring or
installing electrical equipment in any
hazardous or potentially hazardous
location.
Summary of Classifications — NEC 500 – 503
Class
Division
I.
1. Hazard may exist —
A. Acetylene
May exist in atmosphere B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing
under normal operating
30% hydrogen by volume (e.g. butadiene,
conditions
ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
Gas
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether,
ethylene, hydrogen sulfide, morpholine,
cyclopropane)
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane,
propane, acetone, ammonia, vinyl chloride)
2. Potential hazard —
A. Acetylene
May be present in
B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing
atmosphere only under
30% hydrogen by volume (e.g. butadiene,
abnormal circumstances
ethylene oxide, propylene oxide)
OR location adjacent
C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether,
to Class I, Division 1
ethylene, hydrogen sulfide, morpholine,
location
cyclopropane)
Class I, Division 2 Definition
Class I, Division 2 covers hazardous
locations where flammable gases,
vapors or volatile liquids are handled
either in a closed system, or confined
within suitable enclosures, or where
hazardous concentrations are normally
prevented by positive mechanical ventilation. Areas adjacent to Division 1
locations, into which gases might
occasionally flow, would also belong
to Division 2 (NEC (500-5[b])).
D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane,
propane, acetone, ammonia, vinyl chloride)
II. Dust
Summary of NEC Article 505
The NEC also classifies hazardous
locations for flammable gases and
vapors into zones under NEC 505. This
system is more in line with the European Standards, CENELEC and IEC,
with the major difference being that
NEC 505 only classifies gases and
vapors while CENELEC and IEC also
include dusts.
1. Hazard may exist —
E. Conductive and combustible dust (resistivity
May exist in atmosphere
102 ohms/cm
conditions
but ≤108 ohms/cm) (e.g. carbon black, coke dust,
coal)
G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity
≥105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain dust, flour, starch,
sugar, plastics)
2. Potential hazard —
F.
May be present in
atmosphere only under
abnormal circumstances G.
Hazardous Location
Any area where there is the possibility
of explosion and fire resulting from
the presence of flammable vapors,
liquids or gas, or combustible dust or
fibers.
III. Fibers
Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm
but ≤108 ohms/cm) (e.g. carbon black, coke dust,
coal)
Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity
≥105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain dust, flour, starch,
sugar, plastics)
1. Production areas
Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
2. Handling and storage
areas
Easily ignitable fibers or flyings
Note: For additional information on grouping of compounds, see NFPA 497M-1991 and
NFPA 325-1994.
Summary of Classifications — NEC 505
Class
Zone
I.
0. Continuously present or IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
present for long periods IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
of time
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline,
methane, propane or equivalent hazard
Gas
Group
1. Likely to exist under
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
normal operating or
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
maintenance conditions
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline,
or adjacent to Zone 0
methane, propane or equivalent hazard
2. Not likely to occur in
normal operation and if
they do occur will only
exist for short period or
adjacent to Zone 1
CA08102001E
Group
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard
IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard
IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline,
methane, propane or equivalent hazard
47
47-244
Pushbuttons & Indicating Lights
Ratings
January 2010
Class I Division 2
Summary of Basic Methods Available for Class I, Division 2 Locations
Method
Features
Configuration
Advantages
Factory Sealed Contact Block
Closed-ended labyrinth contact
block with an incendive circuit
incapable of external ignition
• Higher continuous carrying amperages — • May not be suitable for logic level
up to 10A
circuits
• Direct drive contacts — contacts can be
forced open
• Suitable for use in all enclosures
• Best suited for motor control applications
Hermetically Sealed Block
Reed switch sealed against an
external atmosphere
• Suitable for low energy level circuits
• Suitable for use in all enclosures
Explosion Proof Enclosures
(Class I, Division 1 and 2)
Enclosures capable of with• Higher level of protection than required
standing an internal explosion
for Class I Division 2
while preventing external ignition. Enclosures designed for
Class I, Div. 1 can safely be used
in Class I, Div. 2
Internal
Ignition
Disadvantages
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
• Lower continuous carrying amperages
are not suitable for motor control applications (typically 3A to 5A rated)
• Contacts cannot be forced open
• Permanent magnet attracts metallic dust
and filings that can reduce the electrical
creepage distance between live terminals
• Higher material and installation costs
• Conduit sealing is still required
• Time consuming maintenance
Hermetically sealed
reed does not allow
external atmosphere to
enter switching chamber.
47
Depression of plunger
rotates magnet and either
opens/closes contacts.
Contacts can not be
forced apart if subject to
arch/fault current, because no
mechanical connection exists.
Direct Drive Contacts
• Contacts can be
mechanically forced
apart if subject to an
arch/fault current.
Figure 47-155. Factory Sealed Contact Blocks
Figure 47-156. Hermetically Sealed Reed Contact Block
Threaded Joint
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
Flat Joint
Internal
Ignition
Internal
Ignition
Cooled
Escaping
Gas
Figure 47-157. Explosion Proof Enclosure
For more information visit: www.eaton.com
CA08102001E
工商网监
湘ICP备2023018690号
